Le Package Tcolorbox - Apprendre Le LaTeX / Mohammed Jaiti

um, erat
ac orci e
. Pellente
5 te
t nisl hen et magna, vitae , tortor sed accu lobor-
drerit mo
arturient sque a nulla. Cum llis. Suspendisse io metus a
lla ullam
montes, n s
cus
ligula ali llus. Donec aliqu libero, pretium a vel, wisi.
qu
ascetur r ociis natoque pen massa.

et
ornare o
d
u t
din
t,
msan M
tis vitae,
bibendum
o
Nam dui
u l tr
6
orbox 4
i c
li
rbi aucto gula, fringilla a,
r lorem n
ies et, te
.14
e
on justo. uismod sodales,
l l u
N am lacus
l
sollicitud
o, pretium in vel, wisi.
s. Pe
10 11
corper ve idiculus m atibus mi. Mor , e r at ligula s . Donec al i b e r
a i
stibulum
turpis. P s. Aliquam
u Cras nec bi ac orci et nis liquet magna, v quet, tortor sed at, lobor-
ellentesqu a
et magni nte. Pellentesq l h endrerit i t ae ornare accumsan
e m o l li o d i o
tincidunt s dis parturient ue a nulla. Cum s. Suspendisse metus a t
cursus lu u r na. N m o ntes, s o ciis n u t m ass b ibe
smod sod ctus mau ulla ullamcorper nascetur ridiculu atoque penatibu a. m i . M
ris. vestibulu s s
a
m lacus l les, sollicitudin v tcolorbo m turpis. mus. Aliquam Cras nec
ibero, pre el, wisi. x 4.14 Pellentes e t magnis d
aliquet, t ti u que
ortor sed m at, lobor- Nam dui
lig u
t i n c i d unt urna
i
v i ta e o rn a ccumsan M orbi a l a , f ringilla cursus lu .
a re
Suspendi odio metus a tis vitae, uctor lorem non j a, euismod soda ctus mau
sse ut m u lt r icies et, t u s to . N l e s , so
i s n a to q u
e penatib ssa.
a bibendum ellus. D am lacus libero, llicitudin vel, wi tcolorbo
14 15
m i. Morbi , e ra t l igula aliq o nec aliqu p retium at si. x 4.14
lus mus. us ac orci e u e t , N am dui l
A
s. Pellen liquam
Cras nec t nisl hen et magna, vitae , tortor sed accu lobor- ig
tesque et magni a n te . Pellentes drerit mo o rnare od m s a n M o r bi auctor ula, fringilla a,
l i lorem no
tincidunt s dis parturient que a nulla. Cum lis. Suspendisse o metus a tis vitae,
u l t r i c n justo.
cursus lu u r na . N m o n t e s , scetu s o c i is n toque u t m a s sa. b ib e n du i e s e t , te
ctus mau ulla ullatcolorbox mcorper na4.14 r ridiculu atcolorbox penati4.14 b u s mi. Mor m, erat ligula al llus. Do
ris. vestibulu s Cras nec bi ac orci et nis iquet magn
tcolorbo m turpis. mus. Aliquam
isi. x 4.14 Pellentes
que et magni ante. Pellentesq l hendrerit mo
Nam dui t i s dis par ue a null
li n c i d u n t t u r ie n t montes, n a. Cum
Morbi au gula, fringilla c u rsus luctu u r n a . N u l a
tis vitae, ctor lorem non j a, euismod soda s mauris. la ullamcorper ve scetur ri
bibendum ultricies et, tel usto. Nam lacus les, sollicitudin
Manual for s tibulum
tcolorbversion t
mi. Mor , e r a t lu s .
tcolorbox
D o
bi ac orc ligula aliquet ma nec aliquet, tort pretium at, lobor si.
l ib e r o , ve l , w i
Nam dui 4.14
ox 4 . 1 4
8 19
s nec ant i e g n o r - ligula, fr
e. Pellen t nisl hendrerit m a, vitae ornare o sed accumsan Morbi au (2018/07/26) in
nis dis pa tesque a n ollis. Sus dio metu t i s v i
c t o r lorem n gilla a, euismod
r u ll p e s t ae, ultric o n justo. N sodales,
urna. Nu turient montes, n a. Cum sociis na ndisse ut massa. a b i b e ndum, er i e s e t , tellus. a m lacus libe sollicitudin ve
lla ullam ascetur r toque pe mi. Mor at ligula Donec al ro, pretiu
s mauris. corper ve id na
stibulum iculus mus. Aliq tibus Cras nec b i a c orci et a li q u et magna i q u e t , tortor s m at, lob
turpis. P uam nisl hend , e
elletcolorbox
ntesque 4.14 et magnis tcolorbox ante. Pel
l e n t e s rerit mol vitae ornare odi d accumsan
tincidunt dis parturient ue a nulla. Cum s. Suspendisse
4.14 q l i o metus a
cursus lu u r na. N m o ntes, s o ciis n u t m ass
lla a, eui ctus mau ulla ullamcorper nascetur ridiculu atoque penatibu a.
2
smod sod ris. vestibulu s s
m turpis. mus. Aliquam
0
usto. Na a
m lacus l les, sollicitudin v tcolorbo Pellentes
. Donec ibe el, x 4.14 Thomas F. Sturm et
aliquet, t ro, pretium at, lo wisi. N a m dui lig
que
t incid
magna, v ortor sed bor- ula, fring
rit mollis i ta e o r n a a c c u m s an M o r b i a i lla c u r s us lu
. Suspen re odio metus a tis vitae, uctor lorem non j a, euismod soda
Cum soc di bibendum ultricies et, tel sto. Nam lacus les, sollicitudin u
iis natoq sse ut massa. l u l v tcolorbo
23
tur ridicu u e penatib m i. Morbi , e ra t ligula aliq s . D o nec aliqu i b e r o , p retium at e l , w i s i. x 4.14
lus mus. us ac orci e u e t , N am dui l
lum turp
is. Pellen liquam
A Cras nec t nisl hen et magna, vitae , tortor sed accu lobor- ig
tesque et magni a n t e . Pellentes drerit mo o rnare od m s a n M o r bi auctor ula, fr
l i lorem n
tincidunt s dis parturient que a nulla. Cum lis. Suspendisse o metus a tis vitae,
u l t r ic
u
cursus lu rna. Nulla ull ontes, nascetu ociis natoque m s u t mass b ibendum ie s
ctus mau amcorper r ridiculu penatibu a. m i , erat lig et, te
. Morbi ac u la
t
ris. vestibulu
m t u r
s mus. A
l i q u a m
s
C r a s n e orci et n aliq
pis. Pelle i
et magni c ante. Pellentesq sl hen
in vel, w colorbox
isi. 4.14 ntesque s u
at, lobor- Nam dui
l ig tincidunt dis parturient e a nu
umsan Morbi au
c to
u la , fringilla
a , cursus lu urna. Nulla ull montes, na
tis vitae, r lorem non e u ismod so ctus mau amcorper
sa u l tricies et, j u s t o d a le s, r i s. ves
b i b en d . Nam la sollicitud t c o
. u te c u in l o
mi. Mor m, erat ligula al llus. Donec aliq s libero, pretium vel, wisi.
rbox 4.1
4
b
Cras nec i ac orci et nis quet magna, v et, tortor sed i u a t, lobor- Nam dui
et magni ante. Pellentesq l hendrerit molli itae ornare odio accumsan Morbi au ligula, fringilla
tincidunt s dis parturient ue a nulla. Cum s. Suspendisse metus a tis vitae, ctor lorem non j a, euismod soda
urna. Nu montes, n sociis nat ut massa
. bibendum ultricies et, tel usto. Nam lacus les, sollic
sus luctu l a o mi. Mor , erat ligula al lus. Donec aliq libero, preti
s mauris. la ullamcorper ve scetur ridiculus m que penatibus
stibulum
turpis. P
us. Aliqu
a m Cras nec bi ac orci et nis iquet magna, v uet, tortor sed
x 4 .1 4 ellentesqu
e et magni ante. Pellentesq l hendrerit molli itae ornare odio
sd ue s. m
Cover code
% \usepackage{incgraph}
\begin{inctext}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\definecolorseries{boxcol}{rgb}{last}{blue}{red}
\resetcolorseries[28]{boxcol}
\coordinate (A) at (0,0); \coordinate (B) at (21,29.7);
\path[use as bounding box] (A) rectangle coordinate (C) (B);
\node[transform shape,xslant=0.7,rotate=-10,xshift=0cm] at (C) {%
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=4,title=tcolorbox \version,
fonttitle=\small\bfseries,raster width=50cm]
\foreach \b in {1,...,28} {\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,
watermark text=\thetcbrasternum,
colframe=boxcol!30!white,
colback=boxcol!25!white!30!white,
colbacktitle=boxcol!!+!50!black!30!white,
colupper=black!30!white]\lipsum[2]\end{tcolorbox}}
\end{tcbraster}%
};
\node at (C) {%
\begin{tcbitemize}[title=tcolorbox \version,fonttitle=\small\bfseries,
enhanced jigsaw,opacityback=0.5,opacitybacktitle=0.75,
halign=center,valign=center,arc=5mm,
raster width=16cm,raster column skip=8mm,raster halign=center,
raster force size=false,
raster row 1/.style={height=6cm},
raster row 2/.style={width=6cm,height=4cm},
raster column 1/.style={flushright title,
frame style={left color=yellow!50!black,right color=green!50!black},
title style={left color=yellow!50!blue,right color=blue!50!green!50!black},
interior style={left color=yellow!70,right color=green!70},
underlay={\draw[line width=6mm,line cap=round,black!60]
([shift={(0.4,-0.15)}]frame.north east)
--([shift={(0.4,0.15)}]frame.south east); }},
raster column 2/.style={
frame style={left color=green!50!black,right color=yellow!50!black},
title style={left color=blue!50!green!50!black,right color=yellow!50!blue},
interior style={left color=green!70,right color=yellow!70}}]
\tcbitem[fontupper=\Huge\bfseries,sharp corners=east,
underlay={\draw[line width=6mm,line cap=round,black!60]
([shift={(0.4,0.30)}]frame.north east)-- coordinate(A) +(0,0.2);
\draw[line width=1mm,line cap=round,black!60](A) -- +(30:1.5cm);
\draw[line width=1mm,line cap=round,black!60](A) -- +(150:1.5cm);}]
tcolorbox
\tcbitem[fontupper=\large\bfseries,sharp corners=west]
Manual for\\ version\\ \version\\(\datum)
\tcbitem[sharp corners=northeast]
\tcbitem[sharp corners=northwest] Thomas F.~Sturm
\end{tcbitemize}%
};
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{inctext}
2
The tcolorbox package
Manual for version 4.14 (2018/07/26)
Thomas F. Sturm1
http://www.ctan.org/pkg/tcolorbox
https://github.com/T-F-S/tcolorbox
Abstract
tcolorbox provides an environment for colored and framed text boxes with a heading
line. Optionally, such a box can be split in an upper and a lower part. The package
tcolorbox can be used for the setting of LATEX examples where one part of the box
displays the source code and the other part shows the output. Another common use
case is the setting of theorems. The package supports saving and reuse of source code
and text parts.
Contents
1 Introduction 8
1.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2 Loading the Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Quick Reference 11
3 Macros for Box Creation 12
4 Option Keys 18
Contents
4.1 Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.2 Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3 Upper Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.4 Lower Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.5 Colors and Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.6 Text Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.7 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.7.1 Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.7.2 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.7.3 Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.7.4 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.7.5 Size Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.7.6 Toggle Left and Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.8 Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.9 Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.10 Height Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.11 Box Content Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.12 Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1
Prof. Dr. Dr. Thomas F. Sturm, Institut für Mathematik und Informatik, Universität der Bundeswehr
München, D-85577 Neubiberg, Germany; email: [email protected]
3
4.13 Floating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.14 Embedding into the Surroundings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.15 Bounding Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.15.1 Shifting Bounding Box Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.15.2 Box Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.15.3 Toggle Enlargements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.15.4 Spread Box to Page Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.15.5 Box Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.16 Layered Boxes and Every Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.17 Capture Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.18 Text Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.19 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.20 \tcbox Specials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.21 Counters, Labels, and References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.22 Even and Odd Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.23 Externalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.24 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5 Initialization Option Keys 108

5.1 Numbered Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.2 Lists of tcolorboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contents
6 Side by Side 116
6.1 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.2 Advanced Settings from the xparse Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
LIB
7 Saving and Loading of Verbatim Texts 126
8 Recording 128
8.1 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.3 Example: Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.4 Example: Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9 Technical Overview and Customization 134

9.1 Skins and Drawing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.2 Code Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.3 Subskins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.4 Drawing Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.5 Useful Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10 Library skins 148

LIB
10.1 Style Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

10.2 Boxed Title Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.2.1 Boxed Title Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.2.2 Options for the Boxed Title Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.2.3 Options for the Boxed Title Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
10.3 Watermark Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
10.4 Clip Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.5 Border Line Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10.6 Shadow Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10.6.1 Common Shadows and Halos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4
10.6.2 Lifted Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10.6.3 Generic Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10.6.4 TikZ Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.7 TikZ Picture Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.8 Underlay Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10.9 Finish Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10.10 Hyper Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10.11 Jigsaw Skin Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.12 Draft Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10.13 Skin Family ’standard’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
10.14 Skin Family ’enhanced’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.15 Skin Family ’bicolor’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.16 Skin Family ’tile’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
10.17 Skin Family ’beamer’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.18 Skin Family ’widget’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
10.19 Skin Family ’empty’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.20 Skin ’spartan’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.21 Skin ’draft’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
10.22 Skin Family ’freelance’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
11 Inclusion of Boxed Image Files 251

11.1 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Contents
11.2 Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
12 TikZ Image and Picture Fill Extensions; Auxiliary Macros 256

12.1 Fill Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
12.2 Fill Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.3 Fill Overzoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
12.4 Fill Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.5 Fill Shrink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
12.6 Fill Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.7 Filling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
12.8 Straightening of the Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
12.9 Extracting Node Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12.10 Hyper Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
13 Library vignette 265

LIB
13.1 Vignette Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

13.2 Generic Geometry Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
13.3 Generic Color and Style Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
13.4 Generic Fading Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
13.5 Vignette as Underlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
13.6 Vignette as Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
14 Library raster 277

LIB
14.1 Concept of Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

14.2 Macros of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
14.3 Option Keys of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
14.4 Adding Styles for Specific Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
14.5 Combining Columns or Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
14.6 Rasters inside Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14.6.1 Raster Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5
14.6.2 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
15 Libraries listings , listingsutf8 , and minted 298
LIB
LIB
LIB
15.1 Loading the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
15.1.1 Loading listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
LIB LIB LIB

15.1.2 Loading listingsutf8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
15.1.3 Loading minted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
15.2 Common Macros of the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
15.3 Option Keys of the listings Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
LIB LIB LIB

15.4 Option Keys of the listingsutf8 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
15.5 Option Keys of the minted Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
15.6 Common Option Keys of all Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
15.7 Option Keys for Processing and Full Document Examples . . . . . . . . . 319
15.8 Creation of LATEX Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
15.9 Creation of LATEX Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
15.10 List of Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
15.11 Solutions for the given LATEX Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
16 Library theorems 339

LIB

Contents
16.3 Examples for Definitions and Theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
16.4 Using other theorem environments with tcolorbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
17 Library breakable 363

LIB
17.1 Technical Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

17.2 Limitations and Known Bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
17.3 Main Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
17.4 Option Keys for the Break Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
17.5 Extra Options for Partial Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
17.6 Breakable boxes and the multicol package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
17.7 Break Point Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
17.8 Break Sequence for the Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
17.9 Break by Hand (Faked Break) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
18 Library magazine 388

LIB
18.1 Creation and Resetting of Box Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

18.2 Storing Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
18.3 Retrieving Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
18.4 Box Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
18.5 Leaflet Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
19 Library poster 398

LIB
19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

19.2 Main Poster Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
19.3 Poster Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
19.4 Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
19.5 Common Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
19.6 Font Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
19.7 Box Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
6
20 Library fitting 411
LIB
21 Library hooks 422
LIB
21.1 Concept of Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
21.2 Box Content Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
21.3 Embedding into the Surroundings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
21.4 Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
21.5 Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
21.6 Underlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
21.7 Finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
21.8 Skin Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
21.9 Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Contents
22 Library xparse 434
LIB
22.1 Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

22.2 Producing tcolorbox Environments and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 436
22.3 Producing tcbox Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
22.4 Producing tcblisting Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
22.5 Producing tcbinputlisting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
22.6 Producing tboxfit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
23 Library external 447

LIB
23.1 Preparation of a Document for Externalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

23.2 Marking Externalization Snippets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
23.3 Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
23.4 Troubleshooting and FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
24 Library documentation 459

LIB

24.3 Predefined Colors of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
A Picture Credits 477
References 478
Index 480
7
1 Introduction
The package originates from the first edition of my book «LATEX – Einführung in das Textsatzsys-
tem» [21] in about 2006. For the LATEX examples and tutorials given there, I wanted to have
accentuated and colored boxes to display source code and compiled text in combination. Since,
in my opinion, this type of boxes is also quite useful to highlight definitions and theorems, I
applied them for my lecture notes in mathematics [18–20] as well. With this package, you are
invited to apply these boxes for similar projects.
Starting with version 2.00, for all internal calculations ε-TEX [2] expressions are used in replace-
ment of the package calc. The breaking news for version 2.00 is the support for breakable boxes.
This new feature allows new applications of the package without affecting the core package too
much if you do not need boxes to break automatically. With version 2.20, the often requested
’side by side’ mode for listings has been added. With version 3.00, boxed titles are introduced
together with improved customization options for overlays, underlays, finishes, and own code
extensions.
Since the first public release in 2011, I received a lot of feedback from all over the world. I want
to thank all who wrote me for supporting this package by sending bug reports and ideas for new
or better features.
1.1 Installation
Typically, tcolorbox will be installed as part of a major LATEX distribution and there is nothing
special to do for a user.
If you intend to make a local installation by hand, see the README file of the tcolorbox package
for some hints. The short story is: you have to install not only tcolorbox.sty, but also all
*.code.tex files in the local texmf tree.
1.2 Loading the Package
The base package tcolorbox loads the packages pgf [22], verbatim [17], etoolbox [7], and
environ [16]. tcolorbox itself is loaded in the usual manner in the preamble:
\usepackage{tcolorbox}
The package takes option keys in the key-value syntax. Alternatively, you may use these keys
later in the preamble with \tcbuselibraryÕ P. 9 (see there). For example, the key to typeset
listings is:
\usepackage[listings]{tcolorbox}
8
1.3 Libraries
The base package tcolorbox is extendable by program libraries. This is done by using option
keys while loading the package or inside the preamble by applying the following macro with the
same set of keys.
\tcbuselibrary{hkey listi}
Loads the libraries given by the hkey listi.
\tcbuselibrary{listings,theorems}
The following keys are used inside \tcbuselibrary respectively \usepackage without the key
tree path /tcb/library/.
/tcb/library/skins ( skins )
LIB
Loads the package tikz [22] and provides additional styles (skins) for the appearance of
the colored boxes; see Section 10 from page 148.
/tcb/library/vignette ( vignette )
LIB
Provides code for more ornamental; see Section 13 from page 265.
/tcb/library/raster ( raster )
LIB
Provides additional macros and options for typesetting multiple boxes arranged in a kind
of raster; see Section 14 from page 277.
/tcb/library/listings ( listings )
LIB
Loads the package listings [6] and provides additional macros for typesetting listings
which are described in Section 15 from page 298.
/tcb/library/listingsutf8 ( listingsutf8 )
LIB
Loads the packages listings [6] and listingsutf8 [10] for UTF-8 support. This is a
variant of the library listings and is described in Section 15 from page 298.
LIB
/tcb/library/minted ( minted )
Loads the package minted [12] to typeset listings with the Pygments [14] tool, also see LIB
Section 15 on page 298.
/tcb/library/theorems ( theorems )
LIB
Provides additional macros for typesetting theorems which are described in Section 16 from
page 339.
/tcb/library/breakable ( breakable )
LIB
Provides support for automatic box breaking from one page to another; see Section 17 on
page 363.
/tcb/library/magazine ( magazine )
LIB
Provides support for storing broken box parts to be used later or in interchanged order,
Section 18 on page 388.
/tcb/library/poster ( poster )
LIB
Provides support for creating posters, Section 19 on page 398.

/tcb/library/fitting ( fitting )
LIB
Provides support for font size adaption of the box content to the box dimensions; see
Section 20 from page 411.
/tcb/library/hooks ( hooks )
LIB
Extends several option keys to ’hookable’ keys; see Section 21 from page 422.
9
/tcb/library/xparse ( xparse )
LIB
Provides document command production with xparse for tcolorbox; see Section 22 from
page 434.
/tcb/library/external ( external )
LIB
Provides externalization support for stand-alone document snippets, see Section 23 on
page 447.
/tcb/library/documentation ( documentation )
LIB
Provides additional macros for typesetting L TEX documentations which are described in
A
/tcb/library/many (style, no value)
Loads the libraries skins , breakable , raster , hooks , theorems , fitting ,
LIB
LIB
LIB
LIB
LIB
LIB
and xparse . Use this shortcut, if you want to use all features of tcolorbox with exception
LIB
of typesetting listings and using the specialized documentation library.
LIB
/tcb/library/most (style, no value)
Loads all libraries except minted and documentation . Use this shortcut, if you want
LIB
LIB
to use all features of tcolorbox with exception of using the minted package and using the
specialized documentation library.
LIB
/tcb/library/all (style, no value)

Loads all libraries. Use this shortcut only, if you indend to use the documentation
LIB
library.
Package tcolorbox
Basic Features
Base package
Advanced Features Advanced Listings Documentation
breakable listings documentation

LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB LIB
LIB LIB
LIB
external listingsutf8
fitting
hooks minted
LIB
magazine
poster
raster
skins
theorems
vignette
xparse
10
2 Quick Reference
/tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 , /tcb/before skipÕ P. 80
tcolorbox
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit,
vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae,
/tcb/width Õ P. felis.
34 Curabitur dictum gravida
mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna.
Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senec-
/tcb/height Õ P. 53
tus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra
metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasel-
/tcb/left skip
lus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer /tcb/right
Õ P. 81 skipÕin,
sapien est, iaculis
P. 81
/tcb/grow
pretiumtoquis,
leftviverra
by ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel
Õ P. 84 /tcb/grow to bibendum.
leo ultrices right byÕ P. 84
Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac,
nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh
mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet
orci dignissim rutrum.
/tcb/afterÕ P. 78 , /tcb/after skipÕ P. 80
/tcb/topruleÕ P. 35
/tcb/toptitleÕ P. 42 /tcb/boxsepÕ P. 39
tcolorbox
/tcb/bottomtitle Õ P. 43
/tcb/boxsepÕ P. 39
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer
/tcb/titlerule Õ P. 36 /tcb/boxsep
adipiscing
Õ P. 39
elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut,
placerat ac, adipiscing/tcb/top
Õ P. 42
vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque.
Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis
egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna
fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien
/tcb/boxsep est,
/tcb/boxsep
Õ P. 39 Õ P. 39
iaculis in, pretium

/tcb/left Õ P. 39quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum.
/tcb/right Õ P. 40
Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur
auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan
eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
/tcb/middleÕ P. 43 /tcb/boxsepÕ P. 39
/tcb/leftruleÕ P. 35 /tcb/middleÕ P. 43 /tcb/boxsep Õ P. 39 /tcb/rightruleÕ P. 35
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem
non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet,
tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi.
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus
mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus
luctus mauris.
/tcb/bottomÕ P. 43 /tcb/boxsepÕ P. 39
/tcb/bottomrule Õ P. 35
11
3 Macros for Box Creation
\begin{tcolorbox}[hoptionsi]
henvironment contenti
\end{tcolorbox}
This is the main environment to create an accentuated colored text box with rounded
corners and, optionally, two parts. The appearance of this box is controlled by numerous
options. In the most simple case the source code
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}.
\end{tcolorbox}
creates the following compiled text box:

This is a tcolorbox.
The text content of the box can be divided in an upper and a lower part by the command
\tcblower. Visually, both parts are separated by a line. For example:
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is another \textbf{tcolorbox}.
\tcblower
Here, you see the lower part of the box.
\end{tcolorbox}
This code gives the following box:

This is another tcolorbox.
The hoptionsi control the appearance and several functions of the boxes, see Section 4 on
page 18 for the complete list. A quick example is given here:
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,title=My nice heading]

This is another \textbf{tcolorbox}.
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My nice heading
This is another tcolorbox.
\tcblower
Used inside tcolorbox to separate the upper box part from the optional lower box part.
The upper and the lower part are treated as separate functional units. If you only want to
draw a line, see \tcblineÕ P. 209 .
12
\tcbset{hoptionsi}
Sets options for every following tcolorboxÕ P. 12 inside the current TEX group. By default,
this does not apply to nested boxes, see Section 4.16 on page 91.
For example, the colors of the boxes may be defined for the whole document by this:
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black}
\tcbsetforeverylayer{hoptionsi}
Sets options for every following tcolorboxÕ P. 12 inside the current TEX group. In contrast
to \tcbset, this does also apply to nested boxes, see Section 4.16 on page 91. Technically,
the hoptionsi are appended to the default values for every tcolorbox which are applied by
/tcb/resetÕ P. 105 .
You should not use this macro, if you are not completely sure that you want to have the
hoptionsi also for boxes in boxes (in boxes in boxes . . . ).
\tcbset{colback=green!10!white}
\tcbsetforeverylayer{colframe=red!75!black}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=All options for this box]

This is a tcolorbox.\par\medskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Nested box]
Note that this nested box has a red frame but no green background.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[reset]
Options given with |\tcbsetforeverylayer| survive a |reset|.
\end{tcolorbox}
All options for this box
Nested box
Note that this nested box has a red frame but no green background.
Options given with \tcbsetforeverylayer survive a reset.
13
\tcbox[hoptionsi]{hbox contenti}
Creates a colored box which is fitted to the width of the given hbox contenti. In principle,
most hoptionsi for a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 can be used for \tcbox with some restrictions. A
\tcbox cannot have a lower part and cannot be broken.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!50!black,colback=white,colupper=red!50!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,nobeforeafter,center title}
Text \tcbox[tcbox raise base]{Hello World}\hfill

%
\tcbox[left=0mm,right=0mm,top=0mm,bottom=0mm,boxsep=0mm,
toptitle=0.5mm,bottomtitle=0.5mm,title=My table]{%
\arrayrulecolor{blue!50!black}\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}%
\begin{tabular}{r|c|l}
One & Two & Three \\\hline\hline
Men & Mice & Lions \\\hline
Upper & Middle & Lower
\end{tabular}}\hfill
%
\tcbox[colback=blue!85!black,
left=0mm,right=0mm,top=0mm,bottom=0mm,boxsep=1mm,arc=0mm,boxrule=0.5pt,
title=My picture]{%
\includegraphics[width=5cm]{Basilica_5.png}}
My picture
My table
One Two Three
Men Mice Lions
Upper Middle Lower
Text Hello World
% \usepackage{tikz}
fonttitle=\bfseries,center title}
% Fixed width box

\begin{tcolorbox}Hello\\World!\end{tcolorbox}
% Fitted width box (like hbox or makebox)

\tcbox{Hello\\World!}
% Fitted width box (using a \tikzname\ node)

\tcbox[tikznode]{Hello\\World!}
Hello
World!
HelloWorld!
Hello
World!
14
! See Section 22.2 on page 436 and Section 22.3 on page 439 for more elaborate methods to
create new environments and commands.
\newtcolorbox[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . Basically, \newtcolorbox
operates like \newenvironment. This means, the new environment hnamei optionally takes
hnumberi arguments, where hdefaulti is the default value for the optional first argument.
The hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcolorbox. Note that /tcb/savedelimiterÕ P. 26
is set to the given hnamei automatically. The hinit optionsi allow setting up automatic
numbering, see Section 5 from page 108.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}{colback=red!5!white,
colframe=red!75!black}
This is my own box.
\begin{mybox}
This is my own box.
\end{mybox}
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{colback=red!5!white,
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries, Hello there
title=#1}
This is my own box with a
\begin{mybox}{Hello there} mandatory title.
This is my own box with a mandatory title.
\end{mybox}
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[2][]{colback=red!5!white,
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
colbacktitle=red!85!black,enhanced,
attach boxed title to top center={yshift=-2mm}, Hello there
title=#2,#1}
This is my own box with a
mandatory title and options.
\begin{mybox}[colback=yellow]{Hello there}
This is my own box with a mandatory title
and options.
\end{mybox}
Definition in the preamble:

\newtcolorbox[auto counter,number within=section]{pabox}[2][]{%
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
title=Examp.~\thetcbcounter: #2,#1}
Examp. 3.1: Hello there

\begin{pabox}[colback=yellow]{Hello there}
This is my own box with a mandatory This is my own box with
numbered title and options. a mandatory numbered title
\end{pabox} and options.
\renewtcolorbox[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Operates like \newtcolorbox, but based on \renewenvironment instead of
\newenvironment. An existing environment is redefined.
15
\newtcbox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Creates a new macro \hnamei based on \tcboxÕ P. 14 . Basically, \newtcbox operates like
\newcommand. The new macro \hnamei optionally takes hnumberi+1 arguments, where
hdefaulti is the default value for the optional first argument. The hoptionsi are given to the
underlying tcbox. The hinit optionsi allow setting up automatic numbering, see Section 5
from page 108.
\newtcbox{\mybox}{colback=red!5!white,
This is my own box.
\mybox{This is my own box.}
\newtcbox{\mybox}[1]{colback=red!5!white,
title=#1}
This is my own box.
\mybox{Hello there}{This is my own box.}
\newtcbox{\mybox}[2][]{colback=red!5!white,
title=#2,#1}
This is my own box.
\mybox[colback=yellow]{Hello there}%
{This is my own box.}

% counter from previous example
\newtcbox[use counter from=pabox]{\pbbox}[2][]{%
title=(\thetcbcounter) #2,#1}
(3.2) Hello there

\pbbox[colback=yellow]{Hello there}%
{This is my own box.} This is my own box.
\newtcbox{\mybox}[1][red]{on line,
arc=0pt,outer arc=0pt,colback=#1!10!white,colframe=#1!50!black,
boxsep=0pt,left=1pt,right=1pt,top=2pt,bottom=2pt,
boxrule=0pt,bottomrule=1pt,toprule=1pt}
\newtcbox{\xmybox}[1][red]{on line,
arc=7pt,colback=#1!10!white,colframe=#1!50!black,
before upper={\rule[-3pt]{0pt}{10pt}},boxrule=1pt,
boxsep=0pt,left=6pt,right=6pt,top=2pt,bottom=2pt}
The \mybox[green]{quick} brown \mybox{fox} \mybox[blue]{jumps} over the

\mybox[green]{lazy} \mybox{dog}.\par
The \xmybox[green]{quick} brown \xmybox{fox} \xmybox[blue]{jumps} over the
\xmybox[green]{lazy} \xmybox{dog}.
The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog .

The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog .
\renewtcbox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Operates like \newtcbox, but based on \renewcommand instead of \newcommand. An existing
macro is redefined.
16
N 2014-10-20 \tcolorboxenvironment{hnamei}{hoptionsi}
An existing environment hnamei is redefined to be boxed inside a tcolorbox with the given
hoptionsi.
% tcbuselibrary{skins}
\newenvironment{myitemize}{%
\begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}
\tcolorboxenvironment{myitemize}{blanker,
before skip=6pt,after skip=6pt, Some text.
borderline west={3mm}{0pt}{red}} • Alpha
• Beta
Some text.
• Gamma
\begin{myitemize}
More text.
\item Alpha
\item Beta
\item Gamma
\end{myitemize}
More text.
See further examples in Section 16.4 on page 362.
17
4 Option Keys
For the hoptionsi in tcolorboxÕ P. 12 respectively \tcbsetÕ P. 13 the following pgf keys can be
applied. The key tree path /tcb/ is not to be used inside these macros. It is easy to add your
own style keys using the syntax for pgf keys, see [21, 22] or the examples starting from page 326.
4.1 Title
/tcb/title=htexti (no default, initially empty)
Creates a heading line with htexti as content.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My heading line] My heading line

\end{tcolorbox} This is a tcolorbox.
/tcb/notitle (no value, initially set)

Removes the title line if set before.
/tcb/adjusted title=htexti (style, no default, initially unset)
Creates a heading line with htexti as content. The minimal height of this line is adjusted to
fit the text given by /tcb/adjust text. This option makes sense for single line headings
if boxes are set side by side with equal height. Note that it is very easy to trick this
adjustment.
\tcbset{colback=White,arc=0mm,width=(\linewidth-4pt)/4,
equal height group=AT,before=,after=\hfill,fonttitle=\bfseries}
The following titles are not adjusted:\\

\foreach \n in {xxx,ggg,AAA,\"Agypten}
{\begin{tcolorbox}[title=\n,colframe=red!75!black]
Some content.\end{tcolorbox}}
Now, we try again with adjusted titles:\\
\foreach \n in {xxx,ggg,AAA,\"Agypten}
{\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=\n,colframe=blue!75!black]
Some content.\end{tcolorbox}}
The following titles are not adjusted:

xxx ggg AAA Ägypten
Some content. Some content. Some content. Some content.
Now, we try again with adjusted titles:

xxx ggg AAA Ägypten
Some content. Some content. Some content. Some content.
/tcb/adjust text=htexti (no default, initially Äpgjy)

This sets the reference text for /tcb/adjusted title. If your texts never exceed ’Äpgjy’
in depth and height you don’t need to care about this option.
18
N 2014-11-24 /tcb/squeezed title=htexti (style, no default, initially unset)
Creates a single heading line with htexti as content. If the htexti is longer than the available
space, the text is squeezed to fit into the available space.
% \tcbuselibrary{raster}
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=3,raster equal height,
colframe=red!75!black,colback=red!5!white,fonttitle=\bfseries]
\tcbitem[squeezed title={Short title}]
First box
\tcbitem[squeezed title={This is a very very long title}]
Second box
\tcbitem[squeezed title={This title is clearly to long for this application}]
Third box
\end{tcbitemize}
Short title This is a very very long title This title is clearly to long for this application
First box Second box Third box
N 2014-11-24 /tcb/squeezed title*=htexti (style, no default, initially unset)

This is a combination of /tcb/adjusted titleÕ P. 18 and /tcb/squeezed title.
colframe=red!75!black,colback=red!5!white,fonttitle=\bfseries]
\tcbitem[squeezed title*={Short title}]
First box
\tcbitem[squeezed title*={This is a very very long title}]
Second box
\tcbitem[squeezed title*={This title is clearly to long for this application}]
Third box
\end{tcbitemize}
Short title This is a very very long title This title is clearly to long for this application
19
/tcb/detach title (no value)
Detaches the title from its normal position. The text of the title is stored into
\tcbtitletext and the formatted title is available by \tcbtitle. The main application is
to move the title from its usual place to another one.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[2][]{colbacktitle=red!10!white,
colback=blue!10!white,coltitle=red!70!black,
title={#2},fonttitle=\bfseries,#1}
\begin{mybox}{My title}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[detach title,before upper={\tcbtitle\quad}]{My title}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[detach title,after upper={\par\hfill\tcbtitle}]{My title}
\end{mybox}
My title
My title This is a tcolorbox.
My title
/tcb/attach title (no value)

Attaches the title to its normal position. This option is used to reverse /tcb/detach title.
U 2015-07-08 /tcb/attach title to upper=htexti (style, default empty, initially unset)
Attaches the title to the begin of the upper part of the box content. The optional htexti is
set between the formatted title and the box content.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[2][]{colbacktitle=red!10!white,
colback=blue!10!white,coltitle=red!70!black,
title={#2},fonttitle=\bfseries,#1}
\begin{mybox}[attach title to upper={\ ---\ }]{My title}

\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[attach title to upper,after title={:\ }]{My title}
\end{mybox}
My title — This is a tcolorbox.
My title: This is a tcolorbox.
! More title options are documented in Section 4.11 on page 64 and Section 10.2 on page 155.
20
4.2 Subtitle
Inside the box content, one or more subtitles can be added. In general, a subtitle is a further
tcolorboxÕ P. 12 which inherits some color and geometry options from the enclosing box. It may
be customized just like any other tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
N 2014-10-10 \tcbsubtitle[hoptionsi]{htexti}
Used inside a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 to add a subtitle box with the given htexti. This is an inde-
pendent tcolorboxÕ P. 12 which is formatted by several inherited properties of the enclosing
box, by further settings from /tcb/subtitle style, and by the given hoptionsi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,
colback=red!5!white, My title
colframe=red!75!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries] This is a tcolorbox.
\tcbsubtitle[before skip=\baselineskip]% My subtitle
{My subtitle}
Further text.
Further text.
\end{tcolorbox}
colback=red!5!white,
colframe=red!75!black, My title
colbacktitle=yellow!50!red,
coltitle=red!25!black, This is a tcolorbox.
fonttitle=\bfseries]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. My subtitle
\tcbsubtitle[before skip=\baselineskip]%
Further text.
{My subtitle}
Further text.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-10 /tcb/subtitle style=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)

Adds tcolorbox hoptionsi to the settings for \tcbsubtitle.
My title
colbacktitle=yellow!50!red,
coltitle=red!25!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,
subtitle style={boxrule=0.4pt, My subtitle
colback=yellow!50!red!25!white} ] Further text.
\tcbsubtitle{My subtitle} Second subtitle
Further text. Further text.
\tcbsubtitle{Second subtitle}
Further text.
\end{tcolorbox}
21
4.3 Upper Part
The text content of a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 may be parted into a mandatory upper part and an op-
tional lower part. These parts are separated by \tcblowerÕ P. 12 . If there is no \tcblowerÕ P. 12
present, there is no lower part and the upper part forms the complete text content.
N 2015-01-06 /tcb/upperbox=hmodei (no default, initially visible)
Controls the treatment of the upper part of the box. If there is no lower part, this is the
complete text content. Feasible values for hmodei are:
• visible: usual type setting of the upper part,
• invisible: empty space instead of the upper part contents.
\begin{tcolorbox}[upperbox=invisible,colback=white]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} (but invisible).
\end{tcolorbox}
\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[upperbox=invisible,colback=white]
\tcblower
This is the lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2015-01-06 /tcb/visible (style, no value)

Shortcut for setting /tcb/upperbox and /tcb/lowerboxÕ P. 24 to be visible.
N 2015-01-06 /tcb/invisible (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/upperbox and /tcb/lowerboxÕ P. 24 to be invisible.
\begin{tcolorbox}[invisible]
\end{tcolorbox}
22
N 2015-05-04 /tcb/saveto=hfile namei (no default, initially empty)
Saves the content of the box into a file for an optional later usage. This is the counterpart
of /tcb/savelowertoÕ P. 24 , but is saves not only the upper part but the whole content. If
a lower part is present, it is also saved including \tcblowerÕ P. 12 .
! This option cannot be combined with /tcb/savelowerto Õ P. 24 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[invisible,saveto=\jobname_mysave1.tex,colback=white]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} which seems to be empty.
The content is saved for later usage.
\end{tcolorbox}
Now, we load the saved text:\\

\input{\jobname_mysave1.tex}
Now, we load the saved text:

This is a tcolorbox which seems to be empty. The content is saved for later usage.
\begin{tcolorbox}[saveto=\jobname_mysave2.tex]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}

\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=red,colback=red!10,
coltitle=black,colbacktitle=red!20,sidebyside,
title=Here we see the saved content including the lower part]
\input{\jobname_mysave2.tex}
\end{tcolorbox}

Here we see the saved content including the lower part
This is a tcolorbox. This is the lower part.
23
4.4 Lower Part
/tcb/lowerbox=hmodei (no default, initially visible)
Controls the treatment of the lower part of the box. Feasible values for hmodei are:
• visible: usual type setting of the lower part,
• invisible: empty space instead of the lower part contents,
• ignored: the lower part is not used (here).
The last two values are usually applied in connection with savelowerto.
\begin{tcolorbox}[lowerbox=invisible,colback=white]
\tcblower
This is the lower part (but invisible).
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[lowerbox=ignored,colback=white]
\tcblower
This is the lower part (but ignored).
\end{tcolorbox}
U 2014-11-28 /tcb/savelowerto=hfile namei (no default, initially empty)

Saves the content of the lower part into a file for an optional later usage.
\begin{tcolorbox}[lowerbox=invisible,savelowerto=\jobname_bspsave.tex,colback=white]
\tcblower
This is the lower part which may be quite complex:
$\displaystyle f(x)=\frac{1+x^2}{1-x^2}$.
\end{tcolorbox}
Now, we load the saved text:\\

\input{\jobname_bspsave.tex}

1 + x2
This is the lower part which may be quite complex: f (x) = .
1 − x2
24
/tcb/lower separated=true|false (default true, initially true)
If set to true, the lower part is visually separated from the upper part. It depends on the
chosen skin how the visualization of the separation is done.
% \tcbuselibrary{skins,raster}
\begin{tcbraster}[colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,fontlower=\itshape]
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Lower separated]
This is the upper part.
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Lower not separated,lower separated=false]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[sidebyside,title=Lower separated]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[sidebyside,title=Lower not separated,lower separated=false]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[beamer,title=Lower separated]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[beamer,title=Lower not separated,lower separated=false]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
%
\end{tcbraster}
Lower separated Lower not separated
This is the upper part. This is the upper part.
This is the lower part. This is the lower part.
This is the upper This is the lower This is the upper This is the lower
part. part. part. part.
This is the upper part. This is the upper part.
25
/tcb/savedelimiter=hnamei (no default, initially tcolorbox)
Used in connection with new environment definitions which extend tcolorbox and use
or allow the option savelowerto. To catch the end of the new box environment
hnamei has to be the name of this environment. Additionally, the environment defini-
tion has to use \tcolorbox instead of \begin{tcolorbox} and \endtcolorbox instead of
\end{tcolorbox}.
\newenvironment{mybox}[1]{%
\tcolorbox[savedelimiter=mybox,
savelowerto=\jobname_bspsave2.tex,lowerbox=ignored,
title=#1]}%
{\endtcolorbox}
\begin{mybox}{My Example}
Upper part.
\tcblower
Saved lower part!
\end{mybox}
Now, the saved part is used:

\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=green!5]
\input{\jobname_bspsave2.tex}
\end{tcolorbox}
My Example
Upper part.
Saved lower part!
The savedelimiter is used implicitely with \newtcolorboxÕ P. 15 which allows a more

convenient usage:
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{%
savelowerto=\jobname_bspsave2.tex,lowerbox=ignored,
title=#1}%
\begin{mybox}{My Example}
Upper part.
\tcblower
Saved lower part!
\end{mybox}

\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=green!5]
\input{\jobname_bspsave2.tex}
\end{tcolorbox}
My Example
Upper part.
Saved lower part!
26
4.5 Colors and Fonts
/tcb/colframe=hcolori (no default, initially black!75!white)
Sets the frame hcolori of the box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=red!50!white]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/colback=hcolori (no default, initially black!5!white)

Sets the background hcolori of the box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!50!white]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/title filled=true|false (default true, initially false)

Switches the drawing of the title background according to the given value. This option
is set to true automatically by /tcb/colbacktitle, /tcb/opacitybacktitleÕ P. 51 , and
/tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 , and /tcb/title codeÕ P. 140 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,title filled] My title

title filled=false] My title
/tcb/colbacktitle=hcolori (no default, initially black!50!white)

Sets the background hcolori of the title area of the box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colbacktitle=red!50!white,
title=My title,coltitle=black, My title
fonttitle=\bfseries]
\end{tcolorbox}
27
/tcb/colupper=hcolori (no default, initially black)
Sets the text hcolori of the upper part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colupper=red!75!black]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/collower=hcolori (no default, initially black)

Sets the text hcolori of the lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[collower=red!75!black]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/coltext=hcolori (style, no default, initially black)

Sets the text hcolori of the box. This is an abbreviation for setting colupper and collower
to the same value.
\begin{tcolorbox}[coltext=red!75!black]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/coltitle=hcolori (no default, initially white)

Sets the title text hcolori of the box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[coltitle=red!75!black,
Test
colbacktitle=black!10!white,title=Test]
\end{tcolorbox}
28
/tcb/fontupper=htexti (no default, initially empty)
Sets htexti before the content of the upper part (e. g. font settings).
\begin{tcolorbox}[fontupper=Hello!~\sffamily]
\end{tcolorbox}
Hello! This is a tcolorbox.
/tcb/fontlower=htexti (no default, initially empty)

Sets htexti before the content of the lower part (e. g. font settings).
\begin{tcolorbox}[fontlower=\sffamily\bfseries]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/fonttitle=htexti (no default, initially empty)

Sets htexti before the content of the title text (e. g. font settings).
\begin{tcolorbox}[fonttitle=\sffamily\bfseries\large,title=Hello]
\end{tcolorbox}
Hello
! More color options are provided by using skins documented in Section 10 from page 148.
29
4.6 Text Alignment
N 2015-05-07 /tcb/halign=halignmenti (no default, initially justify)
If there is no lower part, halign determines the horizontal halignmenti of the text content.
Otherwise, halign determines the horizontal halignmenti of the upper part of the box
only. The feasible values for halignmenti are more or less identical to the corresponding
/tikz/align settings, even if the implementation differs.
• justify: usual left and right justified type setting.
• left: left border justification in analogy to plain TEX.
• flush left: left border justification with \raggedright of LATEX.
• right: right border justification in analogy to plain TEX.
• flush right: right border justification with \raggedleft of LATEX.
• center: centering in analogy to plain TEX.
• flush center: centering with \centering of LATEX.
The differences between the flush and non-flush version are explained in detail in the TikZ
manual [22]. The short story is that the non-flush versions will often look more balanced
but with more hyphenations.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,size=small,
fonttitle=\bfseries,width=3.5cm,box align=top,
nobeforeafter}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush center,halign=flush center]

This is a demonstration text for showing how line breaking works.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush left,halign=flush left]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush right,halign=flush right]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=center,halign=center]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=left,halign=left]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=right,halign upper=right]
\end{tcolorbox}
flush center flush left flush right

This is a This is a This is a
demonstration text demonstration text demonstration text
for showing how line for showing how line for showing how line
breaking works. breaking works. breaking works.
center left right
This is a demon- This is a demonstra- This is a demon-
stration text for tion text for showing stration text for
showing how line how line breaking showing how line
breaking works. works. breaking works.
N 2015-05-07 /tcb/halign upper=halignmenti (no default, initially justify)

Alias for /tcb/halign.
30
N 2015-05-07 /tcb/halign lower=halignmenti (no default, initially justify)
halign lower determines the horizontal halignmenti of the lower part of the box. The
feasible values for halignmenti are the same as for /tcb/halignÕ P. 30 .
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,fonttitle=\bfseries,
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black]
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush center,halign lower=flush center]

Upper part. \tcblower Lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush left,halign lower=flush left]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush right,halign lower=flush right]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=center,halign lower=center]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=left,halign lower=left]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=right,halign lower=right]
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
Upper part. Upper part. Upper part.
Lower part. Lower part. Lower part.
center left right
Upper part. Upper part. Upper part.
Lower part. Lower part. Lower part.
31
N 2015-05-07 /tcb/halign title=halignmenti (no default, initially justify)
halign lower determines the horizontal halignmenti of the title of the box. The feasible
values for halignmenti are the same as for /tcb/halignÕ P. 30 .
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,fonttitle=\bfseries,
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush center,halign title=flush center]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush left,halign title=flush left]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=flush right,halign title=flush right]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=center,halign title=center]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=left,halign title=left]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=right,halign title=right]
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
This is a tcolorbox. This is a tcolorbox. This is a tcolorbox.
center left right
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/flushleft upper (style, no value)

Shortcut for setting /tcb/halignÕ P. 30 to flush left.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/center upper (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halignÕ P. 30 to flush center.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/flushright upper (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halignÕ P. 30 to flush right.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/flushleft lower (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halign lowerÕ P. 31 to flush left.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/center lower (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halign lowerÕ P. 31 to flush center.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/flushright lower (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halign lowerÕ P. 31 to flush right.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/flushleft title (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halign title to flush left.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/center title (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halign title to flush center.
U 2015-05-07 /tcb/flushright title (style, no value)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/halign title to flush right.
32
! natural height, see Section 4.10 on page 53.
The vertical alignment settings are only relevant for boxes which are larger than their
U 2015-07-16 /tcb/valign=halignmenti (no default, initially top)

If the height of a tcolorbox is not the natural height, valign determines the vertical
halignmenti of the upper part. Feasible values are
• top: Anchor text at top.
• center: Anchor text at center.
• bottom: Anchor text at bottom.
• scale: Scale text vertically to fit into the available space. This is brutal and may not
look very good. Consider Section 20 on page 411 alternatively.
• scale*: Like scale, but scaling is bounded by /tcb/valign scale limit.
For a box with natural height, these settings are meaningless.
\tcbset{width=(\linewidth-2mm)/4,before=,after=\hfill,
colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,height=2cm}
\foreach \myalign in {top,center,bottom,scale}

{\begin{tcolorbox}[valign=\myalign]
\end{tcolorbox}}
This is a tcolor-
box. This is a tcolor- This is a tcolor-
box. This is a tcolor-
box. box.
N 2015-05-07 /tcb/valign upper=halignmenti (no default, initially top)
Alias for /tcb/valign.
/tcb/valign lower=halignmenti (no default, initially top)
This key has the same meaning for the lower part as valign for the upper part, i. e., it
determines the vertical halignmenti of the lower part with feasible values top, center,
bottom, scale, and scale*.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/valign scale limit=hreal numberi (no default, initially 1.1)
Sets an upper scale limit for the scale* setting in /tcb/valign and /tcb/valign lower.
Note that this value is not reset by /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 . So, changes also apply to embedded
boxes.
Also see /tcb/sidebyside alignÕ P. 117 for alignment settings when upper part and lower part
are set side-by-side.
33
4.7 Geometry
4.7.1 Width
/tcb/width=hlengthi (no default, initially \linewidth)
Sets the total width of the colored box to hlengthi. See also /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=\linewidth/2]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-31 /tcb/text width=hlengthi (style, no default)

Sets the text width of the upper part to hlengthi. See also /tcb/text heightÕ P. 54 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[text width=4cm]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} where the text has a width of 4cm.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a tcolorbox where

the text has a width of 4cm.
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/add to width=hlengthi (style, no default)

Adds hlengthi to the current total width of the colored box.
\tcbset{width=4cm,colback=red!5!white,
\begin{tcolorbox} This is a tcolorbox.

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[add to width=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
See Section 4.10 on page 53 for setting fixed height values.
34
4.7.2 Rules
/tcb/toprule=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)
Sets the line width of the top rule to hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[toprule=3mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/bottomrule=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)

Sets the line width of the bottom rule to hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[bottomrule=3mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/leftrule=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)

Sets the line width of the left rule to hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[leftrule=3mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/rightrule=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)

Sets the line width of the right rule to hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[rightrule=3mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
35
/tcb/titlerule=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)
Sets the line width of the rule below the title to hlengthi.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
colbacktitle=red!90!black}
\begin{tcolorbox}[titlerule=3mm,title=This is the title]

\end{tcolorbox}
This is the title
/tcb/boxrule=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 0.5mm)

Sets all rules of the frame to hlengthi, i. e. /tcb/topruleÕ P. 35 , /tcb/bottomruleÕ P. 35 ,
/tcb/leftruleÕ P. 35 , /tcb/rightruleÕ P. 35 , and /tcb/titlerule.
\begin{tcolorbox}[boxrule=3mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
! More options for drawing a /tcb/borderlineÕ P. 177 are provided by using skins docu-
mented in Section 10 from page 148.
4.7.3 Arcs
/tcb/arc=hlengthi (no default, initially 1mm)
Sets the inner radius of the four frame arcs to hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[arc=0mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[arc=3mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
36
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/circular arc (style, no value)
Sets /tcb/arcÕ P. 36 to match the half of the inner width of the colored box. If width and
height of the box are identical, this gives a circle.
! If the height of the box is smaller than the width, the result will look quite ugly.
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=3cm,
This is a
halign=center,valign=center,
tcolorbox.
square,circular arc]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/bean arc (style, no value)

Sets /tcb/arc Õ P. 36 to match the smaller value of the half of the inner width and of the
inner height of the colored box.
! This only works for a fixed /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 . Also, /tcb/bean arc must be used
after width and height are set by option keys.
\tcbset{size=fbox,boxrule=0.5mm,
halign=center,valign=center} Box A
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=3cm,height=2cm,
bean arc]
Box A
\end{tcolorbox}
Box B
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=2cm,height=3cm,
bean arc]
Box B
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/octogon arc (style, no value)

Sets /tcb/arc Õ P. 36 to match 2+ 2 of the inner width of the colored box. If width and
1√
height of the box are identical, the interior is a regular octogon.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,
size=minimal,auto outer arc,
width=2.1cm,octogon arc,
colback=red,colframe=white,colupper=white,
fontupper=\fontsize{7mm}{7mm}\selectfont\bfseries\sffamily,
halign=center,valign=center, STOP
square,arc is angular,
borderline={0.2mm}{-1mm}{red} ]
STOP
\end{tcolorbox}
37
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/arc is angular (no value, initially unset)
Using this options applies a patch which straightens the corners arcs of the boxes. The
little arcs are replaced by little straight lines.
! TikZ code. This change may break with future updates of TikZ.
This patch is considered as an experimental feature. It changes some of the original
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
arc=3mm}
\begin{tcolorbox}[arc is angular] This is a tcolorbox.

\begin{tcolorbox}[arc is curved]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/arc is curved (no value, initially set)

This option resets the patch from /tcb/arc is angular. The original TikZ code is acti-
vated.
/tcb/outer arc=hlengthi (no default, initially unset)
Sets the outer radius of the four frame arcs to hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[arc=4mm,outer arc=1mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/auto outer arc (no value, initially set)

Sets the outer radius of the four frame arcs automatically in dependency of the inner radius
given by /tcb/arcÕ P. 36 .
38
4.7.4 Spacing
/tcb/boxsep=hlengthi (no default, initially 1mm)
Sets a common padding of hlengthi between the text content and the frame of the box. This
value is added to the key values of left, right, top, bottom, and middle at the appropriate
places.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,width=(\linewidth-4mm)/2,
before=,after=\hfill}
\begin{tcolorbox}[boxsep=5mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[boxsep=5mm,draft]
\end{tcolorbox}
frame: w=195.33255pt, h=48.97505pt
This is a tcolorbox. upper:

This is a w=141.2724pt,
tcolorbox. h=6.296pt
interior: w=192.4873pt, h=46.1298pt
/tcb/left=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 4mm)

Sets the left space between all text parts and frame (additional to boxsep). This is an
abbreviation for setting lefttitle, leftupper, and leftlower to the same value.
\begin{tcolorbox}[left=0mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-16 /tcb/left*=hlengthi (style, no default)

Sets /tcb/left such that hlengthi is the distance between the left bounding box and the
text parts.
This is some text.

\begin{tcolorbox}[grow to left by=5mm,left*=0mm,
enhanced,show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
This is some text.

39
/tcb/lefttitle=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)
Sets the left space between title text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[lefttitle=3cm,title=My Title]
\end{tcolorbox}
My Title
/tcb/leftupper=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)

Sets the left space between upper text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[leftupper=3cm,title=My Title]
\end{tcolorbox}
My Title
/tcb/leftlower=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)

Sets the left space between lower text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[leftlower=3cm]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/right=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 4mm)

Sets the right space between all text parts and frame (additional to boxsep). This is an
abbreviation for setting righttitle, rightupper, and rightlower to the same value.
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=5cm,right=2cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a tcol-
orbox.
40
N 2017-02-16 /tcb/right*=hlengthi (style, no default)
Sets /tcb/right such that hlengthi is the distance between the right bounding box and the
text parts.
\flushright This is some text.

\begin{tcolorbox}[grow to right by=5mm,right*=0mm,
halign=right,enhanced,show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
This is some text.

/tcb/righttitle=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)

Sets the right space between title text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=5cm,righttitle=2cm,title=My very long title text]

This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} with standard upper box dimensions.
\end{tcolorbox}
My very long ti-

tle text
This is a tcolorbox with

standard upper box dimen-
sions.
/tcb/rightupper=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)

Sets the right space between upper text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=5cm,rightupper=2cm,title=My very long title text]

This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} with compressed upper box dimensions.
\end{tcolorbox}
My very long title text
This is a tcol-
orbox with
compressed
upper box
dimensions.
41
/tcb/rightlower=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)
Sets the right space between lower text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=5cm,rightlower=2cm]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} with standard upper box dimensions.
\tcblower
This is the lower part with large space at right.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a tcolorbox with

standard upper box dimen-
sions.
This is the lower

part with large
space at right.
/tcb/top=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

Sets the top space between text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[top=0mm]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/toptitle=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)

Sets the top space between title and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[toptitle=3mm,title=My title]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
42
/tcb/bottom=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)
Sets the bottom space between text and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[bottom=0mm]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/bottomtitle=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)

Sets the bottom space between title and frame (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[bottomtitle=3mm,title=My title]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
/tcb/middle=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

Sets the space between upper and lower text to the separation line (additional to boxsep).
\begin{tcolorbox}[middle=0mm,boxsep=0mm]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
43
4.7.5 Size Shortcuts
/tcb/size=hnamei (no default, initially normal)
Sets all geometry keys with exception of /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 to predefined length values. For
hnamei, the following values are feasible:
• normal: normal sized boxes e.g. of width \linewidth.
• title: title line sized boxes.
• small: small boxes e.g. for keyword highlighting.
• fbox: identical to the standard \fbox.
• tight: no padding space at all.
• minimal: no padding space, no box rules.
\foreach \s in {normal,title,small,fbox,tight,minimal} {
\tcbox[size=\s,on line]{\s} }
\tcbox[size=\s,on line,title=Test]{\s} }
\begin{tcolorbox}[size=\s,on line,title=Test,width=2.2cm]
\s \tcblower lower\end{tcolorbox} }
normal title small fbox tight minimal
Test
Test Test Test
Test Test
Test
normal Test Test Test

title small fbox Test Test
lower tight minimal
lower lower lower lower lower
Predefined values
boxrule 0.5mm 0.4mm 0.3mm 0.4pt 0.4pt 0.0pt
boxsep 1.0mm 1.0mm 1.0mm 3.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
left 4.0mm 2.0mm 1.0mm 0.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
right 4.0mm 2.0mm 1.0mm 0.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
top 2.0mm 0.25mm 0.0mm 0.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
bottom 2.0mm 0.25mm 0.0mm 0.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
toptitle 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
bottomtitle 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
middle 2.0mm 0.75mm 0.5mm 1.0pt 0.2pt 0.0pt
arc 1.0mm 0.75mm 0.5mm 1.0pt 0.0pt 0.0pt
outer arc auto auto auto auto 0.0pt 0.0pt
44
/tcb/oversize=hlengthi (style, default 0pt)
Sets the text width of the upper part to the current line width plus an optional hlengthi.
This is achieved by changing the keys /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 /tcb/enlarge left byÕ P. 83 , and
/tcb/enlarge right byÕ P. 83 appropriately. The resulting box is overlapping into the left
and right margin of the page. Note that this style option has to be given after all other ge-
ometry keys! Also see /tcb/grow sidewards byÕ P. 85 and /tcb/spread sidewardsÕ P. 88 .
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\textit{Normal text for comparison:}\\

\lipsum[2]
\begin{tcolorbox}[oversize,title=Oversized box]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Normal box]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
Normal text for comparison:

Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non
justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed
accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et
nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis
natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt
urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
Oversized box
Normal box
luctus mauris.
45
4.7.6 Toggle Left and Right
U 2017-02-16 /tcb/toggle left and right=htoggle preseti (default evenpage, initially none)
According to the htoggle preseti, the left and the right settings of the tcolorbox are switched
or not. Feasible values are:
• none: no switching.
• forced: the values of the left and right rules, spaces, and corners are switched.
• evenpage: if the page is an even page, the values of the left and right rules, spaces,
and corners are switched. This value also sets /tcb/check odd pageÕ P. 101 to true.
Horizontal bounding box enlargements are not toggled by this option. They
! can be toggled independently by /tcb/toggle enlargementÕ P. 86 . For example,
/tcb/oversizeÕ P. 45 changes the bounding box.
% \usepackage{lipsum}
% \usetikzlibrary{patterns}
% \tcbuselibrary{skins,breakable}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,breakable,
toggle left and right,sharp corners,
boxrule=0mm,top=0mm,bottom=0mm,left=1mm,right=1mm,
rightrule=1cm,colupper=blue!25!black,
interior style={fill overzoom image=lichtspiel.jpg,fill image opacity=0.25},
frame style={pattern=crosshatch dots light steel blue},
overlay={%
\begin{tcbclipframe}
\tcbifoddpage{\coordinate (X) at ([xshift=-5mm]frame.east);}
{\coordinate (X) at ([xshift=5mm]frame.west);}
\fill[shading=ball,ball color=blue!50!white,opacity=0.5] (X) circle (4mm);
\end{tcbclipframe}}]
\lipsum[1-6]
\end{tcolorbox}
This example switches a 1cm thick rule from the left to the right side depending on the
page number. Thereby, the rule is always on the outer side of the double-sided paper.
Additionally, a ball is drawn on the outer side with help of an overlay.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum
ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu
libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue
eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada
fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et
lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida
placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent
eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada
eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci
eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis
eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor
lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus.
Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae
ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut
massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et
magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tin-
cidunt tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellen-
46
tesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam.
Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia.
Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit
ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim.
Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc
eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec
et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tin-
cidunt ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac
habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc
elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sol-
licitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae
tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta
vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus
semper, leo velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum diam.
Aliquam pellentesque, augue quis sagittis posuere, turpis lacus congue quam, in
hendrerit risus eros eget felis. Maecenas eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor.
Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Sed a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi
fringilla, wisi in dignissim interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui
cursus dui. Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras ac
magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget nunc.
Nam feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur consectetuer.
Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, tincidunt sit amet, laoreet
vitae, arcu. Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, molestie
non, nonummy vel, nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales
cursus, magna. Donec eu purus. Quisque vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede
lorem egestas dui, et convallis elit erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc.
Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium, ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer
arcu est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio.
47
4.8 Corners
The four corners of any tcolorbox can be set individually as /tcb/sharp corners or
as /tcb/rounded cornersÕ P. 49 . These settings are also reflected in the behavior of
/tcb/borderlineÕ P. 177 and /tcb/shadowÕ P. 188 as one would expect.
By default, all four corners are rounded. So, only the /tcb/sharp corners option will be
necessary for most use cases. The /tcb/rounded cornersÕ P. 49 option can be used to revert a
/tcb/sharp corners setting.
/tcb/sharp corners=hpositioni (default all, initially unset)
The hpositioni denotes one or more of the four box corners to be set as sharp corners. The
not assigned corners will retain their mode. Feasible values for hpositioni are:
• northwest
• northeast
• southwest
• southeast
• north
• south
• east
• west
• downhill
• uphill
• all
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!5!white,
sharp corners=northwest ] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
sharp corners ] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
48
/tcb/rounded corners=hpositioni (default all, initially all)
The /tcb/rounded corners can be used to revert a /tcb/sharp cornersÕ P. 48 setting.
The hpositioni denotes one or more of the four box corners to be set as rounded corners.
The not assigned corners will retain their mode. Feasible values for hpositioni are2 :
• northwest
• northeast
• southwest
• southeast
• north
• south
• east
• west
• downhill
• uphill
• all
colframe=red!75!black,sharp corners,
rounded corners=northwest ] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/sharpish corners (style, no value)

Shortcut for setting /tcb/arcÕ P. 36 and /tcb/outer arcÕ P. 38 to 0pt. With this setting,
rounded corners will appear as quasi-sharp, but e. g. the shadow will be somewhat rounder
than the shadow of really sharp corners.
! to rounded corners, one has to adapt /tcb/arc

Corners are still of type rounded with this option, but appear sharp. To switch back
Õ P. 36 and /tcb/outer arcÕ P. 38 .
sharpish corners ] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
2
The graphical examples assume that the boxes where set to have sharp corners before.
49
The following examples will show the differences between /tcb/rounded cornersÕ P. 49 ,
/tcb/sharpish cornersÕ P. 49 , and /tcb/sharp cornersÕ P. 48 . The later two give the same
core box, but /tcb/borderlineÕ P. 177 and /tcb/shadowÕ P. 188 settings are slightly different.
The following examples use /tcb/drop fuzzy shadowÕ P. 182 .
My title
rounded corners
My title
sharpish corners
My title
sharp corners
50
4.9 Transparency
! Section 10.11 on page 201.

Transparency effects are likely to be used in conjunction with jigsaw skin variants, see
/tcb/opacityframe=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the frame opacity of the box to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tcolorbox}[opacityframe=0.25,
colframe=red]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/opacityback=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the background opacity of the box to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tcolorbox}[standard jigsaw,colframe=red,
opacityframe=0.5, opacityback=0.5]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/opacitybacktitle=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the title background opacity of the box to the given hfractioni.
opacityframe=0.5, opacitybacktitle=0.5, This is a title
title filled, title=This is a title]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/opacityfill=hfractioni (style, no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the fill opacity for frame, interior and optionally the title background to the given
hfractioni.
This is a title
opacityfill=0.7, title=This is a title]
\end{tcolorbox}
51
/tcb/opacityupper=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)
Sets the text opacity of the upper box part to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,opacityupper=0.5,
interior style={pattern=checkerboard light '
&gray}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/opacitylower=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the text opacity of the lower box part to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,opacitylower=0.5,
\tcblower This is the lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/opacitytext=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the text opacity of the upper and the lower box part to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,opacitytext=0.5,
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/opacitytitle=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Sets the text opacity of the box title to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,opacitytitle=0.7,
coltitle=black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,title=This is a title, This is a title
title style={pattern=checkerboard light '
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,fonttitle=\bfseries,title=This is a title,

opacityframe=0.5,opacityback=0.25,opacitybacktitle=0.25,opacitytext=0.8,
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,colbacktitle=yellow!20!red]
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a title
52
4.10 Height Control
In a typical usage scenario, the height of a tcolorbox is computed automatically to fit the
content. Nevertheless, the height can be set to a fixed value or to fit commonly for several
boxes, e. g. if boxes are set side by side.
! /tcb/breakable
The height control keys are only applicable to unbreakable boxes. If a box is set to be
Õ P. 365 , the height is always computed according to the natural height.
/tcb/natural height (no value, initially set)

Sets the total height of the colored box to its natural height depending on the box content.
/tcb/height=hlengthi (no default)
Sets the total height of the colored box to hlengthi independent of the box content. hlengthi
is the minimum height of the box, if /tcb/height plus is larger than zero.
colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height=1cm,valign=center]
This box has a height of 1cm.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height=2cm,valign=center]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height=3cm,split=0.5,valign=center,valign lower=center]
\tcblower
Lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
This box has a height of

3cm.
This box has a height of

This box has a height of 2cm. Lower part.
1cm.
/tcb/height plus=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

The box may extend a given fixed /tcb/height up to the given hlengthi.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,width=3cm,nobeforeafter}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height=1cm,height plus=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height=1cm,height plus=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
53
/tcb/height from=hmini to hmaxi (style, no default)
Sets the box height to a dimension between hmini and hmaxi.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm,top=1mm,
bottom=1mm,right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,width=4.5cm,nobeforeafter,
height from=2cm to 8cm}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a,

euismod sodales, sollicitudin
vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem
non justo. Nam lacus libero,
pretium at, lobortis vitae, ul-
tricies et, tellus. Donec ali-
quet, tortor sed accumsan
bibendum, erat ligula aliquet
magna, vitae ornare odio me-
tus a mi. Morbi ac orci et
nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
pendisse ut massa. Cras nec
ante. Pellentesque a nulla.
Cum sociis natoque penati-
bus et magnis dis parturi-
This is a tcolorbox. This is a tcolorbox. This is ent montes, nascetur ridiculus
a tcolorbox. This is a tcolor- mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
box. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum
turpis. Pellentesque cursus
luctus mauris.
N 2014-10-31 /tcb/text height=hlengthi (style, no default)

Sets the text height to hlengthi. This is the length from the top of the upper part to the
bottom of the optional lower part. See also /tcb/text widthÕ P. 34 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[text height=2cm]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} where the text area has a height of 2cm.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a tcolorbox where the text area has a height of 2cm.
54
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/add to height=hlengthi (style, no default)
Adds hlengthi to the current height of the colored box. /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 has to be set
before this key is used! If this option is used several times, then the /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 is
also increased several times.
\tcbset{height=2cm,
valign=center,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2,
before=,after=\hfill,colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white}
\begin{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[add to height=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}

N 2016-02-16 /tcb/add to natural height=hlengthi (style, no default)

The application of this option generates a box with natural height plus the given hlengthi.
If this option is used several times, then the last setting of hlengthi wins. The resulting box
is not considered a fixed height box and the implementation is quite different to /tcb/add
to height.
\tcbset{valign=center,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2,
before=,after=\hfill,colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This box has natural height.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[add to natural height=1cm]
This box has natural height plus 1 cm.
\end{tcolorbox}
This box has natural height plus 1 cm.

This box has natural height.
55
N 2014-09-22 /tcb/height fill=true|false|maximum (default true, initially false)
If set to true, the height of the tcolorbox is set to the rest of the available vertical space of
U 2016-02-17
the current page. If set to maximum, the page is compressed as much as possible. Note that
the tcolorbox is always set as its own paragraph using this option. Also see /tcb/text
fillÕ P. 67 .
! Note that the library breakable has to be loaded to use this key!
LIB
This height control key is only applicable to unbreakable boxes, but it uses code from
the library breakable . The counterpart for breakable boxes is /tcb/height fixed
LIB
for Õ P. 370 .
This option can and should not be used for boxes in boxes, but it can be used for boxes
inside a tcbrasterÕ P. 279 .
% \tcbuselibrary{breakable}
\begin{tcolorbox}[height fill,
title=Box which fills the rest of the page]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
Box which fills the rest of the page
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut,
placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est,
iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum.
56
N 2017-06-28 /tcb/inherit height=fraction (default 1, initially unset)
If this option is used for a tcolorbox which is embedded inside another (outer) tcolorbox
and if this outer tcolorbox has a fixed height, then the given hfractioni of the available
text height of the outer tcolorbox is used as /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 for the current tcolorbox.
Otherwise, /tcb/natural heightÕ P. 53 is applied for the current tcolorbox.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Outer box with fixed height 4cm,height=4cm]

\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Inner box,nobeforeafter,inherit height]
This inner box matches the available space.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Outer box with natural height]

This inner box has its natural height.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Outer box with fixed height 5cm,height=5cm]

\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=red,beforeafter skip=0pt,inherit height=0.6]
Deeply nested box using 60 percent of the available space.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=red,beforeafter skip=0pt,inherit height=0.4]
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
Outer box with fixed height 4cm
Inner box
This inner box matches the available space.
Outer box with natural height
Inner box
This inner box has its natural height.
Outer box with fixed height 5cm
Inner box
57
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/square (style, no value)
Sets /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 to match the width of the colored box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=3cm,
This is a
tcolorbox.
square]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/space=hfractioni (no default, initially 0)

If the height of a tcolorbox is not the natural height, the space difference between the
forced and the natural size is distributed between the upper and the lower part of the box.
This space could also be negative. hfractioni with a value between 0 and 1 is the amount
of space which is added to the upper part, the rest is added to the lower part. If there is
no lower part, then all of the space is added to the upper part always.
\foreach \f in {0.2,0.4,0.7}
{\begin{tcolorbox}[space=\f]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}}
This is the upper part. This is the upper part. This is the upper part.

/tcb/space to upper (style)

This is an abbreviation for space=1, i. e. all extra space is added to the upper part.
/tcb/space to lower (style, initially set)
This is an abbreviation for space=0, i. e. all extra space is added to the lower part (if there
is any).
58
/tcb/space to both (style)
This is an abbreviation for space=0.5, i. e. the extra space equally distributed between the
upper and the lower part.
\foreach \myspace in {space to upper,space to both,space to lower}

{\begin{tcolorbox}[\myspace]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}}

N 2015-02-15 /tcb/space to=hmacroi (no default, initially unset)

forced and the natural size is saved into the given local hmacroi. This hmacroi can and
should be used inside the box content to add content which is vertically sized to match
hmacroi.
• The actual length saved into hmacroi is adapted dynamically during several
compilations – at least two, but maybe more.
• Due to the adaption algorithm, objects can be sized with hmacroi plus any offset
! length.
• Never ever use hmacroi multiplied with a factor. The only exception to this rule
is that the space can be split into parts which sum to hmacroi.
• Never use this in combination with /tcb/fitÕ P. 413 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,height=3cm,
space to=\myspace]
This is my box of height 3cm. The space is filled with a picture:\\[2mm]
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth,height=\myspace]{goldshade.png}\\[1mm]
This is some other text.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my box of height 3cm. The space is filled with a picture:
This is some other text.
59
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,height=3cm,
space to=\myspace]
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth,
height=0.33\dimexpr\myspace]{blueshade.png}\\[1mm]
This is my box of height 3cm.\\[2mm]
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth,
height=0.67\dimexpr\myspace]{goldshade.png}
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my box of height 3cm.
/tcb/split=hfractioni (no default)

If the height of a tcolorbox is not the natural height, the hfractioni with a value between
0 and 1 determines the positioning of the segmentation between the upper and the lower
part. Here, 0 stands for top and 1 for bottom. Note that the box is split regardless of the
actual dimensions of the text parts!
\tcbset{width=(\linewidth-2mm)/3,before=,after=\hfill,height=3cm,
colback=white,colframe=blue!75!black,valign=center,valign lower=center}
\foreach \f in {0.1,0.5,0.8}
{\begin{tcolorbox}[split=\f]
\tcblower
This is the lower part with a lot of text in several lines.
\end{tcolorbox}}
This is the lower part This is the lower part This is the lower part
with a lot of text in sev- with a lot of text in sev- with a lot of text in sev-
eral lines. eral lines. eral lines.
60
U 2014-11-07 /tcb/equal height group=hidi (no default)
Boxes which are members of an equal height group will all get the same height, i. e.
the maximum of all their natural heights. The hidi serves to distinguish between different
height groups. Note that you have to compile twice to see changes and that height groups
are global definitions.
\tcbset{width=(\linewidth-2mm)/3,before=,after=\hfill,arc=0mm,
colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[equal height group=A,adjusted title={One}]

My smallest box.
\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[equal height group=A,adjusted title={Two}]
This box is also small.
\tcblower
But with a lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[equal height group=A,adjusted title={Three}]
This box contains a lot of text just to fill the space
with word flowing and flowing and flowing until the box
is filled with all of it.
\end{tcolorbox}\linebreak
%
\tcbset{width=(\linewidth-1mm)/2,before=,after=\hfill,arc=0mm,
colframe=red!75!black,colback=white}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[equal height group=B]
Now, we use another equal height group.
\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[equal height group=B,after=]
\begin{equation*}
\int\limits_{0}^{1} x^2 = \frac13.
\end{equation*}
\end{tcolorbox}
One Two Three
My smallest box. This box is also small. This box contains a lot
of text just to fill the
But with a lower part. space with word flowing
and flowing and flowing
until the box is filled with
all of it.
Now, we use another equal height group. Z1

1
x2 = .
3
0
! See Section 14 on page 277 for more equal height options.
61
/tcb/minimum for equal height group=hidi:hlengthi (no default, initially unset)
Plants a hlengthi into the equal height group with the given hidi. This ensures that the
height will not drop below hlengthi. Note that you cannot reduce a computed height value
by using this key with a small value. The difference to applying /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 directly
is that the boxes are never too small for their content.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,arc=0mm,
before=,after=\hfill,fonttitle=\bfseries,left=2mm,right=2mm,
width=3.5cm,
equal height group=C,
minimum for equal height group=C:3.5cm}
\begin{tcolorbox}
My first box. All boxes will get 3.5cm times 3.5cm
if the content height is not too large.
\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}
My second box.
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcblisting}{}
\textbf{Mixed}
with a listing.
\end{tcblisting}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title={Fourth box}]
My final box.
\end{tcolorbox}%
Fourth box
My first box. All My second box. \textbf{Mixed}
boxes will get 3.5cm with a listing. My final box.
times 3.5cm if the This is the lower
content height is part.
not too large. Mixed with a list-
ing.
N 2016-03-24 /tcb/minimum for current equal height group=hlengthi (no default, initially unset)
Sets /tcb/minimum for equal height group for the current equal height group. Appar-
ently, this only works for an already known equal height group, i.e. /tcb/equal height
groupÕ P. 61 has to be set before this option is used. This option is likely to be used in
combination with /tcb/raster equal heightÕ P. 287
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal height,colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,
raster every box/.style={minimum for current equal height group=2cm}]
\tcbitem A
\tcbitem B
\end{tcbitemize}
A B
62
N 2015-11-27 /tcb/use height from group=hidi (style, default current group)
Sets the current box to a fixed /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 which is copied from an equal height
U 2016-02-22
group with the given hidi. If this height is not available during the current compilation, no
fixed height setting is used. If hidi is omitted, the current equal height group is used which
has to be set before by /tcb/equal height groupÕ P. 61 .
Note that the natural height of the current box is not considered for computation of the
group height. The main application for /tcb/use height from group is that the height
can be adapted further by /tcb/add to heightÕ P. 55 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[use height from group=C,add to height=-2cm,

colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white]
Height from group 'C' of the previous example, but reduced by 2cm.
\end{tcolorbox}%
Height from group ’C’ of the previous example, but reduced by 2cm.
Every line is inside an equal height group:
\begin{tcbraster}[raster equal height=rows,
title=Box \thetcbrasternum,
enhanced,size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white]
\begin{tcolorbox}First line\\second line\\
The height of this box rules.\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[use height from group]Test\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[use height from group]
First line\\second line\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}The height of this box rules.\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
Every line is inside an equal height group:

Box 1 Box 2
First line Test
second line
The height of this box rules.
Box 3 Box 4
First line The height of this box rules.
second line
N 2015-11-27 \tcbheightfromgroup{hmacroi}{hidi}
Saves the height from an equal height group with the given hidi to a hmacroi. If this height
is not available during the current compilation, hmacroi is set to 0pt.
63
4.11 Box Content Additions
The following options introduce some arbitrary hcodei to the content of a tcolorbox. These
additions can be given at the beginning or at the ending of the title, the upper part, or the lower
part.
/tcb/before title=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
The given hcodei is placed after the color and font settings and before the content of the
title.
\tcbset{before title={\textcolor{yellow}{\large Important:}~},
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title]
\end{tcolorbox}
Important: My title
/tcb/after title=hcodei (no default, initially unset)

The given hcodei is placed after the content of the title.
\tcbset{after title={\hfill\colorbox{Navy}{approved}},
\end{tcolorbox}
My title approved
64
/tcb/before upper=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
upper part.
\tcbset{before upper={\textit{The story:}\par},

\end{tcolorbox}
My title
The story:
U 2016-10-21 /tcb/after upper=hcodei (no default, initially unset)

The given hcodei is placed after the content of the upper part.
\tcbset{after upper={\par\hfill\textit{Read more next week}},

\end{tcolorbox}
My title
Read more next week
\begin{tcolorbox}[before upper=\flqq,after upper=\frqq,

\end{tcolorbox}
«This is a tcolorbox.»
An \unskip is placed in front of the given hcodei. From version 3.80 to 3.94, this
! \unskip was omitted to avoid certain problems which (hopefully) should not occur
with the new improved code.
N 2016-10-21 /tcb/after upper*=hcodei (no default, initially unset)

Alias for /tcb/after upper. From version 3.80 to 3.94, it prepended an \unskip to the
U 2016-10-21
given hcodei. Now, this key is considered to be deprecated.
65
/tcb/before lower=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
lower part.
\tcbset{before lower=\textit{Behold:~},colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black}
\begin{tcolorbox}
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
Behold: This is the lower part.
U 2016-10-21 /tcb/after lower=hcodei (no default, initially unset)

The given hcodei is placed after the content of the lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[before lower=$,after lower=$,

\tcblower
\sin^2(x)+\cos^2(x)=1.
\end{tcolorbox}
sin2 (x) + cos2 (x) = 1.
\begin{tcolorbox}[after lower=\ \textit{This is the end.},

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
This is the lower part. This is the end.
An \unskip is placed in front of the given hcodei. From version 3.80 to 3.94, this
! \unskip was omitted to avoid certain problems which (hopefully) should not occur
with the new improved code.
N 2016-10-21 /tcb/after lower*=hcodei (no default, initially unset)

Alias for /tcb/after lower. From version 3.80 to 3.94, it prepended an \unskip to the
U 2016-10-21
given hcodei. Now, this key is considered to be deprecated.
66
! If /tcb/text fill is used, one cannot have a lower part and the box is unbreakable.
N 2015-07-15 /tcb/text fill (style, no value)
This style sets /tcb/before upperÕ P. 65 and /tcb/after upperÕ P. 65 to embed the up-
per part with a minipage. If a fixed height was applied e.g. by /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 or
/tcb/height fillÕ P. 56 , this minipage gets a matching height. This allows to use verti-
cal glue macros like \vfill to act like expected. If the box has no fixed height, setting
/tcb/text fill has no other effect as making the box unbreakable.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
height=8cm,text fill,
title=My filled box]
\par\vfill
\begin{center}
My middle text.
\end{center}
\par\vfill
This is the end of my box.
\end{tcolorbox}
My filled box
My middle text.
This is the end of my box.
67
! If /tcb/tabularx or /tcb/tabularx* are used, one cannot have a lower part.
/tcb/tabularx=hpreamblei (style)
This style sets /tcb/before upper Õ P. 65 and /tcb/after upper Õ P. 65 and several geom-
etry keys to support a tabularx with the given hpreamblei. The packages tabularx [4],
array, and colortbl have to be loaded separately.
% \usepackage{array,tabularx}
% \usepackage{colortbl} - or - \usepackage[table]{xcolor}
\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\raggedleft\arraybackslash}X}% see tabularx
\tcbset{enhanced,fonttitle=\bfseries\large,fontupper=\normalsize\sffamily,
colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black,colbacktitle=Salmon!30!white,
coltitle=black,center title}
\begin{tcolorbox}[tabularx={X||Y|Y|Y|Y||Y},title=My table]
Group & One & Two & Three & Four & Sum\\\hline\hline
Red & 1000.00 & 2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 10000.00\\\hline
Green & 2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 5000.00 & 14000.00\\\hline
Blue & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 5000.00 & 6000.00 & 18000.00\\\hline\hline
Sum & 6000.00 & 9000.00 & 12000.00 & 15000.00 & 42000.00
\end{tcolorbox}
My table
Group One Two Three Four Sum
Red 1000.00 2000.00 3000.00 4000.00 10000.00
Green 2000.00 3000.00 4000.00 5000.00 14000.00
Blue 3000.00 4000.00 5000.00 6000.00 18000.00
Sum 6000.00 9000.00 12000.00 15000.00 42000.00
/tcb/tabularx*={hcodei}{hpreamblei} (style)
This is a variant of /tcb/tabularx which adds some hcodei before the table starts.
% \usepackage{colortbl} - or - \usepackage[table]{xcolor}
coltitle=black,center title}
\begin{tcolorbox}[tabularx*={\arrayrulewidth0.5mm}{X|X|X},title=My table]
One & Two & Three \\\hline\hline
1000.00 & 2000.00 & 3000.00\\\hline
2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00
\end{tcolorbox}
My table
One Two Three
1000.00 2000.00 3000.00
2000.00 3000.00 4000.00
68
/tcb/tikz upper=hoptionsi (style)
This style adds a centered tikzpicture environment to the start and end of the upper
part. The hoptionsi may be given as TikZ picture options.
% \usepackage{tikz}
\begin{tcolorbox}[tikz upper,fonttitle=\bfseries,colback=white,colframe=black,
title=\tikzname\ drawing]
\path[fill=yellow,draw=yellow!75!red] (0,0) circle (1cm);
\fill[red] (45:5mm) circle (1mm);
\draw[line width=1mm,red] (215:5mm) arc (215:325:5mm);
\end{tcolorbox}
TikZ drawing
/tcb/tikz lower=hoptionsi (style)

This style adds a centered tikzpicture environment to the start and end of the lower part.
The hoptionsi may be given as TikZ picture options.
% \usepackage{tikz}
% \tcbuselibrary{skins,listings}
\tcbset{tikz lower,listing side text,fonttitle=\bfseries,
bicolor,colback=LightBlue!50!white,colbacklower=white,colframe=black,
righthand width=3cm}
\begin{tcblisting}{title=\tikzname\ drawing}
\path[fill=yellow,draw=yellow!75!red]
(0,0) circle (1cm);
\draw[line width=1mm,red]
(215:5mm) arc (215:325:5mm);
\end{tcblisting}
TikZ drawing
\path[fill=yellow,draw=yellow!75!red]
(0,0) circle (1cm);
\draw[line width=1mm,red]
(215:5mm) arc (215:325:5mm);
69
/tcb/tikznode upper=hoptionsi (style)
This style places the upper part content into a centered TikZ node. The hoptionsi may be
given as TikZ node options. This style is especially useful for boxes with multiline texts
which are fitted to the text width.
% \usepackage{tikz}
\newtcbox{\headline}[1][]{enhanced,center,
ignore nobreak,fontupper=\Large\bfseries,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white,
drop fuzzy shadow=yellow,tikznode upper,#1}
\headline{Important\\Headline}
Important
Headline
/tcb/tikznode lower=hoptionsi (style)

This style places the lower part content into a centered TikZ node. The hoptionsi may be
given as TikZ node options.
% \usepackage{tikz}
\begin{tcolorbox}[bicolor,colback=LightBlue!50!white,colbacklower=white,
colframe=black,tikznode lower={inner sep=2pt,draw=red,fill=yellow}]
Upper part.
\tcblower
Lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
Upper part.
Lower part.
/tcb/tikznode=hoptionsi (style)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/tikznode upper and /tcb/tikznode lower the same time.
/tcb/varwidth upper=hlengthi (style, default /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 )
This style places the upper part content into a varwidth environment. This style needs
the varwidth package [1] to be loaded manually. The resulting box has a maximal width
of hlengthi. This option is only senseful for a \tcboxÕ P. 14 .
% \usepackage{varwidth}
\newtcbox{\varbox}{colframe=red!50!black, Short text.
colback=red!10!white,varwidth upper}
\varbox{Short text.} This box contains is a longer

\varbox{This box contains is a longer text text which is broken.
which is broken.}
70
4.12 Overlays
With an overlay, arbitrary hgraphical codei can be added to a tcolorbox. This code is executed
after the frame and interior are drawn and before the text content is drawn. Therefore, you
can decorate the tcolorbox with your own extensions. Common special cases are watermarks
which are implemented using overlays. See Subsection 10.3 from page 165 if you want to add
watermarks.
If you use the core package only, the hgraphical codei has to be pgf code and there is
! not much assistance for positioning. Therefore, the usage of the /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206
mode from the library skins is recommended which allows tikz code and gives access to
/tcb/geometry nodesÕ P. 137 for positioning.
/tcb/overlay=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Adds hgraphical codei to the box drawing process. This hgraphical codei is drawn after the
frame and interior and before the text content.
% \tcbuselibrary{skins} % preamble
\tcbset{frogbox/.style={enhanced,colback=green!10,colframe=green!65!black,
enlarge top by=5.5mm,
overlay={\foreach \x in {2cm,3.5cm} {
\begin{scope}[shift={([xshift=\x]frame.north west)}]
\path[draw=green!65!black,fill=green!10,line width=1mm] (0,0) arc (0:180:5mm);
\path[fill=black] (-0.2,0) arc (0:180:1mm);
\end{scope}}}}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[frogbox,title=My title]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
% \usetikzlibrary{patterns} % preamble
\tcbset{ribbonbox/.style={enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
overlay={\path[fill=blue!75!white,draw=blue,double=white!85!blue,
preaction={opacity=0.6,fill=blue!75!white},
line width=0.1mm,double distance=0.2mm,
pattern=fivepointed stars,pattern color=white!75!blue]
([xshift=-0.2mm,yshift=-1.02cm]frame.north east)
-- ++(-1,1) -- ++(-0.5,0) -- ++(1.5,-1.5) -- cycle;}}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[ribbonbox,title=My title]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
71
/tcb/no overlay (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the overlay if set before.
/tcb/overlay broken=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakable Õ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the hgraphical
codei is added to the box drawing process. /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
/tcb/overlay unbroken=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakable Õ P. 365 but is not broken actually or if the box is
set to be /tcb/unbreakableÕ P. 366 , then the hgraphical codei is added to the box drawing
process. /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
/tcb/overlay first=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
codei is added to the box drawing process for the first part of the break sequence.
/tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
/tcb/overlay middle=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the hgraphical
codei is added to the box drawing process for the middle parts (if any) of the break sequence.
/tcb/overlay last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
codei is added to the box drawing process for the last part of the break sequence.
/tcb/overlay unbroken and first=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an optimized abbreviation for setting /tcb/overlay unbroken and /tcb/overlay
first together. /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
/tcb/overlay middle and last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an optimized abbreviation for setting /tcb/overlay middle and /tcb/overlay
last together. /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
/tcb/overlay unbroken and last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an optimized abbreviation for setting /tcb/overlay unbroken and /tcb/overlay
last together. /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/overlay first and middle=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an optimized abbreviation for setting /tcb/overlay first and /tcb/overlay
middle together. /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 overwrites this key.
This example demonstrates the application of break sequence specific overlay options.
Here, we define an environment myexample based on tcolorbox where the visible drawing
is done totally by overlay keys.
Here, the first application of myexample produces an unbroken tcolorbox. The frame is
drawn by the code given with /tcb/overlay unbroken.
The second application of myexample is broken into several parts which are drawn by
the codes given with /tcb/overlay first, /tcb/overlay middle, and /tcb/overlay
last.
% Preamble:
%\usepackage{tikz,lipsum}
%\tcbuselibrary{skins,breakable}
%\newcounter{example}
\colorlet{colexam}{red!75!black}
\newtcolorbox[use counter=example]{myexample}{%
72
empty,title={Example \thetcbcounter},attach boxed title to top left,
boxed title style={empty,size=minimal,toprule=2pt,top=4pt,
overlay={\draw[colexam,line width=2pt]
([yshift=-1pt]frame.north west)--([yshift=-1pt]frame.north east);}},
coltitle=colexam,fonttitle=\Large\bfseries,
before=\par\medskip\noindent,parbox=false,boxsep=0pt,left=0pt,right=3mm,top=4pt,
breakable,pad at break*=0mm,vfill before first,
overlay unbroken={\draw[colexam,line width=1pt]
([yshift=-1pt]title.north east)--([xshift=-0.5pt,yshift=-1pt]title.north-|frame.east)
--([xshift=-0.5pt]frame.south east)--(frame.south west); },
overlay first={\draw[colexam,line width=1pt]
([yshift=-1pt]title.north east)--([xshift=-0.5pt,yshift=-1pt]title.north-|frame.east)
--([xshift=-0.5pt]frame.south east); },
overlay middle={\draw[colexam,line width=1pt] ([xshift=-0.5pt]frame.north east)
--([xshift=-0.5pt]frame.south east); },
overlay last={\draw[colexam,line width=1pt] ([xshift=-0.5pt]frame.north east)
--([xshift=-0.5pt]frame.south east)--(frame.south west);},%
}
\begin{myexample}
\lipsum[1]
\end{myexample}
\begin{myexample}
\lipsum[2-11]
\end{myexample}
\lipsum[12]% following text
Example 1
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat
ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget,
consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant
morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras
viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu
tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra
ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla,
malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci
eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit
amet orci dignissim rutrum.
Example 2
justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor
sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac
orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum
sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam
tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique,
libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus
adipiscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae,
placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec,
suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed
lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent
73
euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus.
Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst.
Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean
placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar
elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor
vitae risus porta vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper, leo
velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum diam. Aliquam pellentesque,
augue quis sagittis posuere, turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus eros eget felis. Mae-
cenas eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Sed a turpis
eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim interdum, justo lectus sagittis
dui, et vehicula libero dui cursus dui. Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut
augue. Cras ac magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget
nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur consectetuer.
Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, tincidunt sit amet, laoreet vitae, arcu.
Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel,
nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu
purus. Quisque vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis elit
erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium,
ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas
vel, odio.
Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut quis purus. Sed ac odio. Sed vehicula
hendrerit sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accumsan risus eget odio. In hac habitasse
platea dictumst. Pellentesque non elit. Fusce sed justo eu urna porta tincidunt. Mauris felis
odio, sollicitudin sed, volutpat a, ornare ac, erat. Morbi quis dolor. Donec pellentesque, erat
ac sagittis semper, nunc dui lobortis purus, quis congue purus metus ultricies tellus. Proin
et quam. Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra, per inceptos
hymenaeos. Praesent sapien turpis, fermentum vel, eleifend faucibus, vehicula eu, lacus.
Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Donec odio elit, dictum in, hendrerit sit amet, egestas sed, leo. Praesent feugiat sapien aliquet
odio. Integer vitae justo. Aliquam vestibulum fringilla lorem. Sed neque lectus, consectetuer
at, consectetuer sed, eleifend ac, lectus. Nulla facilisi. Pellentesque eget lectus. Proin eu
metus. Sed porttitor. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Suspendisse eu lectus. Ut mi
mi, lacinia sit amet, placerat et, mollis vitae, dui. Sed ante tellus, tristique ut, iaculis eu,
malesuada ac, dui. Mauris nibh leo, facilisis non, adipiscing quis, ultrices a, dui.
Morbi luctus, wisi viverra faucibus pretium, nibh est placerat odio, nec commodo wisi enim
eget quam. Quisque libero justo, consectetuer a, feugiat vitae, porttitor eu, libero. Sus-
pendisse sed mauris vitae elit sollicitudin malesuada. Maecenas ultricies eros sit amet ante.
Ut venenatis velit. Maecenas sed mi eget dui varius euismod. Phasellus aliquet volutpat odio.
Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae; Pel-
lentesque sit amet pede ac sem eleifend consectetuer. Nullam elementum, urna vel imperdiet
sodales, elit ipsum pharetra ligula, ac pretium ante justo a nulla. Curabitur tristique arcu eu
metus. Vestibulum lectus. Proin mauris. Proin eu nunc eu urna hendrerit faucibus. Aliquam
auctor, pede consequat laoreet varius, eros tellus scelerisque quam, pellentesque hendrerit
ipsum dolor sed augue. Nulla nec lacus.
Suspendisse vitae elit. Aliquam arcu neque, ornare in, ullamcorper quis, commodo eu, libero.
Fusce sagittis erat at erat tristique mollis. Maecenas sapien libero, molestie et, lobortis in,
74
sodales eget, dui. Morbi ultrices rutrum lorem. Nam elementum ullamcorper leo. Morbi
dui. Aliquam sagittis. Nunc placerat. Pellentesque tristique sodales est. Maecenas imperdiet
lacinia velit. Cras non urna. Morbi eros pede, suscipit ac, varius vel, egestas non, eros.
Praesent malesuada, diam id pretium elementum, eros sem dictum tortor, vel consectetuer
odio sem sed wisi.
Sed feugiat. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus
mus. Ut pellentesque augue sed urna. Vestibulum diam eros, fringilla et, consectetuer eu,
nonummy id, sapien. Nullam at lectus. In sagittis ultrices mauris. Curabitur malesuada erat
sit amet massa. Fusce blandit. Aliquam erat volutpat. Aliquam euismod. Aenean vel lectus.
Nunc imperdiet justo nec dolor.
Etiam euismod. Fusce facilisis lacinia dui. Suspendisse potenti. In mi erat, cursus id, nonummy
sed, ullamcorper eget, sapien. Praesent pretium, magna in eleifend egestas, pede pede pretium
lorem, quis consectetuer tortor sapien facilisis magna. Mauris quis magna varius nulla scelerisque
imperdiet. Aliquam non quam. Aliquam porttitor quam a lacus. Praesent vel arcu ut tortor
cursus volutpat. In vitae pede quis diam bibendum placerat. Fusce elementum convallis neque.
Sed dolor orci, scelerisque ac, dapibus nec, ultricies ut, mi. Duis nec dui quis leo sagittis
commodo.
75
Floating box from floatplacement
I am floating
This floating box is placed at the top of a page.
4.13 Floating Objects

/tcb/floatplacement=hvaluesi (no default, initially htb)
Sets hvaluesi as default values for the usage of /tcb/float and /tcb/float*. Feasible are
the usual parameters for floating objects.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
watermark color=red!15!white}
\begin{tcolorbox}[floatplacement=t,float,
title=Floating box from |floatplacement|,
watermark text={I am floating}]
This floating box is placed at the top of a page.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/float=hvaluesi (default from floatplacement)

Turns the box to a floating object where hvaluesi are the usual parameters for such
floating objects. If they are not used, the placement uses the default values given by
floatplacement.
\begin{tcolorbox}[float, title=Floating box from |float|,

enhanced,watermark text={I'm also floating}]
This box floats to a feasible place automatically. You do not have to
use a numbering for this floating object.
\end{tcolorbox}
Floating box from float
I’m also floating

This box floats to a feasible place automatically. You do not have to use a numbering for
this floating object.
/tcb/float*=hvaluesi (default from floatplacement)

Identical to /tcb/float, but for wide boxes spanning the whole page width of two column
documents or in conjunction with the packages multicol or paracol. Note that you have
to set width=\textwidth additionally, if the box should span the whole page width in these
cases!
\begin{tcolorbox}[float*=b, title=Floating box from |float*|,width=\textwidth,
enhanced,watermark text={I'm also floating}]
In this single column document, you will see no difference to |float|.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/nofloat (style, initially set)

Turns the floating behavior off.
Floating box from float*
I’m also floating

In this single column document, you will see no difference to float.
76
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/every float=hcodei (no default, initially empty)
For floating objects, the /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 settings are ignored. In-
stead, the given hcodei is inserted before a floating box. If the box is /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 ,
the given hcodei is inserted before every part of the break sequence. The most common use
case is every float=\centering.
\tcbox[float=htb,title={Floating box},every float=\centering,

colback=blue!50!black,colframe=blue!50!white,colbacktitle=blue!10!white,
coltitle=black,center title]
{\includegraphics[height=6cm]{lichtspiel.jpg}}
Floating box
77
4.14 Embedding into the Surroundings
Typically, but not necessarily, a tcolorbox is put inside a separate paragraph and has some
vertical space before and after it. This behavior is controlled by the keys before and after.
/tcb/before=hcodei (no default, initially see /tcb/autoparskip)
Sets the hcodei which is executed before the colored box. It is not used for floating
boxes. Also, it is not used, if the box follows a heading immediately and /tcb/ignore
nobreakÕ P. 81 is set to false.
/tcb/after=hcodei (no default, initially see /tcb/autoparskip)
Sets the hcodei which is executed after the colored box. It is not used for floating boxes.
U 2017-02-01 /tcb/parskip (style, no value)
Sets the keys before and after to values which are recommended, if the package parskip
is used and there is no better idea for before and after. This is similar to:
\tcbset{parskip/.style={before={\par\pagebreak[0]\parindent=0pt},
after={\par}}}
U 2017-02-01 /tcb/noparskip (style, no value)

Sets the keys before and after to values which are recommended, if the package parskip
is not used and there is no better idea for before and after. This is similar to:
\tcbset{noparskip/.style={before={\par\pagebreak[0]\smallskip\parindent=0pt},
after={\par\smallskip}}}
/tcb/autoparskip (style, no value, initially set)

Tries to detect the usage of the package parskip and sets the keys before and after
accordingly. Actually, the following is done:
• If the length of \parskip is greater than 0pt at the beginning of the document,
/tcb/parskip is executed. Here, the usage of package parskip is assumed.
• Otherwise, if the length of \parskip is not greater than 0pt at the beginning of the
document, /tcb/noparskip is executed. Here, the absence of package parskip is
assumed.
autoparskip is the default for the package tcolorbox, if before or after are not changed
otherwise.
/tcb/nobeforeafter (style, no value)
Abbreviation for clearing the keys before and after. The colored box is not put into a
paragraph and there is no space before or after the box.
\tcbset{myone/.style={colback=LightGreen,colframe=DarkGreen,
equal height group=nobefaf,width=\linewidth/4,nobeforeafter}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[myone,title=Box 1]Box 1\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[myone,title=Box 4]Box 4\end{tcolorbox}
Box 1 Box 2 Box 3 Box 4
Box 1 Box 2 Box 3 Box 4
/tcb/forces nobeforeafter (style, no value)

Forces the setting of /tcb/nobeforeafter even if /tcb/before and /tcb/after are set
to other values later. Do not use this option globally unless you really know what you do.
Note that embedded boxes do not inherit this forced clearance.
78
/tcb/baseline=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Used to set the \pgfsetbaseline value of the resulting tcolorbox.
\tcbset{colframe=red!50!white,width=4cm,nobeforeafter}
Some text\dotfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[baseline=3mm]
One line.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[baseline=3mm]
First line.\\Second line.
\end{tcolorbox}
First line.
Some text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One line. Second line.
N 2014-10-10 /tcb/box align=halignmenti (style, no default, initially bottom)

Used to set the /tcb/baseline value of the resulting tcolorbox. Feasible values for
halignmenti are:
• bottom: alignment with the box bottom,
• top: alignment with the box top,
• center: alignment with the box center,
• base: alignment with the box content base. This option is not applicable for a
tcolorboxÕ P. 12 but for a \tcboxÕ P. 14 only. It is an alias for /tcb/tcbox raise
baseÕ P. 96 .
Some text\dotfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[box align=bottom]
One line.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[box align=bottom]
\end{tcolorbox}
First line.
One line. Second line.
Some text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Some text\dotfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[box align=top]
One line.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[box align=top]
\end{tcolorbox}
Some text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One line. First line.
Second line.
79
Some text\dotfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[box align=center]
One line.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[box align=center]
\end{tcolorbox}
Some text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First line.

One line.
Second line.
\tcbset{colframe=red!50!white,nobeforeafter}
Some text\dotfill
\tcbox[nobeforeafter,box align=base]{One line}
\tcbox[nobeforeafter,box align=base,size=fbox]{Another line}
Some text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One line Another line
N 2014-10-10 /tcb/before skip=hgluei (style, no default)

Inserts some vertical space of the given hgluei before the colored box. This style sets
U 2015-03-16
/tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 .
Some text. Some text.

\begin{tcolorbox}[before skip=1cm,
colframe=red!50!white]
N 2014-10-10 /tcb/after skip=hgluei (style, no default)

Inserts some vertical space of the given hgluei after the colored box. This style sets
U 2017-02-01
/tcb/afterÕ P. 78 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[after skip=1cm,
colframe=red!50!white]
\end{tcolorbox}
Some text.
Some text.
N 2014-10-10 /tcb/beforeafter skip=hgluei (style, no default)

Inserts some vertical space of the given hgluei before and after the colored box. This style
sets /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 .
\tcbset{beforeafter skip=0pt,
colframe=red!50!white}
\begin{tcolorbox} This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox} Second box.
Second box.
\end{tcolorbox}
80
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/left skip=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 0mm)
Inserts some horizontal space of the given hlengthi before the colored box. This style sets
/tcb/grow to left byÕ P. 84 with the negated hlengthi, i.e. the bounding box and box
width are changed.
\noindent\rule{\linewidth}{2pt}
\begin{tcolorbox}[left skip=1cm,
colframe=red!50!white] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/right skip=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 0mm)

Inserts some horizontal space of the given hlengthi after the colored box. This style sets
/tcb/grow to right byÕ P. 84 with the negated hlengthi, i.e. the bounding box and box
width are changed.
\begin{tcolorbox}[right skip=1cm,
colframe=red!50!white] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-10 /tcb/leftright skip=hlengthi (style, no default)

Inserts some horizontal space of the given hlengthi before and after the colored box. This
style changes the bounding box and the box width.
\begin{tcolorbox}[leftright skip=1cm, This is a tcol-

colframe=red!50!white] orbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-12-11 /tcb/ignore nobreak=true|false (default true, initially false)

After a heading, LATEX tries to avoid a break by setting a nobreak boolean value. Starting
from version 3.33, the /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 respectively /tcb/before skipÕ P. 80 settings are
not used after a heading if /tcb/ignore nobreak is set to false. For an unbreakable box,
/tcb/before nobreak is used instead. Further, a /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 box will also try
to avoid a break between a heading and a directly following first part of a break sequence.
Set /tcb/ignore nobreak to true, if nobreak should be ignored as prior to version 3.33.
Also, such a setting may be used locally to enforce the /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 setting.
N 2014-12-16 /tcb/before nobreak=hcodei (no default, initially \noindent)
Sets the hcodei which is executed before the colored box if it is unbreakable, if /tcb/ignore
nobreak is not set, and if the box follows a heading.
N 2017-02-23 /tcb/parfillskip restore=true|false (default true, initially true)
If this option is set to be true, the minimum value of \parfillskip is tested at specific
spots, if it is greater than 0pt. If so, \parfillskip is restored to \@flushglue which
happens to be the default value.
These tests are executed for /tcb/parskipÕ P. 78 , /tcb/noparskipÕ P. 78 , /tcb/after
skipÕ P. 80 , /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 , and tcbrasterÕ P. 279 .
This option was created to automatically avoid overfull box warnings with \parfillskip
changing packages.
81
4.15 Bounding Box
Normally, every tcolorbox has a bounding box which fits exactly to the dimensions of the
outer frame. Therefore, LATEX reserves exactly the space needed for the box. This behavior
can be changed by enlarging (or shrinking) the bounding box. If the bounding box is enlarged,
the tcolorbox will get some clearance around it. If the bounding box is shrunk, i. e. enlarged
with negative values, the tcolorbox will overlap to other parts of the page. For example, the
tcolorbox could be stretched into the page margin.
The following examples use /tcb/show bounding boxÕ P. 179 to display the actual bound-
! ing box. For this, the library skins has to be included and /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 has
LIB
to be set.
4.15.1 Shifting Bounding Box Borders

/tcb/enlarge top initially by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to the top of the box by hlengthi. If the box is break-
able, only the first box of the break sequence gets enlarged. /tcb/enlarge top byÕ P. 83
overwrites this key.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge top initially by=-5mm]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge top initially by=5mm,enhanced,show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/enlarge bottom finally by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)

Enlarges the bounding box distance to the bottom of the box by hlengthi. If the box is
breakable, only the last box of the break sequence gets enlarged. /tcb/enlarge bottom
byÕ P. 83 overwrites this key.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge bottom finally by=5mm]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge bottom finally by=-5mm,enhanced,show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
82
/tcb/enlarge top at break by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to the top of the box by hlengthi, if the box is
/tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 . In this case, it is applied to middle and last parts in a break
sequence. /tcb/enlarge top by overwrites this key.
/tcb/enlarge bottom at break by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to the bottom of the box by hlengthi, if the box is
/tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 . In this case, it is applied to first and middle parts in a break
sequence. /tcb/enlarge bottom by overwrites this key.
/tcb/enlarge top by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to the top of the box by hlengthi. /tcb/enlarge top
initially byÕ P. 82 and /tcb/enlarge top at break by are set to hlengthi.
/tcb/enlarge bottom by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to the bottom of the box by hlengthi. /tcb/enlarge
bottom finally byÕ P. 82 and /tcb/enlarge bottom at break by are set to hlengthi.
/tcb/enlarge left by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to the left side of the box by hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge left by=2cm,width=5cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge left by=-2cm,width=\linewidth+2cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/enlarge right by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)

Enlarges the bounding box distance to the right side of the box by hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge right by=-2cm,width=\linewidth+2cm,

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge right by=2cm,width=\linewidth-2cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
83
/tcb/enlarge by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Enlarges the bounding box distance to all sides of the box by hlengthi.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,width=5cm,nobeforeafter}
\begin{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enlarge by=5mm,enhanced,show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/grow to left by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)

Enlarges the current box width by hlengthi and enlarges (shrinks) the bounding box distance
to the left side of the box by −hlengthi. Also see /tcb/left skipÕ P. 81 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[width=5cm,grow to left by=2cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

This is a \textbf{tcolorbox} with a width of 7cm.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a tcolorbox with a width of 7cm.
/tcb/grow to right by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)

Enlarges the current box width by hlengthi and enlarges (shrinks) the bounding box distance
to the right side of the box by −hlengthi. Also see /tcb/right skipÕ P. 81 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[grow to right by=2cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[grow to right by=2cm,grow to left by=1cm,

\end{tcolorbox}
84
N 2018-03-22 /tcb/grow sidewards by=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/grow to left byÕ P. 84 and /tcb/grow to right byÕ P. 84 to
hlengthi. Also see /tcb/oversizeÕ P. 45 and /tcb/spread sidewardsÕ P. 88 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[grow sidewards by=2cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
4.15.2 Box Alignment

N 2015-11-20 /tcb/flush left (style, no value)
Enlarges the bounding box to the right side to fill the line completely.
\begin{tcolorbox}[flush left,width=5cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
N 2015-11-20 /tcb/flush right (style, no value)

Enlarges the bounding box to the left side to fill the line completely.
\begin{tcolorbox}[flush right,width=5cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
N 2015-11-20 /tcb/center (style, no value)

Enlarges the bounding box equally to both sides to fill the line completely.
\begin{tcolorbox}[center,width=5cm,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
85
Floating box from toggle enlargement
This page is an even page. Therefore, the left and right enlargements are toggled. This box stretches
to the right margin on odd pages and to the left margin on even pages. The current document is
one-sided – this feature makes sense for two-sided documents only.
4.15.3 Toggle Enlargements

U 2015-11-13 /tcb/toggle enlargement=htoggle preseti (default evenpage, initially none)
According to the htoggle preseti, the left and the right enlargements of the bounding box
are switched or not. Feasible values are:
• none: no switching.
• forced: the values of the left and right enlargement are switched.
• evenpage: if the page is an even page, the values of the left and right enlargement are
switched. This value also sets /tcb/check odd pageÕ P. 101 to true.
! See /tcb/toggle left and right Õ P. 46 to toggle geometry settings.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,
grow to left by=20mm,grow to right by=-5mm}
\begin{tcolorbox}[toggle enlargement=none,enhanced,show bounding box]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[toggle enlargement=forced]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[toggle enlargement=evenpage]
This page is an \tcbifoddpage{odd}{even} page.
Therefore, the left and right enlargements
\tcbifoddpage{are not}{are} toggled.
\end{tcolorbox}
This page is an even page. Therefore, the left and right enlargements are toggled.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=red!60!black,colback=red!15!white,
fonttitle=\bfseries,title=Floating box from \texttt{toggle enlargement},
width=\textwidth,grow to right by=2cm,toggle enlargement,float=t]
This page is an \tcbifoddpage{odd}{even} page.
Therefore, the left and right enlargements \tcbifoddpage{are not}{are} toggled.
This box stretches to the right margin on odd pages and to the left
margin on even pages. The current document is one-sided -- this feature makes
sense for two-sided documents only.
\end{tcolorbox}
86
4.15.4 Spread Box to Page Borders
The following border options are not applicable to nested boxes, boxes insides tables, etc.
! For boxes inside lists, the options may work, but not necessarily. Also, boxes should be
set with \noindent and full width.
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread inwards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)

Enlarges the current box width to match the inner page border (left-handed side for one-
sided documents). If the optional hlengthi is greater than 0pt, the box grows over the
border, if hlengthi is lower than 0pt, there is a margin between box and page border.
/tcb/toggle enlargementÕ P. 86 is set automatically.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,spread inwards,
colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread outwards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)

Enlarges the current box width to match the outer page border (right-handed side for
one-sided documents). If the optional hlengthi is greater than 0pt, the box grows over
the border, if hlengthi is lower than 0pt, there is a margin between box and page border.
/tcb/toggle enlargementÕ P. 86 is set automatically.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,spread outwards,
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/move upwards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)

Starts a new page with the box at the very top page border. If the optional hlengthi is
greater than 0pt, the box moves over the border, if hlengthi is lower than 0pt, there is a
margin between box and page border.
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/move upwards*=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/move upwards, but without starting a new page.
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/fill downwards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)
Enlarges the height of the box until the very bottom page border. The library breakable
LIB
has to be loaded, and /tcb/height fillÕ P. 56 is set automatically. If the optional hlengthi
is greater than 0pt, the box moves over the border, if hlengthi is lower than 0pt, there is a
margin between box and page border.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,fill downwards,
\end{tcolorbox}
87
This is an example for ’spread upwards’.
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread upwards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)

Combination of /tcb/move upwardsÕ P. 87 , /tcb/spread inwardsÕ P. 87 , and /tcb/spread
outwardsÕ P. 87 . The optional hlengthi is used for all these keys.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,spread upwards,sharp corners=north,height=3cm,

colframe=blue!75!black,interior style={top color=blue!50,bottom color=white}]
This is an example for 'spread upwards'.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread upwards*=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)

Identical to /tcb/move upwardsÕ P. 87 , but without starting a new page.
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread sidewards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)
Combination of /tcb/spread inwardsÕ P. 87 and /tcb/spread outwardsÕ P. 87 . The op-
tional hlengthi is used for all these keys. Also see /tcb/oversizeÕ P. 45 and /tcb/grow
sidewards byÕ P. 85 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,spread sidewards,
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)

Combination of /tcb/move upwards Õ P. 87 , /tcb/fill downwardsÕ P. 87 , /tcb/spread
inwards Õ P. 87 , and /tcb/spread outwards P. 87 . Such, the box fills the whole page. The
Õ
optional hlengthi is used for all these keys.

N 2017-02-13 /tcb/spread downwards=hlengthi (default 0pt, initially unset)
Combination of /tcb/fill downwards Õ P. 87 , /tcb/spread inwardsÕ P. 87 , and
/tcb/spread outwards Õ P. 87 . The optional hlengthi is used for all these keys.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,spread downwards,sharp corners=south,

colframe=red!75!black,interior style={top color=white,bottom color=red!50}]
This is an example for 'spread downwards'.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is an example for ’spread downwards’.
88
4.15.5 Box Extrusion
! The following keys should not be used with breakable boxes or boxes with a lower part.
/tcb/shrink tight (style, no value, initially unset)
The total colored box is shrunk to the dimensions of the upper part. There should be no
lower part and no title. This style sets the /tcb/boxsepÕ P. 39 to 0pt and other geometry
keys to fitting values. This option is likely to be used with the following extrusion keys.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,arc=0mm,boxrule=0.4pt,
nobeforeafter,tcbox raise base,shrink tight}
\begin{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
Lorem \tcbox{ipsum} dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit.
U 2014-09-19 /tcb/extrude left by=hlengthi (style, no default, initially unset)

The (upper part of the) colored box is extruded by the given hlengthi to the left side. The
inner width and the bounding box is kept unchanged and the operation is additive!
\tcbset{enhanced,colframe=red,colback=yellow!25!white,
frame style={opacity=0.25},interior style={opacity=0.5},
nobeforeafter,tcbox raise base,shrink tight,extrude by=2mm}
vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis.
\tcbox[extrude left by=1cm]{Curabitur} dictum gravida mauris.
Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna.
consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna.
U 2014-09-19 /tcb/extrude right by=hlengthi (style, no default, initially unset)

The (upper part of the) colored box is extruded by the given hlengthi to the right side. The
\tcbox[extrude right by=1cm]{Curabitur} dictum gravida mauris.
89
/tcb/extrude top by=hlengthi (style, no default, initially unset)
The (upper part of the) colored box is extruded by the given hlengthi to the top side. The
\tcbox[extrude top by=1cm]{Curabitur} dictum gravida mauris.
/tcb/extrude bottom by=hlengthi (style, no default, initially unset)

The (upper part of the) colored box is extruded by the given hlengthi to the bottom side.
The inner width and the bounding box is kept unchanged and the operation is additive!
\tcbox[extrude bottom by=1cm]{Curabitur} dictum gravida mauris.
/tcb/extrude by=hlengthi (style, no default, initially unset)

The (upper part of the) colored box is extruded by the given hlengthi to all sides. The inner
width and the bounding box is kept unchanged and the operation is additive!
vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. \tcbox{Curabitur} dictum
gravida mauris. \tcbox[colframe=Green,interior style={opacity=0.0}]{Nam}
arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, \tcbox{vulputate} a, magna. Donec
vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus
et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. \tcbox{Mauris ut leo.}
consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi
tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo.
90
4.16 Layered Boxes and Every Box Settings
A tcolorbox may contain another tcolorbox and so on. The package takes track of the nesting
level using a counter tcblayer. Counter values may be used for doing some fancy things, but
you should never change the counter value yourself.
The package takes special care for the first four layers or nesting levels, called managed layers.
Here, footnote texts are administrated to find their intended place and specific layer dependent
options may be set by changing /tcb/every box on layer nÕ P. 92 . If needed, the number
of managed layers can be increased by setting \tcbsetmanagedlayersÕ P. 92 to a higher value
than 4.
The following styles have a considerable influence on how layered boxes are processed. Note
especially that nested boxes are getting a /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 by default. You can change this,
but be prepared for suprises if you do.
If the defaults are not changed, a tcolorbox gets its options in the following order. Following
options overwrite preceding options.
1. On package load, all options are set to default values.
2. Every \tcbsetÕ P. 13 command adds or changes options for the following boxes inside the
current TEX group.
3. While entering a tcolorbox, a /tcb/every box on layer nÕ P. 92 or /tcb/every box
on higher layersÕ P. 92 option list is applied. With default settings this means:
• For layer 1 (lowest layer), the /tcb/every box option list is applied. Not overwritten
options given by a preceding \tcbsetÕ P. 13 survive.
• For layer 2 and above (nested boxes), a /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 followed by /tcb/every
box option list is applied. Every resettable options given by a preceding \tcbsetÕ P. 13
and by the sourrounding box(es) are reset.
4. The hoptionsi given to the tcolorbox are applied. Or, if the box was generated by
\newtcolorboxÕ P. 15 or friends, the hoptionsi given there are applied.
5. If the box was generated by \newtcolorboxÕ P. 15 or friends, some automated options are
applied.
/tcb/every box (style)
By default, this style is empty.
% default setting:
\tcbset{every box/.style={}}
It may be changed by redefining this style.
% setting all boxes to be enhanced:

\tcbset{every box/.style={enhanced}}
The alternative for setting something for every box (on every layer) is
\tcbsetforeverylayerÕ P. 13 :
! % setting all boxes to be enhanced:
\tcbsetforeverylayer{enhanced}
91
/tcb/every box on layer n (style)
Here, n has to be replaced by a number ranging from 1 to the highest managed layer number
(4 by default).
% default settings:
\tcbset{
every box on layer 1/.style={every box},
every box on layer 2/.style={reset,every box},
}
/tcb/every box on higher layers (style)

Higher layers are layers above the highest managed layer number (4 by default).
\tcbset{every box on higher layers/.style={reset,every box}}
\tcbsetmanagedlayers{hnumberi}
Replaces the highest managed layer number by hnumberi where 4 is the default. This macro
can only be used inside the preamble. Using a hnumberi lower than 4 typically makes no
sense, but is not forbidden.
% \tcbuselibrary{skins,breakable}
\tcbset{colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
every box/.style={enhanced,watermark text=\thetcblayer,
before=\par\smallskip,after=\par\smallskip},
every box on layer 2/.style={reset,every box,colback=yellow!10!white,
drop fuzzy shadow}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,breakable,title=Layer 1 Box]
Here comes a footnote\footnote{Footnote from layer 1 box}.
\lipsum[2]
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Layer 2 Box]
abc\footnote{The footnote of abc}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Another Box,ams equation]
\tcbhighmath{\sum\limits_{n=1}^{\infty} \frac{1}{n}} = \infty.
\end{tcolorbox}
Some text\footnote{Footnote from some text}.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Yet Another Box]
\tcboxfit[height=2cm]{\lipsum[1]}
My text.
\begin{tcolorbox}
Another lipsum text\footnote{A lipsum text}. \lipsum[3]
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Layer 4,colframe=blue,colback=white]
Layer 4\footnote{Layer 4 footnote}
\end{tcolorbox}
The End\footnote{Last footnote}.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
1
Layer 1 Box
Here comes a footnotea . Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel,
wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies
et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae
ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras
92
123
nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient
montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum
turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
2
Layer 2 Box
abca
a
The footnote of abc
32
Another Box
∞
X 1
= ∞. (1)
n=1
n
Some textb .
Yet Another Box
3
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum
gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et
lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis,
viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac,
nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis
eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
My text.
Another lipsum texta . Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat,
congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fer-
mentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing sem-
per elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae,
placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend
at, accumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna.
Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque
tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu
purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus.
Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis
eu massa.
4
Layer 4
Layer 4a
a
Layer 4 footnote
The Endb .
a
A lipsum text
b
Last footnote
a
Footnote from layer 1 box
b
Footnote from some text
93
4.17 Capture Mode
/tcb/capture=hmodei (no default, initially minipage)

The capture hmodei defines how the box content is processed.
Feasible values for hmodei are:
• minipage:
This is the default hmodei for tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . The content may have an upper and
a lower part. Optionally, the box can be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 . The box content is
put into a minipage or into something similar to a minipage.
• hbox:
This is the default hmodei for \tcboxÕ P. 14 . The content cannot have a lower part and
cannot be broken. The colored box is sized according to the dimensions of the content.
A shortcut to set this mode is /tcb/hbox.
• fitbox: (needs the fitting library)
LIB
This is the default hmodei for \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 . The content cannot have a lower part
and cannot be broken. The content is sized according to the dimensions of the colored
box. A shortcut to set this mode is /tcb/fitÕ P. 413 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[capture=minipage]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[capture=hbox]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[capture=fitbox,height=9mm]% needs the 'fitting' library

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/hbox (style, no default)

Shortcut for capture=hbox.
\begin{tcolorbox}[hbox]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/minipage (style, no default)

Shortcut for capture=minipage.
94
4.18 Text Characteristics
U 2015-10-14 /tcb/parbox=true|false (default true, initially true)
The text inside a tcolorbox is formatted using a LATEX minipage if the box is unbreakable.
If breakable, the box tries a mimicry of a minipage. In a minipage or parbox, paragraphs
are formatted slightly different as the main text. If the key value is set to false, the normal
main text behavior is restored. In some situations, this has some unwanted side effects. It
is recommended that you use this experimental setting only where you really want to have
this feature.
% \usepackage{lipsum} % preamble
\tcbset{width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2,nobeforeafter,arc=1mm,
colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,fonttitle=\bfseries,fontupper=\small,
left=2mm,right=2mm,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,equal height group=parbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[parbox,adjusted title={parbox=true (normal)}]

\lipsum[1-2]
\end{tcolorbox}\hfill%
\begin{tcolorbox}[parbox=false,adjusted title={parbox=false}]
\lipsum[1-2]
\end{tcolorbox}%
parbox=true (normal) parbox=false

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adip- Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adip-
iscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, plac- iscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, plac-
erat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur erat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a,
magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellen- magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellen-
tesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et ne- tesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et ne-
tus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mau- tus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mau-
ris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. ris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem.
Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultri- Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultri-
ces. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida ces. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida
placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium
quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo
ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi do- ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi do-
lor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, lor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac,
nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec
varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue
eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis
eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum. eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales,
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales,
sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non
justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis
vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tor-
vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tor-
tor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula ali-
quet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi.
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
pendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et mag-
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et mag-
nis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus
nis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus
mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam-
corper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus
luctus mauris.
luctus mauris.
95
/tcb/hyphenationfix=true|false (default true, initially false)
Long words at the beginning of paragraphs in very narrow boxes will not be hyphenated
using pdflatex. This problem is circumvented by applying the hyphenationfix option.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,
fontupper=\normalsize,
colback=blue!5!white,width=4cm} Rechnungsadjunktentochter.
Statthaltereikonzipist.
\begin{tcolorbox}
Rechnungsadjunktentochter.\par
Statthaltereikonzipist. Rechnungsad-
\end{tcolorbox}
junktentochter.
\begin{tcolorbox}[hyphenationfix] Statthal-
Rechnungsadjunktentochter.\par tereikonzipist.
Statthaltereikonzipist.
\end{tcolorbox}
!
parbox=false and hyphenationfix should not be used together. They are targeting
different box types and they do not blend very well.
4.19 Files
/tcb/tempfile=hfile namei (no default, initially \jobname.tcbtemp)
Sets hfile namei as name for the temporary file which is used inside tcbwritetempÕ P. 126
and \tcbusetempÕ P. 126 implicitely.
4.20 \tcbox Specials
The following options are applicable for \tcboxÕ P. 14 and \tcboxmathÕ P. 341 only.
/tcb/tcbox raise=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Raises the \tcboxÕ P. 14 by the given hlengthi.
fonttitle=\bfseries,nobeforeafter,center title}
Test\dotfill
\tcbox[tcbox raise base]{Hello World 1}\dotfill
\tcbox{Hello World 2}\dotfill
\tcbox[tcbox raise=5mm]{Hello World 3}
Hello World 3
Hello World 2
Test . . . . . . Hello World 1 ...... ......
/tcb/tcbox raise base (style, no value, initially unset)

Raises the \tcboxÕ P. 14 such that the base of its content matches the base of the environ-
mental line; see example above.
/tcb/on line (style, no value, initially unset)
Combines /tcb/tcbox raise base with /tcb/nobeforeafterÕ P. 78 . The resulting box
behaves analogue to \fbox.
96
N 2015-03-23 /tcb/tcbox width=hmodei (no default, initially auto)
Controls how \tcboxÕ P. 14 respects a /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 setting. Feasible values for hmodei
are:
• auto (initial setting): ignore /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 and set box width according to its
content.
• auto limited: Set box width according to its content, if it is smaller than
/tcb/widthÕ P. 34 . Otherwise, the content is set like in a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 with line
breaks.
• forced center: Set box width according to /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 . The content is centered
and may overlap the box borders.
• forced left: Set box width according to /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 . The content is left
aligned and may overlap the box borders.
• forced right: Set box width according to /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 . The content is right
aligned and may overlap the box borders.
• minimum center: Set box width according to /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 , if the content fits
into. The content is centered and the box width may grow beyond /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 .
• minimum left: Set box width according to /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 , if the content fits into.
The content is left aligned and the box width may grow beyond /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 .
• minimum right: Set box width according to /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 , if the content fits into.
The content is right aligned and the box width may grow beyond /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 .
\tcbset{size=small,on line,before upper=\strut,

colframe=blue!75!black,colback=blue!5!white,
fontupper=\normalsize,width=4cm}
\tcbox[tcbox width=auto]{auto}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=auto limited]{auto limited}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=auto limited]{auto limited with long text}\\
\tcbox[tcbox width=forced center]{forced center}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=forced center]{forced center with long text}\\
\tcbox[tcbox width=forced left]{forced left}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=forced left]{forced left with long text}\\
\tcbox[tcbox width=forced right]{forced right}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=forced right]{forced right with long text}\\
\tcbox[tcbox width=minimum center]{minimum center}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=minimum center]{minimum center with long text}\\
\tcbox[tcbox width=minimum left]{minimum left}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=minimum left]{minimum left with long text}\\
\tcbox[tcbox width=minimum right]{minimum right}\qquad
\tcbox[tcbox width=minimum right]{minimum right with long text}
auto auto limited auto limited with

long text
forced center forced center with long text
forced left forced left with long text
forced right forced right with long text
minimum center minimum center with long text
minimum left minimum left with long text
minimum right minimum right with long text
97
4.21 Counters, Labels, and References
/tcb/phantom=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
The hcodei is put in a box at the upper left corner of the tcolorbox. If the tcolorbox
is breakable, the hcodei is executed for the first box of the break sequence only. If there
already was some phantom code given, the new hcodei is appended.
The hcodei is intended to be used for counter stepping, labelling, and related operations
which do not produce visible text.
• The hcodei is executed before the title and box content, i. e. counter values are ensured
to be increased before usage.
• Labels are ensured to reference the correct page number.
• The hcodei is executed only once even during fitting operations for title and box con-
tent.
• In combination with the hyperref package, the hyper anchor is set to the upper left
corner of the tcolorbox, i. e. links inside the pdf document will jump to the box
pleasantly.
• Since the hcodei is executed inside a TEX group, only global operations can survive
this group.
Examples for the phantom usage are given in Section 15.9 from page 333, e. g. Example 15.1
on page 334.
/tcb/nophantom (no value, initially set)
Removes the phantom code if set before.
/tcb/label=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)
The hmarkeri is set as label text for a reference with the \ref macro. Typically, this
option is used for numbered boxes, see Subsection 5.1 from page 108, e. g. /tcb/new/auto
counterÕ P. 108 .
N 2014-11-28 /tcb/phantomlabel=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)
Equivalent to /tcb/label for an unnumbered box. A \phantomsection from the package
hyperref [15] is used to set a correct hyperlink target. This is not needed for a numbered
box.
/tcb/label type=htypei (no default, initially unset)
This option key can be used only in conjunction with the cleveref package [5] which has
to be loaded separately. htypei has to be a cross-reference type known to cleveref like
theorem, algorithm, result, etc. References made with cleveref will use this type. Note
that using label type will result in compilation errors, if cleveref is not loaded. For an
example, see Theorem 16.3.5 on page 359.
/tcb/no label type (no value, initially set)
Removes a /tcb/label type, if set before.
/tcb/step=hcounteri (no default, initially unset)
Shortcut for phantom={\refstepcounter{#1}}. The given hcounteri is increased and ready
for labelling. This option is not needed when using the convenient automated numbering
introduced with version 2.40, see Subsection 5.1 from page 108.
/tcb/step and label={hcounteri}{hmarkeri} (no default, initially unset)
Shortcut for using /tcb/step and /tcb/label. This option is not needed when using the
convenient automated numbering introduced with version 2.40, see Subsection 5.1 from
page 108.
98
/tcb/list entry=htexti (no default, initially unset)
If the «list of tcolorbox(es)» feature described in Subsection 5.2 from page 115 is used, this
key describes the htexti for an entry into the generated list, e. g.
list entry={\protect\numberline{\thetcbcounter}My beautiful Example}
See Section 15.9 from page 333 for a complete example.

N 2014-09-19 /tcb/list text=htexti (style, no default)
This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/list entry to
\protect\numberline{\thetcbcounter}htexti. So, the following settings are identical:
list text={My beautiful Example},

list entry={\protect\numberline{\thetcbcounter}My beautiful Example}

/tcb/add to list={hlisti}{htypei} (no default, initially unset)
If the «list of tcolorbox(es)» feature described in Subsection 5.2 from page 115 is used, list
entries are generated automatically. With this key, you can enforce an entry to the given
hlisti with the given htypei. This issues:
\addcontentsline{hlisti}{htypei}{hentry texti}
N 2016-06-22 /tcb/nameref=htexti (no default, initially unset)
If the nameref package is loaded, the given htexti is used for corresponding \nameref
U 2016-11-18
macros. Typically, the htexti will be chosen to be identical or nearly identical to the one
for /tcb/titleÕ P. 18 .
\begin{pabox}[label={mynamelabel},nameref={Title or anything else}]{Title text}

\end{pabox}
This box is automatically numbered with \ref{mynamelabel} on page
\pageref{mynamelabel}.
The box is titled '\nameref{mynamelabel}'.
Examp. 4.1: Title text
This box is automatically numbered with 4.1 on page 99.

The box is titled ’Title or anything else’.
! /tcb/nameref is used automatically inside \newtcbtheorem Õ P. 339 .
99
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hypertarget=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)
A \hypertarget from the package hyperref [15] is used to create an internal link of an an-
chor hmarkeri. This hmarkeri can be referenced by \hyperlink or /tcb/hyperlinkÕ P. 199 .
% \usepackage{hyperref}%
colback=red!10,colframe=red!50!black, Box A
hypertarget=hypertwinA,
hyperlink=hypertwinB, Click me to jump to
title=Box A] Box B.
Click me to jump to Box B.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-10 /tcb/bookmark=htexti (no default, initially unset)

Sets a PDF bookmark with the given htexti, if the package bookmark [11] is loaded. This
bookmark is set with an automated destination (the current box) and is set one level below
the current bookmark level.
% \usepackage{bookmark}% Example for using a

\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=blue!10,colframe=blue!50!black, bookmark
bookmark=Example for using a bookmark,
title=Example for using a bookmark] Open the bookmark
Open the bookmark view of the previewer view of the pre-
to see the bookmark. viewer to see the
\end{tcolorbox} bookmark.
N 2017-02-10 /tcb/bookmark*={hoptionsi}{htexti} (no default, initially unset)

Identical to /tcb/bookmark, but additional hoptionsi from the package bookmark [11] can
be given.
% \usepackage{bookmark}%
Red and bold book-
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!10,colframe=red!50!black,
mark
bookmark*={color=red,italic,bold}%
{Another bookmark example}, Open the bookmark
title=Red and bold bookmark] view of the pre-
Open the bookmark view of the previewer viewer to see the
to see the bookmark. bookmark.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2018-07-26 /tcb/index=hentryi (no default, initially unset)

Adds an index hentryi for the box. This is a shortcut for setting \index{hentryi} to
/tcb/phantomÕ P. 98 .
N 2018-07-26 /tcb/index*={hnamei}{hentryi} (no default, initially unset)
Adds an hentryi to an index with a specific hnamei. This is a shortcut for set-
ting \index[hnamei]{hentryi} to /tcb/phantomÕ P. 98 . An index extension package like
imakeidx has to be loaded to use this option key.
100
4.22 Even and Odd Pages
! Also see /tcb/toggle left and rightÕ P. 46 and /tcb/toggle enlargementÕ P. 86 for
further even/odd options.
U 2015-11-13 /tcb/check odd page=true|false (default true, initially false)

If set to true, a precise even/odd page testing for the current box is applied. This is done
by using labels. If a box moves to another page, the document has to be compiled twice
for the correct settings. If set to false, even/odd page tests may give wrong results for the
first box of a page.
/tcb/toggle left and rightÕ P. 46 , /tcb/toggle enlargementÕ P. 86 , and /tcb/if odd
page automatically set check odd page, but for \tcbifoddpageÕ P. 103 this option has to
be set explicitely.
N 2015-11-13 /tcb/if odd page={hodd optionsi}{heven optionsi} (style, no default)
If the current box is on an odd page, the hodd optionsi are applied. On an even page, the
heven optionsi are applied. /tcb/check odd page is automatically set for precise even/odd
page testing.
\begin{tcolorbox}[if odd page={colback=yellow!50}{colback=red!50}]

This box is colored in yellow on an odd page
and is colored in red on an even page.
\end{tcolorbox}
This box is colored in yellow on an odd page and is colored in red on an even page.
If a box is /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 , using /tcb/if odd page only acts upon the first
! box. If the setting should be repeated for every partial box of the break sequence,
the option should be packed into /tcb/extrasÕ P. 371 . In this case, /tcb/check odd
page has to be set explicitely! Also see /tcb/if odd page*Õ P. 102 .
N 2016-11-18 /tcb/if odd page or oneside={hodd optionsi}{heven optionsi} (style, no default)

For onesided documents, the hodd optionsi are applied always. For twosided documents,
this style is identical to /tcb/if odd page.
101
N 2015-11-13 /tcb/if odd page*={hodd optionsi}{heven optionsi} (style, no default)
! This option needs the breakable library, see Section 17 on page 363.
LIB
For breakable boxes, if the current partial box is on an odd page, the hodd optionsi are
applied. On an even page, the heven optionsi are applied. /tcb/check odd pageÕ P. 101 is
automatically set for precise even/odd page testing.
In contrast to /tcb/if odd pageÕ P. 101 , /tcb/if odd page* is used on every partial box
of a break sequences and not only on the first box. Another difference is that /tcb/if
odd page* is applied quite late during option processing, while /tcb/if odd pageÕ P. 101
is applied immediately.
/tcb/if odd page* is implemented as /tcb/if odd pageÕ P. 101 packed into
/tcb/extrasÕ P. 371 .
% \tcbuselibrary{breakable}
\begin{tcolorbox}[breakable,if odd page*={colback=yellow!50}{colback=red!50}]
This breakable box is colored in yellow on an odd page
and is colored in red on an even page. For every partial box, the
test is repeated, i.e. this would give a yellow, red, yellow, red, \ldots\
sequence for a long content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This breakable box is colored in yellow on an odd page and is colored in red on an even page.
For every partial box, the test is repeated, i.e. this would give a yellow, red, yellow, red, . . .
sequence for a long content.
N 2016-11-18 /tcb/if odd page or oneside*={hodd optionsi}{heven optionsi} (style, no default)

For onesided documents, the hodd optionsi are applied always. For twosided documents,
this style is identical to /tcb/if odd page*.
102
N 2015-11-13 \tcbifoddpage{hodd codei}{heven codei}
If the current box is on an odd page, the hodd codei is executed. On an even page, the heven
codei is executed. For precise even/odd page testing, the /tcb/check odd pageÕ P. 101 has
to be set manually inside the box options.
The macro \tcbifoddpage can be used inside underlay, overlay, or watermark code to test
if the box is on an odd page. This will work also for boxes in a break sequence.
The macro can also be used inside the box content text. For unbreakable boxes, the
correct page test is applied. But for /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 boxes, \tcbifoddpage will
always give the result for the page of the first box inside the box content text. If needed,
the methods from the packages changepage or ifoddpage could be used here.
\tcbset{colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,check odd page,

title={Example for a box on an \tcbifoddpage{odd}{even} page},
watermark text={\tcbifoddpage{Odd}{Even} page!}]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
Example for a box on an odd page
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, plac-
erat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy
eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habi-
Odd page!
tant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo.
Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus
eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra
malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius
orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget
orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
N 2016-11-18 \tcbifoddpageoroneside{hodd codei}{heven codei}

For onesided documents, the hodd codei is executed always. For twosided documents, this
macro is identical to \tcbifoddpage.
103
N 2015-11-13 \thetcolorboxnumber
This is a unique identifier (arabic number) for a tcolorbox. It is locally defined inside boxes
and has no meaning outside. It is used for precise even/odd page testing, but may also be
valuable for elaborate user code.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=yellow!5,title=Box \thetcolorboxnumber]
This box is \thetcolorboxnumber.
\tcbox[on line,size=fbox]{This box is \thetcolorboxnumber} and
\tcbox[on line,size=fbox]{this box is \thetcolorboxnumber}.
This box is \thetcolorboxnumber.
\end{tcolorbox}
Box 1123
This box is 1123. This box is 1124 and this box is 1125 . This box is 1123.
N 2015-11-13 \thetcolorboxpage
This macro contains the expanded arabic page number of the current tcolorbox. It is
locally defined inside boxes and has no meaning outside. It is precise only, if /tcb/check
odd pageÕ P. 101 was set.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=yellow!5,check odd page,

title=Box on page~\thetcolorboxpage]
This box is located on page~\thetcolorboxpage.
\end{tcolorbox}
Box on page 104
This box is located on page 104.
104
4.23 Externalization
! See Section 23 on page 447 for the external library of tcolorbox.
LIB
If the externalization library of the tikz package is used and /tcb/graphical
environmentÕ P. 135 is set to tikzpicture, a tcolorbox could trigger the externalization
process which will arise a compilation error.
To avoid this, there are two possible strategies:
• Ensure, that \tikzexternaldisable is set before a tcolorbox is used. If you typically use
the pattern \tikzexternalenable some picture \tikzexternaldisable, there is nothing
to care about.
• If externalization is enabled globally, use /tcb/shield externalize to shield any
tcolorbox. The preamble code could look like this:
\usetikzlibrary{external}
\tikzexternalize
\tcbset{shield externalize}
/tcb/shield externalize=true|false (default true, initially false)

If set to true, the drawing part of the tcolorbox is not being externalized which is a good
thing at the current state of art. Nevertheless, if the tcolorbox contains a tikzpicture,
this picture is still externalized. Pictures drawn with help of /tcb/tikz upperÕ P. 69 or
alike are not externalized.
If a tcolorbox is used inside a node of an encircling tikzpicture which is externalized, do
! not use \tikzexternaldisable in front of the tcolorbox. /tcb/shield externalize is
deactivated automatically inside a tikzpicture.
/tcb/external=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)

Convenience option which calls \tikzsetnextfilename{hfile namei}. Typically, it may
be used inside the option list of a tcolorbox to set the externalization hfile namei
for the first tikzpicture which is discovered inside the box content. The package
tikz [22] or the library skins has to be loaded to use this option. Additionally,
LIB
\usetikzlibrary{external} has to be used.

/tcb/remake=true|false (default true, initially false)
Convenience option which calls /tikz/external/remake next. Typically, it may be used
inside the option list of a tcolorbox to force the remake of the first tikzpicture which is
discovered inside the box content. The package tikz [22] or the library skins has to be
LIB
loaded to use this option. Additionally, \usetikzlibrary{external} has to be used.
4.24 Miscellaneous
/tcb/reset (no value, initially set)
Sets (nearly) all tcolorbox settings (including loaded libraries) back to their default values
plus any settings given by \tcbsetforeverylayerÕ P. 13 . /tcb/savedelimiterÕ P. 26 and
/tcb/captureÕ P. 94 keep their values. Also, all raster values (see Section 14 on page 277)
are not resetted.
This option is useful for boxes in boxes where the inner box should not inherit the settings
of the outer box. Note that for boxes inside boxes the reset is done automatically, if the
standard settings of the package are used (v2.40 and above), see Section 4.16 from page 91.
105
N 2015-01-09 /tcb/only=<hoverlay specificationi>{hoptionsi} (style, no default, initially unset)
Sets the given tcolorbox hoptionsi in dependency of a beamer hoverlay specificationi. Note
that this needs the beamer class. The hoptionsi will only be used on the specified beamer
frames.
\documentclass{beamer}
\usepackage[many]{tcolorbox}
\begin{document}
\begin{frame}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,fonttitle=\bfseries,
enhanced,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10,colbacktitle=red,
sidebyside,righthand width=3cm,
lowerbox=invisible,lower separated=false,
drop lifted shadow,
only=<1>{colbacktitle=yellow,coltitle=red!50!black,colframe=red},
only=<3>{colback=yellow!50,watermark text={Attention!}},
only=<3->{lowerbox=visible} ]
This is a test.
\begin{itemize}[<+->]
\item One
\item Two
\item \alert<3>{Three}
\item Four
\end{itemize}
\tcblower
\begin{equation*}
\int\limits_{1}^{x} \frac{1}{t}~dt = \ln(x).
\end{equation*}
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{frame}
\end{document}
/tcb/code=hcodei (no default, initially unset)

The given hcodei is executed immediately. This option is useful to place some arbitrary
code into an option list.
code={Useless at this spot but functional.},
fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[code={\newcommand{\mycommand}{\textit{working}}},
title=My \mycommand\ title]
\end{tcolorbox}
Useless at this spot but functional.

My working title
106
N 2016-10-21 /tcb/void (no value, initially unset)
Annihilates the current tcolorbox as far as possible. Basically, this comments out the whole
tcolorbox by using a key. If the option list of the current tcolorbox contains arbitrary
code with global impact (like counter settings), these actions are not undone automati-
cally. Nevertheless, the effects of /tcb/phantomÕ P. 98 , /tcb/stepÕ P. 98 , /tcb/new/auto
counterÕ P. 108 , etc., are removed by /tcb/void.
A%
\begin{tcolorbox}[
title=This box is completely removed by the following key,
void
]
\end{tcolorbox}
B
AB
This option key cannot be applied for every situation. For example, if several box
!
environments with the same environment name are nested, for the outer environment
/tcb/void cannot be used, since the end of the inner environment will be misinter-
preted as end of the outer environment.
107
5 Initialization Option Keys
The initialization options are only applicable for the generation of new environments and com-
mands based on tcolorbox and friends. Particularly, they can be used for
• \newtcolorboxÕ P. 15 ,
• \newtcboxÕ P. 16 ,
• \newtcblistingÕ P. 302 ,
• \newtcbinputlistingÕ P. 304 ,
• \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 , and
• \newtcboxfitÕ P. 412 .
Typically, these options may generate counters and alike. It is strongly recommended that
! you use initialization options inside the preamble only. Otherwise, you may get trouble
when using LATEX’s \include features.
5.1 Numbered Boxes
Counters assigned using the initialization options are administrated automatically. Especially,
they are increased for each new box. Independent from the real counter name, the counter value
can be referenced by \thetcbcounter, e. g. inside the title of the box. The real counter name
is stored inside \tcbcounter.
/tcb/new/auto counter (no value, initially unset)
Creates a new counter automatically. With /tcb/new/number formatÕ P. 110 and
/tcb/new/number withinÕ P. 110 , the appearance and behavior of the counter can be
changed. The counter value is referenced by \thetcbcounter.
\begin{pabox}[label={myautocounter}]{Title with number}

This box is automatically numbered with \ref{myautocounter} on page
\pageref{myautocounter}. Inside the box, the \thetcbcounter\ can
also be referenced by |\thetcbcounter|.
The real counter name is \texttt{\tcbcounter}.
\end{pabox}
Examp. 5.1: Title with number
This box is automatically numbered with 5.1 on page 108. Inside the box, the 5.1 can also
be referenced by \thetcbcounter. The real counter name is tcb@cnt@pabox.
108
/tcb/new/use counter from=htcolorboxi (no default, initially unset)
Here, a counter from another htcolorboxi is reused. Note that the settings for
/tcb/new/number formatÕ P. 110 and /tcb/new/number withinÕ P. 110 are inherited and
cannot be changed. The counter value is referenced by \thetcbcounter.
\newtcolorbox[use counter from=pabox]{mybox}[2][]{%

colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
title=Some Box \thetcbcounter: #2,#1}
\begin{mybox}[label={myusecounterfrom}]{Title with continued number}

This box is automatically numbered with \ref{myusecounterfrom} on page
\pageref{myusecounterfrom}. Inside the box, the \thetcbcounter\ can
\end{mybox}
Some Box 5.2: Title with continued number
This box is automatically numbered with 5.2 on page 109. Inside the box, the 5.2 can also
be referenced by \thetcbcounter. The real counter name is tcb@cnt@pabox.
/tcb/new/use counter=hcounteri (no default, initially unset)

Here, an ordinary existing LATEX hcounteri is used for numbering. With /tcb/new/number
formatÕ P. 110 and /tcb/new/number withinÕ P. 110 , the appearance and behavior of the
counter can be changed. The counter value is referenced by \thetcbcounter.
% \newcounter{myexample}% preamble
\newtcolorbox[use counter=myexample,number format=\Alph]{mybox}[2][]{%
colback=green!5!white,colframe=green!55!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
title=Some Box \thetcbcounter: #2,#1}
\begin{mybox}[label={myusecounter}]{Title with \LaTeX\ number}

This box is automatically numbered with \ref{myusecounter} on page
\pageref{myusecounter}. Inside the box, the \thetcbcounter\ can
\end{mybox}
Some Box A: Title with LATEX number
This box is automatically numbered with A on page 109. Inside the box, the A can also be
referenced by \thetcbcounter. The real counter name is myexample.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/new/use counter*=hcounteri (no default, initially unset)

An existing LATEX hcounteri is used for numbering. In contrast to /tcb/new/use counter,
the options /tcb/new/number formatÕ P. 110 and /tcb/new/number withinÕ P. 110 are ig-
nored. Use this for counters which are already configured outside the tcolorbox package,
e. g. the standard figure counter.
/tcb/new/no counter (no value, initially set)
The created boxes are not numbered. This is the default. The option may be used to
overrule a previous option.
109
/tcb/new/number within=hcounteri (no default, initially unset)
The automatic counter is set to zero, if hcounteri is increased. Additionally, during output,
the value of hcounteri is prepended to the value of the automatic counter.
To prepend the automatic counter with the chapter number and to reset it with every new
chapter, use:
number within=chapter
See /tcb/new/use counterÕ P. 109 for a complete example.

/tcb/new/number format=hformat macroi (no default, initially \arabic)
Declares the format of the automatic counter. The hformat macroi can be any valid LATEX
number formatting macro like \arabic, \roman, etc.
To display the counter value in large roman numbers, use:
number format=\Roman
See /tcb/new/auto counterÕ P. 108 for a complete example.

/tcb/new/number freestyle=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
Allows advanced control over the complete number format. This option overrules the format
given by /tcb/new/number within and /tcb/new/number format. Nevertheless, you can
combine it with /tcb/new/number within to get the desired reset property.
The hcodei is some formatting code which should contain \tcbcounter to reference the
automated counter. Since this hcodei is expanded, you have to secure each macro with
\noexpand with exception of \tcbcounter.
\newtcolorbox[auto counter,number within=section,
number freestyle={(Q/\noexpand\thesection/\noexpand\Alph{\tcbcounter})},
]{phbox}[2][]{%
colback=yellow!15!white,colframe=blue!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
title=Question~\thetcbcounter: #2,#1}
\begin{phbox}[label={myfreestyle}]{Title with freestyle number}

This box is automatically numbered with \ref{myfreestyle} on page
\pageref{myfreestyle}. Inside the box, the \thetcbcounter\ can
\end{phbox}
Question (Q/5/A): Title with freestyle number
This box is automatically numbered with (Q/5/A) on page 110. Inside the box, the (Q/5/A)
can also be referenced by \thetcbcounter. The real counter name is tcb@cnt@phbox.
110
! the preamble.
The following options /tcb/new/crefname and /tcb/new/Crefname need to be set inside
U 2014-12-01 /tcb/new/crefname={hsingulari}{hplurali} (no default, initially unset)

This option key can be used only in conjunction with the cleveref package [5] which
has to be loaded separately. It creates a cross-reference type for the new tcolorbox’es,
where the lowercase hsingulari and hplurali forms of the cross-reference are given. This
type is the environment or macro name and /tcb/label typeÕ P. 98 is set automatically.
See /tcb/label typeÕ P. 98 and [5] for more information.
U 2014-12-01 /tcb/new/Crefname={hsingulari}{hplurali} (no default, initially unset)
This option key can be used only in conjunction with the cleveref package [5] which has
to be loaded separately. It creates a cross-reference type for the new tcolorbox’es, where
the uppercase hsingulari and hplurali forms of the cross-reference are given. This type
is the environment or macro name and /tcb/label typeÕ P. 98 is set automatically. See
/tcb/label typeÕ P. 98 and [5] for more information.

% \usepackage{cleveref}
\newtcolorbox[auto counter,number within=section,
crefname={bluebox}{blueboxes}]%
{mybluebox}[2][]{colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
title=Bluebox \thetcbcounter: #2,#1}
% \usepackage{varioref}
\begin{mybluebox}[label={myreference}]{My title}
This is an example.
\end{mybluebox}
\Cref{myreference}, \cref{myreference}.\\
\Cpageref{myreference}, \cpageref{myreference}.\\
\nameCref{myreference}, \namecref{myreference}.\\
\labelcref{myreference}, \labelcpageref{myreference}.\\
With \texttt{varioref}:\\
\Vref{myreference}, \vref{myreference}.\\
\Vref*{myreference}, \vref*{myreference}.
Bluebox 5.1: My title
This is an example.
Bluebox 5.1, bluebox 5.1.

Page 111, page 111.
Bluebox, bluebox.
5.1, 111.
With varioref:
111
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/new/blend into=hnamei (style, no default, initially unset)
Used to comfortably blend into an existing schema of naming and numbering for some
selected cases. For example, a tcolorbox can be used to display and entitle an image
pretending to be a standard figure environment. Here, /tcb/titleÕ P. 18 is used instead
of the standard \caption and /tcb/list textÕ P. 99 can be used instead of the optional
parameter of the standard \caption.
Feasible values for hnamei are:
• figures: blend into the standard figure environment.
• tables: blend into the standard table environment.
• listings: blend into the standard lstlisting environment of the package listings
[6].
Note that blend into=listings can only be used in the document con-
!
tent or, preferably, inside a \AtBeginDocument clause! Using it without
\AtBeginDocument inside the preamble does not work since the listings pack-
ages initializes its counter also inside \AtBeginDocument.
\begin{figure}[htb]
\centering\includegraphics[height=4cm]{lichtspiel.jpg}
\caption{A standard figure}
\end{figure}
\newtcolorbox[blend into=figures]{myfigure}[2][]{float=htb,capture=hbox,
title={#2},every float=\centering,#1}
\begin{myfigure}{A tcolorbox figure}

\includegraphics[height=4cm]{lichtspiel.jpg}
\end{myfigure}
Figure 1: A standard figure
Figure 2: A tcolorbox figure
112
N 2015-03-13 /tcb/blend before title=hvaluei (no default, initially colon)
This option formats the title output of /tcb/new/blend intoÕ P. 112 . Note that this is a
common tcolorbox option which should be set globally or in the normal option part of
\newtcolorboxÕ P. 15 .
Feasible values for hvaluei are:
• colon: use name/number plus colon.
• dash: use name/number plus dash.
• colon hang: use name/number plus colon with hanging indent.
• dash hang: use name/number plus dash with hanging indent.
blend before title=dash hang,title={#2},every float=\centering,#1}
\begin{myfigure}{A tcolorbox figure with quite a long title}

\end{myfigure}
Figure 3 – A tcolorbox figure with

quite a long title
113
N 2015-03-13 /tcb/blend before title code=hcodei (no default)
This option formats the title output of /tcb/new/blend intoÕ P. 112 . The hcodei takes one
parameter, the name/number. Use this, if /tcb/blend before titleÕ P. 113 is not flexible
enough.
blend before title code={\fbox{##1}\ },title={#2},every float=\centering,#1}
\begin{myfigure}{A tcolorbox figure}

\end{myfigure}
Figure 4 A tcolorbox figure
114
5.2 Lists of tcolorboxes
For figures and tables, LATEX provides the \listoffigures and \listoftables commands to
create lists of these numbered entities. Also, a tcolorbox can be part of such a kind of list.
1. Assign a list hnamei by the initialization option /tcb/new/list inside.
2. Optionally, a new htypei for list entries may be assigned by the initialization option
/tcb/new/list type.
3. List entries a generated automatically within each new tcolorbox using the above initial-
ization.
• If /tcb/list entryÕ P. 99 is set, the entry is generated with it.
• Otherwise, if /tcb/titleÕ P. 18 is set, the entry is generated with it.
• Otherwise, the entry is generated with the current number and the environment name.
4. The generated list is displayed by \tcblistof.
/tcb/new/list inside=hnamei (no default, initially unset)
Assigns a list or contents file to the generated tcolorboxes. Entries to this list are saved
to a file which gets the hnamei as file name extension. The list is referenced by this name
in \tcblistof. For example:
list inside=exam

/tcb/new/list type=htypei (no default, initially tcolorbox)
Optionally, some htypei can be assigned to the list entries. For a new htypei, a macro
\l@htypei has to exist which controls the format of the list entry. The default type is
defined by
\newcommand*\l@tcolorbox{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
This is identical to the \l@section setting of LATEX. \l@tcolorbox can be redefined or a

new htypei can be assigned.
\tcblistof[hmacroi]{hnamei}{htitle texti}
Displays the generated list of tcolorboxes with the given hnamei. The heading is generated
by hmacroi{htitle texti} where \section is the default setting for hmacroi.
To display the list inside a subsection, use for example:
\tcblistof[\subsection]{exam}{List of Exercises}
The result of the example is found as Subsection 15.10 on page 336.
! The core of the list is generated by \@starttoc{hnamei} which can be wrapped into
an own macro.
115
6 Side by Side
A side by side box is a special tcolorboxÕ P. 12 where the upper and lower part of the box are
set side by side. All boxes of this kind are unbreakable.
Further side by side options for code examples are /tcb/listing side textÕ P. 315 ,
! /tcb/text side listingÕ P. 315 , /tcb/listing outside textÕ P. 315 , and /tcb/text
outside listingÕ P. 315 .
6.1 Basic Settings
/tcb/sidebyside=true|false (default true, initially false)

Normally, the upper part and the lower part of the box have their positions as their names
suggest. If sidebyside is set to true, the upper part is drawn left-handed and the lower
part is drawn right-handed. Both parts are drawn together with the geometry settings of the
upper part but the space is divided horizontally according to the following options. Colors,
fonts, and box content additions are used individually. The resulting box is unbreakable.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,sidebyside]
This is the upper (\textit{left-handed}) part.
\tcblower
This is the lower (\textit{right-handed}) part.
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
This is the upper (left-handed) part. This is the lower (right-handed) part.
% \tcbuselibrary{skins}
\begin{tcolorbox}[bicolor,sidebyside,righthand width=3cm,
sharp corners,boxrule=.4pt,colback=green!5,colbacklower=green!50!black!50]
\lipsum[2]
\tcblower
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{goldshade}%
\end{tcolorbox}
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi.

Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at,
lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed ac-
cumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio
metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut
massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque
penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus
mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum
116
U 2015-02-06 /tcb/sidebyside align=halignmenti (no default, initially center)
Sets the vertical halignmenti for the left-handed and right-handed part.
Feasible values for halignmenti are:
• center: identical to minipage option c.
• top: identical to minipage option t (aligns the top lines of the left-handed and right-
handed side according to their baselines).
• bottom: identical to minipage option b (aligns the bottom lines of the left-handed and
right-handed side according to their baselines).
• center seam: aligns the center of the left-handed and right-handed side.
• top seam: aligns the very top seam of the left-handed and right-handed side.
• bottom seam: aligns the very bottom seam of the left-handed and right-handed side.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,nobeforeafter,
left=2mm,right=2mm,sidebyside,sidebyside gap=6mm,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/3}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=center,sidebyside align=center]

This is a text which is too long for one line.
\tcblower
This is a short text.
\end{tcolorbox}\hfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=top,sidebyside align=top]
\tcblower
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=bottom,sidebyside align=bottom]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
center top bottom
This is a This is a This is a This is a

text which This is a text which short text. text which
is too long short text. is too long is too long This is a
for one line. for one line. for one line. short text.
center, top, and bottom are identical to the known corresponding minipage options. While
this is the preferred approach for text content, the result for boxed content like tables or
images may not be as expected.
For such content, one may use center seam, top seam, and bottom seam. For example,
top seam aligns the very top seam of the left-handed and right-handed side.
117
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
size=small,righthand width=4cm,sidebyside,sidebyside gap=6mm,lower separated=false}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=center seam,sidebyside align=center seam]

This is my description text for the pictures displayed on the right-handed side.
\tcblower
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth/2]{goldshade}%
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth/2]{blueshade}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=top seam,sidebyside align=top seam]

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=bottom seam,sidebyside align=bottom seam]

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
center seam
This is my description text for the pictures displayed on the

right-handed side.
top seam
right-handed side.
bottom seam

right-handed side.
118
/tcb/sidebyside gap=hlengthi (no default, initially 10mm)
Sets the horizontal distance between the left-handed and right-handed part to hlengthi.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,nobeforeafter,
sidebyside,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=Wide gap,sidebyside gap=30mm]

\tcblower
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=Narrow gap,sidebyside gap=1mm]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
Wide gap
This is
a text Narrow gap
This is
which is
a short
too long This is a text which
text.
for one is too long for one This is a short text.
line. line.
/tcb/lefthand width=hlengthi (no default, initially unset)

Sets the width of the left-handed part to the given hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,sidebyside,lefthand width=3cm]

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
This is the upper

This is the lower (right-handed) part.
(left-handed) part.
/tcb/righthand width=hlengthi (no default, initially unset)

Sets the width of the right-handed part to the given hlengthi.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,sidebyside,righthand width=3cm]

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
This is the lower

This is the upper (left-handed) part.
(right-handed) part.
119
/tcb/lefthand ratio=hfractioni (no default, initially 0.5)
Sets the width of the left-handed part to the given hfractioni of the available space.
hfractioni is a value between 0 and 1.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,sidebyside,lefthand ratio=0.25]

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
This is the upper

This is the lower (right-handed) part.
(left-handed) part.
/tcb/righthand ratio=hfractioni (no default, initially 0.5)

Sets the width of the right-handed part to the given hfractioni of the available space.
hfractioni is a value between 0 and 1.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,sidebyside,righthand ratio=0.25]

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
This is the lower

This is the upper (left-handed) part.
(right-handed) part.
120
If one side of a side-by-side box should be adapted to the width of its content, this width has
to be computed beforehand. The following example uses a savebox \mysavebox to store the
picture to determine its width. A more convenient way to handle this task is to use the methods
from Section 6.2 on page 122.
% \tcbuselibrary{skins,xparse}
% \newsavebox\mysavebox % preamble
\DeclareTotalTColorBox{\mysidebox}{ O{} +m +m }{
bicolor,colback=white,colbacklower=yellow!10,
fonttitle=\bfseries,center title,
sidebyside,
code={\sbox{\mysavebox}{#2}},
lefthand width=\wd\mysavebox,
drop lifted shadow,
#1
}
{\usebox{\mysavebox}\tcblower#3}
\mysidebox[title=The Triangle]{%
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill=red!20,draw=red!50!black]
(0,0) node[below]{A} -- (3,1) node[right]{B}
-- (1,4) node[above]{C} -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}%
}{%
\lipsum[1]
}
The Triangle
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut pu-

C rus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Cur-
abitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget,
consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu
neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et
malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra
metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ul-
trices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Inte-
ger sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent
B eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi do-
lor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur
auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi,
A congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci
sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
121
6.2 Advanced Settings from the xparse Library
LIB
! onAll page
following macros and options need the xparse library to be loaded, see Section 22
LIB
434.
N 2015-11-20 \tcbsidebyside[hoptionsi]{hleft-handed contenti}{hright-handed contenti}

Creates a colored box using more or less arbitrary hoptionsi for a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
The /tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 option is set to true and the hleft-handed contenti and
hright-handed contenti is filled into the box appropriately. The resulting box is unbreakable.
\tcbsidebyside is not only a shortcut for using a normal tcolorboxÕ P. 12 with
/tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 , but allows setting further options like /tcb/sidebyside
adaptÕ P. 123 and /tcb/sidebyside switchÕ P. 125 .
\tcbsidebyside[title=The Triangle,
sidebyside adapt=left,
bicolor,colback=white,colbacklower=yellow!10,
fonttitle=\bfseries,center title,drop lifted shadow,
]{%
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill=red!20,draw=red!50!black]
(0,0) node[below]{A} -- (3,1) node[right]{B}
-- (1,4) node[above]{C} -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}%
}{%
\lipsum[1]
}
The Triangle
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit.

C Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae,
felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec
vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tris-
tique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis eges-
tas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla
et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu
tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est,
iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem
B vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor
nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Cur-
abitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus.
A Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis,
diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
122
N 2015-11-20 /tcb/sidebyside adapt=hside(s)i (no default, initially none)
The option allows the left-handed and/or right-handed side to determine the dimensions of
the box. This option is only valid inside \tcbsidebysideÕ P. 122 .
Feasible values for hside(s)i are:
• none: no measurement of left-handed and right-handed side.
• left: the actual width of the left-handed content is used to set /tcb/lefthand
widthÕ P. 119 .
• right: the actual width of the right-handed content is used to set /tcb/righthand
widthÕ P. 119 .
• both: the actual width of the left-handed and right-handed content is used
to set /tcb/lefthand widthÕ P. 119 , /tcb/righthand widthÕ P. 119 , and the overall
/tcb/widthÕ P. 34 .
\tcbsidebyside[sidebyside adapt=left,
title=Very important table,
beamer,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10,
lower separated=false,sidebyside gap=5mm
]{%
\begin{tabular}{|l|c|r|}\hline
left & center & right\\\hline
A & B & C\\\hline
D & E & F\\\hline
\end{tabular}
}{%
This table contains the most important figures for
all future actions. You may notice that B follows A,
C follows B, and so on.
}
Very important table
left center right This table contains the most important figures for all future ac-
A B C tions. You may notice that B follows A, C follows B, and so
D E F on.
\tcbsidebyside[sidebyside adapt=right,
blanker,sidebyside gap=5mm
]{%
\lipsum[2]
}{%
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
}
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor
lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus.
Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae
ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut
massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et
magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
123
\tcbsidebyside[sidebyside adapt=both,
enhanced,center,
title=Both sides adapted,
attach boxed title to top center={yshift=-2mm},
coltitle=black,boxed title style={colback=red!25},
segmentation style=solid,colback=red!5,colframe=red!50
]{%
A & B & C\\\hline
D & E & F\\\hline
\end{tabular}
}{%
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
}
Both sides adapted
left center right

A B C
D E F
124
N 2015-11-20 /tcb/sidebyside switch=true|false (default true, initially false)
If set to true, the hleft-handed contenti and hright-handed contenti of
\tcbsidebysideÕ P. 122 are switched. Obviously, this option is only valid inside
\tcbsidebysideÕ P. 122 .
The side switching can be made even/odd page sensitive, if used inside /tcb/if odd
pageÕ P. 101 .
\tcbsidebyside{Left}{Right}
\tcbsidebyside[sidebyside switch]{Left}{Right}
\tcbsidebyside[title=Very important table,

if odd page={sidebyside switch,sidebyside adapt=right,flushright title}%
{sidebyside adapt=left},
beamer,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10,
lower separated=false,sidebyside gap=5mm
]{%
A & B & C\\\hline
D & E & F\\\hline
\end{tabular}
}{%
This table contains the most important figures for
all future actions. You may notice that B follows A,
C follows B, and so on.
}
Left Right
Right Left
Very important table
This table contains the most important figures for all future ac- left center right
tions. You may notice that B follows A, C follows B, and so A B C
on. D E F
125
7 Saving and Loading of Verbatim Texts
The following macros are slightly modified versions of the original macros from the known
packages moreverb and verbatim. They are used implicitly inside of a tcolorbox environment,
but they can be used outside also.
\begin{tcbverbatimwrite}{hfile namei}
\end{tcbverbatimwrite}
Saves the henvironment contenti to a file named by hfile namei. TEX macros inside the
environment are not expanded.
\begin{tcbverbatimwrite}{\jobname_verbexp.tex}
This text is saved \textit{as is}.
\end{tcbverbatimwrite}
Now, we are using the file:\par

\input{\jobname_verbexp.tex}
Now, we are using the file:

This text is saved as is.
This environment may be used inside an own environment. Note, that inside the environ-
ment definition \tcbverbatimwrite has to be used instead of \begin{tcbverbatimwrite}
and \endtcbverbatimwrite instead of \end{tcbverbatimwrite}.
\newenvironment{myverbatim}{%
\begingroup\tcbverbatimwrite{\jobname_myverb.tex}}%
{\endtcbverbatimwrite\endgroup}
\begin{myverbatim}
This is the text which is saved by my own environment.
\end{myverbatim}

\input{\jobname_myverb.tex}

This is the text which is saved by my own environment.
\begin{tcbwritetemp}
\end{tcbwritetemp}
Has the same function as tcbverbatimwrite, but uses the key value of tempfile for the
file name.
This text is saved \textit{as is}.
\end{tcbwritetemp}

\tcbusetemp

This text is saved as is.
\tcbusetemp
Loads the current temporary file which was saved by tcbwritetemp.
126
N 2017-07-05 /tcb/verbatim ignore percent=true|false (default true, initially false)
If this option is set to be true, the percent sign % is silently ignored for
tcbverbatimwriteÕ P. 126 and all macros and environments which are built us-
ing tcbverbatimwriteÕ P. 126 , e.g. tcbwritetempÕ P. 126 , tcblistingÕ P. 299 , or
dispExampleÕ P. 464 .
This option may be useful for creating some special effects, but mainly it is intended to be
applied for documentation with DocStrip. The creation of this option was motivated by
Yudai Nakata. Note that this option is not getting reset by /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 .
Normal usage:
%\begin{center}\bfseries
This is my text.
%\end{center}
\end{tcbwritetemp}
Normal usage:
\tcbusetemp
This is my text.
\tcbset{verbatim ignore percent}
Option applied:
\bigskip Option applied:
This is my text.
This is my text.
%\end{center}
\end{tcbwritetemp}
\tcbusetemp
! Note that every percent sign is removed, also escaped ones.

Normal
% \tcbuselibrary{listings}
\def\percent{\%}
This is my 5\percent\ text
\begin{tcblisting}{title=Normal} and this is my 10\% text.
%\begin{center}\bfseries %\end{center}
and this is my 10\% text. This is my 5% text and this is my 10%
%\end{center} text.
\end{tcblisting}
Option applied
\begin{tcblisting}{
title=Option applied, \begin{center}\bfseries
verbatim ignore percent} This is my 5\percent\ text
%\begin{center}\bfseries and this is my 10\ text.
\end{center}
and this is my 10\% text.
%\end{center}
\end{tcblisting} This is my 5% text and this is
my 10 text.
127
8 Recording
The package provides some macros and options to take records during compilation. This is
done by LATEX file operations to save some data to a file for later usage. The main application
scenario is depicted in Section 8.3 on the next page where information about example solutions
is recorded and read again in Section 8.4 on page 132.
8.1 Macros
N 2014-11-28 \tcbstartrecording[hfile namei]

Opens a file denoted by hfile namei for writing the records. The default file name is
\jobname.records. See Section 8.3 on the next page for an example application.
N 2014-11-28 \tcbrecord{hcontenti}
Records any hcontenti to the record file. \tcbrecord is implemented as \immediate\write.
\tcbstartrecording has to be called before; otherwise, \tcbrecord is silently ignored.
\tcbrecord{\string\solution{\thetcbcounter}{solutions/exercise-\thetcbcounter.tex}}
N 2014-11-28 \tcbstoprecording
Closes the current record file which was opened by \tcbstartrecording before.
N 2014-11-28 \tcbinputrecords[hfile namei]
Opens a file denoted by hfile namei for reading the records via \input. The default file
name is the name of the last used record file for saving. \tcbstoprecording has to be
called before.
8.2 Options
N 2014-11-28 /tcb/record=hcontenti (style, no default)

Records any hcontenti to the record file, see \tcbrecord. This key can be used several
times to write several lines.
record={\string\solution{\thetcbcounter}{solutions/exercise-\thetcbcounter.tex}}
N 2014-11-28 /tcb/no recording

Disables \tcbrecord and /tcb/record inside the current group.
128
8.3 Example: Exercises
The following application example creates exercises and their corresponding solutions. Each
pair is generated inside a single tcolorbox where the solution is given below \tcblowerÕ P. 12 .
For every example, the solution part is saved by /tcb/savelowertoÕ P. 24 to a file. The saving
is recorded using /tcb/recordÕ P. 128 . To enlighten the possibilities, the second exercise has no
solution. Finally, the solutions are input in Section 8.4 on page 132.

\NewTColorBox[auto counter,number within=section]{exercise}{+!O{}}{%

enhanced,colframe=green!20!black,colback=yellow!10!white,coltitle=green!40!black,
underlay={\begin{tcbclipinterior}
\shade[inner color=green!80!yellow,outer color=yellow!10!white]
(interior.north west) circle (2cm);
\draw[help lines,step=5mm,yellow!80!black,shift={(interior.north west)}]
(interior.south west) grid (interior.north east);
\end{tcbclipinterior}},
title={Exercise~\thetcbcounter:},
label={exercise@\thetcbcounter},
attach title to upper=\quad,
after upper={\par\hfill\textcolor{green!40!black}%
{\itshape Solution on page~\pageref{solution@\thetcbcounter}}},
lowerbox=ignored,
savelowerto=solutions/exercise-\thetcbcounter.tex,
record={\string\solution{\thetcbcounter}{solutions/exercise-\thetcbcounter.tex}},
#1
}
\NewTotalTColorBox{\solution}{mm}{%
enhanced,colframe=red!20!black,colback=yellow!10!white,coltitle=red!40!black,
\shade[inner color=red!50!yellow,outer color=yellow!10!white]
(interior.north west) circle (2cm);
\draw[help lines,step=5mm,yellow!80!black,shift={(interior.north west)}]
(interior.south west) grid (interior.north east);
title={Solution of Exercise~\ref{exercise@#1} on page~\pageref{exercise@#1}:},
phantomlabel={solution@#1},
attach title to upper=\par,
}{\input{#2}}
\tcbset{no solution/.style={no recording,after upper=}}
\tcbstartrecording
\begin{exercise}
Compute the derivative of the following function:
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=\sin((\sin x)^2)
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( \sin((\sin x)^2) \right)'
=\cos((\sin x)^2) 2\sin x \cos x.
\end{align*}
129
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}[no solution]
It holds:
\begin{equation*}
\frac{d}{dx}\left(\ln|x|\right) = \frac{1}{x}.
\end{equation*}
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=(\sin(\sin x))^2
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( (\sin(\sin x))^2 \right)'
=2\sin(\sin x)\cos(\sin x)\cos x.
\end{align*}
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=\sqrt{x^3-6x^2+2x}
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( \sqrt{x^3-6x^2+2x} \right)'
= \frac{3x^2-12x+2}{2\sqrt{x^3-6x^2+2x}}.
\end{align*}
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=\left(\frac{2+3x}{1-2x}\right)^3
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( \left(\frac{2+3x}{1-2x}\right)^3 \right)'
= 3 \left(\frac{2+3x}{1-2x}\right)^2 \frac{(1-2x)3-(2+3x)(-2)}{(1-2x)^2}
= \frac{21(2+3x)^2}{(1-2x)^4}.
\end{align*}
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=\frac{\cos x}{(\tan 2x)^2}
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( \frac{\cos x}{(\tan 2x)^2} \right)'
= \left( \frac{\cos x (\cos 2x)^2}{(\sin 2x)^2} \right)'\\
&= \frac{(\sin 2x)^2 [(-\sin x)(\cos 2x)^2+(\cos x)4\cos 2x (-\sin 2x)]
- \cos x (\cos 2x)^2 4\sin 2x \cos 2x}{(\sin 2x)^4}\\
&= -\frac{\cos(2x) [\sin x \sin 2x \cos 2x+ 4\cos x(\sin 2x)^2
+ 4 \cos x (\cos 2x)^2]}{(\sin 2x)^3}\\
130
&= -\frac{\cos(2x) [\sin x \sin 2x \cos 2x+ 4\cos x]}{(\sin 2x)^3}.
\end{align*}
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=\cos((2x^2+3)^3)
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( \cos((2x^2+3)^3) \right)'
=-\sin((2x^2+3)^3) 3(2x^2+3)^2 2\cdot 2x\\
&=-12x(2x^2+3)^2\sin((2x^2+3)^3).
\end{align*}
\end{exercise}
\begin{exercise}
\begin{equation*}
f(x)=(x^2+1)\sqrt{x^4+1}
\end{equation*}
\tcblower
The derivative is:
\begin{align*}
f'(x) &= \left( (x^2+1)\sqrt{x^4+1} \right)'
= 2x\sqrt{x^4+1} + \frac{2x^3(x^2+1)}{\sqrt{x^4+1}}.
\end{align*}
\end{exercise}
\tcbstoprecording
Exercise 8.1: Compute the derivative of the following function:
f (x) = sin((sin x)2 )
Solution on page 132
Exercise 8.2: It holds:

d 1
(ln x) = .
dx x
f (x) = (sin(sin x))2

p
f (x) = x3 − 6x2 + 2x
131
3
2 + 3x
f (x) =
1 − 2x

cos x
f (x) =
(tan 2x)2
f (x) = cos((2x2 + 3)3 )

p
f (x) = (x2 + 1) x4 + 1
8.4 Example: Solutions
This concludes the example given in Section 8.3 on page 129. Now, the saved and recorded
solutions are included.
\tcbinputrecords
Solution of Exercise 8.1 on page 131:

The derivative is:
0
f 0 (x) = sin((sin x)2 ) = cos((sin x)2 )2 sin x cos x.

The derivative is:
0
f 0 (x) = (sin(sin x))2 = 2 sin(sin x) cos(sin x) cos x.

The derivative is:
p 0 3x2 − 12x + 2
f 0 (x) = x3 − 6x2 + 2x = √ .
2 x3 − 6x2 + 2x
132
The derivative is:
3 !0 2
2 + 3x 2 + 3x (1 − 2x)3 − (2 + 3x)(−2) 21(2 + 3x)2
f (x) =
0
=3 = .
1 − 2x 1 − 2x (1 − 2x)2 (1 − 2x)4

The derivative is:
0 !0
cos x cos x(cos 2x)2
f (x) =
0
=
(tan 2x)2 (sin 2x)2
(sin 2x)2 [(− sin x)(cos 2x)2 + (cos x)4 cos 2x(− sin 2x)] − cos x(cos 2x)2 4 sin 2x cos 2x
=
(sin 2x)4
cos(2x)[sin x sin 2x cos 2x + 4 cos x(sin 2x)2 + 4 cos x(cos 2x)2 ]
=−
(sin 2x)3
cos(2x)[sin x sin 2x cos 2x + 4 cos x]
=− .
(sin 2x)3

The derivative is:
0
f 0 (x) = cos((2x2 + 3)3 ) = − sin((2x2 + 3)3 )3(2x2 + 3)2 2 · 2x
= −12x(2x2 + 3)2 sin((2x2 + 3)3 ).

The derivative is:
p 0 p 2x3 (x2 + 1)
f 0 (x) = (x2 + 1) x4 + 1 = 2x x4 + 1 + √ .
x4 + 1
133
9 Technical Overview and Customization
This section provides a technical overview of the skin concept of tcolorbox. For most appli-
cations of tcolorbox, one will not need to know the bells and whistles described herein. You
may proceed to Section 10 on page 148 where the customization options for most users are
documented.
The following explanations also cover options and settings from the skins library, see Sec-
LIB
tion 10 on page 148.
9.1 Skins and Drawing Engines
From a technical point of view, a skin is a style definition for the appearance of a tcolorbox.
The core package provides some additional option keys for skins but only two skins called
standardÕ P. 204 and standard jigsawÕ P. 205 . The skins library adds several more skins. To
LIB
change to a skin, only one option from the core package has to be set.
/tcb/skin=hnamei (style, no default, initially standard)
Sets the current skin to hnamei. This is a style definition which sets all the following keys,
i. e. for many use cases there is nothing more to do.
\tcbset{colback=Salmon!50!white,colframe=FireBrick!75!black,
width=(\linewidth-8mm)/2,before=,after=\hfill,equal height group=ske}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=My title]

This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[skin=beamer,beamer,adjusted title=My title]
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
My title My title
This is my content. This is my content.
/tcb/skin first=hnamei (style, no default, initially standard)

If the box is set to be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the skin for the
first part of the break sequence is set to hnamei, see Subsection 17.8 on page 378. Typically,
this key is set by a /tcb/skin.
/tcb/skin middle=hnamei (style, no default, initially standard)
middle parts (if any) of the break sequence is set to hnamei, see Subsection 17.8 on page
378. Typically, this key is set by a /tcb/skin.
/tcb/skin last=hnamei (style, no default, initially standard)
last part of the break sequence is set to hnamei, see Subsection 17.8 on page 378. Typically,
this key is set by a /tcb/skin.
134
/tcb/graphical environment=hnamei (no default, initially pgfpicture)
Sets the graphical environment for the tcolorbox to hnamei. Feasible values are
pgfpicture and tikzpicture or environments which inherit from one of these two. This
key is set by a /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 and may seldom be used directly.
The skin of a tcolorbox is drawn by up to four engines. Afterwards, the text content is drawn
which is not part of a skin. The four steps are:
1. The frame of the box, drawn by /tcb/frame engine.
2. The interior of the box. The interior of a box with title is drawn differently from a box
without title. /tcb/interior titled engine or /tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 is used
to draw the interior.
3. The segmentation (line) of the box, if there is a lower part; drawn by /tcb/segmentation
engineÕ P. 136 .
4. The title area of the box, if there is a title and /tcb/title filledÕ P. 27 is set to true;
drawn by /tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 .
/tcb/frame engine=hnamei (no default, initially standard)
Sets the frame drawing engine for a box to hnamei. Typically, this key is set by a
/tcb/skinÕ P. 134 . Feasible values for hnamei are:
• standard: the original code from the core package,
• path: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathjigsaw: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathfirst: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathfirstjigsaw: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathmiddle: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathmiddlejigsaw: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathlast: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• pathlastjigsaw: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 ,
• freelance: deprecated.
• spartan: a quite spartan code.
• empty: draw nothing.
/tcb/interior titled engine=hnamei (no default, initially standard)
Sets the interior drawing engine for a titled box to hnamei. Typically, this key is set by a
• path: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
• pathfirst: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
• pathmiddle: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
• pathlast: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
135
/tcb/interior engine=hnamei (no default, initially standard)
Sets the interior drawing engine for an untitled box to hnamei. Typically, this key is set
by a /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 . Feasible values for hnamei are:
• path: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
• pathfirst: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
• pathmiddle: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
• pathlast: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
/tcb/segmentation engine=hnamei (no default, initially standard)
Sets the segmentation (line) drawing engine for a box to hnamei. Typically, this key is set
by a /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 . Feasible values for hnamei are:
• path: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/segmentation styleÕ P. 151 ,
/tcb/title engine=hnamei (no default, initially standard)
Sets the title area drawing engine for a titled box to hnamei. Typically, this key is set by a
• path: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 ,
• pathfirst: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 ,
• pathmiddle: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 ,
• pathlast: a tikz path which is controlled by /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 ,
! using code option keys, see Section 9.2 on page 138.

After an engine is set to an initializing value, the resulting graphical code can be changed
136
/tcb/geometry nodes=true|false (default true, initially false)
If set to true, up to four tikz nodes are defined for a tcolorbox which are named frame,
interior, segmentation, and title. These nodes describe the boundaries of the equally
named parts of a tcolorbox. They are used by most engines based on TikZ. Typically, this
key is set automatically by a /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 .
\tcbset{colback=Salmon!50!white,colframe=FireBrick!75!black,
width=(\linewidth-8mm)/2,before=,after=\hfill,equal height group=geon}
\begin{tcolorbox}[adjusted title=The title]

The upper part.\tcblower The lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,adjusted title=The title,
frame code={\path[draw=red,fill=red!25]
(frame.south west) rectangle (frame.north east);},
interior titled code={\path[draw=blue,fill=blue!25]
(interior.south west) rectangle (interior.north east);},
segmentation code={\path[draw=green,fill=green!25]
(segmentation.south west) rectangle (segmentation.north east);},
title code={\path[draw=black,fill=brown!75!black]
(title.south west) rectangle (title.north east);}]
The upper part.\tcblower The lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
The title The title
The upper part. The upper part.
The lower part. The lower part.
137
9.2 Code Option Keys
The following code options are applicable for all skins. The used hgraphical codei can be any
pgf code. For all skins with exception of standardÕ P. 204 and standard jigsawÕ P. 205 , the
hgraphical codei can also be any TikZ code.
/tcb/frame code=hgraphical codei (code, default from standard)
The given hgraphical codei is used for drawing the frame of the box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,frame code={
\foreach \n in {north east,north west,south east,south west}
{\path [fill=red!75!black] (interior.\n) circle (3mm); }; }]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/frame empty (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/frame code to empty. This option removes the drawing
of the frame. Alternatively, use /tcb/frame hiddenÕ P. 149 .
/tcb/interior titled code=hgraphical codei (code, default from standard)
The given hgraphical codei is used for drawing the interior of the box, if the box comes with
a title.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,interior titled code={

\path[draw=red!5!white,line width=5mm,line cap=round]
([xshift=3mm,yshift=-3mm]interior.north west)
--([xshift=-3mm,yshift=3mm]interior.south east)
([xshift=3mm,yshift=3mm]interior.south west)
--([xshift=-3mm,yshift=-3mm]interior.north east);}]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
/tcb/interior titled empty (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/interior titled code to empty. This option removes
the drawing of the untitled interior. Alternatively, use /tcb/interior hiddenÕ P. 150 .
138
/tcb/interior code=hgraphical codei (code, default from standard)
The given hgraphical codei is used for drawing the interior of the box, if the box is without
a title.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,interior code={
\path[draw=red!5!white,line width=5mm,line cap=round]
([xshift=3mm,yshift=-3mm]interior.north west)
--([xshift=-3mm,yshift=3mm]interior.south east)
([xshift=3mm,yshift=3mm]interior.south west)
--([xshift=-3mm,yshift=-3mm]interior.north east);}]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/interior empty (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/interior code to empty. This option removes the
drawing of the interior. Alternatively, use /tcb/interior hiddenÕ P. 150 .
/tcb/segmentation code=hgraphical codei (code, default from standard)
The given hgraphical codei is used for drawing the segmentation area of the box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,segmentation code={

\path[top color=red!5!white,bottom color=red!5!white,middle color=blue]
(segmentation.south west) rectangle (segmentation.north east);}]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
/tcb/segmentation empty (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/segmentation code to empty. This option removes the
drawing of the segmentation line. Alternatively, use /tcb/segmentation hiddenÕ P. 151 .
139
/tcb/title code=hgraphical codei (code, default from standard)
The given hgraphical codei is used for drawing the title area of the box.
coltitle=black}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,title code={

\path[draw=yellow,solid,decorate,line width=2mm,
decoration={coil,aspect=0,segment length=10.1mm}]
([xshift=1mm]title.west) -- ([xshift=-1mm]title.east);}]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
/tcb/title empty (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/title code to empty. This option removes the drawing
of the title area. Alternatively, use /tcb/title hiddenÕ P. 152 .
140
9.3 Subskins
A subskin is a new /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 based on an existing skin which is extended or changed.
Never use geometry settings or bounding box options inside a subskin definition! If one skin
is replaced by another skin, the overall bounding box should stay constant. Especially, if a
! skin is used for a breakable box, unpredictable and unpleasant results could arise otherwise.
If you want to change the geometry also, use an additional style. See the skin beamerÕ P. 228
and the style /tcb/beamerÕ P. 228 as pattern.
\tcbsubskin{hnamei}{hbase skini}{hoptionsi}
Creates a new skin hnamei which inherits all properties of an existing hbase skini plus the
given hoptionsi. The new skin hnamei can be used as value for the keys /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 ,
/tcb/skin firstÕ P. 134 , /tcb/skin middleÕ P. 134 , and /tcb/skin lastÕ P. 134 . As hbase
skini, one can take standardÕ P. 204 , emptyÕ P. 237 , enhancedÕ P. 206 , or any skin from the
skins library, see Section 10 on page 148.
LIB
\tcbsubskin{mycross}{empty}{frame code={%
\draw[red,line width=5pt] (frame.south west)--(frame.north east);
\draw[red,line width=5pt] (frame.north west)--(frame.south east);},
skin first=mycross,skin middle=mycross,skin last=mycross }
\begin{tcolorbox}[skin=mycross]
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
/tcb/skin first is subskin of={hbase skini}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Creates a new unnamed skin which inherits all properties of an existing hbase skini plus the
given hoptionsi. This skin is set as /tcb/skin firstÕ P. 134 .
See a detailed example on page 243.
/tcb/skin middle is subskin of={hbase skini}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
given hoptionsi. This skin is set as /tcb/skin middleÕ P. 134 .
/tcb/skin last is subskin of={hbase skini}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
given hoptionsi. This skin is set as /tcb/skin lastÕ P. 134 .
141
9.4 Drawing Scheme
Depending on the complexity of a tcolorbox definition, the resulting box is drawn in a more
or less complex series of steps.
To document and demonstrate these drawing steps, we consider the following box definition:
\newtcolorbox{testbox}[1][]{enhanced,title=Test Box,
boxrule=1mm,titlerule=0.5mm,colframe=blue!50!black,
interior style={top color=blue!20!green!50!white,bottom color=blue!20!yellow!50!white},
colbacktitle=blue!50!green!90!white,segmentation style={solid},
fonttitle=\bfseries,drop fuzzy shadow,borderline={0.3mm}{0.35mm}{yellow!50!white},
underlay={\path[fill image opacity=0.15,fill image scale=0.9,
fill stretch picture={\draw[blue,line width=2mm] circle (1);}]
(interior.south west) rectangle (interior.north east);},
watermark text={Watermark},watermark color={green!20!white},
finish={\begin{tcbclipframe}
\path[bottom color=black,top color=black!50!white,opacity=0.1]
(frame.south west) -- (frame.south east) -- (frame.north east) -- cycle;
\path[top color=white,bottom color=black!50!white,opacity=0.1]
(frame.south west) -- (frame.north east) -- (frame.north west) -- cycle;
\end{tcbclipframe}},#1}
For this definition, we get the maximal number of drawing steps:
Test Box
1. shadow
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• Section 10.6 on page 182.
Test Box
2. frame
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• /tcb/colframeÕ P. 27 , /tcb/opacityframeÕ P. 51
• /tcb/frame codeÕ P. 138
• /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148
142
Test Box
3. interior
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• /tcb/colbackÕ P. 27 , /tcb/opacitybackÕ P. 51
• /tcb/interior codeÕ P. 139 , /tcb/interior titled codeÕ P. 138
• /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149
Test Box
4. title area
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• /tcb/colbacktitleÕ P. 27 , /tcb/opacitybacktitleÕ P. 51
• /tcb/title codeÕ P. 140
• /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151
Test Box
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis.5.Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
segmentation
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• /tcb/lower separatedÕ P. 25
• /tcb/segmentation codeÕ P. 139
• /tcb/segmentation styleÕ P. 151
143
Test Box
6. border line
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• Section 10.5 on page 177
Test Box
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse
7. underlay ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
luctus mauris.
Lower part

Test Box
Watermark
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse
8. overlay ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
luctus mauris.
Lower part

144
Test Box
Watermark
9. text content
luctus mauris.
Lower part
• /tcb/colupperÕ P. 28 , /tcb/collowerÕ P. 28 , /tcb/coltitleÕ P. 28

• /tcb/fontupperÕ P. 29 , /tcb/fontlowerÕ P. 29 , /tcb/fonttitleÕ P. 29
• /tcb/opacityupperÕ P. 52 , /tcb/opacitylowerÕ P. 52 , /tcb/opacitytitleÕ P. 52
Test Box
Watermark
10. finish
luctus mauris.
Lower part
All together, the box is drawn:
\begin{testbox}
\lipsum[2]
\tcblower
Lower part
\end{testbox}
Test Box
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo.
Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed ac-
cumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et
Watermark
Lower part
145
9.5 Useful Properties
The following macros describe certain properties which may be used for the drawing scheme, see
Section 9.4 on page 142. Sometimes, they are even available inside the box content. All of them
are considered to be read-only and should never be redefined by the user.
N 2016-02-16 \tcbheightspace
forced and the natural size is hold by \tcbheightspace. This macro is not usable inside
the box content, but for skins or inside /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 , /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 , etc.
If such a space information is needed inside the box content, see /tcb/space toÕ P. 59
instead.
\newtcolorbox{testbox}[2][]{enhanced,size=fbox,
colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,height=#2,
underlay={\node[above,inner sep=3pt] at (interior.south){%
\includegraphics[width=\tcbtextwidth,height=\tcbheightspace-3pt]{goldshade.png}};
},
#1}
\begin{testbox}{3cm}
This is my box. The space is filled with a picture.
\end{testbox}
\begin{testbox}{2cm}
\end{testbox}
N 2016-02-16 \tcbtextwidth
This property describes the box content width.
• If there also is a lower part, it describes the width of the upper part.
• For /tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 boxes, it describes the combined text width plus segmen-
tation.
• This property can be used inside the box content text with exception of /tcb/fitÕ P. 413
boxes.
• \tcbtextwidth can be used for all box types for skins or inside /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 ,
/tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 , etc.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=blue!75!black]
Inside a box: \tcbtextwidth\ (=\the\linewidth).
\end{tcolorbox}
Inside a box: 370.74823pt (=370.74823pt).
146
N 2016-02-16 \tcbtextheight
This property describes the designated box content height. If the box is larger than the
natural height, the actual content will be smaller than \tcbtextheight.
• For boxes with a fixed /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 , this property can be used inside the box
content text. For other boxes, it denotes 0pt inside the box content.
• \tcbtextheight can be used for all box types for skins or inside /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 ,
/tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 , etc.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,colframe=blue!75!black,
underlay={\node[left,red] at (frame.east) {Here: \tcbtextheight};}]
Inside a box with natural height: \tcbtextheight.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,colframe=blue!75!black,height=1cm,
underlay={\node[left,red] at (frame.east) {Here: \tcbtextheight};}]
Inside a box with fixed height: \tcbtextheight.
\end{tcolorbox}
Inside a box with natural height: 0pt. Here: 7.95pt
Inside a box with fixed height: 8.5359pt. Here: 8.5359pt
N 2017-04-25 \tcbsegmentstate
This macro contains 0, 1, or 2. Itis set for every unbroken box and every broken partial
box with the following meaning:
• 0: The current (partial) box contains only an upper part.
• 1: The current (partial) box contains an upper and a lower part. The segmentation
node can be used for positioning.
• 2: The current (partial) box contains only a lower part. This can only be true for
parts of breakable boxes.
Skins like bicolorÕ P. 219 use this property to paint the (partial) boxes.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster equal height,enhanced,
watermark text=\tcbsegmentstate]
\begin{tcolorbox}Upper part\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Upper part\tcblower Lower part\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
Upper part
0 Upper part
Lower part 1
147
10 Library skins
LIB
The library is loaded by a package option or inside the preamble by:
\tcbuselibrary{skins}
This also loads the package tikz [22]. Typically but not necessarily, the following skins use
tikz instead of pgf.
10.1 Style Option Keys
The following style options are applicable for all skins which use engines of type path, pathfirst,
pathmiddle, or pathlast. Especially, the skin enhancedÕ P. 206 supports all of them and
standardÕ P. 204 none.
/tcb/frame style=htikz keysi (style, no default)
The htikz keysi are used inside the tikz path command for drawing the frame of the box.
This option is available if the /tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 is set to path, pathfirst,
pathmiddle, or pathlast. It is not available for standard.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title, My title

frame style={left color=red!75!black,
right color=blue!75!black}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/frame style image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the frame with an external image referenced by hfile namei. For advanced fea-
tures like blending of a picture with the background, use /tcb/frame style together with
/tikz/fill stretch imageÕ P. 257 .
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,fonttitle=\bfseries}
My title
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,
frame style image=blueshade.png] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
148
/tcb/frame style tile={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)
Fills the frame with a tile pattern based on an external image referenced by hfile namei. The
hgraphics optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command. For advanced
features like blending of a picture with the background, use /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 to-
gether with /tikz/fill tile imageÕ P. 261 .
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,coltitle=red!30!black,
opacityback=0.75,fonttitle=\bfseries}
My title
frame style tile={width=1cm}{pink_marble.png}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/frame hidden (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for frame style={draw=none,fill=none}. Depending on the skin, this
option switches off the drawing of the frame. Alternatively, use /tcb/frame emptyÕ P. 138 .
fonttitle=\bfseries,coltitle=black}
My title
frame hidden] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/interior style=htikz keysi (style, no default)

The htikz keysi are used inside the tikz path command for drawing the interior of the
box. They are used for the titled and for the untitled version as well.
This option is available if the /tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 or /tcb/interior
engineÕ P. 136 is set to path, pathfirst, pathmiddle, or pathlast. It is not available for
standard.
\tcbset{colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}

interior style={left color=red!20!white,
right color=yellow!50!white}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
149
/tcb/interior style image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
Fills the interior with an external image referenced by hfile namei. For advanced features
like blending of a picture with the background, use /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 together
with /tikz/fill stretch imageÕ P. 257 .
My title
interior style image=goldshade.png] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/interior style tile={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)

Fills the interior with a tile pattern based on an external image referenced by hfile namei.
The hgraphics optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command. For
advanced features like blending of a picture with the background, use /tcb/interior
styleÕ P. 149 together with /tikz/fill tile imageÕ P. 261 .
My title
interior style tile={width=2cm}{crinklepaper.png}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/interior hidden (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for interior style={draw=none,fill=none}. Depending on the skin,
this option switches off the drawing of the interior. Alternatively, use /tcb/interior
emptyÕ P. 139 and/or /tcb/interior titled emptyÕ P. 138 .
\tcbset{frame style={top color=red!20!white,

bottom color=red!20!white!75!black},
fonttitle=\bfseries,coltitle=black} My title
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title, This is a tcolorbox.

interior hidden]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. This is the lower part.
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
150
/tcb/segmentation style=htikz keysi (style, no default)
The htikz keysi are used inside the tikz path command for drawing the segmentation line
of the box.
This option is available if the /tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 is set to path. It is not
available for standard.
My title
segmentation style={double=white,draw=blue, This is a tcolorbox.
double distance=1pt,solid}]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/segmentation hidden (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for segmentation style={draw=none,fill=none}. Depending on
the skin, this option switches off the drawing of the segmentation line. See also
/tcb/lower separatedÕ P. 25 which has the same effect for most skins. Alternatively, use
/tcb/segmentation emptyÕ P. 139 .
My title
enhanced,segmentation hidden] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/title style=htikz keysi (style, no default)

The htikz keysi are used inside the tikz path command for drawing the title area of the
box.
This option is available if the /tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 is set to path, pathfirst,
pathmiddle, or pathlast. It is not available for standard.
coltitle=blue!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}
My title
title style={left color=blue!15!yellow, This is a tcolorbox.
right color=red!85!black}]
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
151
/tcb/title style image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
Fills the title area with an external image referenced by hfile namei. For advanced features
like blending of a picture with the background, use /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 together with
/tikz/fill stretch imageÕ P. 257 .
\tcbset{colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,
My title
title style image=blueshade.png] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/title style tile={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)

Fills the title area with a tile pattern based on an external image referenced by hfile
namei. The hgraphics optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command.
For advanced features like blending of a picture with the background, use /tcb/title
styleÕ P. 151 together with /tikz/fill tile imageÕ P. 261 .
coltitle=blue!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}
My title
title style tile={width=1cm}{pink_marble.png}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/title hidden (style, no value)

This is a shortcut for title style={draw=none,fill=none}. Depending on the skin, this
option switches off the drawing of the title background. See also /tcb/title filledÕ P. 27
for a similar effect. Alternatively, use /tcb/title emptyÕ P. 140 .
My title
enhanced,title hidden] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
152
N 2015-01-14 /tcb/titlerule style=htikz keysi (style, no default)
The htikz keysi are used to draw a title rule, i.e. a rule below the optional title. The
width of the rule is controlled by /tcb/titleruleÕ P. 36 . It may be set directly to a
smaller width to create mixed effects with the standard rule. This option is implemented
as an /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 . Thus, it is not available for standardÕ P. 204 and standard
jigsawÕ P. 205 , but for all other skins, e.g. enhancedÕ P. 206 . As an underlay, this option can
be used multiple times and is removed by /tcb/no underlayÕ P. 195 .
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
colbacktitle=red!50!yellow,fonttitle=\bfseries, My title
title=My title,
titlerule=1mm, This is a tcolorbox.
titlerule style=yellow ]
\end{tcolorbox}
colbacktitle=red!50!yellow,fonttitle=\bfseries, My title
title=My title,
titlerule=1mm, This is a tcolorbox.
titlerule style={yellow,line width=0.5mm} ]
\end{tcolorbox}
colbacktitle=red!50!yellow,fonttitle=\bfseries,
frame hidden, My title
title=My title,
boxrule=0pt,titlerule=1mm, This is a tcolorbox.
titlerule style=red!50!black ]
\end{tcolorbox}
%\usetikzlibrary{arrows.meta}
\begin{tcolorbox}[empty,
coltitle=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
borderline horizontal={0.5mm}{0pt}{red!50!white}, My title
title=My title,
titlerule style={red, This is a tcolorbox.
arrows = {Hooks[arc=270]-Hooks[arc=270]}} ]
\end{tcolorbox}
153
The combined TikZ style applied to frame, interior, and title background can used by authors
in customizing code.
/tikz/tcb fill frame (style, no value)
This is a TikZ style which is finally applied to the frame of the box.
% \tcbuselibrary{hooks}
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=red!5!white,
frame code app={\path[tcb fill frame] My title
([yshift=-2mm]frame.north)
circle (8mm); } } This is a tcolorbox.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title] This is the lower part.

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tikz/tcb fill interior (style, no value)

This is a TikZ style which is finally applied to the interior of the box.
interior titled code app={\path[tcb fill interior]
([yshift=-0.1pt]interior.north east) My title
--([yshift=3pt]interior.north)
--([yshift=-0.1pt]interior.north west) This is a tcolorbox.
--cycle;} }
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
/tikz/tcb fill title (style, no value)

This is a TikZ style which is finally applied to the title area of the box.
colbacktitle=blue!75!black, My title
title code app={\path[tcb fill title]
(title) circle (5mm); } } This is a tcolorbox.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title] This is the lower part.

\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
154
10.2 Boxed Title Option Keys
10.2.1 Boxed Title Placement
The following options place the title text into an own \tcboxÕ P. 14 . This boxed title can be
customized independently from the main box using /tcb/boxed title styleÕ P. 159 . The place-
ment can be influenced by hboxtitle optionsi.
/tcb/attach boxed title to top left={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)
The title is boxed with a \tcboxÕ P. 14 and attached to the top left corner of the main box.

attach boxed title to top left]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/attach boxed title to top center={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

The title is boxed with a \tcboxÕ P. 14 and attached to the top of the main box.

attach boxed title to top center]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/attach boxed title to top right={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

The title is boxed with a \tcboxÕ P. 14 and attached to the top right corner of the main box.

attach boxed title to top right]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/attach boxed title to bottom left={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

The title is boxed with a \tcboxÕ P. 14 and attached to the bottom left corner of the main
box.
attach boxed title to bottom left] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox} My title
/tcb/attach boxed title to bottom center={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

The title is boxed with a \tcboxÕ P. 14 and attached to the bottom of the main box.
attach boxed title to bottom center] This is a tcolorbox.
/tcb/attach boxed title to bottom right={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

The title is boxed with a \tcboxÕ P. 14 and attached to the bottom right corner of the main
box.
attach boxed title to bottom right] This is a tcolorbox.
155
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/attach boxed title to top={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)
This is a convenient style to mimic a standard title. It uses /tcb/attach boxed title to
top centerÕ P. 155 , /tcb/minipage boxed titleÕ P. 163 , and sizes the boxed title to match
the base box.
attach boxed title to top, My title
boxed title style={colframe=red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/attach boxed title to top*={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

In contrast to /tcb/attach boxed title to top, this style uses smaller left and right
rules to avoid previewer glitches. Typically, one would not use different colors for the frame
as in the example below.
attach boxed title to top*, My title
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/attach boxed title to bottom={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

This is a convenient style to produce a standard-like title at the bottom of the
box. It uses /tcb/attach boxed title to bottom centerÕ P. 155 , /tcb/minipage boxed
titleÕ P. 163 , and sizes the boxed title to match the base box.
attach boxed title to bottom, This is a tcolorbox.
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. My title
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/attach boxed title to bottom*={hboxtitle optionsi} (style, default empty)

In contrast to /tcb/attach boxed title to top, this style uses smaller left and right
rules to avoid previewer glitches.
attach boxed title to bottom*] This is a tcolorbox.
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/flip title={hoptionsi} (style, default empty)

This style combines /tcb/attach boxed title to bottom* with /tcb/boxed title
styleÕ P. 159 . The hoptionsi are given to /tcb/boxed title styleÕ P. 159 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[tile,flip title={sharp corners},

title=My title,colback=red!10,
colbacktitle=red!75!black]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. My title
\end{tcolorbox}
156
10.2.2 Options for the Boxed Title Placement
The hboxtitle optionsi of the keys described above are shift values. The dimensions of the boxed
title are stored into two macros \tcboxedtitleheight and \tcboxedtitlewidth. These macros
can be used inside the following hboxtitle optionsi:
/tcb/boxtitle/xshift=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
The boxed title is shifted by hlengthi in the horizontal direction.
attach boxed title to top left={xshift=-2mm}, My title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=blue}]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/boxtitle/yshift=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

The boxed title is shifted by hlengthi in the vertical direction.
attach boxed title to top center=
{yshift=-\tcboxedtitleheight/2}, My title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=blue}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/boxtitle/yshifttext=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

The text inside the main box by hlengthi to give room for e. g. a sunken title.
My title
{yshift=-3mm,yshifttext=-1mm},
boxed title style={size=small,colback=blue}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/boxtitle/yshift*=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

Sets /tcb/boxtitle/yshift and /tcb/boxtitle/yshifttext the same time.
/tcb/boxtitle/yshifttext is only set if necessary.
attach boxed title to top center={yshift*=-3mm}, My title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=blue}]
\end{tcolorbox}
The bounding box of the resulting total tcolorbox is adapted automatically to the vertical
! dimensions of the boxed title. Possible horizontal enlargements are not automatically
computed.
attach boxed title to top left=
{xshift=-2mm,yshift=-2mm}, My title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=blue},
show bounding box]
\end{tcolorbox}
157
10.2.3 Options for the Boxed Title Box
The boxed title options are implemented as an underlay, see Section 10.8 on page 195.
! Therefore, a boxed title is not drawn, if a skin does not support underlays like
standardÕ P. 204 . Still, the room for the boxed titles gets reserved in these cases.
! code
A TikZ node title is produced by a boxed title which can be used inside /tcb/frame
Õ P. 138 , /tcb/interior codeÕ P. 139 , underlays, overlays, and finishes.
A boxed title is almost always the first underlay. The only exceptions are underlays defined
!
by /tcb/underlay boxed titleÕ P. 196 which are drawn before. Additionally, underlays
defined by /tcb/underlay boxed titleÕ P. 196 are only drawn, if a boxed title is actually
set. They are ignored, if there is no boxed title.
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/boxed title size=hsizei (no default, initially title)

This setting defines the basic size for the title box. Further settings can be applied using
/tcb/boxed title styleÕ P. 159 . Feasible values for hsizei are:
• title: Sets the size according to /tcb/sizeÕ P. 44 =title.
• standard: No size setting. Typically, this is identical to /tcb/sizeÕ P. 44 =normal.
• copy: The size values for a title of the base box are copied for the title box.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,enhanced,boxrule=0.4pt,
title=My title,attach boxed title to top center]
\begin{tcolorbox}[boxed title size=title]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[boxed title size=standard]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[boxed title size=copy]
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
My title
My title My title
158
U 2016-02-26 /tcb/boxed title style=hoptionsi (style, initially empty)
By default, a boxed title is dimensioned with /tcb/sizeÕ P. 44 =title and inherits the
/tcb/skinÕ P. 134 and /tcb/colframeÕ P. 27 of the main box. Also, the /tcb/colbackÕ P. 27
is inherited from the main /tcb/colbacktitleÕ P. 27 . Font and color of the title text are set
as usual. All other hoptionsi are set by the /tcb/boxed title style key. Since a boxed
title is set by \tcboxÕ P. 14 , all tcolorbox options are applicable here. If /tcb/boxed title
style is used several times, the hoptionsi are is appended.
fonttitle=\bfseries,coltitle=green!25!black,
My title
boxed title style={colframe=green!75!black, This is a tcolorbox.
colback=yellow!50!green}]
\end{tcolorbox}
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white,
arc=1mm,colbacktitle=red!10!white,
fonttitle=\bfseries,coltitle=red!50!black,
attach boxed title to top left=
{xshift=3.2mm,yshift=-0.50mm}, My title
boxed title style={skin=enhancedfirst jigsaw,
size=small,arc=1mm,bottom=-1mm, This is a tcolorbox.
interior style={fill=none,
top color=red!30!white,
bottom color=red!20!white}}]
\end{tcolorbox}
colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white,colbacktitle=blue!5!yellow!10!white,
fonttitle=\bfseries,coltitle=black,attach boxed title to top center=
{yshift=-0.25mm-\tcboxedtitleheight/2,yshifttext=2mm-\tcboxedtitleheight/2},
boxed title style={boxrule=0.5mm,
frame code={ \path[tcb fill frame] ([xshift=-4mm]frame.west)
-- (frame.north west) -- (frame.north east) -- ([xshift=4mm]frame.east)
-- (frame.south east) -- (frame.south west) -- cycle; },
interior code={ \path[tcb fill interior] ([xshift=-2mm]interior.west)
-- (interior.north west) -- (interior.north east)
-- ([xshift=2mm]interior.east) -- (interior.south east) -- (interior.south west)
-- cycle;} }]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
159
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[2][]{enhanced,skin=enhancedlast jigsaw,
attach boxed title to top left={xshift=-4mm,yshift=-0.5mm},
fonttitle=\bfseries\sffamily,varwidth boxed title=0.7\linewidth,
colbacktitle=blue!45!white,colframe=red!50!black,
interior style={top color=blue!10!white,bottom color=red!10!white},
boxed title style={empty,arc=0pt,outer arc=0pt,boxrule=0pt},
underlay boxed title={
\fill[blue!45!white] (title.north west) -- (title.north east)
-- +(\tcboxedtitleheight-1mm,-\tcboxedtitleheight+1mm)
-- ([xshift=4mm,yshift=0.5mm]frame.north east) -- +(0mm,-1mm)
-- (title.south west) -- cycle;
\fill[blue!45!white!50!black] ([yshift=-0.5mm]frame.north west)
-- +(-0.4,0) -- +(0,-0.3) -- cycle;
\fill[blue!45!white!50!black] ([yshift=-0.5mm]frame.north east)
-- +(0,-0.3) -- +(0.4,0) -- cycle; },
title={#2},#1}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
My title
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[2][]{enhanced,
attach boxed title to top left={xshift=1cm,yshift=-2mm},
fonttitle=\bfseries,varwidth boxed title=0.7\linewidth,
colbacktitle=green!45!white,coltitle=green!10!black,colframe=green!50!black,
interior style={top color=yellow!10!white,bottom color=green!10!white},
boxed title style={boxrule=0.75mm,colframe=white,
borderline={0.1mm}{0mm}{green!50!black},
borderline={0.1mm}{0.75mm}{green!50!black},
interior style={top color=green!10!white,bottom color=green!10!white,
middle color=green!50!white},
drop fuzzy shadow},
title={#2},#1}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
My title
160
\newtcolorbox{flipbox}[2][]{
enhanced,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=yellow!5,fonttitle=\bfseries,
flip title={interior hidden},title={#2},#1}
\begin{flipbox}{My title}
\lipsum[2]
\end{flipbox}
My title
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[2][]{skin=enhancedlast jigsaw,interior hidden,
boxsep=0pt,top=0pt,colframe=red,coltitle=red!50!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries\sffamily,
attach boxed title to bottom center,
boxed title style={empty,boxrule=0.5mm},
varwidth boxed title=0.5\linewidth,
underlay boxed title={
\draw[white,line width=0.5mm]
([xshift=0.3mm-\tcboxedtitleheight*2,yshift=0.3mm]title.north west)
--([xshift=-0.3mm+\tcboxedtitleheight*2,yshift=0.3mm]title.north east);
\path[draw=red,top color=white,bottom color=red!50!white,line width=0.5mm]
([xshift=0.25mm-\tcboxedtitleheight*2,yshift=0.25mm]title.north west)
cos +(\tcboxedtitleheight,-\tcboxedtitleheight/2)
sin +(\tcboxedtitleheight,-\tcboxedtitleheight/2)
-- ([xshift=0.25mm,yshift=0.25mm]title.south west)
-- ([yshift=0.25mm]title.south east)
cos +(\tcboxedtitleheight,\tcboxedtitleheight/2)
sin +(\tcboxedtitleheight,\tcboxedtitleheight/2); },
title={#2},#1}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
My title
161
before skip=2mm,after skip=2mm,
colback=black!5,colframe=black!50,boxrule=0.2mm,
attach boxed title to top left={xshift=1cm,yshift*=1mm-\tcboxedtitleheight},
varwidth boxed title*=-3cm,
boxed title style={frame code={
\path[fill=tcbcol@back!30!black]
([yshift=-1mm,xshift=-1mm]frame.north west)
arc[start angle=0,end angle=180,radius=1mm]
([yshift=-1mm,xshift=1mm]frame.north east)
arc[start angle=180,end angle=0,radius=1mm];
\path[left color=tcbcol@back!60!black,right color=tcbcol@back!60!black,
middle color=tcbcol@back!80!black]
([xshift=-2mm]frame.north west) -- ([xshift=2mm]frame.north east)
[rounded corners=1mm]-- ([xshift=1mm,yshift=-1mm]frame.north east)
-- (frame.south east) -- (frame.south west)
-- ([xshift=-1mm,yshift=-1mm]frame.north west)
[sharp corners]-- cycle;
},interior engine=empty,
},
title={#2},#1}
\begin{mybox}[colbacktitle=green]{My title}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[colbacktitle=red]{My title}
\lipsum[3]
\end{mybox}
My title
My title
libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus
placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan
nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem.
Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim.
Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar
lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
N 2016-02-26 /tcb/no boxed title style (style, initially set)

Removes all options which were set by /tcb/boxed title styleÕ P. 159 .
162
/tcb/hbox boxed title (no value, initially set)
The title text content is captured with a horizontal box. Especially, there are no linebreak
possible.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{hbox boxed title,

enhanced,attach boxed title to top center=
boxed title style={size=small,colback=red}, Short title
title={#1}} This is a tcolorbox.
\begin{mybox}{Short title}
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. This title is not really very short
\end{mybox}\bigskip
\begin{mybox}{This title is not really very short}
\end{mybox}
/tcb/minipage boxed title=hlengthi (initially unset)

The title text content is captured with a minipage with a width of hlengthi. By default, the
resulting boxed title is somewhat smaller than the main box.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{minipage boxed title,

Short title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=red},
center title,title={#1}} This is a tcolorbox.
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. This title is not really
\end{mybox}\bigskip very short
\end{mybox}
/tcb/minipage boxed title*=hlengthi (initially unset)

The title text content is captured with a minipage with a width of main box width plus
hlengthi. By default, the resulting boxed title is somewhat smaller than the main box.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{minipage boxed title*=-2cm,

Short title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=red},
center title,title={#1}} This is a tcolorbox.
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. This title is not
\end{mybox}\bigskip really very short
\end{mybox}
163
/tcb/tikznode boxed title=hoptionsi (initially unset)
The title text content is captured with a TikZ node with given TikZ hoptionsi. The text is
centered by default
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{tikznode boxed title,

{yshift=-3mm,yshifttext=-1mm}, Short title
boxed title style={size=small,colback=red}, This is a tcolorbox.
title={#1}}
\begin{mybox}{Short title} This title

This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. is not really
\end{mybox}\bigskip very short
\begin{mybox}{This title\\is not really\\very short} This is a tcolorbox.

\end{mybox}
/tcb/varwidth boxed title=hlengthi (initially unset)

The title text content is captured with a varwidth environment with a width of hlengthi.
This style needs the varwidth package [1] to be loaded manually. By default, the resulting
boxed title is somewhat smaller than the main box.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{varwidth boxed title,
center title,title={#1}}
\begin{mybox}{Short title} This title is not really

This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. very short
\end{mybox}\bigskip
\end{mybox}
/tcb/varwidth boxed title*=hlengthi (initially unset)

The title text content is captured with a varwidth environment with a width of main box
width plus hlengthi. This style needs the varwidth package [1] to be loaded manually. By
default, the resulting boxed title is somewhat smaller than the main box.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1]{varwidth boxed title*=-2cm,
center title,title={#1}}
\begin{mybox}{Short title} This title is not

This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}. really very short
\end{mybox}\bigskip
\end{mybox}
164
10.3 Watermark Option Keys
The following watermark options are applicable for all skins which use tikzpicture as
/tcb/graphical environmentÕ P. 135 . Therefore, the skin standardÕ P. 204 does not support
these watermarks, but all other skins, e. g. enhancedÕ P. 206 .
The watermark options rely on the more general overlay options described in Section 4.12
! from page 71. Therefore, watermarks and overlays cannot be used mixed. But a mixture
is possible with the hooks library, see Section 21.
LIB
/tcb/watermark text=htexti (no default, initially unset)
Writes some htexti in the center of the interior region of a tcolorbox. This htexti is written
after the frame and interior are drawn and before the text content is drawn. It is zoomed
or stretched according the values of /tcb/watermark zoomÕ P. 168 or /tcb/watermark
stretchÕ P. 170 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,watermark text=My Watermark]

\lipsum[1]
\tcblower
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
My Watermark
/tcb/watermark text on=hparti is htexti (no default, initially unset)

This option writes some htexti in the center of the interior region of a tcolorbox as described
for /tcb/watermark text. But this is done only for boxes named hparti of a break sequence,
see /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 .
Feasible values for hparti are:
• broken: all broken box parts,
• unbroken: unbroken boxes only,
• first: first parts of a break sequence,
• middle: middle parts of a break sequence,
• last: last parts of a break sequence,
• unbroken and first: unbroken boxes and first parts of a break sequence,
• middle and last: middle and last parts of a break sequence.
• first and middle: first and middle parts of a break sequence.
165
/tcb/watermark graphics=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
Draws an external picture referenced by hfile namei in the center of the interior region of
a tcolorbox. The picture is drawn after the frame and interior are drawn and before the
text content is drawn. It is zoomed or stretched according the values of /tcb/watermark
zoomÕ P. 168 or /tcb/watermark stretchÕ P. 170 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,watermark graphics=Basilica_5.png,

watermark opacity=0.15]
\lipsum[1-2]
\tcblower
This example uses a public domain picture from\\
\url{http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Basilica_5.png}
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
This example uses a public domain picture from

http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Basilica_5.png
/tcb/watermark graphics on=hparti is hfile namei (no default, initially unset)

This option draws a picture referenced by hfile namei in the center of the interior region of
a tcolorbox as described for /tcb/watermark graphics. But this is done only for boxes
named hparti of a break sequence, see /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 .
166
/tcb/watermark tikz=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
Draws the given tikz hgraphical codei in the center of the interior region of a tcolorbox.
The code is executed after the frame and interior are drawn and before the text con-
tent is drawn. The result is zoomed or stretched according the values of /tcb/watermark
zoomÕ P. 168 or /tcb/watermark stretchÕ P. 170 .
watermark tikz={\draw[line width=2mm] circle (1cm)
node{\fontfamily{ptm}\fontseries{b}\fontsize{20mm}{20mm}\selectfont ?};}]
\lipsum[1]
\tcblower
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
?
/tcb/watermark tikz on=hparti is hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

This option draws the given tikz hgraphical codei in the center of the interior region of a
tcolorbox as described for /tcb/watermark tikz. But this is done only for boxes named
hparti of a break sequence, see /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 .
/tcb/no watermark (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the watermark if set before. This is an alias for /tcb/no overlayÕ P. 72 .
167
/tcb/watermark opacity=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.00)
Sets the opacity value ∈ [0, 1] for a watermark.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
watermark text=Watermark,nobeforeafter,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Opacity 1.00,watermark opacity=1.00]

\lipsum[2]
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Opacity 0.50,watermark opacity=0.50]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}%
Opacity 1.00 Opacity 0.50
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod so- Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod so-
dales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc- dales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc-
tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero,
pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tel- pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tel-
lus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan lus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan
bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vi- bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vi-
Watermark
tae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac
orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse
ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
Watermark
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus
et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur
ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pel- Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pel-
lentesque cursus luctus mauris. lentesque cursus luctus mauris.
/tcb/watermark zoom=hfractioni (no default, initially 0.75)

Sets the zoom value for a watermark. The zoom respects the aspect ratio. The value 1.0
means to fill the whole box until the watermark touches the frame.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
watermark text=Watermark,nobeforeafter,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Zoom 1.0,watermark zoom=1.0]

\lipsum[2]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}%
Zoom 1.0 Zoom 0.5
Watermark
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus
Watermark
168
/tcb/watermark shrink=hfractioni (no default, initially unset)
Identically to /tcb/watermark zoomÕ P. 168 , but the watermark never gets enlarged. Thus,
the watermark keeps its original size or is shrunk.
/tcb/watermark overzoom=hfractioni (no default, initially unset)
Sets the overzoom value for a watermark. The overzoom respects the aspect ratio. The
value 1.0 means to fill the whole box until the watermark touches all four sides of the frame.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=white,colframe=blue!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
watermark opacity=0.5,
watermark graphics=lichtspiel.jpg,nobeforeafter,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2}

\lipsum[1]
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Overzoom 1.0,watermark overzoom=1.0]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}%
Zoom 1.0 Overzoom 1.0
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer
adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibu- adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibu-
lum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. lum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis.
Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam
arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula
augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant
morbi tristique senectus et netus et male- morbi tristique senectus et netus et male-
suada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris suada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris
ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem.
Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla
ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tor- ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tor-
tor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, tor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est,
iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc.
Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices biben- Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices biben-
dum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor dum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor
nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis
ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla.
Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh
mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis
quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci
dignissim rutrum. dignissim rutrum.
If a /tcb/watermark overzoom value of 1.0 is used in connection with invisible top and
bottom rules which still have a thickness greater than 0pt, the space of these invisible rules
! may not be covered by the watermark. For example, this situation may occur during the
breaking of /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 boxes. To avoid this optical glitch, just set /tcb/pad
at breakÕ P. 369 to any desired value.
169
/tcb/watermark stretch=hfractioni (no default, initially unset)
Sets the stretch value for a watermark. The stretch value is applied to width and height in
relation to the box dimensions. It does not respect the aspect ratio. The value 1.0 means
to fill the whole box.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=white,colframe=blue!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
watermark graphics=lichtspiel.jpg,watermark opacity=0.5,
nobeforeafter,width=(\linewidth-2mm)/2}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Stretch 1.00,watermark stretch=1.00]

\lipsum[2]
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Stretch 0.50,watermark stretch=0.50]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}%
Stretch 1.00 Stretch 0.50
tae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac tae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac
orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse
ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus
/tcb/watermark color=hcolori (no default, initially mixed background and frame color)
Sets the color for the watermark.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,watermark text=My Watermark,

watermark color=yellow!50!red]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
My Watermark
170
/tcb/clip watermark=true|false (default true, initially true)
Sets the watermark to be clipped to the interior area.
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=white,colframe=blue!50!white,fonttitle=\bfseries,
watermark opacity=0.5,watermark stretch=1.00,arc=3mm,
watermark graphics=lichtspiel.jpg}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Clip (default),clip watermark]

\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=No clip,clip watermark=false]

\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}%
Clip (default)
No clip
171
10.4 Clip Environments
The following clip environments are applicable for all skins which use engines of type path,
pathfirst, pathmiddle, or pathlast. Especially, the skin enhancedÕ P. 206 supports all of
them and standardÕ P. 204 none. The typical area of application is inside overlay code, see
Section 4.12 from page 71.
\begin{tcbclipframe}
\end{tcbclipframe}
Defines a Tikz scope which clips to the frame area path.
\makeatletter
\newtcolorbox{picturebox}[2][]{%
enhanced,frame hidden,interior hidden,fonttitle=\bfseries,
overlay={\begin{tcbclipframe}\node at (frame)
{\includegraphics[width=\tcb@width,height=\tcb@height]{#2}};\end{tcbclipframe}%
\begin{tcbclipinterior}\fill[white,opacity=0.75]
(frame.south west) rectangle (frame.north east);\end{tcbclipinterior}},#1}
\makeatother
\begin{picturebox}[title=My Picture Box]{lichtspiel.jpg}

\lipsum[1]
\end{picturebox}
My Picture Box
172
\begin{tcbinvclipframe}
\end{tcbinvclipframe}
Defines a Tikz scope which clips to the outside of the frame area path.
\tcbset{enhanced jigsaw,fonttitle=\bfseries,opacityback=0.35,colback=blue!5!white,
frame style={left color=red!75!black,right color=red!10!yellow}}
\begin{tikzpicture}% draw two balls

\path[use as bounding box] (0,0.8) rectangle +(0.1,0.1);
\shadedraw [shading=ball] (0,0) circle (1cm);
\shadedraw [ball color=red] (3,-2.2) circle (1cm);
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=A translucent box,

overlay={\begin{tcbinvclipframe}
\draw[red,line width=1cm] ([xshift=-2mm,yshift=2mm]frame.north west)
--([xshift=2mm,yshift=-2mm]frame.south east);
\draw[red,line width=1cm] ([xshift=-2mm,yshift=-2mm]frame.south west)
--([xshift=2mm,yshift=2mm]frame.north east);
\end{tcbinvclipframe}}]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
A translucent box
173
\begin{tcbclipinterior}
\end{tcbclipinterior}
Defines a Tikz scope which clips to the interior area path.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My Title,
overlay={\begin{tcbclipinterior}
\draw[red,line width=1cm] (interior.north west)--(interior.south east);
\draw[red,line width=1cm] (interior.south west)--(interior.north east);
\end{tcbclipinterior}}]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
My Title
\begin{tcbcliptitle}
\end{tcbcliptitle}
Defines a Tikz scope which clips to the title area path.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My Title,colframe=blue,colback=yellow!10!white,
overlay={\begin{tcbcliptitle}\node at (title)
{\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{lichtspiel.jpg}};\end{tcbcliptitle}}]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
My Title
174
/tcb/clip title=true|false (default true, initially false)
Sets the title to be clipped to the title area.
\tcbset{enhanced,width=5cm,colframe=red!50!white,coltitle=black,
colbacktitle=yellow!50!white}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=\mbox{This is a title which is unbreakable and far too long}]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=\mbox{This is a title which is unbreakable and far too long},

clip title]
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a title which is unbreakable and far too long
This is a title which is unbreakable and far too long
/tcb/clip upper=true|false (default true, initially false)

Sets the upper part to be clipped to the interior area.
\newcommand{\mygraphics}[2][]{%
\tcbox[enhanced,boxsep=0pt,top=0pt,bottom=0pt,left=0pt,
right=0pt,boxrule=0.4pt,drop fuzzy shadow,clip upper,
colback=black!75!white,toptitle=2pt,bottomtitle=2pt,nobeforeafter,
center title,fonttitle=\small\sffamily,title=\detokenize{#2}]
{\includegraphics[width=\the\dimexpr(\linewidth-4mm)/2\relax]{#2}}}
\mygraphics{lichtspiel.jpg}\hfill
\mygraphics{Basilica_5.png}
lichtspiel.jpg
Basilica_5.png
175
The example for /tcb/clip upperÕ P. 175 sizes the box according to the dimensions of the pic-
ture. To do it the other way around, the watermark options provide an easy solution.
\newcommand{\mygraphics}[2][]{%
\tcbox[enhanced,capture=minipage,boxsep=0pt,top=0pt,bottom=0pt,left=0pt,
right=0pt,boxrule=0.4pt,drop fuzzy shadow,nobeforeafter,
colback=black!75!white,toptitle=2pt,bottomtitle=2pt,
center title,fonttitle=\small\sffamily,title=\detokenize{#2},
width=(\linewidth-4mm)/2,height=6cm,colbacktitle={black},
watermark zoom=1.0,watermark graphics={#2}]{}}
\mygraphics{lichtspiel.jpg}\hfill
\mygraphics{Basilica_5.png}
lichtspiel.jpg Basilica_5.png
/tcb/clip lower=true|false (default true, initially false)

Sets the lower part to be clipped to the interior area.
\tcbset{enhanced,width=5cm,colframe=red!50!black,text and listing}
\begin{tcblisting}{}
Donau\-dampf\-schiff\-fahrts\-ka\-pi\-t\"ans\-m\"ut\-zen\-fran\-sen
\end{tcblisting}
\begin{tcblisting}{clip lower}
\end{tcblisting}
Donaudampfschifffahrtska-
pitänsmützenfransen
Donaudampfschifffahrtska-
pitänsmützenfransen
176
10.5 Border Line Option Keys
The following borderline options are applicable for most skins which use tikzpicture as
these border lines, but most other skins, e. g. enhancedÕ P. 206 .
The borderlines are independent from the normal tcolorbox rules. They may be used with or
without the /tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 .
The borderlines are stackable, i. e. several different border lines can be used on the same
tcolorbox. They are drawn after the box frame and box interior and before overlays or water-
marks.
! lines are created by a TikZ drawing process. This can be used to apply different effects.
Technically, the normal tcolorbox rules result from a TikZ filling process. The border
/tcb/borderline={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds a new borderline to the stack of border lines. This border line is drawn with the given
hwidthi and gets an hoffseti computed from the frame outline. A positive hoffseti value
moves the borderline inside the tcolorbox and a negative hoffseti value moves it outside
without changing the bounding box.
The border line is drawn along a TikZ path with the given TikZ hoptionsi. Note that the
TikZ line width option should not be used here.
The border lines adapt to the rounded corners of the tcolorbox. An inside borderline will
switch to sharp corners if necessary, an outside borderline will always be rounded except
for /tcb/sharp cornersÕ P. 48 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=Rounded corners,fonttitle=\bfseries,boxsep=5pt,
arc=8pt,
borderline={0.5pt}{0pt}{red},
borderline={0.5pt}{5pt}{blue,dotted},
borderline={0.5pt}{-5pt}{green} ]
\end{tcolorbox}
\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=Sharp corners,fonttitle=\bfseries,boxsep=5pt,
arc=8pt,sharp corners=downhill,
borderline={0.5pt}{0pt}{red},
borderline={0.5pt}{5pt}{blue,dotted},
borderline={0.5pt}{-5pt}{green} ]
\end{tcolorbox}
Rounded corners
Sharp corners
177
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,arc=3mm,boxrule=1.5mm,boxsep=1.5mm,
colback=yellow!20!white,
colframe=blue,
borderline={1mm}{1mm}{white},
borderline={1mm}{2mm}{red} ]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pel-
lentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla
ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis
in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean
faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor
semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend,
sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,arc=3mm,boxrule=1.5mm,
frame hidden,colback=blue!10!white,
borderline={1mm}{0mm}{blue,dotted} ]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi
ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla.
Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus.
Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus
mauris.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,skin=enhancedmiddle,
frame hidden,interior hidden,top=0mm,bottom=0mm,boxsep=0mm,
borderline={0.75mm}{0mm}{red},
borderline={0.75mm}{0.75mm}{red!50!yellow},
borderline={0.75mm}{1.5mm}{yellow}, ]
\lipsum[3]
\end{tcolorbox}
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tris-
tique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus
placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec,
suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed
lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent
euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus.
Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
178
\newtcolorbox{mygreenbox}[2][]{%
enhanced,width=\linewidth-6pt,
enlarge top by=3pt,enlarge bottom by=3pt,
enlarge left by=3pt,enlarge right by=3pt,
title={#2},frame hidden,boxrule=0pt,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,
colframe=green!30!black, colbacktitle=green!50!yellow,
coltitle=black, colback=green!25!white,
borderline={0.5pt}{-0.5pt}{green!75!blue},
borderline={1pt}{-3pt}{green!50!blue},#1}
\begin{mygreenbox}{My title}
\lipsum[4]
\end{mygreenbox}
My title
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt
ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea
dictumst. Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi.
Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac
pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus
quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
/tcb/no borderline (no default, initially set)

Removes all borderlines if set before.
/tcb/show bounding box=hcolori (default red, initially unset)
Displays the bounding box borderline of a tcolorbox. Its intended use is debugging and
fine tuning. It should not be part of a final document. The optional hcolori is the base
color for the bounding box borderline.
\tcbset{enhanced,nobeforeafter,width=4cm,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[show bounding box,title=Normal]

\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[show bounding box=blue,title=Shadow,drop fuzzy shadow]
\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[show bounding box=green,title=Enlarged,drop fuzzy shadow,
enlarge by=2mm]
\end{tcolorbox}
Enlarged
Normal Shadow
This is a tcolorbox. This is a tcolorbox.
179
The following partial borderlines act slightly different from the complete borderlines de-
! scribed before. They ignore rounded corner settings, their length is not modified by their
hoffseti, they ignore skin settings but adapt to breakable boxes.
N 2014-10-20 /tcb/borderline north={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds a new borderline with the given hwidthi to the north of the tcolorbox. A positive
hoffseti value moves the borderline inside the tcolorbox and a negative hoffseti value moves
it outside without changing the bounding box.
borderline north={2pt}{-2pt}{red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-20 /tcb/borderline south={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds a new borderline with the given hwidthi to the south of the tcolorbox. A positive
borderline south={2pt}{-2pt}{red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-20 /tcb/borderline east={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds a new borderline with the given hwidthi to the east of the tcolorbox. A positive
hoffseti value moves the borderline inside the tcolorbox and a negative hoffseti value
moves it outside without changing the bounding box.
borderline east={2pt}{-2pt}{red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-20 /tcb/borderline west={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds a new borderline with the given hwidthi to the west of the tcolorbox. A positive
borderline west={2pt}{-2pt}{red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
180
N 2014-10-20 /tcb/borderline horizontal={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
Adds a new borderline with the given hwidthi to the north and south of the tcolorbox. A
positive hoffseti value moves the borderlines inside the tcolorbox and a negative hoffseti
value moves them outside without changing the bounding box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[blanker,top=3mm,bottom=3mm,
borderline horizontal={2pt}{0pt}{red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2014-10-20 /tcb/borderline vertical={hwidthi}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds a new borderline with the given hwidthi to the east and west of the tcolorbox. A
positive hoffseti value moves the borderlines inside the tcolorbox and a negative hoffseti
value moves them outside without changing the bounding box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[blanker,left=3mm,right=3mm,
borderline vertical={2pt}{0pt}{red}]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}.\\
My second line.
My second line.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,colback=yellow!10!white,boxrule=0pt,frame hidden,
borderline north={1mm}{-2mm}{red},
borderline south={1mm}{-2mm}{blue},
borderline west={1mm}{-2mm}{green},
borderline east={1mm}{-2mm}{yellow}]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus
rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor
gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem
vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis
ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu,
accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
181
10.6 Shadow Option Keys
The following shadow options are applicable for most skins which use tikzpicture as
these shadows, but most other skins, e. g. enhancedÕ P. 206 .
The shadows are stackable, i. e. several different shadows can be used on the same tcolorbox.
They are drawn before the box frame is drawn.
/tcb/no shadow (no default)
Removes all shadows if set before.
10.6.1 Common Shadows and Halos

/tcb/drop shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)
Adds a new shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Optionally, the
hcolori for the shadow can be changed.
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow]
\end{tcolorbox}\par\bigskip Another shadow
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Another shadow,
drop shadow=blue] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new fuzzy shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Optionally,
the hcolori for the shadow can be changed.
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow]
drop fuzzy shadow=blue] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop midday shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Optionally, the
hcolori for the shadow can be changed.
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop midday shadow]
drop midday shadow=blue] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
182
/tcb/drop fuzzy midday shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)
Adds a new fuzzy shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Optionally,
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy midday shadow]
drop fuzzy midday shadow=blue] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/halo=hsizei with hcolori (style, default 0.9mm with yellow)

Adds a new halo shadow with the given hcolori which overlaps the colorbox an all sides by
hsizei.
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries} My own halo
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My own halo,halo] This is a tcolorbox.

\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Another halo, Another halo
halo=2mm with green]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/fuzzy halo=hsizei with hcolori (style, default 0.9mm with yellow)

Adds a new fuzzy halo shadow with the given hcolori which overlaps the colorbox an all
sides by hsizei plus 0.48mm.
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries} My own halo
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My own halo,fuzzy halo] This is a tcolorbox.

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Another halo, Another halo
fuzzy halo=2mm with green]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[blank,enhanced jigsaw,boxsep=2pt,arc=2pt,
fuzzy halo=2mm with red!50!white,
fuzzy halo=1mm with white]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
183
For all following shadows, the optionally given hcolori for the shadow can be changed equivalent
to the preceding examples.
/tcb/drop shadow southeast=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)
Adds a new shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. This shadow is
identical to /tcb/drop shadowÕ P. 182 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow southeast,

enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop shadow south=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. This shadow is
identical to /tcb/drop midday shadowÕ P. 182 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow south,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop shadow southwest=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows.
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow southwest,
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop shadow west=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow west,
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop shadow northwest=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow northwest,
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop shadow north=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow north,
\end{tcolorbox}
184
/tcb/drop shadow northeast=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow northeast,
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop shadow east=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow east,
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow southeast=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new fuzzy shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. This shadow
is identical to /tcb/drop fuzzy shadowÕ P. 182 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow southeast,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow south=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new fuzzy shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. This shadow
is identical to /tcb/drop fuzzy midday shadowÕ P. 183 .
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow south,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow southwest=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new fuzzy shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows.
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow southwest,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow west=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow west,

\end{tcolorbox}
185
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow northwest=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow northwest,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow north=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow north,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow northeast=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow northeast,

\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop fuzzy shadow east=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

\begin{tcolorbox}[drop fuzzy shadow east,

\end{tcolorbox}
186
10.6.2 Lifted Shadows
/tcb/drop lifted shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)
Adds a new lifted shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Optionally,
boxrule=0.4pt,sharp corners,
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop lifted shadow]
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Another shadow, This is a tcolorbox.
drop lifted shadow=blue]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop small lifted shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new small lifted shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Option-
ally, the hcolori for the shadow can be changed.
boxrule=0.4pt,sharp corners,
\tcbox[drop small lifted shadow,size=fbox]
{This is a tcolorbox.} Another shadow
\par\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Another shadow, This is a tcolorbox.
drop small lifted shadow=black]
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/drop large lifted shadow=hcolori (style, default black!50!white)

Adds a new large lifted shadow with standard dimensions to the stack of shadows. Option-
ally, the hcolori for the shadow can be changed.
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop large lifted shadow]
drop large lifted shadow=blue] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
187
10.6.3 Generic Shadows
/tcb/shadow={hxshifti}{hyshifti}{hoffseti}{hoptionsi} (no default)
Adds a new shadow to the stack of shadows. This shadow follows the outline of the
tcolorbox but is shifted by hxshifti and hyshifti. The hoffseti value is a distance value
from the frame outline. A positive hoffseti value shrinks the shadow and a negative hoffseti
value enlarges the shadow. The shadow is filled along a TikZ path with the given TikZ
hoptionsi.
The shadows adapt to the rounded corners of the tcolorbox. An shrinked shadow will
switch to sharp corners if necessary, an enlarged shadow may become more rounded de-
pending on several factors. But /tcb/sharp cornersÕ P. 48 have sharp shadows.
Shadows are not considered for the bounding box computation by default. Large
! shadows may be overlaped by the following content. But, the bounding box can be
adapted if necessary.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My own shadow,

shadow={2mm}{-1mm}{0mm}{black!50!white}]
This is a tcolorbox. My own shadow
\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip This is a tcolorbox.
shadow={-1mm}{-2mm}{0mm}{fill=blue,
opacity=0.5}] Another shadow
\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Double shadow,
Double shadow
shadow={-1.5mm}{-1.5mm}{0mm}{fill=blue,
opacity=0.25}, This is a tcolorbox.
shadow={1.5mm}{-1.5mm}{0mm}{fill=red,
opacity=0.25}]
This is a tcolorbox. Far shadow
\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip This is a tcolorbox.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Far shadow,
shadow={5.5mm}{-3.5mm}{2mm}{fill=black,
opacity=0.25}]
This is a tcolorbox. Halo shadow
\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip\bigskip This is a tcolorbox.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Halo shadow,
shadow={0mm}{0mm}{-1.5mm}%
{fill=yellow!75!red,opacity=0.5}]
\end{tcolorbox}
188
/tcb/fuzzy shadow={hxshifti}{hyshifti}{hoffseti}{hstepi}{hoptionsi} (no default)
Adds a new fuzzy shadow to the stack of shadows. Actually, this option adds several
shadows which appear like a shadow with a fuzzy border. This fuzzy shadow follows the
outline of the tcolorbox but is shifted by hxshifti and hyshifti. The hoffseti value is a
distance value from the frame outline. A positive hoffseti value shrinks the shadow and a
negative hoffseti value enlarges the shadow. The {hstepi} value describes a shrink offset
used for the combination of the partial shadows. The shadow is filled along a TikZ path
with the given TikZ hoptionsi but any opacity value will be ignored.

fuzzy shadow={2mm}{-1mm}{0mm}{0.1mm}%
{black!50!white}] My own shadow
\par\bigskip
fuzzy shadow={-1mm}{-2mm}{0mm}{0.2mm}% Another shadow
{fill=blue}]
\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Double shadow, Double shadow
fuzzy shadow={-1.5mm}{-1.5mm}{0mm}{0.1mm}%
{blue}, This is a tcolorbox.
fuzzy shadow={1.5mm}{-1.5mm}{0mm}{0.1mm}%
{red}]
This is a tcolorbox. Far shadow
\end{tcolorbox}
\par\bigskip
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Far shadow,
fuzzy shadow={5.5mm}{-3.5mm}{0mm}{0.3mm}%
{black}]
This is a tcolorbox. Glow shadow
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Glow shadow,
fuzzy shadow={0mm}{0mm}{-1.5mm}{0.15mm}%
{yellow!75!red}]
\end{tcolorbox}
fuzzy shadow={1.0mm}{-1.0mm}{0.12mm}{0mm}{blue!50!white},
fuzzy shadow={-1.0mm}{-1.0mm}{0.12mm}{0mm}{red!50!white},
fuzzy shadow={-1.0mm}{1.0mm}{0.12mm}{0mm}{green!50!white},
fuzzy shadow={1.0mm}{1.0mm}{0.12mm}{0mm}{yellow!50!white},#1
}
\begin{mybox}[title=A multi shadow box]

\end{mybox}
A multi shadow box
189
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/smart shadow arc=true|false (default true, initially true)
If set to true, the shadow drawing algorithm tries to do a somewhat smart calculation of
the arc for the shadow. The result is pleasing for typical boxes with rounded corners, but
gives strange results for circular boxes.
\tcbset{enhanced,nobeforeafter,colback=red!5!white,
colframe=red!75!black,width=3cm,square,halign=center,valign=center
}
\begin{tcolorbox}[drop shadow]
Smart shadow arc (arguably better than normal)
\end{tcolorbox}
\hfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[smart shadow arc=false, drop shadow]
Normal shadow arc
\end{tcolorbox}
\hfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[circular arc, drop shadow]
Smart shadow arc (worse than normal)
\end{tcolorbox}
\hfill
\begin{tcolorbox}[circular arc, smart shadow arc=false, drop shadow]
Normal shadow arc
\end{tcolorbox}
Smart
Smart
shadow arc
Normal shadow arc Normal
(arguably
shadow arc (worse than shadow arc
better than
normal)
normal)
/tcb/lifted shadow={hxshifti}{hyshifti}{hbendi}{hstepi}{hoptionsi} (no default)

Adds a new lifted shadow to the stack of shadows. Actually, this option adds several
shadows which appear like a shadow with a fuzzy border. This lifted shadow follows the
outline of the tcolorbox but is shifted by hxshifti and hyshifti on the lower left corner and
by −hxshifti and hyshifti on the lower right corner. Additionally, there is a hbendi in the
middle. The {hstepi} value describes a shrink offset used for the combination of the partial
shadows. The shadow is filled along a TikZ path with the given TikZ hoptionsi but any
opacity value will be ignored.
boxrule=0.1pt,
My own shadow
lifted shadow={1mm}{-2mm}{3mm}{0.1mm}% This is a tcolorbox.
{black!50!white}]
\end{tcolorbox}
190
10.6.4 TikZ Shadows
Alternativ to the package shadow options described before, shadows from the «Shadows Library»
of TikZ can be used. Such shadows can be added directly to the frame path using /tcb/frame
styleÕ P. 148 .
% \usetikzlibrary{shadows}
frame style={drop shadow} ]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,height=3cm,
halign=center,valign=center, This is a tcolorbox.
frame style={circular drop shadow} ]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,width=2.5cm,
square,circular arc,
tcolorbox
frame style={circular glow={fill=red}} ]
tcolorbox
\end{tcolorbox}
191
10.7 TikZ Picture Option Keys
The following general options are applicable for skins which use tikzpicture as
these options, but most other skins, e. g. enhancedÕ P. 206 .
/tcb/tikz=htikz option listi (no default, initially empty)
Adds the given htikz option listi to the main tikzpicture environment used to draw the
color box, see [22]. If this option is applied a second time, the new htikz option listi is
appended to the current option list.
Transparent box
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Transparent box,
tikz={opacity=0.5,transparency group}] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
x
fontupper=\bfseries\Huge, bo
!
d
d
halign title=center,halign=center} te
l
ta
Ro
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Rotated box,
tikz={rotate=30}] S o
Sold!
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/tikz reset (initially set)

Removes all options given by /tcb/tikz.
/tcb/at begin tikz=htikz codei (no default, initially empty)
The given htikz codei is executed at the beginning of the tikzpicture environment after
the TikZ option execute at begin picture was applied. If this option is applied a second
time, the new htikz codei is appended to the current code.
/tcb/at begin tikz reset (initially set)
Removes all code given by /tcb/at begin tikz.
/tcb/at end tikz=htikz codei (no default, initially empty)
The given htikz codei is executed at the ending of the tikzpicture environment before the
TikZ option execute at end picture was applied. If this option is applied a second time,
the new htikz codei is appended to the current code.
/tcb/at end tikz reset (initially set)
Removes all code given by /tcb/at end tikz.
192
/tcb/rotate=hanglei (no default, initially unset)
Rotates the tcolorbox by the given hanglei. Note that this is a TikZ coordinate transfor-
mation i.e. not all graphical elements like shadings will really be rotated.
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries} x
bo x.
te d r bo
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Rotated box,rotate=30] ta l o
Ro tco
This is a tcolorbox. i sa
\end{tcolorbox} is
Th
/tcb/scale=hfractioni (no default, initially unset)

Scales the tcolorbox by the given hfractioni. Note that this is a TikZ coordinate transfor-
mation i.e. not all graphical elements like line widths will really be scaled.
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries} Scaled box
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Scaled box,scale=0.5]
This is a tcolorbox. Scaled box
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Scaled box,scale=1.25] This is a tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/remember (style, initially unset)

Shortcut for tikz={remember picture}. This allows one to reference nodes in other TikZ
pictures.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,remember,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,title=The four corners of a paper,
overlay={\draw[red!50!white,line width=1mm,opacity=0.5,shorten >=3mm]
(frame.north west) edge[->] (current page.north west)
(frame.north east) edge[->] (current page.north east)
(frame.south west) edge[->] (current page.south west)
(frame.south east) edge[->] (current page.south east);}]
\end{tcolorbox}
The four corners of a paper
193
/tcb/remember as=hnamei (style, no default, initially unset)
The frame node will be remembered by the given hnamei to be referenced in other TikZ
pictures.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1][]{enhanced,colframe=blue!75!black,colback=blue!10!white,
fonttitle=\bfseries,#1}
\begin{mybox}[title=First Box,nobeforeafter,width=\linewidth/4,remember as=one]

This is a test.
\end{mybox}
\hfill
\begin{mybox}[title=Second Box,nobeforeafter,width=\linewidth/4,remember as=two]
This is a test.
\end{mybox}
\hfill
\begin{mybox}[title=Third Box,nobeforeafter,width=\linewidth/4,remember as=three]
This is a test.
\end{mybox}
\lipsum[2]
\begin{mybox}[title=Fourth Box,remember as=four]

This is a test.
\end{mybox}
\begin{tikzpicture}[overlay,remember picture,line width=1mm,draw=red!75!black]

\draw[->] (one.east) to[bend right] node[above] {A} (two.west);
\draw[->] (two.east) to[bend left] node[above] {B} (three.west);
\draw[->] (three.east) to[bend left=90] node[right] {C} (four.east);
\draw[->] (four.west) to[bend left=90] node[left] {D} (one.west);
\end{tikzpicture}
First Box Second Box B Third Box

A
This is a test. This is a test. This is a test.
Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan
D bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit C
mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et
magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper
vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
Fourth Box
This is a test.
194
10.8 Underlay Option Keys
Underlays are quite similar to overlays described in Section 4.12 on page 71. Underlays are
drawn after the frame and interior are drawn and before overlays and the text content is drawn;
see Section 9.4 on page 142 for the general drawing scheme.
The differences between underlays and overlays are:
• Underlays are not applicable for the skins standardÕ P. 204 and standard jigsawÕ P. 205 ,
whereas overlays are applicable also for these skins. The skin spartanÕ P. 247 supports
underlays but no overlays.
! If an underlay is used with the standard Õ P. 204 skin, it is silently ignored.
• Underlays are stackable, i. e. several different underlays can be used on the same
tcolorbox. Overlays are not stackable by default (but with some help of the library
hooks ).
LIB
• Boxed titles are implemented with underlays (Section 10.2 on page 155), watermarks are
implemented with overlays (Section 10.3 on page 165).
/tcb/underlay=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
frame and interior and before the text content.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1][]{enhanced,colback=red!5!white,
colbacktitle=red!85!black!50!white,
colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,watermark color=yellow!50!white,
\draw[red!40!white,line width=1cm] (interior.south west)--(interior.north east);
attach boxed title to top center={yshift=-2mm},#1}
\begin{mybox}[title=My box,watermark text=My Watermark]

\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
My box
My Watermark
/tcb/no underlay (style, no default, initially set)

Removes the underlay if set before.
195
/tcb/underlay broken=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
codei is added to the box drawing process. /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
/tcb/underlay unbroken=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 but is not broken actually or if the box is
process. /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
/tcb/no underlay unbroken (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the unbroken underlay if set before.
/tcb/underlay first=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
/tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
/tcb/no underlay first (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the first underlay if set before.
/tcb/underlay middle=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
/tcb/no underlay middle (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the middle underlay if set before.
/tcb/underlay last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
/tcb/no underlay last (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the last underlay if set before.
/tcb/underlay boxed title=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
If the box has a boxed title, see Section 10.2 on page 155, then the hgraphical codei is added
to the box drawing process before the boxed title is drawn.
/tcb/no underlay boxed title (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the boxed title underlay if set before.
/tcb/underlay unbroken and first=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/underlay unbroken and /tcb/underlay first
together. /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
/tcb/underlay middle and last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/underlay middle and /tcb/underlay last to-
gether. /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
/tcb/underlay unbroken and last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/underlay unbroken and /tcb/underlay last
together. /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/underlay first and middle=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/underlay first and /tcb/underlay middle to-
gether. /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 overwrites this key.
196
10.9 Finish Option Keys
Finishes are quite similar to underlays described in Section 10.8 on page 195 and overlays
described in Section 4.12 on page 71. Finishes are drawn after the text content is drawn; see
Section 9.4 on page 142 for the general drawing scheme. Therefore, a finish will reduce the
readability of the text content.
Finishes are intended for special effects like highlights or glosses or text over text.
• Finishes are only applicable for the skins enhancedÕ P. 206 , emptyÕ P. 237 , freelanceÕ P. 250 ,
bicolorÕ P. 219 , beamerÕ P. 228 , and widgetÕ P. 233 .
! If a finish is used with the standard Õ P. 204 skin, it is silently ignored.
• Finishes are stackable, i. e. several different finishes can be used on the same tcolorbox.
/tcb/finish=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
text content.
colbacktitle=red!85!black!50!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
finish={\begin{tcbclipframe}
\path[bottom color=black,top color=black!50!white,opacity=0.1]
(frame.south west) -- (frame.south east) -- (frame.north east) -- cycle;
\path[top color=white,bottom color=black!50!white,opacity=0.1]
(frame.south west) -- (frame.north east) -- (frame.north west) -- cycle;
\end{tcbclipframe}},#1}
\begin{mybox}[title=My box]
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
My box
colbacktitle=red!85!black!50!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
finish={\node[draw,fill=white,fill opacity=0.85,inner sep=5mm,
rounded corners] at (frame.center) {\Huge\bfseries Finish!};},#1}
\begin{mybox}[title=My box]
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
My box
Finish!
197
/tcb/no finish (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the finish if set before.
/tcb/finish broken=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
codei is added to the box drawing process. /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 overwrites this key.
/tcb/finish unbroken=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
process. /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 overwrites this key.
/tcb/no finish unbroken (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the unbroken finish if set before.
/tcb/finish first=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
/tcb/finishÕ P. 197 overwrites this key.
/tcb/no finish first (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the first finish if set before.
/tcb/finish middle=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
/tcb/no finish middle (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the middle finish if set before.
/tcb/finish last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
/tcb/no finish last (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the last finish if set before.
/tcb/finish unbroken and first=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/finish unbroken and /tcb/finish first to-
gether. /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 overwrites this key.
/tcb/finish middle and last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/finish middle and /tcb/finish last together.
/tcb/finish unbroken and last=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/finish unbroken and /tcb/finish last to-
gether. /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 overwrites this key.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/finish first and middle=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/finish first and /tcb/finish middle together.
198
10.10 Hyper Option Keys
All options of this section need the package hyperref [15] to be loaded separately. All these
options are implemented as /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 and can be disabled by /tcb/no finishÕ P. 198 .
! If the package hyperref [15] is not loaded or if the standardÕ P. 204 skin is used, all hyper
option are silently ignored.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperref=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)

The whole frame of a tcolorbox is make an active hyperlink for a hmarkeri which was
given by \label or /tcb/labelÕ P. 98 or /tcb/phantomlabelÕ P. 98 . Such, the tcolorbox
is made a clickable button (depending on the previewer).
% \section{Library skins}\label{sec:skins}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[beamer,colback=red!50,
Jump to the heading
hyperref=sec:skins]
of Section 10.
Jump to the heading of Section~\ref*{sec:skins}.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperref interior=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)

Identical to /tcb/hyperref, but only the interior of a tcolorbox is made a hyperlink
(without frame and title).
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperref title=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperref, but only the title of a tcolorbox is made a hyperlink.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperref node={hmarkeri}{hnodei} (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperref, but only the given TikZ hnodei is made a hyperlink. This
hnodei may be frame, interior, title, or any other named node used for drawing the
tcolorbox. The hnodei may be defined inside /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 , /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71
or /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 . If the later is used, define the node before /tcb/hyperref node is
applied.
% \section{Library skins}\label{sec:skins}%
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,colback=yellow!10,
underlay={\node[red,fill=red!30,inner sep=3mm] Jump to the head-
(click) at (frame.center) {X};}, ing of Section 10
hyperref node={sec:skins}{click}] (X marksX the click
Jump to the heading of Section~\ref*{sec:skins} point).
(X marks the click point).
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperlink=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)

The whole frame of a tcolorbox is make an active hyperlink for a hmarkeri which was given
by \hypertarget or /tcb/hypertargetÕ P. 100 . Such, the tcolorbox is made a clickable
button (depending on the previewer).
% \usepackage{hyperref}%
colback=blue!10,colframe=blue!50!black, Box B
hypertarget=hypertwinB,
hyperlink=hypertwinA, Click me to jump to
title=Box B] Box A.
Click me to jump to Box A.
\end{tcolorbox}
199
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperlink interior=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperlinkÕ P. 199 , but only the interior of a tcolorbox is made a hyper-
link (without frame and title).
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperlink title=hmarkeri (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperlinkÕ P. 199 , but only the title of a tcolorbox is made a hyperlink.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperlink node={hmarkeri}{hnodei} (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperlink Õ P. 199 , but only the given TikZ hnodei is made a hyperlink.
This hnodei may be frame, interior, title, or any other named node used for drawing the
or /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 . If the later is used, define the node before /tcb/hyperlink node
is applied.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl=hurli (no default, initially unset)
The whole frame of a tcolorbox is make an active hyperlink for an hurli in the same manner
as using \href or \url. Such, the tcolorbox is made a clickable button (depending on the
previewer).
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,colback=red!50,
hyperurl=http://www.ctan.org/pkg/tcolorbox] View CTAN with a
View CTAN with a browser. browser.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl interior=hurli (no default, initially unset)

Identical to /tcb/hyperurl, but only the interior of a tcolorbox is made a hyperlink
(without frame and title).
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl title=hurli (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperurl, but only the title of a tcolorbox is made a hyperlink.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl node={hurli}{hnodei} (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperurl, but only the given TikZ hnodei is made a hyperlink. This
hnodei may be frame, interior, title, or any other named node used for drawing the
or /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 . If the later is used, define the node before /tcb/hyperurl node is
applied.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl*={hoptionsi}{hurli} (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperurl, but additional hyperref [15] hoptionsi are applied.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,colback=green!50,
hyperurl*={page=3,pdfnewwindow=true}%
Open example file
{tcolorbox-example.pdf}]
on Page 3.
Open example file on Page~3.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl* interior={hoptionsi}{hurli} (no default, initially unset)

Identical to /tcb/hyperurl interior, but additional hyperref [15] hoptionsi are applied.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl* title={hoptionsi}{hurli} (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperurl title, but additional hyperref [15] hoptionsi are applied.
N 2017-02-03 /tcb/hyperurl* node={hoptionsi}{hurli}{hnodei} (no default, initially unset)
Identical to /tcb/hyperurl node, but additional hyperref [15] hoptionsi are applied.
200
10.11 Jigsaw Skin Variants
As described in Section 9.1 on page 134, a tcolorbox is drawn by up to four engines. Typically,
the frame engine fills the complete box area with color and the other engines fill certain areas
with other colors. Finally, only the area which you see as frame of the box will display the frame
color. For most applications, this is a good approach.
For certain boxes, a more delicate procedure is needed. E.g., if the box should be translucent,
an already painted area cannot be made unpainted. Therefore, more elaborate frame engines
saw holes into the frame where the interior area and optionally the title area will be painted.
The resulting skins are called jigsaw skins. For standardÕ P. 204 and enhancedÕ P. 206 , there are
variants called standard jigsawÕ P. 205 and enhanced jigsawÕ P. 213 .
\newcommand{\ballexample}{\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[use as bounding box] (0,0.8) rectangle +(0.1,0.1);
\shadedraw [shading=ball] (0,0) circle (1cm);
\shadedraw [ball color=red] (3,-2.2) circle (1cm);
\end{tikzpicture}}
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=blue!5!white,
frame style={left color=red!75!black,right color=red!10!yellow},
fonttitle=\bfseries }
\ballexample
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=A normal box]

\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
\ballexample
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=A translucent jigsaw box,

enhanced jigsaw,opacityback=0.35]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
A normal box
Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accum-
san bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl
hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque
penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla
ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
A translucent jigsaw box
201
\tcbset{enhanced,colback=red!10!white,coltitle=black,
frame style={left color=red!75!black,right color=red!10!yellow},
fonttitle=\bfseries,interior hidden,title hidden}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=A normal box with hidden interior and title]

\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,
title=A jigsaw box with hidden interior and title]
\end{tcolorbox}
A normal box with hidden interior and title
A jigsaw box with hidden interior and title
\newtcolorbox{mybox}{skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw,leftrule=5mm,rightrule=5mm,
boxsep=0mm,top=0mm,bottom=0mm,
frame style={top color=blue,bottom color=red},interior hidden}
\begin{mybox}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
202
10.12 Draft Mode
To reduce the compiliation time while drafting a document, the draft mode can be applied.
Basically, it changes all skins to spartanÕ P. 247 and sets the /tcb/fit algorithmÕ P. 419 to
squeeze. Especially, when fuzzy shadows are used, the speedup will be considerable high.
It is strongly recommended that the draft mode is not used for the final document. Use
! spartanÕ P. 247 directly, if you want to stay with it. The draft mode implementation may
change in future.
Normally, switching to the draft mode should not alter the geometry of your document.
Since overlays are deactivated, any code placed there (e.g. counter changes) is not executed
! anymore! Also, /tcb/remember asÕ P. 194 will not have any effect. You may exclude critical
code with \tcbinterruptdraftmode / \tcbcontinuedraftmode from converting to draft
mode.
\tcbstartdraftmode
Any following tcolorbox code is put into draft mode. All skin settings are overruled with
spartanÕ P. 247 . Overlays, watermarks, shadows, borderlines, and rounded corners are de-
activated for all tcolorbox layers.
\tcbstopdraftmode
The draft mode is deactivated for the following code.
\tcbinterruptdraftmode
If the compilation is in draft mode, the draft mode is deactivated until a following
\tcbcontinuedraftmode is detected.
If the compilation is not in draft mode, nothing happens and a following
\tcbcontinuedraftmode will not start the draft mode.
! nested.
The pair \tcbinterruptdraftmode and \tcbcontinuedraftmode cannot be used
\tcbcontinuedraftmode
Continues the draft mode which was suspended by a preceding \tcbinterruptdraftmode.
Nothing happens, if there was no draft mode before \tcbinterruptdraftmode.
! \tcbcontinuedraftmode is shielded from draft mode.

Code, which is place between \tcbinterruptdraftmode and
/tcb/draftmode=true|false (default true, initially false)

If set to true, the draft mode is started. If set to false, the draft mode is stopped.
\newtcolorbox{mybeamer}[2][]{beamer,colback=Salmon!50!white,
colframe=FireBrick!75!black,adjusted title={#2},#1}
\begin{mybeamer}{Beamer box}
This box looks like a box provided by the \texttt{beamer} class.
\end{mybeamer}\par\medskip
\begin{mybeamer}[draftmode]{Beamer box}
\end{mybeamer}
Beamer box
This box looks like a box provided by the beamer class.
Beamer box
203
10.13 Skin Family ’standard’
Note that the option keys /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 , /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 ,
! /tcb/segmentation styleÕ P. 151 , and /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 are not be applicable to
the standard skin. Also, watermarks (see Subsection 10.3) are not usable with the standard
skin.
/tcb/skin=standard (skin)
This is the standard skin from the core package. All drawing engines are set to type
standard. The drawing is based on pgf commands and does not need the tikz package.
Environment and engines for the skin ’standard’
/tcb/graphical environmentÕ P. 135 : pgfpicture

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : standard
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : standard
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : standard
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : standard
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : standard
/tcb/standard (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=standard.
\begin{tcbraster}[standard,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

colback=LightGreen,colframe=DarkGreen,colbacktitle=LimeGreen!75!DarkGreen,
left=1mm,right=1mm,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,middle=1mm]
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
This is my content. This is my content. My title My title
More content. This is my content. This is my content.
More content.
204
/tcb/skin=standard jigsaw (skin)
This is the standard jigsaw skin from the core package. It differs from the skin
standardÕ P. 204 by its frame engine, see Section 10.11 on page 201.
Environment and engines for the skin ’standard jigsaw’
/tcb/graphical environmentÕ P. 135 : pgfpicture

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : standardjigsaw
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : standard
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : standard
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : standard
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : standard
/tcb/standard jigsaw (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=standard jigsaw.
\begin{tcbraster}[standard jigsaw,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

opacityframe=0.5,opacityback=0.5,opacitybacktitle=0.5,
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
205
10.14 Skin Family ’enhanced’
! features, the enhanced skin is what you are looking for.

If you like the standard appearance of a tcolorbox but you want to have some ’enhanced’
/tcb/skin=enhanced (skin)
This skin translates the drawing commands of the core package into tikz path com-
mands. Therefore, it allows all tikz high level options for these paths and has
more flexibility compared to the standardÕ P. 204 skin. You pay for this with some
prolonged compilation time. The tikz path options can be given with the op-
tion keys /tcb/frame style Õ P. 148 , /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 , /tcb/segmentation
style Õ P. 151 , and /tcb/title styleÕ P. 151 .

Environment and engines for the skin ’enhanced’
/tcb/graphical environmentÕ P. 135 : tikzpicture

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : path
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : path
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : path
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : path
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : path
/tcb/enhanced (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=enhanced.
\begin{tcbraster}[enhanced,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
206
% \usetikzlibrary{shadings} % preamble
\tcbset{skin=enhanced,fonttitle=\bfseries,
frame style={upper left=blue,upper right=red,lower left=yellow,lower right=green},
interior style={white,opacity=0.5},
segmentation style={black,solid,opacity=0.2,line width=1pt}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=Nice box in rainbow colors]

With the 'enhanced' skin, it is quite easy to produce fancy looking effects.
\tcblower
Note that this is still a \texttt{tcolorbox}.
\end{tcolorbox}
Nice box in rainbow colors
With the ’enhanced’ skin, it is quite easy to produce fancy looking effects.
Note that this is still a tcolorbox.
% \usetikzlibrary{decorations.pathmorphing} % preamble
\tcbset{skin=enhanced,fonttitle=\bfseries,boxrule=1mm,
frame style={draw=FireBrick,fill=Salmon},drop fuzzy shadow,
interior style={draw=FireBrick,top color=Salmon!10,bottom color=Salmon!20},
segmentation style={draw=FireBrick,solid,decorate,
decoration={coil,aspect=0,segment length=10.1mm}}}
\begin{tcblisting}{title=A listing box with shadow and some specials}

Of course, skins can be used for listings also.
\begin{equation}
\int\limits_1^2 \frac{1}{x}~dx = \ln(2).
\end{equation}
\end{tcblisting}
A listing box with shadow and some specials

\begin{equation}
\int\limits_1^2 \frac{1}{x}~dx = \ln(2).
\end{equation}

Z2
1
dx = ln(2). (2)
x
1
207
/tcb/enhanced standard (style, no value)
For unbreakable boxes, this is identical to using /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 . But, for breakable
boxes, the break sequence is identical to the standardÕ P. 204 skin, see Section 17.8 from
page 378.
/tcb/blank (style, initially unset)
This style relies on the skin enhancedÕ P. 206 . All drawing operations are hidden and all
margins are set to 0pt. See /tcb/blankerÕ P. 238 for switching off the drawing engines.
\begin{tcolorbox}[blank,watermark text=A blank box]

\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
A blank box
208
\tcbline
Sometimes, a line is only a line. With \tcblowerÕ P. 12 you separate the box content into two
functional units. \tcbline draws only a line which looks like the segmentation line between
upper and lower part. Furthermore, you can use \tcbline more than just once. \tcbline
always uses the path drawing engine. Therefore, the /tcb/segmentation styleÕ P. 151 can
be applied.
\tcbset{enhanced,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=white}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colupper=red!50!black,collower=green!50!black]
\lipsum[1]
\tcbline
\lipsum[2]
\tcblower
\lipsum[3]
\tcbline
\lipsum[4]
\end{tcolorbox}
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tris-
tique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus
placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan
nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem.
Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim.
Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar
lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ul-
trices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea
dictumst. Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi.
Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac
pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus
quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
\tcbline*
Equivalent to \tcbline, but in a breakable box, \tcbline* is removed if at a page/box
break. Also, it is removed at the end of a box.
209
/tcb/skin=enhancedfirst (skin)
This is a flavor of enhancedÕ P. 206 which is used as a first part in a break sequence for
enhancedÕ P. 206 . Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhancedfirst’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathfirst
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : pathfirst
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : pathfirst
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : pathfirst
\begin{tcbraster}[skin=enhancedfirst,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
210
/tcb/skin=enhancedmiddle (skin)
This is a flavor of enhancedÕ P. 206 which is used as a middle part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhancedmiddle’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathmiddle
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : pathmiddle
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : pathmiddle
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : pathmiddle
\begin{tcbraster}[skin=enhancedmiddle,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
211
/tcb/skin=enhancedlast (skin)
This is a flavor of enhancedÕ P. 206 which is used as a last part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhancedlast’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathlast
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : pathlast
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : pathlast
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : pathlast
\begin{tcbraster}[skin=enhancedlast,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
212
/tcb/skin=enhanced jigsaw (skin)
This is the jigsaw variant of skin enhancedÕ P. 206 . It differs by its frame engine, see Sec-
tion 10.11 on page 201.
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhanced jigsaw’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathjigsaw
/tcb/enhanced jigsaw (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=enhanced jigsaw.
\begin{tcbraster}[enhanced jigsaw,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
N 2017-07-01 /tcb/enhanced standard jigsaw (style, no value)

For unbreakable boxes, this is identical to using /tcb/enhanced jigsaw. But, for breakable
boxes, the break sequence is identical to the standard jigsawÕ P. 205 skin, see Section 17.8
from page 378.
213
/tcb/skin=enhancedfirst jigsaw (skin)
This is the jigsaw variant of skin enhancedfirstÕ P. 210 . It differs by its frame engine, see
Section 10.11 on page 201.
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhancedfirst jigsaw’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathfirstjigsaw
\begin{tcbraster}[skin=enhancedfirst jigsaw,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
214
/tcb/skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw (skin)
This is the jigsaw variant of skin enhancedmiddleÕ P. 211 . It differs by its frame engine, see
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhancedmiddle jigsaw’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathmiddlejigsaw
\begin{tcbraster}[skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
/tcb/marker (style, no value)

This styles relies on the skin enhancedmiddle jigsaw. It is intended to be used as an
optical marker like a highlighter pen.
\begin{tcolorbox}[marker]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan
!
bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit
mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et
magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper
vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
215
This examples demonstrates the creation of several text marker environments based on
enhancedmiddleÕ P. 211 .
\tcbset{textmarker/.style={%
skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw,breakable,parbox=false,
boxrule=0mm,leftrule=5mm,rightrule=5mm,boxsep=0mm,arc=0mm,outer arc=0mm,
left=3mm,right=3mm,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,toptitle=1mm,bottomtitle=1mm,oversize}}
\newtcolorbox{yellow}{textmarker,colback=yellow!5!white,colframe=yellow}
\newtcolorbox{orange}{textmarker,colback=DarkOrange!5!white,
colframe=DarkOrange!75!yellow}
\newtcolorbox{red}{textmarker,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red}
\newtcolorbox{blue}{textmarker,colback=DeepSkyBlue!5!white,colframe=DeepSkyBlue}
\newtcolorbox{green}{textmarker,colback=Chartreuse!5!white,colframe=Chartreuse}
\newtcolorbox{rainbow}{textmarker,interior hidden,
frame style={top color=blue,bottom color=red,middle color=green}}
\begin{yellow}
\lipsum[1-3]
\end{yellow}
\begin{orange}
\lipsum[4]
\end{orange}
\begin{red}
\lipsum[5]
\end{red}
\begin{green}
\lipsum[6]
\end{green}
\begin{blue}
\lipsum[7]
\end{blue}
\begin{rainbow}
\lipsum[8]
\end{rainbow}
consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant
morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras
viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus
sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc.
Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada
eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus.
Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci
dignissim rutrum.
216
libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus adip-
iscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat
a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec, suscipit a,
ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla
vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc
eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam
vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst.
Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean
placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit
purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae
risus porta vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper, leo velit
ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum diam. Aliquam pellentesque, augue
quis sagittis posuere, turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus eros eget felis. Maecenas
eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Sed a turpis eu
lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, et
vehicula libero dui cursus dui. Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras
ac magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget nunc. Nam
feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur consectetuer.
Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel, nisl.
Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu purus.
Quisque vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis elit erat sed
nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium, ultricies non,
pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio.
Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut quis purus. Sed ac odio. Sed vehicula hendrerit
sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accumsan risus eget odio. In hac habitasse platea
dictumst. Pellentesque non elit. Fusce sed justo eu urna porta tincidunt. Mauris felis odio,
sollicitudin sed, volutpat a, ornare ac, erat. Morbi quis dolor. Donec pellentesque, erat ac sagittis
semper, nunc dui lobortis purus, quis congue purus metus ultricies tellus. Proin et quam. Class
aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra, per inceptos hymenaeos. Praesent
sapien turpis, fermentum vel, eleifend faucibus, vehicula eu, lacus.
Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Donec odio elit, dictum in, hendrerit sit amet, egestas sed, leo. Praesent feugiat sapien aliquet
odio. Integer vitae justo. Aliquam vestibulum fringilla lorem. Sed neque lectus, consectetuer
at, consectetuer sed, eleifend ac, lectus. Nulla facilisi. Pellentesque eget lectus. Proin eu metus.
Sed porttitor. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Suspendisse eu lectus. Ut mi mi, lacinia sit
amet, placerat et, mollis vitae, dui. Sed ante tellus, tristique ut, iaculis eu, malesuada ac, dui.
Mauris nibh leo, facilisis non, adipiscing quis, ultrices a, dui.
217
/tcb/skin=enhancedlast jigsaw (skin)
This is the jigsaw variant of skin enhancedlastÕ P. 212 . It differs by its frame engine, see
Environment and engines for the skin ’enhancedlast’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : pathlastjigsaw
\begin{tcbraster}[skin=enhancedlast jigsaw,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
218
10.15 Skin Family ’bicolor’
/tcb/skin=bicolor (skin)
This skin is quite similar to the standardÕ P. 204 and enhancedÕ P. 206 skin. But instead of a
segmentation line, the optional lower part of the box is filled with a different color or drawn
with a different style.
Environment and engines for the skin ’bicolor’

/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : special
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : special
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : special
• The most basic usage of this skin is to set the background color of the lower part by
/tcb/colbacklowerÕ P. 220 and all other options like for the standardÕ P. 204 skin.
\begin{tcolorbox}[skin=bicolor,title=The title,
colframe=FireBrick!75!black,colback=Salmon!50!white,colbacklower=Salmon]
The upper part.
\tcblower
The lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
The title
The upper part.
The lower part.
• The more advanced usage of this skin is to apply the /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148
and the /tcb/interior styleÕ P. 149 like for the enhancedÕ P. 206 skin. Also, the
/tcb/segmentation styleÕ P. 151 can be used, but it is applied to the whole lower
part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[skin=bicolor,title=The title,
frame style={top color=FireBrick,
bottom color=FireBrick!15!white,draw=black},
interior style={left color=Salmon,right color=Salmon!50!white},
segmentation style={right color=Salmon,left color=Salmon!50!white}]
The upper part.
\tcblower
The lower part.
\end{tcolorbox}
The title
The upper part.
The lower part.
/tcb/bicolor (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=bicolor.
219
\begin{tcbraster}[bicolor,raster equal height,raster columns=4,
colback=LightGreen,colframe=DarkGreen,colbacklower=LimeGreen!75!LightGreen,
colbacktitle=LimeGreen!75!DarkGreen,
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
/tcb/colbacklower=hcolori (no default, initially black!15!white)

Sets the background hcolori of the lower part. It depends on the skin, if this value is used.
\tcbset{gitexample/.style={listing and comment,comment={#1},

skin=bicolor,boxrule=1mm,fonttitle=\bfseries,coltitle=black,
frame style={draw=black,left color=Gold,right color=Goldenrod!50!Gold},
colback=black,colbacklower=Goldenrod!75!Gold,
colupper=white,collower=black,
listing options={language={bash},aboveskip=0pt,belowskip=0pt,nolol,
basicstyle=\ttfamily\bfseries,extendedchars=true}}}
\begin{tcblisting}{title={Snapshot of the staging area},

gitexample={The option '-a' automatically stages all tracked and modified
files before the commit.\par
This can be combined with the message option '-m'
as seen in the third line.}}
git commit
git commit -a
git commit -am 'changes to my example'
\end{tcblisting}
Snapshot of the staging area
git commit
git commit -a
git commit - am ' changes to my example '
The option ’-a’ automatically stages all tracked and modified files before the commit.
This can be combined with the message option ’-m’ as seen in the third line.
220
/tcb/skin=bicolorfirst (skin)
This is a flavor of bicolorÕ P. 219 which is used as a first part in a break sequence for
bicolorÕ P. 219 . Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’bicolorfirst’

\begin{tcbraster}[skin=bicolorfirst,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
221
/tcb/skin=bicolormiddle (skin)
This is a flavor of bicolorÕ P. 219 which is used as a middle part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’bicolormiddle’

\begin{tcbraster}[skin=bicolormiddle,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
222
/tcb/skin=bicolorlast (skin)
This is a flavor of bicolorÕ P. 219 which is used as a last part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’bicolorlast’

\begin{tcbraster}[skin=bicolorlast,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
223
10.16 Skin Family ’tile’
N 2016-02-25 /tcb/skin=tile (skin)
This skin is a variant of skin bicolorÕ P. 219 . Especially, the optional lower part of the
box is colored by /tcb/colbacklowerÕ P. 220 . The main difference to bicolorÕ P. 219 is that
tile has no frame.
Environment and engines for the skin ’tile’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : empty
N 2016-02-25 /tcb/tile (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=tile.
! It also changes the geometry and some style options.

\begin{tcbraster}[tile,raster equal height,raster columns=4,
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
224
N 2016-02-25 /tcb/skin=tilefirst (skin)
This is a flavor of tileÕ P. 224 which is used as a first part in a break sequence for tileÕ P. 224 .
Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’tilefirst’

\begin{tcbraster}[skin=tilefirst,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

left=1mm,right=1mm,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,middle=1mm,boxrule=0pt]
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
225
N 2016-02-25 /tcb/skin=tilemiddle (skin)
This is a flavor of tileÕ P. 224 which is used as a middle part in a break sequence for
tileÕ P. 224 . Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’tilemiddle’

\begin{tcbraster}[skin=tilemiddle,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
226
N 2016-02-25 /tcb/skin=tilelast (skin)
This is a flavor of tileÕ P. 224 which is used as a last part in a break sequence for tileÕ P. 224 .
Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’tilelast’

\begin{tcbraster}[skin=tilelast,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
227
10.17 Skin Family ’beamer’
/tcb/skin=beamer (skin)
This skin resembles boxes known from the beamer class and therefore is called ’beamer’. It
uses the normal colors from the core package but shades them a little bit. To use this skin,
the tikz library shadings has to be included in the preamble by:
\usetikzlibrary{shadings}
Environment and engines for the skin ’beamer’

/tcb/beamer (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=beamer.

\begin{tcbraster}[beamer,raster equal height,raster columns=4,
colback=LightGreen,colframe=DarkGreen,
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
228
\begin{tcolorbox}[beamer,colback=Salmon!50!white,colframe=FireBrick!75!black,
adjusted title=A colored box with the 'beamer' skin]
\end{tcolorbox}
A colored box with the ’beamer’ skin
\begin{tcolorbox}[beamer,colframe=blue,colback=black,
watermark graphics=lichtspiel.jpg,
coltext=white,watermark opacity=0.75,watermark stretch=1.0,
title=Beamer Box with background picture]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
Beamer Box with background picture
\newtcolorbox{myblock}[2][]{%
beamer,breakable,colback=LightBlue,colframe=DarkBlue,#1,title=#2}%
\begin{myblock}{Beamerish \texttt{block}: \texttt{myblock}}

\lipsum[1]
\end{myblock}
Beamerish block: myblock
229
/tcb/skin=beamerfirst (skin)
This is a flavor of beamerÕ P. 228 which is used as a first part in a break sequence for
beamerÕ P. 228 . Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’beamerfirst’

\begin{tcbraster}[beamer,skin=beamerfirst,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
230
/tcb/skin=beamermiddle (skin)
This is a flavor of beamerÕ P. 228 which is used as a middle part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’beamermiddle’

\begin{tcbraster}[beamer,skin=beamermiddle,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
231
/tcb/skin=beamerlast (skin)
This is a flavor of beamerÕ P. 228 which is used as a last part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’beamerlast’

\begin{tcbraster}[beamer,skin=beamerlast,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
232
10.18 Skin Family ’widget’
/tcb/skin=widget (skin)
This skin uses the normal colors from the core package but shades them a little bit. To use
this skin, the tikz library shadings has to be included in the preamble by:
\usetikzlibrary{shadings}
The appearance of the skin can be controlled by /tcb/frame styleÕ P. 148 , /tcb/interior
styleÕ P. 149 , and /tcb/segmentation styleÕ P. 151 , if needed.
Environment and engines for the skin ’widget’

/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : special
/tcb/widget (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=widget.

\begin{tcbraster}[widget,raster equal height,raster columns=4,
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
233
\begin{tcolorbox}[widget,colback=Salmon!50!white,colframe=FireBrick!75!black,
adjusted title=A colored box with the 'widget' skin]
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
A colored box with the ’widget’ skin
This is my content.
/tcb/skin=widgetfirst (skin)
This is a flavor of widgetÕ P. 233 which is used as a first part in a break sequence for
widgetÕ P. 233 . Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’widgetfirst’

\begin{tcbraster}[widget,skin=widgetfirst,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
234
/tcb/skin=widgetmiddle (skin)
This is a flavor of widgetÕ P. 233 which is used as a middle part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’widgetmiddle’

\begin{tcbraster}[widget,skin=widgetmiddle,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
235
/tcb/skin=widgetlast (skin)
This is a flavor of widgetÕ P. 233 which is used as a last part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’widgetlast’

\begin{tcbraster}[widget,skin=widgetlast,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
236
10.19 Skin Family ’empty’
/tcb/skin=empty (skin)
This skin sets all engines to empty, i. e. nothing is drawn at all. Therefore, this skin is a
good starting point to create a complete new style by yourself.
Environment and engines for the skin ’empty’

/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : empty
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : empty
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : empty
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : empty
/tcb/empty (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=empty.
\begin{tcbraster}[empty,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

coltitle=Navy,borderline={2pt}{0pt}{black!10!white},
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
237
/tcb/blanker (style, initially unset)
This style relies on the skin emptyÕ P. 237 . All engines are set to empty and all margins are
set to 0pt. In contrast to /tcb/blankÕ P. 208 , the graphical paths are not constructed with
exception of the geometry nodes.
\begin{tcolorbox}[blanker,watermark text=A blank box]

\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
A blank box
% \tcbuselibrary{fitting}
\newtcboxfit{\mybox}[1]{blanker,width=4cm,height=7cm,top=4pt,
watermark text=#1}
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}\hline
A & B & C\\\hline
\mybox{A}{\lipsum[1]} & \mybox{B}{\lipsum[2]} & \mybox{C}{\lipsum[3]}\\\hline
\end{tabular}
A B C
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, con- Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, Nulla malesuada porttitor diam.
sectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut pu-
euismod sodales, sollicitudin Donec felis erat, congue non,
rus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique,
adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
libero. Vivamus viverra fermen-
dictum gravida mauris. Nam non justo. Nam lacus libero,
arcu libero, nonummy eget, con- tum felis. Donec nonummy pel-
sectetuer id, vulputate a, magna.
pretium at, lobortis vitae, ul- lentesque ante. Phasellus adip-
Donec vehicula augue eu neque. tricies et, tellus. Donec ali- iscing semper elit. Proin fer-
mentum massa ac quam. Sed
ABC
Pellentesque habitant morbi tris- quet, tortor sed accumsan
tique senectus et netus et male-
bibendum, erat ligula aliquet diam turpis, molestie vitae, plac-
suada fames ac turpis egestas. erat a, molestie nec, leo. Maece-
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra me- magna, vitae ornare odio me- nas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula,
tus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus tus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl eleifend at, accumsan nec, sus-
vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices.
Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tor-
hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse cipit a, ipsum. Morbi blan-
tor gravida placerat. Integer sapien ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pel- dit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc
est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra lentesque a nulla. Cum sociis eleifend consequat lorem. Sed
ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellen-
natoque penatibus et magnis
leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean fau- tesque tincidunt purus vel magna.
cibus. Morbi dolor nulla, male- dis parturient montes, nasce- Integer non enim. Praesent euis-
suada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, tur ridiculus mus. Aliquam mod nunc eu purus. Donec biben-
nulla. Curabitur auctor semper
tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam- dum quam in tellus. Nullam cur-
nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus.
Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan corper vestibulum turpis. Pel- sus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi.
eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis lentesque cursus luctus mau- Nam vulputate metus eu enim.
eget orci sit amet orci dignissim Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu
rutrum.
ris. massa.
238
/tcb/blankest (style, initially unset)
This style extends /tcb/blankerÕ P. 238 . All engines are set to empty and all margins are
set to 0pt. In contrast to /tcb/blankerÕ P. 238 , also title, shadow, underlay, overlay, finish
and borderline are removed.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,raster equal height,
title=Box \thetcbrasternum,
enhanced,size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white,
coltitle=yellow!85!black,
drop fuzzy shadow,watermark text={Box \thetcbrasternum},
borderline={.25mm}{-0.5mm}{green!40!black},
finish={\begin{tcbclipframe}\draw[blue,opacity=0.1,line width=1cm]
(frame.south west) -- (frame.north east);\end{tcbclipframe}},
]
\begin{tcolorbox}\lipsum[4]\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[blanker]\lipsum[4]\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[blankest]\lipsum[4]\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
Box 1 Box 2 Quisque ullamcorper placerat ip-

Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel
Quisque ullamcorper plac-
sum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultri-
erat ipsum. Cras nibh.
justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
Morbi vel justo vitae lacus
ces. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In
tincidunt ultrices. Lorem
consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst.
ipsum dolor sit amet, con-
hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis augue.
sectetuer adipiscing elit. In
Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum
hac habitasse platea dic-
Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean plac-
tumst. Integer tempus con-
fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed
Box 1
vallis augue. Etiam facilisis.
Nunc elementum fermentum
wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut
imperdiet, enim sed gravida
Box 2
erat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed
gravida sollicitudin, felis odio
placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit
gravida sollicitudin, felis odio
placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit
purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tor-
purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet
sollicitudin, felis odio plac-
tor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae
erat quam, ac pulvinar elit
nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
purus eget enim. Nunc vitae
tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit risus porta vehicula.
amet nisl. Vivamus quis tor-
tor vitae risus porta vehicula.
239
/tcb/skin=emptyfirst (skin)
This is a flavor of emptyÕ P. 237 which is used as a first part in a break sequence for
emptyÕ P. 237 . Nevertheless, this skin can be applied independently.
Environment and engines for the skin ’emptyfirst’

\begin{tcbraster}[empty,skin=emptyfirst,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
240
/tcb/skin=emptymiddle (skin)
This is a flavor of emptyÕ P. 237 which is used as a middle part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’emptymiddle’

\begin{tcbraster}[empty,skin=emptymiddle,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
241
/tcb/skin=emptylast (skin)
This is a flavor of emptyÕ P. 237 which is used as a last part in a break sequence for
Environment and engines for the skin ’emptylast’

\begin{tcbraster}[empty,skin=emptylast,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
242
This example demonstrates a breakable customized box. Here, we define an environment
freebox. The first application of freebox produces an unbroken tcolorbox. The box is
drawn by the code given by /tcb/frame codeÕ P. 138 and /tcb/interior codeÕ P. 139 .
The second application of freebox is broken into several parts which are drawn
by the codes given by /tcb/skin first is subskin ofÕ P. 141 , /tcb/skin middle is
subskin ofÕ P. 141 , and /tcb/skin last is subskin ofÕ P. 141 .
% Preamble:
%\usepackage{tikz,lipsum}
%\tcbuselibrary{skins,breakable}
\tikzset{coltria/.style={fill=red!15!white}}
\newtcolorbox{freebox}[1][]{empty,breakable,leftrule=5mm,left=2mm,
frame style={fill,top color=red!75!black,bottom color=red!75!black,middle color=red},
colback=yellow!50!white,
watermark color=red!50!yellow!75!white,
watermark text on=unbroken is unbroken box,
watermark text on=first is first part,
watermark text on=middle is middle part,
watermark text on=last is last part,
% code for unbroken boxes:
frame code={\path[tcb fill frame] (frame.south west)--(frame.north west)
--([xshift=-5mm]frame.north east)--([yshift=-5mm]frame.north east)
--([yshift=5mm]frame.south east)--([xshift=-5mm]frame.south east)--cycle; },
interior code={\path[tcb fill interior] (interior.south west)--(interior.north west)
--([xshift=-4.8mm]interior.north east)--([yshift=-4.8mm]interior.north east)
--([yshift=4.8mm]interior.south east)--([xshift=-4.8mm]interior.south east)
--cycle; },
% code for the first part of a break sequence:
skin first is subskin of={emptyfirst}{%
--([xshift=-5mm]frame.north east)--([yshift=-5mm]frame.north east)
--(frame.south east)--cycle;
\path[coltria] ([xshift=2.5mm,yshift=1mm]frame.south west) -- +(120:2mm)
-- +(60:2mm)-- cycle; },
interior code={\path[tcb fill interior] (interior.south west|-frame.south)
--(interior.north west)--([xshift=-4.8mm]interior.north east)
--([yshift=-4.8mm]interior.north east)--(interior.south east|-frame.south)
--cycle; },
},%
% code for the middle part of a break sequence:
skin middle is subskin of={emptymiddle}{%
--(frame.north east)--(frame.south east)--cycle;
\path[coltria] ([xshift=2.5mm,yshift=-1mm]frame.north west) -- +(240:2mm)
-- +(300:2mm) -- cycle;
\path[coltria] ([xshift=2.5mm,yshift=1mm]frame.south west) -- +(120:2mm)
-- +(60:2mm) -- cycle;
},
interior code={\path[tcb fill interior] (interior.south west|-frame.south)
--(interior.north west|-frame.north)--(interior.north east|-frame.north)
--(interior.south east|-frame.south)--cycle; },
},
% code for the last part of a break sequence:
skin last is subskin of={emptylast}{%
--(frame.north east)--([yshift=5mm]frame.south east)
--([xshift=-5mm]frame.south east)--cycle;
\path[coltria] ([xshift=2.5mm,yshift=-1mm]frame.north west) -- +(240:2mm)
-- +(300:2mm) -- cycle;
},
interior code={\path[tcb fill interior] (interior.south west)
243
--(interior.north west|-frame.north)--(interior.north east|-frame.north)
--([yshift=4.8mm]interior.south east)--([xshift=-4.8mm]interior.south east)
--cycle; },
},
#1}
\begin{freebox}
\lipsum[1]
\end{freebox}
\begin{freebox}
\lipsum[1-12]
\end{freebox}
unbroken box
egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum
urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer
sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices
bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac,
nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi,
congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim
rutrum.
egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum
urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer
sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices
bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac,
first part
nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi,
congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim
rutrum.
non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec
aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio
metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec
ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient
montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt
tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante.
Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis,
molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula,
eleifend at, accumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc
eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel
magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam
in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim.
244
Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse
platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum
fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio
placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh
sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper,
leo velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum diam. Aliquam
pellentesque, augue quis sagittis posuere, turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus
eros eget felis. Maecenas eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor.
Nulla facilisi. Sed a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim
interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui cursus dui. Mauris tempor
ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras ac magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas.
Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur
consectetuer.
Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, tincidunt sit amet, laoreet vitae,
arcu. Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, molestie non,
nonummy vel, nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus,
magna. Donec eu purus. Quisque vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas
dui, et convallis elit erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor
odio, commodo pretium, ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu est, nonummy in,
middle part
fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio.
Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut quis purus. Sed ac odio. Sed vehicula
hendrerit sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accumsan risus eget odio. In hac
habitasse platea dictumst. Pellentesque non elit. Fusce sed justo eu urna porta tincidunt.
Mauris felis odio, sollicitudin sed, volutpat a, ornare ac, erat. Morbi quis dolor. Donec
pellentesque, erat ac sagittis semper, nunc dui lobortis purus, quis congue purus metus
ultricies tellus. Proin et quam. Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per
conubia nostra, per inceptos hymenaeos. Praesent sapien turpis, fermentum vel, eleifend
faucibus, vehicula eu, lacus.
egestas. Donec odio elit, dictum in, hendrerit sit amet, egestas sed, leo. Praesent feu-
giat sapien aliquet odio. Integer vitae justo. Aliquam vestibulum fringilla lorem. Sed
neque lectus, consectetuer at, consectetuer sed, eleifend ac, lectus. Nulla facilisi. Pel-
lentesque eget lectus. Proin eu metus. Sed porttitor. In hac habitasse platea dictumst.
Suspendisse eu lectus. Ut mi mi, lacinia sit amet, placerat et, mollis vitae, dui. Sed
ante tellus, tristique ut, iaculis eu, malesuada ac, dui. Mauris nibh leo, facilisis non,
adipiscing quis, ultrices a, dui.
Morbi luctus, wisi viverra faucibus pretium, nibh est placerat odio, nec commodo wisi
enim eget quam. Quisque libero justo, consectetuer a, feugiat vitae, porttitor eu, libero.
Suspendisse sed mauris vitae elit sollicitudin malesuada. Maecenas ultricies eros sit
amet ante. Ut venenatis velit. Maecenas sed mi eget dui varius euismod. Phasellus
aliquet volutpat odio. Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices
posuere cubilia Curae; Pellentesque sit amet pede ac sem eleifend consectetuer. Nullam
elementum, urna vel imperdiet sodales, elit ipsum pharetra ligula, ac pretium ante justo
a nulla. Curabitur tristique arcu eu metus. Vestibulum lectus. Proin mauris. Proin eu
nunc eu urna hendrerit faucibus. Aliquam auctor, pede consequat laoreet varius, eros
tellus scelerisque quam, pellentesque hendrerit ipsum dolor sed augue. Nulla nec lacus.
Suspendisse vitae elit. Aliquam arcu neque, ornare in, ullamcorper quis, commodo eu,
libero. Fusce sagittis erat at erat tristique mollis. Maecenas sapien libero, molestie et,
245
lobortis in, sodales eget, dui. Morbi ultrices rutrum lorem. Nam elementum ullamcorper
leo. Morbi dui. Aliquam sagittis. Nunc placerat. Pellentesque tristique sodales est.
Maecenas imperdiet lacinia velit. Cras non urna. Morbi eros pede, suscipit ac, varius
last part
vel, egestas non, eros. Praesent malesuada, diam id pretium elementum, eros sem dictum
tortor, vel consectetuer odio sem sed wisi.
Sed feugiat. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nasce-
tur ridiculus mus. Ut pellentesque augue sed urna. Vestibulum diam eros, fringilla et,
consectetuer eu, nonummy id, sapien. Nullam at lectus. In sagittis ultrices mauris. Cur-
abitur malesuada erat sit amet massa. Fusce blandit. Aliquam erat volutpat. Aliquam
euismod. Aenean vel lectus. Nunc imperdiet justo nec dolor.
Etiam euismod. Fusce facilisis lacinia dui. Suspendisse potenti. In mi erat, cursus id,
nonummy sed, ullamcorper eget, sapien. Praesent pretium, magna in eleifend egestas,
pede pede pretium lorem, quis consectetuer tortor sapien facilisis magna. Mauris quis
magna varius nulla scelerisque imperdiet. Aliquam non quam. Aliquam porttitor quam
a lacus. Praesent vel arcu ut tortor cursus volutpat. In vitae pede quis diam bibendum
placerat. Fusce elementum convallis neque. Sed dolor orci, scelerisque ac, dapibus nec,
ultricies ut, mi. Duis nec dui quis leo sagittis commodo.
246
10.20 Skin ’spartan’
/tcb/skin=spartan (skin)
This skin is quite . . . spartan. It supports no rounded corners, no overlays, no shadows, no
borderlines, and no finishes. The only exception are underlays. One cannot do very fancy
things with this skin, but it compiles very fast. Therefore, the spartan skin is used for the
draft mode, see Section 10.12 on page 203. Nevertheless, it can be used as a normal skin.
Environment and engines for the skin ’spartan’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : spartan
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : spartan
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : spartan
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : spartan
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : spartan
/tcb/spartan (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=spartan.
\begin{tcbraster}[spartan,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
More content.
247
10.21 Skin ’draft’
/tcb/skin=draft (skin)
This skin is intended to be used while drafting new geometric settings for a tcolorbox.
Environment and engines for the skin ’draft’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : special
/tcb/draft (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=draft.
\begin{tcbraster}[draft,raster equal height,raster columns=4,

\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\end{tcolorbox}
This is my content.
\tcblower
More content.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
frame: w=101.71864pt, h=56.11296pt
frame: w=101.71864pt, h=56.11296pt
frame: w=101.71864pt, h=56.11296pt
frame: w=101.71864pt, h=56.11296pt
This is my content. This

upper: is my content.
w=87.49236pt, title:My
h=7.95pt w=87.49236pt,
title h=9.2425pt
title:My
w=87.49236pt,
title h=9.2425pt
upper: w=87.49236pt, h=41.88667pt More content. This is my content. upper: This is my content.
w=87.49236pt, h=7.95pt
upper: w=87.49236pt, h=25.53104pt
lower: w=87.49236pt, h=22.55563pt
interior: w=98.8734pt, h=53.26772pt lower:
interior: w=87.49236pt,
More
w=98.8734pt, h=6.2pt
content. h=36.91208pt
248
\vspace*{3mm}
\begin{tcolorbox}[draft,title=A colored box with the 'draft' skin]
\lipsum[1-3]
\tcblower
\lipsum[4-6]
\end{tcolorbox}
frame: w=423.94617pt, h=506.20157pt

A colored box with the ’draft’ skintitle: w=392.64822pt, h=6.2pt
san bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna,
upper: vitae ornare
w=392.64822pt, odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl
h=249.95pt
libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing
semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie
nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum.
Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim.
Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu purus.
Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate
metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer
tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut
imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim.
Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper, leo velit
ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum diam. Aliquam pellentesque, augue quis
sagittis posuere, turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus eros eget felis. Maecenas eget erat
in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Sed a turpis eu lacus commodo
facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim interdum, justo
lower: w=392.64822pt, lectus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui
h=205.95pt
cursus dui. Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras ac magna. Cras
nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est.
Curabitur consectetuer.
Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, tincidunt sit amet, laoreet vitae, arcu. Aenean
faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel, nisl. Ut
lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu purus. Quisque
vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis elit erat sed nulla. Donec
luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium, ultricies non, pharetra in,
velit. Integer arcu est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio.
interior: w=421.10092pt, h=490.04318pt
249
10.22 Skin Family ’freelance’
This skin family ’freelance’ is deprecated with tcolorbox 3.00. It is not longer needed,
because /tcb/frame codeÕ P. 138 , /tcb/interior codeÕ P. 139 , /tcb/interior titled
codeÕ P. 138 , and /tcb/title codeÕ P. 140 can be applied to every skin now. In this sense,
! everything has become freelance now.

For users of /tcb/freelance: Old code should continue to work. There may be ex-
ceptions for breakable freelance boxes under certain circumstances. For new code, use
/tcb/emptyÕ P. 237 or /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 where you would have used /tcb/freelance
before.
/tcb/skin=freelance (skin)
This skin gives full freedom for the appearance of the tcolorbox. All drawing engines
are set to type freelance; they use the tikz package and compute the /tcb/geometry
nodesÕ P. 137 .
Environment and engines for the skin ’freelance’

/tcb/frame engineÕ P. 135 : freelance
/tcb/interior titled engineÕ P. 135 : freelance
/tcb/interior engineÕ P. 136 : freelance
/tcb/segmentation engineÕ P. 136 : freelance
/tcb/title engineÕ P. 136 : freelance
/tcb/freelance (style, no value)

This is an abbreviation for setting skin=freelance.
/tcb/skin=freelancefirst (skin)
This skin equals freelance with exception of the break sequence, see Section 17.8 on
page 378.
/tcb/skin=freelancemiddle (skin)
page 378.
/tcb/skin=freelancelast (skin)
page 378.
/tcb/extend freelance=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
The hoptionsi are added to the skin definition of freelance.
/tcb/extend freelancefirst=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
The hoptionsi are added to the skin definition of freelancefirst which is used as first
part of the break sequence of freelance. See /tcb/skin first is subskin ofÕ P. 141 for
a substitute of this key.
/tcb/extend freelancemiddle=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
The hoptionsi are added to the skin definition of freelancemiddle which is used as middle
part of the break sequence of freelance. See /tcb/skin middle is subskin ofÕ P. 141
for a substitute of this key.
/tcb/extend freelancelast=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
The hoptionsi are added to the skin definition of freelancelast which is used as last
part of the break sequence of freelance. See /tcb/skin last is subskin ofÕ P. 141 for
a substitute of this key.
250
11 Inclusion of Boxed Image Files
The skins library adds some commands to conveniently include boxed image files. For the
LIB
following macros and options, the skins library has to be loaded by a package option or inside
LIB
the preamble by:
See Section 10 on page 148 for the documentation of all other options of the skins library.
LIB
11.1 Macros
N 2014-11-14 \tcbincludegraphics[hoptionsi]{hfile namei}
In principle, this macro includes an image file denoted by hfile namei using the standard
U 2016-07-13
\includegraphics and puts it into a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . The hoptionsi are tcolorbox keys
to set up the colored box. Use /tcb/graphics optionsÕ P. 254 to specify options for the
underlying \includegraphics. Some tcolorbox option keys are automatically set, namely
/tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 and options to center the image inside the box.
The sizing of the included image is done depending on the following:
• If a /tcb/widthÕ P. 34 is specified, but no fixed /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 , the image is sized
to fill the inner width of the box. The height of the box adapts to the image.
• If a fixed /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 is specified, the image is sized to fill the fixed inner area
of the box.
• If the /tcb/captureÕ P. 94 mode /tcb/hboxÕ P. 94 is specified, the image is sized ac-
cording to given \includegraphics options only. The box adapts to the image.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,raster force size=false,size=fbox,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!20!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,center title,drop fuzzy shadow]
\tcbincludegraphics[title=Normal]{goldshade.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[title=Fixed height,height=3cm]{goldshade.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[title=hbox mode,hbox,graphics options={width=3cm}]
{goldshade.png}
\end{tcbraster}
Normal
hbox mode
Fixed height
251
The auxiliary macro \imagename may be used inside \tcbincludegraphicsÕ P. 251 to dis-
play the name of the file. \imagename is already partially detokenized and is allowed to
contain special characters like the underscore. Note that an appropriate font is required to
display such characters.
\begin{tcbraster}[size=fbox,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!20!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries\ttfamily,center title,drop fuzzy shadow]
\tcbincludegraphics[title=\imagename]{goldshade.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[finish={
\node[fill=white,fill opacity=0.5,text opacity=1]
at (frame.center) {\bfseries\ttfamily\imagename};}]{blueshade.png}
\end{tcbraster}
goldshade.png
blueshade.png
252
N 2014-11-14 \tcbincludepdf[hoptionsi]{hfile namei}
This is a generalized version of \tcbincludegraphicsÕ P. 251 which allows to include a
complete PDF file denoted by hfile namei. Every page is boxed into an own tcolorboxÕ P. 12
customized by the given hoptionsi. It is reasonable to put such a series of boxes inside a
tcbrasterÕ P. 279 for alignment.
Use /tcb/graphics pagesÕ P. 254 to use a selection of pages instead of using the whole file.
The auxiliary macro \imagepage may be used inside \tcbincludepdf to display the current
page number.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,colframe=blue,colback=white,
colbacktitle=blue!50!white,fonttitle=\small\bfseries\ttfamily,
left=0pt,right=0pt,top=0pt,bottom=0pt,boxsep=0pt,boxrule=0.6pt,
toptitle=1mm,bottomtitle=1mm,drop lifted shadow,center title,
graphics pages={1,...,6},title={\imagename\ [\imagepage]}]
\tcbincludepdf{tcolorbox-example.pdf}
\end{tcbraster}
tcolorbox-example.pdf [1] tcolorbox-example.pdf [2] tcolorbox-example.pdf [3]
1 Colored boxes 2 LATEX-Examples 4 Watermarks

Box with a watermark picture
My box. This is a \LaTeX\ example:
\begin{equation} Here, you see my nice box with a picture as a watermark. This picture
My title \sum\limits_{i=1}ˆn i = \frac{n(n+1)}{2}. is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of my box. Instead of a
\end{equation} picure, some text could be used or arbitrary graphical code. See the
My box with my title. documentation for more options.
This is a LATEX example:
Upper part of my box. n(n + 1)

n
X
i= (1)
i=1
2
.
5 Boxes in boxes
Lower part of my box.
Box
Side by side
My title Box inside box
This is a \LaTeX\ example: This is a LATEX example:
I can do this also with a title. \begin{equation} Box inside box inside box
\sum\limits_{i=1}ˆn i = n
X n(n + 1)
Lower part of my box. \frac{n(n+1)}{2}. i= . (2) And now for something completely different: Boxes!
2
\end{equation} i=1
This is another box.
Now, we play hide and seek. Where is the lower part?
3 Theorems
I
Theorem 3.1: Summation of Numbers
Here I am
For all natural number n it holds: 6 Breakable Boxes
I’m invisible until you find me.
Breakable box
n(n + 1)
n
X
i= . (3) Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit,
2
vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum
i=1
Funny settings. gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulpu-
tate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant
We have given Theorem 3.1 on page 2.
morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibu-
My title 3.2 Theorem (Summation of Numbers): For all natural number n it holds: lum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida
This box is filled with an external image. placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc.
Title and interior are made partly transparent to show the image. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi
n(n + 1)
n
X
i= . (4) dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auc-
i=1
2 tor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue
My title eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci
This box uses a boxed title. The box of the title can be formatted inde- dignissim rutrum.
pendently from the main box. Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi
auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae,
1 2 3
tcolorbox-example.pdf [4] tcolorbox-example.pdf [5] tcolorbox-example.pdf [6]
IV
ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat Fusce sed justo eu urna porta tincidunt. Mauris felis odio, sollicitudin sectetuer tortor sapien facilisis magna. Mauris quis magna varius nulla
II
ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et sed, volutpat a, ornare ac, erat. Morbi quis dolor. Donec pellentesque, scelerisque imperdiet. Aliquam non quam. Aliquam porttitor quam a
nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellen- erat ac sagittis semper, nunc dui lobortis purus, quis congue purus metus lacus. Praesent vel arcu ut tortor cursus volutpat. In vitae pede quis
tesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient ultricies tellus. Proin et quam. Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora diam bibendum placerat. Fusce elementum convallis neque. Sed dolor
montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam- torquent per conubia nostra, per inceptos hymenaeos. Praesent sapien orci, scelerisque ac, dapibus nec, ultricies ut, mi. Duis nec dui quis leo
corper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris. turpis, fermentum vel, eleifend faucibus, vehicula eu, lacus. sagittis commodo.
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada
at, tincidunt tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec fames ac turpis egestas. Donec odio elit, dictum in, hendrerit sit amet,
nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. Proin fer- egestas sed, leo. Praesent feugiat sapien aliquet odio. Integer vitae justo.
III
mentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat a, Aliquam vestibulum fringilla lorem. Sed neque lectus, consectetuer at,
molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, ac- consectetuer sed, eleifend ac, lectus. Nulla facilisi. Pellentesque eget
cumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc lectus. Proin eu metus. Sed porttitor. In hac habitasse platea dictumst.
eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tin- Suspendisse eu lectus. Ut mi mi, lacinia sit amet, placerat et, mollis
cidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu vitae, dui. Sed ante tellus, tristique ut, iaculis eu, malesuada ac, dui.
purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Mauris nibh leo, facilisis non, adipiscing quis, ultrices a, dui.
Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque Morbi luctus, wisi viverra faucibus pretium, nibh est placerat odio, nec
felis eu massa. commodo wisi enim eget quam. Quisque libero justo, consectetuer a,
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vi- feugiat vitae, porttitor eu, libero. Suspendisse sed mauris vitae elit sol-
tae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer licitudin malesuada. Maecenas ultricies eros sit amet ante. Ut venenatis
adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus con- velit. Maecenas sed mi eget dui varius euismod. Phasellus aliquet volut-
vallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean pat odio. Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices
placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat posuere cubilia Curae; Pellentesque sit amet pede ac sem eleifend con-
quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus sectetuer. Nullam elementum, urna vel imperdiet sodales, elit ipsum
nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula. pharetra ligula, ac pretium ante justo a nulla. Curabitur tristique arcu
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a eu metus. Vestibulum lectus. Proin mauris. Proin eu nunc eu urna
faucibus semper, leo velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. hendrerit faucibus. Aliquam auctor, pede consequat laoreet varius, eros
Vestibulum diam. Aliquam pellentesque, augue quis sagittis posuere, tellus scelerisque quam, pellentesque hendrerit ipsum dolor sed augue.
turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus eros eget felis. Maecenas Nulla nec lacus.
eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Suspendisse vitae elit. Aliquam arcu neque, ornare in, ullamcorper quis,
Sed a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim commodo eu, libero. Fusce sagittis erat at erat tristique mollis. Maece-
interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui cursus dui. nas sapien libero, molestie et, lobortis in, sodales eget, dui. Morbi ultri-
Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras ac ces rutrum lorem. Nam elementum ullamcorper leo. Morbi dui. Aliquam
magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi sagittis. Nunc placerat. Pellentesque tristique sodales est. Maecenas im-
eget nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur consectetuer. perdiet lacinia velit. Cras non urna. Morbi eros pede, suscipit ac, varius
Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, tincidunt sit amet, vel, egestas non, eros. Praesent malesuada, diam id pretium elementum,
laoreet vitae, arcu. Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, eros sem dictum tortor, vel consectetuer odio sem sed wisi.
rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel, nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit Sed feugiat. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturi-
amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu purus. Quisque ent montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ut pellentesque augue sed urna.
vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis Vestibulum diam eros, fringilla et, consectetuer eu, nonummy id, sapien.
elit erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor Nullam at lectus. In sagittis ultrices mauris. Curabitur malesuada erat
odio, commodo pretium, ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu sit amet massa. Fusce blandit. Aliquam erat volutpat. Aliquam euis-
est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio. mod. Aenean vel lectus. Nunc imperdiet justo nec dolor.
Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut quis purus. Sed ac odio. Etiam euismod. Fusce facilisis lacinia dui. Suspendisse potenti. In
Sed vehicula hendrerit sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accumsan mi erat, cursus id, nonummy sed, ullamcorper eget, sapien. Praesent
risus eget odio. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pellentesque non elit. pretium, magna in eleifend egestas, pede pede pretium lorem, quis con-
4 5 6
253
11.2 Option Keys
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/graphics options=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
Used for \tcbincludegraphicsÕ P. 251 and \tcbincludepdfÕ P. 253 to specify
U 2018-03-18
\includegraphics hoptionsi.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,size=fbox,raster equal height,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!20!black,drop fuzzy shadow]
\tcbincludegraphics{goldshade.png}
\newcommand{\myangle}{angle=20}%
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics options=\myangle]{goldshade.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics options={viewport=0cm 0cm 8cm 4cm,clip}]
{goldshade.png}
\end{tcbraster}
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/graphics directory=hdirectoryi (no default, initially empty)

Used for \tcbincludegraphics Õ P. 251 and \tcbincludepdf Õ P. 253 to specify a file system
hdirectoryi where the image files are located.
\tcbset{
graphics directory={.},
graphics directory={examples},
graphics directory={../../pictures},
}
! /tcb/graphics directory may be used especially for \tcbincludepdf

The \graphicspath macro from the graphics package is superior to this option.
Õ P. 253 .
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/graphics pages=hselectioni (no default, initially 1,...,\pdfpages)

Used for \tcbincludepdf Õ P. 253 to specify a hselectioni of pages to be included. The largest
page number is accessible by \pdfpages. The hselectioni has to be given using the \foreach
syntax of TikZ.
\tcbset{
graphics pages={1,3,7},
graphics pages={1,...,10},
graphics pages={1,3,...,18},
graphics pages={100,...,\pdfpages},
}
254
N 2018-03-21 /tcb/graphics orientation=horientationi (no default, initially as-is)
Used for \tcbincludegraphicsÕ P. 251 and \tcbincludepdfÕ P. 253 to guarantee a certain
horientationi of the included image. After all other options for the image are processed, the
result is possibly rotated to be in landscape or portrait mode.
Feasible values for horientationi are:
• as-is: no rotation of the processed image.
• landscape: the processed image is possibly rotated by 90 degrees to ensure that the
final width is not smaller than the final height.
• landscape*: the processed image is possibly rotated by -90 degrees to ensure that the
final width is not smaller than the final height.
• portrait: the processed image is possibly rotated by 90 degrees to ensure that the
final height is not smaller than the final width.
• portrait*: the processed image is possibly rotated by -90 degrees to ensure that the
final height is not smaller than the final width.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=6,size=fbox,raster equal height,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!20!black,drop fuzzy shadow]
\tcbincludegraphics{Basilica_5.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics orientation=landscape]{Basilica_5.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics orientation=portrait]{Basilica_5.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics orientation=portrait*]{Basilica_5.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics options={viewport=0cm 0cm 2cm 3cm,clip}]
{goldshade.png}
\tcbincludegraphics[graphics options={viewport=0cm 0cm 2cm 3cm,clip},
graphics orientation=landscape]{goldshade.png}
\end{tcbraster}
255
12 TikZ Image and Picture Fill Extensions; Auxiliary Macros
The skins library adds some image and picture fill options to the vast option set of TikZ [22].
LIB
These options can be used in any tikzpicture. For the following options, the skins library
LIB
has to be loaded by a package option or inside the preamble by:
See Section 10 on page 148 for the documentation of all other options of the skins library.
LIB
12.1 Fill Plain
/tikz/fill plain image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
Fills the current path with an external image referenced by hfile namei. The image is put
in the center of the path, but it is not resized to fit into the path area.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill plain image=goldshade.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill plain image*=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with an external image referenced by hfile namei. The image is put in
the center of the path, but it is not resized to fit into the path area. The hgraphics optionsi
are given to the underlying \includegraphics command.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill plain '
&image*={width=2.5cm}{goldshade.png}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill plain picture=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with the given hgraphical codei. The result is put in the center of the
path, but it is not resized to fit into the path area. Note that this is almost identical to the
standard path picture option.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill plain picture={%
\draw[red!50!yellow,line width=2mm]
(0,0) circle (1cm);
\draw[red,line width=5mm] (-1,-1) -- (1,1);
\draw[red,line width=5mm] (-1,1) -- (1,-1);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
256
12.2 Fill Stretch
/tikz/fill stretch image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
Fills the current path with an external image referenced by hfile namei. The image is
stretched to fill the path area.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill stretch image=goldshade.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill stretch image*={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with an external image referenced by hfile namei. The hgraphics
optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command. The image is stretched
to fill the path area.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill stretch image*=
{angle=90,origin=c}{goldshade.png}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill stretch picture=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with the given hgraphical codei. The result is stretched to fill the
path area.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill stretch picture={%
(0,0) circle (1cm);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
257
12.3 Fill Overzoom
/tikz/fill overzoom image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
zoomed such that the path area fills the image.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill overzoom image=goldshade.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill overzoom image*={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)

optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command. The image is zoomed
such that the path area fills the image.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill overzoom image*=
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill overzoom picture=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with the given hgraphical codei. The result is zoomed such that the
path area fills the image.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill overzoom picture={%
(0,0) circle (1cm);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
258
12.4 Fill Zoom
/tikz/fill zoom image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
zoomed such that it fits inside the path area. Typically, some parts of the path area will
stay unfilled.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill zoom image=goldshade.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill zoom image*={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)

such that it fits inside the path area. Typically, some parts of the path area will stay
unfilled.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill zoom image*=
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill zoom picture=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with the given hgraphical codei. The result is zoomed such that it fits
inside the path area. Typically, some parts of the path area will stay unfilled.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill zoom picture={%
(0,0) circle (1cm);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
259
12.5 Fill Shrink
/tikz/fill shrink image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
zoomed such that it fits inside the path area, but it never gets enlarged. Typically, some
parts of the path area will stay unfilled.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill shrink image=goldshade.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill shrink image*=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)

such that it fits inside the path area, but it never gets enlarged. Typically, some parts of
the path area will stay unfilled.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill shrink '
&image*={width=1.5cm}{goldshade.png}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill shrink picture=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with the given hgraphical codei. The result is zoomed such that it
fits inside the path area, but it never gets enlarged. Typically, some parts of the path area
will stay unfilled.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill shrink picture={%
(0,0) circle (1cm);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
260
12.6 Fill Tile
/tikz/fill tile image=hfile namei (no default, initially unset)
Fills the current path with a tile pattern using an external image referenced by hfile namei.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill tile image=pink_marble.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill tile image*={hgraphics optionsi}{hfile namei} (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with a tile pattern using an external image referenced by hfile namei.
The hgraphics optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill tile image*={width=1cm}{pink_marble.png}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill tile picture=hgraphical codei (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with a tile pattern using the given hgraphical codei.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill tile picture={%
(0,0) circle (1cm);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill tile picture*={hfractioni}{hgraphical codei} (no default, initially unset)

Fills the current path with a tile pattern using the given hgraphical codei. The graphic is
resized by hfractioni.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill tile picture*={0.25}{%
(0,0) circle (1cm);
}]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
261
12.7 Filling Options
/tikz/fill image opacity=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)
Sets the fill opacity for the image or picture fill options to the given hfractioni.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill stretch image=goldshade.png] (0,0) circle (1cm);
\path[fill=red,fill stretch image=goldshade.png,fill image opacity=0.75]
(2,0) circle (1cm);
(4,0) circle (1cm);
(6,0) circle (1cm);
\path[fill=red] (8,0) circle (1cm);
\end{tikzpicture}
/tikz/fill image scale=hfractioni (no default, initially 1.0)

Stretches, zooms, overzooms or shrinks the image or picture to the given hfractioni of the
width and height of the current path.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[draw,fill zoom image=goldshade.png]
(0,0) rectangle +(2,2);
\path[draw,fill zoom image=goldshade.png,fill image scale=0.75]

(3,0) rectangle +(2,2);
\path[draw,fill zoom image=goldshade.png,fill image scale=1.5]

(6,0) rectangle +(2,2);
\end{tikzpicture}
U 2018-03-18 /tikz/fill image options=hgraphics optionsi (no default, initially empty)

The hgraphics optionsi are given to the underlying \includegraphics command for the
image fill options. This can be just together with /tikz/fill stretch imageÕ P. 257 ,
/tikz/fill overzoom imageÕ P. 258 , /tikz/fill zoom imageÕ P. 259 , and /tikz/fill
tile imageÕ P. 261 .
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill image options={width=1cm},
fill tile image=pink_marble.png]
(2.75,-0.75) -- (3,0) -- (2.75,0.75)
\foreach \w in {45,90,...,315}
{ -- (\w:1.5cm) } -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
262
Image blending example
\begin{tikzpicture}[every node/.style=
{circle,minimum width=2cm}]
\node[fill stretch image=blueshade.png]
(A) at (120:3cm) {A}; A + B
\node[fill stretch image=goldshade.png]
(B) at (60:3cm) {B};
\node[
preaction={fill stretch image=blueshade.png},
fill stretch image=goldshade.png,
fill image opacity=0.5] (C) {C};
\path (A) -- node{$+$} (B); C
\draw[->,very thick] (A)--(C);
\draw[->,very thick] (B)--(C);
\end{tikzpicture}
12.8 Straightening of the Arcs
! code. This change may break with future updates of TikZ.

This patch is considered as an experimental feature. It changes some of the original TikZ
N 2014-05-05 \tcbpatcharcangular
The TikZ package provides a nice rounded corners option to replace all corners by little
arcs. \tcbpatcharcangular is a patch which straightens the arcs. To say it more prosaic,
the little arcs are replaced by little straight lines.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\draw[thick,rounded corners=8pt]
(0,0) -- (0,2) -- (1,3.25) -- (2,2) -- (2,0)
-- (0,2) -- (2,2) -- (0,0) -- (2,0);
\tcbpatcharcangular
\draw[thick,rounded corners=8pt,xshift=2.5cm]
(0,0) -- (0,2) -- (1,3.25) -- (2,2) -- (2,0)
-- (0,2) -- (2,2) -- (0,0) -- (2,0);
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2014-05-05 \tcbpatcharcround
This macro reverts \tcbpatcharcangular, i.e., the patch from \tcbpatcharcangular is
replaced by the original code.
263
12.9 Extracting Node Dimensions
The following auxiliary macros are defined by the skins library. They allow to determine
LIB
the width and height of an arbitrary TikZ node. To be more specific, they determine the east-
to-west and the north-to-south dimensions which may be not the maximal dimensions for a
non-rectangular node. Note that the following dimensions are measured exactly including the
line width of the border line. If a new rectangle or node with the same dimensions and a border
is to be drawn, this border width has to be substracted.
N 2014-09-19 \tcbsettowidthofnode{hregisteri}{hnodei}
Sets the east-to-west dimension of the given hnodei to the TEX hregisteri.
N 2014-09-19 \tcbsetmacrotowidthofnode{hmacroi}{hnodei}
Defines hmacroi as the east-to-west dimension of the given hnodei.
N 2014-09-19 \tcbsettoheightofnode{hregisteri}{hnodei}
Sets the north-to-south dimension of the given hnodei to the TEX hregisteri.
N 2014-09-19 \tcbsetmacrotoheightofnode{hmacroi}{hnodei}
Defines hmacroi as the north-to-south dimension of the given hnodei.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[align=center,draw=red,fill=yellow] (A) {This is my\\example node};
\tcbsetmacrotowidthofnode\mywidth{A}
\tcbsetmacrotoheightofnode\myheight{A}
\path[fill=blue!25!white] % rectangle widthout border
([xshift=2mm]A.south east)
rectangle node{Copy} +(\mywidth,\myheight);
\node[draw=blue,fill=blue!25!white, % standard border width 0.4pt
minimum width=\mywidth-0.4pt, % minus width of border
minimum height=\myheight-0.4pt % minus height of border
]
at ([xshift=5cm]A) {Copy 2};
\end{tikzpicture}
This is my
Copy Copy 2
example node
12.10 Hyper Nodes
The following auxiliary macro is defined by the skins library.

LIB
N 2016-02-03 \tcbhypernode{hmacroi}{hnodei}
Applies a hyperlink creating hmacroi from the package hyperref [15] to an existing tikz
hnodei. \tcbhypernode can only be used inside a tikzpicture environment. The last
argument of the hmacroi is to be omitted and should stand for an object (text) which is to be
made a hyperlink. For example, use \hyperref[name] instead of \hyperref[name]{text}.
% \usepackage{hyperref}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[align=center,draw=red,fill=red!5] (mybutton)
{Click me to jump to Section~\ref*{sec:tikzimagefilling}};
\tcbhypernode{\hyperref[sec:tikzimagefilling]}{mybutton}
\end{tikzpicture}
Click me to jump to Section 12
264
13 Library vignette
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{vignette}
This also loads the LIB skins library, see Section 10 on page 148, and the fadings library of tikz
[22].
13.1 Vignette Drawing
N 2016-04-22 \tcbvignette{hoptionsi}
In this context, a vignette is a four part rectangular frame. It is constructed as several
TikZ paths and, therefore, can only be used inside a tikzpicture environment or inside
tcolorboxÕ P. 12 options.
The hoptionsi control position, size and style settings of the vignette. Theses options have
the common key path /tcb/vig/ and are described in the following.
The next examples show direct \tcbvignette usage without a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{}
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[draw,fill=blue!15!white] (A) {Test};
Test
\tcbvignette{outside node=A,raised color=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[draw,fill=blue!15!white] (A) {Another Test};
\tcbvignette{size=3mm,outside node=A,
Another Test
north style=red,east style=yellow,
south style=blue,west style=green}
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[inner sep=3mm,fill=red!75] (A) {Test};
Test
\tcbvignette{over node=A,fade in}
\end{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette can be used directly inside appropriate options keys for tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
Note that options like /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 need /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 or similar settings.
265
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,size=small,sharp corners,
colback=green!10,colframe=green!50!black,
boxrule=1mm,titlerule=0mm,
My title
title=My title,center title,fonttitle=\bfseries,
underlay={\tcbvignette{size=1mm,inside node=frame, This is a tcolor-
raised color=green!50!black}}] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
Mostly, convenient short cuts like /tcb/underlay vignetteÕ P. 272 can be used to add a
vignette to a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . Here, \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 is used internally.
boxrule=1mm,titlerule=0mm, My title
title=My title,center title,fonttitle=\bfseries, This is a tcolor-
underlay vignette] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
13.2 Generic Geometry Settings
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/xmin=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

Sets the lower horizontal limit of a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 .
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/xmax=hlengthi (no default, initially 1cm)
Sets the upper horizontal limit of a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 .
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/ymin=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Sets the lower vertical limit of a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 .
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/ymax=hlengthi (no default, initially 1cm)
Sets the upper vertical limit of a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 .
\begin{tikzpicture}
\fill [black!20] (0,0) rectangle (3,2);
\path [pattern=checkerboard,pattern color=black!30]
(0,0) rectangle (3,2);
\tcbvignette{xmin=1cm,xmax=2.5cm,ymin=0.5cm,ymax=1.75cm}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/lower left corner=hcoordinatesi (style, initially 0,0)

Sets the lower left corner of a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 . This style sets /tcb/vig/xmin and
/tcb/vig/ymin.
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/upper right corner=hcoordinatesi (style, initially 1,1)
Sets the upper right corner of a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 . This style sets /tcb/vig/xmax and
/tcb/vig/ymax.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{lower left corner={1,0.5},
upper right corner={2.5,1.75}}
\end{tikzpicture}
266
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/inside node=hnamei (style, initally unset)
Places the \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 inside the node with the given hnamei. The outer limits of
the vignette are adapted to the node geometry.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[minimum width=2cm,minimum height=1cm] (A) {Node A};
\tcbvignette{inside node=A} Node A
\draw[very thick] (A.south west) rectangle (A.north east);
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/outside node=hnamei (style, initally unset)

Places the \tcbvignette Õ P. 265 outside the node with the given hnamei. The inner limits
of the vignette are adapted to the node geometry.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{outside node=A} Node A
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/over node=hnamei (style, initally unset)

Places the \tcbvignette Õ P. 265 over the node with the given hnamei. The outer limits of the
vignette are adapted to the node geometry, but are shifted to the outside by /tcb/vig/over
node offset.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{over node offset=1mm,over node=A} Node A
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/over node offset=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.1mm)

Determines the shift value for /tcb/vig/over node. Note that /tcb/vig/over node
offset has to be set before /tcb/vig/over node is used.
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/north size=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)
Sets the thickness of the north vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{north size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/south size=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

Sets the thickness of the south vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{south size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/east size=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

Sets the thickness of the east vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{east size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
267
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/west size=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)
Sets the thickness of the west vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{west size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/vertical size=hlengthi (style, initially 2mm)

Sets /tcb/vig/north sizeÕ P. 267 and /tcb/vig/south sizeÕ P. 267 , to the given hlengthi.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{vertical size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/horizontal size=hlengthi (style, initially 2mm)

Sets /tcb/vig/east sizeÕ P. 267 and /tcb/vig/west size, to the given hlengthi.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{horizontal size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/size=hlengthi (style, initially 2mm)

Sets /tcb/vig/north size Õ P. 267 , /tcb/vig/south size Õ P. 267 , /tcb/vig/east
sizeÕ P. 267 , and /tcb/vig/west size to the given hlengthi.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{size=4mm}
\end{tikzpicture}
! /tcb/vig/north sizeÕ P. 267 , /tcb/vig/south sizeÕ P. 267 , etc. have to be set before
/tcb/vig/outside nodeÕ P. 267 is used.
13.3 Generic Color and Style Settings
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/north style={hstylei} (no default, initially red!50!white)

Sets TikZ hstylei options for the north vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{north style=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/south style={hstylei} (no default, initially red!50!black)

Sets TikZ hstylei options for the south vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{south style={draw=blue,fill=yellow}}
\end{tikzpicture}
268
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/east style={hstylei} (no default, initially red!75!black)
Sets TikZ hstylei options for the east vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{east style={left color=yellow!75!black,
right color=blue!75!black}}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/west style={hstylei} (no default, initially red!75!white)

Sets TikZ hstylei options for the west vignette part.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{west style={preaction={fill=black!20},
pattern=checkerboard,
pattern color=black!30}}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-05-24 /tcb/vig/scope={hstylei} (no default, initially empty)

The four vignette parts are drawn inside a TikZ scope environment which takes the given
hstylei as option.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{scope={transparency group,opacity=0.25}}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/raised color=hcolori (no default)

Creates a raised frame impression by setting the four style options /tcb/vig/north
styleÕ P. 268 , /tcb/vig/south styleÕ P. 268 , /tcb/vig/east style, and /tcb/vig/west
style to darkened and lightened variations of the given hcolori.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{raised color=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/lowered color=hcolori (no default)

Creates a lowered frame impression by setting the four style options /tcb/vig/north
styleÕ P. 268 , /tcb/vig/south styleÕ P. 268 , /tcb/vig/east style, and /tcb/vig/west
style to darkened and lightened variations of the given hcolori.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{lowered color=green!75!black}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/color from=hinneri to houteri (no default)

Sets the four style options /tcb/vig/north styleÕ P. 268 , /tcb/vig/south styleÕ P. 268 ,
/tcb/vig/east style, and /tcb/vig/west style such that the color shades from the
hinneri color to the houteri color.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{color from=red to blue!50}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/base color=hcolori (no default)

Sets the base color for /tcb/vig/raised color, /tcb/vig/lowered color, /tcb/finish
fading vignetteÕ P. 275 . Typically, this value has not to be set directly.
269
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/draw method=direct|clipped (no default, initially direct)
Especially, if shadings or fadings are used, the drawn vignette graphs are displayed some-
times not as perfect as expected. Glitches and imperfections are very dependent on the
previewer software. The /tcb/vig/draw method intends to give a choice of alternative
drawing methods.
• direct: The vignette parts are drawn/filled by using a single TikZ graph. This is the
preferred (and default) method for solid color graphs.
• clipped: The vignette parts are drawn somewhat oversized and are clipped to the
intended region. In combination with shadings and fadings this seems to give a bet-
ter/different optical result (depends on the previewer).
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{color from=red to yellow}
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\tcbvignette{color from=red to yellow,draw method=clipped}
\end{tikzpicture}
! This option is a stopgap and may be changed or preferably removed in future.

13.4 Generic Fading Settings
The fadings library of tikz [22] is loaded automatically by the vignette library. Amongst
LIB
others, the fadings west, east, north, and south are defined inside the fadings library.
The vignette library adds some more fadings called semi west, semi east, semi north,
LIB
and semi south. These fadings are much weaker than the normal fadings.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\fill [path fading=semi west,blue] (0,0) rectangle (1,1);
\end{tikzpicture}
Comparison of the Fadings
west east
north south
semi west semi east
semi north semi south
270
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/fade in={hstylei} (style, default white)
/tcb/vig/east styleÕ P. 269 , and /tcb/vig/west styleÕ P. 269 such that the paths fade
from outside to inside.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\fill [black!20] (-0.5,-0.5) rectangle (1.5,1.5);
(-0.5,-0.5) rectangle (1.5,1.5);
\tcbvignette{fade in=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/fade out={hstylei} (style, default white)

from inside to outside.
\begin{tikzpicture}
(-0.5,-0.5) rectangle (1.5,1.5);
\tcbvignette{fade out=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/semi fade in={hstylei} (style, default white)

weak from outside to inside.
\begin{tikzpicture}
(-0.5,-0.5) rectangle (1.5,1.5);
\tcbvignette{semi fade in=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/vig/semi fade out={hstylei} (style, default white)

weak from inside to outside.
\begin{tikzpicture}
(-0.5,-0.5) rectangle (1.5,1.5);
\tcbvignette{semi fade out=blue}
\end{tikzpicture}
271
13.5 Vignette as Underlay
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/underlay vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)

This puts a \tcbvignette Õ P. 265 with the given hoptionsi as /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 to
a tcolorbox Õ P. 12 . The dimensions of the vignette are matched to the dimensions
of the tcolorbox P. 12 . For example, /tcb/leftruleÕ P. 35 is used as /tcb/vig/west
Õ
sizeÕ P. 268 . Also, /tcb/colframeÕ P. 27 is used as /tcb/vig/raised colorÕ P. 269 .

For a /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 tcolorbox, the vignette is also been broken. Alternatively,
\tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 could be used directly inside an /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 with appropri-
ate settings.
boxrule=2mm,titlerule=0mm, My title
underlay vignette] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,size=small,arc=0pt,
colback=blue!10,colframe=blue,boxrule=2mm,
This is a tcolor-
underlay vignette={size=1.5mm}]
box.
\end{tcolorbox}
colframe=red,interior hidden,boxrule=2mm,
colupper=white,center upper,fontupper=\bfseries, This is a
underlay vignette] tcolorbox.
\end{tcolorbox}
colback=red!50!yellow,frame hidden,boxrule=2mm,
underlay vignette={color from=red!50!yellow to white, This is a tcolor-
draw method=clipped,size=2.1mm}] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
\tcbox[enhanced,sharp corners,colback=red!10,colframe=red]
{Test} Test
\tcbox[enhanced,sharp corners,colback=red!10,colframe=red, Test

underlay vignette]{Test}
272
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/underlay raised shading vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)
This is a special style derived from /tcb/underlay vignetteÕ P. 272 , where the frame color
is shaded to create a soft raised frame impression.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,sharp corners,
colback=green!10,
colframe=green!50!black,
My title
size=small,boxrule=2mm,titlerule=0mm,
underlay raised shading vignette] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/underlay raised fading vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)

This style gives a similar effect as /tcb/underlay raised shading vignette, but a path
fading is used here. Different optical impression are very previewer-dependent.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,sharp corners,
colback=green!10,
My title
underlay raised fading vignette] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/underlay shade in vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)

This is a special style derived from /tcb/underlay vignetteÕ P. 272 , where the frame color
is shaded into the interior color.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,sharp corners,frame hidden,
colback=green!10,
This is a tcolor-
box.
underlay shade in vignette]
\end{tcolorbox}
273
13.6 Vignette as Finish
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/finish vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)

This puts a \tcbvignette Õ P. 265 with the given hoptionsi as /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 to a
tcolorbox Õ P. 12 . The default style settings create a raised frame impression by drawing
black and white color parts with reduced opacity.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,size=small,
boxrule=0.5mm,titlerule=0mm, My title
finish vignette={size=1mm}] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
\tcbincludegraphics[blankest,width=3cm,
finish vignette={size=3mm}]{pink_marble.png}
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/finish raised fading vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)

This puts a \tcbvignette Õ P. 265 with the given hoptionsi as /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 to a
tcolorbox Õ P. 12 . The default style settings create a soft raised frame impression by drawing
fading black and white color parts.
finish raised fading vignette={size=1mm}] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
finish raised fading vignette={size=3mm}]{pink_marble.png}
274
N 2016-04-22 /tcb/finish fading vignette={hoptionsi} (style, no default)
This puts a \tcbvignetteÕ P. 265 with the given hoptionsi as /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 to a
tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . The default style settings fade the box into white from inside to outside.
Note that /tcb/vig/over nodeÕ P. 267 is used here. /tcb/vig/over node offsetÕ P. 267
can be adapted to overlap the box more or less. The fade color can be set using
/tcb/vig/base colorÕ P. 269 .
finish fading vignette={size=2mm}] box.
\end{tcolorbox}
finish fading vignette={size=3mm}]{pink_marble.png}
Example
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=blue!50!black,size=small,
title=Example]
\tcbincludegraphics[blankest,
finish fading vignette={base color=blue!50!black,size=3mm,
over node offset=0.2mm}]{pink_marble.png}
\end{tcolorbox}
275
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=3,bicolor,
raster equal height,sharp corners,boxrule=2mm,
colframe=red,colback=yellow!5,colbacklower=yellow!25!red!20]
\tcbitem A
\tcbitem[underlay vignette] B
\tcbitem[underlay={\tcbvignette{inside node=interior,
lowered color=red,size=1mm}}] C
\tcbitem[underlay vignette,
underlay={\tcbvignette{inside node=interior,
lowered color=red,size=1mm}}] D
\tcbitem[boxrule=3mm,underlay vignette={size=2mm},
lowered color=red,size=1mm}}] E
\tcbitem[underlay raised shading vignette] F
\tcbitem[underlay raised shading vignette,
lowered color=red,size=1mm}}] G
\tcbitem[title=H1,underlay={\tcbvignette{inside node=interior,
lowered color=red,size=1mm}},finish vignette] H2
\tcbitem[boxrule=0.25mm,colback=red!30,finish vignette] I1 \tcblower I2
\tcbitem[tile,colback=red!30,finish raised fading vignette] J1 \tcblower J2
\tcbitem[boxrule=1mm,underlay={\tcbvignette{inside node=interior,
raised color=red,size=1mm}}] K
\tcbitem[boxrule=1mm,title=L1,underlay={\tcbvignette{inside node=title,
lowered color=red,size=0.5mm}}] L2
\end{tcbitemize}
A B C
D E F
H1 I1
G
H2 I2
J1 L1
K
L2
J2
276
14 Library raster
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{raster}
14.1 Concept of Rasters
A raster is used to align several colored boxes in a regular way. It can be seen as a far related
counterpart to the matrix construct of TikZ, but it differs in many aspects.
In principle, tcolorboxes are arranged in rows and columns when put inside a tcbrasterÕ P. 279
environment. The boxes are fluently added to the raster like adding text to a paragraph.
Especially, line/row breaks are done automatically and one cannot end a line/row ahead of
schedule. Further, a raster is not restricted to a single page but may break into an arbitrary
series of pages.
/tcb/raster before skipÕ P. 284

Box #1 Box #2
/tcb/raster width
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing
elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipisc-
NamÕdui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollici-
P. 283
tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam
ing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tel-
arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate lus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat
a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi.
habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut
fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis
metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes,
/tcb/raster left skip Õ P. 285
fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor /tcb/raster right skip
nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla
Õ P. 285
gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luc-
quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices tus mauris.
bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, male-
suada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor
/tcb/raster column skipÕ P. 285
semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh
mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam.
Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
/tcb/raster row skipÕ P. 285
Box #3 Box #4
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi
congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique, libero. Vi- vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem ipsum
vamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pel- dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac
lentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. Proin habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis au-
/tcb/raster heightÕ P. 284

fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie gue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi.
vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollic-
Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec, suscipit itudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus
a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit
eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehic-
Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non ula.
enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec biben-
dum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus.
Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibu-
lum pellentesque felis eu massa.
/tcb/raster after skipÕ P. 284
277
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,raster rows=3,raster height=\linewidth,
enhanced,size=small,sharp corners,arc=8mm,colframe=red!50!black,
colback=yellow!10!white,watermark overzoom=1.0,fit algorithm=hybrid* ]
\begin{tcolorbox}[rounded corners=northwest,boxrule=0pt,
watermark graphics=lichtspiel.jpg]\end{tcolorbox}
\tcboxfit{\lipsum[1]}
\begin{tcolorbox}[rounded corners=northeast,boxrule=0pt,
watermark graphics=goldshade.png]\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[valign=center,halign=center]Nine Boxes.\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[rounded corners=southwest,boxrule=0pt,
watermark graphics=goldshade.png]\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[rounded corners=southeast,boxrule=0pt,
watermark graphics=lichtspiel.jpg]\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}

adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibu-
lum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, fe-
lis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam
arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id,
vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue
eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tris-
tique senectus et netus et malesuada fames
ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras
viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus
vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus
eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat.
Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis,
viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo
ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi
dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mol-
lis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla.
Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi,
congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis,
diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim
rutrum.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod so- Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec
dales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc- felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tin-
cidunt tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra
tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellen-
pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper
tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed ac- elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam.
cumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat
magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia.
Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Nine Boxes. nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend conse-
Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis na- quat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim.
toque penatibus et magnis dis parturi- Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna.
ent montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc
eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tel-
Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ul- lus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec
lamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellen- et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim.
tesque cursus luctus mauris. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ip-

sum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vi-
tae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem
ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer
adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse
platea dictumst. Integer tempus
convallis augue. Etiam facilisis.
Nunc elementum fermentum wisi.
Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet,
enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis
odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit
purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor.
Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vi-
vamus quis tortor vitae risus porta
vehicula.
278
14.2 Macros of the Library
N 2014-11-10 \begin{tcbraster}[hoptionsi]
U 2017-02-01
\end{tcbraster}
A raster arranges enclosed boxes in a regular way, mainly into rows and columns. The
hoptionsi are used to control the raster parameters and to set the properties for the enclosed
boxes.
• The raster is only allowed to contain a series of tcolorboxÕ P. 12 environments or
derived constructs. With some small restrictions, boxes created with \tcboxfitÕ P. 411
can also be added. Boxes created with \tcboxÕ P. 14 are not reasonable here, but may
be used to a certain degree.
• Do not add anything else between the boxes inside the raster with exception of white-
space. Especially, do not use \\ or \par to end a row; row breaks are done automati-
cally.
• The boxes inside a raster are numbered automatically. \thetcbrasternum may be
used inside a box to access this number.
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3, raster equal height,
size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white,colbacktitle=red!50!white,
title={Box \# \thetcbrasternum}]
\begin{tcolorbox}First box\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Second box\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}This is a box\\with a second line\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Another box\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}A box again\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
Box # 1 Box # 2 Box # 3

First box Second box This is a box
with a second line
Box # 4 Box # 5
Another box A box again
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=2, raster equal height=rows,

\end{tcbraster}
Box # 1 Box # 2
First box Second box
Box # 3 Box # 4
This is a box Another box
with a second line
Box # 5
A box again
279
N 2014-11-10 \begin{tcbitemize}[hoptionsi]
\end{tcbitemize}
This is a special case of a tcbrasterÕ P. 279 with the given hoptionsi.
• Here, the enclosed boxes are created using \tcbitem.
• There has to be at least one \tcbitem.
• One cannot use anything else than \tcbitem to add something to the raster.
This leads to a very compact syntax.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=2, raster equal height=rows,

\tcbitem First box
\tcbitem Second box
\tcbitem This is a box\\with a second line
\tcbitem[colback=yellow,colbacktitle=yellow!50!black] Another box
\tcbitem A box again
\end{tcbitemize}
Box # 1 Box # 2
First box Second box
Box # 3 Box # 4
This is a box Another box
with a second line
Box # 5
A box again
tcbitemize has more restrictions than tcbrasterÕ P. 279 . Especially, the

! /tcb/captureÕ P. 94 mode has to be minipage. For example, /tcb/fitÕ P. 413 can-
not be used safely. If /tcb/fitÕ P. 413 should be used, turn over to tcbrasterÕ P. 279 .
N 2014-11-10 \tcbitem[hoptionsi]
Used inside tcbitemize to create a new tcolorboxÕ P. 12 with the given hoptionsi.
280
N 2016-02-19 \begin{tcboxedraster}[hraster optionsi]{hbox optionsi}
\end{tcboxedraster}
This is a convenience environment which combines a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 with an embedded
tcbrasterÕ P. 279 . The hbox optionsi are given to the outer tcolorboxÕ P. 12 , while the
hraster optionsi are given to the embedded tcbrasterÕ P. 279 . This environment is especially
useful for rasters inside rasters.
\begin{tcboxedraster}[raster columns=3, raster equal height,
{colback=yellow!10,fonttitle=\bfseries,title=Boxed Raster}
\end{tcboxedraster}
Boxed Raster
Box # 1 Box # 2 Box # 3

with a second line
Box # 4 Box # 5
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=2, raster equal height,
raster every box/.style={size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white,
valign=center,halign=center}]
\begin{tcolorbox}One\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Two\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcboxedraster}{blankest}
\begin{tcolorbox}Three\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Four\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Five\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}Six\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcboxedraster}
\begin{tcolorbox}Seven\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
One Two
Three Four
Seven
Five Six
281
N 2016-04-27 \begin{tcboxeditemize}[hraster optionsi]{hbox optionsi}
\end{tcboxeditemize}
This is a convenience environment which combines a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 with an embedded
tcbitemizeÕ P. 280 . The hbox optionsi are given to the outer tcolorboxÕ P. 12 , while the
hraster optionsi are given to the embedded tcbitemizeÕ P. 280 . This environment is espe-
cially useful for rasters inside rasters.
\begin{tcboxeditemize}[raster columns=3, raster equal height,

{colback=yellow!10,fonttitle=\bfseries,title=Boxed Itemize}
\tcbitem First box
\tcbitem Second box
\tcbitem This is a box\\with a second line
\tcbitem Another box
\tcbitem A box again
\end{tcboxeditemize}
Boxed Itemize
Box # 1 Box # 2 Box # 3

with a second line
Box # 4 Box # 5
282
14.3 Option Keys of the Library
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster columns=hnumberi (no default, initially 2)

Sets the hnumberi of columns for a raster.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=3,
size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=4,
size=small,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two Three
Four
One Two Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster rows=hnumberi (no default, initially 2)

Sets the hnumberi of rows for a raster. Note that this is only relevant in connection with
setting /tcb/raster heightÕ P. 284 to a value greater than 0pt. Then, it defines the number
of rows per given height.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster width=hlengthi (no default, initially \linewidth)
Sets the total raster width to the given hlengthi. /tcb/raster left skipÕ P. 285 and
/tcb/raster right skipÕ P. 285 are part of the total width.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster width=\linewidth/2,
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
283
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster height=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Sets the raster height per /tcb/raster rowsÕ P. 283 to the given hlengthi. This forces an
appropriate height for the enclosed boxes. /tcb/raster before skip and /tcb/raster
after skip are not part of this calculation. If the hlengthi is set to 0pt, this feature is
deactivated.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster height=4cm, raster rows=2,
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem[enhanced,
finish={\draw[blue,very thick,<->] (frame.south)
-- node[right,pos=.75]{4cm} +(0,4); }]
Three
\tcbitem Four
\tcbitem Five
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
4cm
Three Four
Five
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster before skip=hgluei (no default, initially 2mm)

Space of the given hgluei is inserted vertically before the raster. This space is discardable.
U 2014-12-16
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster after skip=hgluei (no default, initially 2mm)

Space of the given hgluei is inserted vertically after the raster. This space is discardable.
U 2014-12-16
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/raster equal skip=hlengthi (style, no default)

Shortcut to set /tcb/raster before skip, /tcb/raster after skip, /tcb/raster
column skipÕ P. 285 , and /tcb/raster row skipÕ P. 285 to the same hlengthi value.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal skip=4mm,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
284
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster left skip=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Space of the given hlengthi is inserted horizontally left of the raster.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster left skip=2cm,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster right skip=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

Space of the given hlengthi is inserted horizontally right of the raster.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster right skip=2cm,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster column skip=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

Space of the given hlengthi is inserted horizontally between the columns.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster column skip=2cm,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster row skip=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

Space of the given hlengthi is inserted vertically between the rows.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster row skip=0pt,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
285
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster halign=halignmenti (no default, initially left)
Defines the horizontal alignment for the boxes of the rows of a raster, if these rows are not
completely filled (mainly: the last one).
• left: align to the left side,
• center: align to the center,
• right: align to the right side.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster halign=center,
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster valign=halignmenti (no default, initially center)

Defines the vertical alignment for the boxes of a row, if the boxes do not have equal height.
This sets the /tcb/box alignÕ P. 79 option.
• top: align to the top side,
• center: align to the center,
• bottom: align to the bottom side.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster valign=top, raster columns=3,

\tcbitem \Huge One
\tcbitem \Large Two
\tcbitem Three
\end{tcbitemize}
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster valign=center, raster columns=3,
size=small,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white]
\tcbitem \Huge One
\tcbitem \Large Two
\tcbitem Three
\end{tcbitemize}
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster valign=bottom, raster columns=3,
size=small,colframe=green!50!black,colback=green!10!white]
\tcbitem \Huge One
\tcbitem \Large Two
\tcbitem Three
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two Three
One Two Three
One Two Three
286
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster equal height=htypei (default all, initially none)
Puts the enclosed boxes into a common /tcb/equal height groupÕ P. 61 . The hidi of the
U 2017-02-28
equal height group is chosen automatically, but it may be set manually by /tcb/raster
equal height group. Also see /tcb/minimum for current equal height groupÕ P. 62 .
Feasible values for htypei are:
• none: no equal height setting,
• rows: all boxes in a row are set to equal height,
• all: all boxes in the raster are set to equal height.
Note that you have to compile twice to see changes.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal height=rows,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem \Huge Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One
Two
Three Four
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal height,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem \Huge Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One
Two
Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster equal height group=hidi (no default)

Overwrites the automatically chosen id with the given hidi. If this is used to share a
common height between the raster and another raster or box, the /tcb/raster equal
height option should be set to all.
\tcbset{size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white}
\begin{tcolorbox}[equal height group=raster-manual-id]
A single box
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal height,raster equal height group=raster-manual-id]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem \Huge Two
\end{tcbitemize}
A single box
One
Two
287
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster force size=true|false (default true, initially true)
Enforces the raster size computations onto the enclosed boxes. If set to false, individual
settings can be used (for the better or worse).
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster force size=false, raster halign=center,

\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem[add to width=-3cm] Three
\tcbitem[add to width=-3cm] Four
\tcbitem[add to width=-3cm] Five
\tcbitem[add to width=3cm] Six
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
Five Six
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster reset (no value)

Sets all raster settings back to their default values. Note that /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 does not
execute this option. Style settings like /tcb/raster odd column etc. are not touched by
/tcb/raster reset.
14.4 Adding Styles for Specific Boxes
The following styles can be defined to address certain boxes inside a raster. Note that such style
definitions are not removed by /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 or /tcb/raster reset. The style definitions
are used in the order given below.
N 2014-11-24 /tcb/raster every box (style)
This style is used for every box.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster odd column (style)
This style is used for every box in an odd column.
\begin{tcbitemize}[size=small,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white,
raster odd column/.style={colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white}]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster even column (style)

This style is used for every box in an even column.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster column n (style)
This style is used for every box in the n-th column. n has to be replaced by a number.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster odd row (style)
This style is used for every box in an odd row.
288
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster even row (style)
This style is used for every box in an even row.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster row m (style)
This style is used for every box in the m-th row. m has to be replaced by a number.
raster row 2/.style={colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white}]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster odd number (style)

This style is used for every box with an odd number.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster even number (style)
This style is used for every box with an even number.
raster columns=3,
raster even number/.style={colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white}]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\tcbitem Five
\tcbitem Six
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two Three
Four Five Six
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster row m column n (style)

This style is used for the box in the m-th row and n-th column. m and n have to be replaced
by numbers.
N 2014-11-10 /tcb/raster number n (style)
This style is used for the box with number n. n has to be replaced by a number.
raster number 4/.style={colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white}]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One Two
Three Four
289
14.5 Combining Columns or Rows
N 2016-02-19 /tcb/raster multicolumn=hnumberi (no default, initially unset)

This option has to be set inside the option list of a tcolorbox Õ P. 12 inside a tcbrasterÕ P. 279
or inside \tcbitem Õ P. 280 inside tcbitemize Õ P. 280 . It merges the given hnumberi of boxes
into one single box on the same line. The resulting box gets the \thetcbrasternum of the
first box. If there are not enough boxes available on the current line, this option is ignored
and a warning is given.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal height=rows,raster columns=3,

title=\thetcbrasternum,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white]
\tcbitem[colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white,raster multicolumn=1]
multicolumn=1
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
multicolumn=2
\tcbitem
multicolumn=3
\tcbitem
multicolumn=2
\end{tcbitemize}
1 2 3
multicolumn=1
4 6
multicolumn=2
multicolumn=3
10 11
multicolumn=2
290
N 2016-02-19 /tcb/raster multirow=hnumberi (no default, initially unset)
This option has to be set inside the option list of a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 inside a tcbrasterÕ P. 279
or inside \tcbitemÕ P. 280 inside tcbitemizeÕ P. 280 . This option not really merges boxes,
but simply sizes the current box to fit the space of hnumberi rows.
/tcb/raster multirow needs /tcb/raster heightÕ P. 284 to be set. How to achieve

! a similar result for boxes without fixed /tcb/raster heightÕ P. 284 is shown after-
wards.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster rows=3,raster columns=3,raster height=6cm,

raster every box/.style={colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!10!white}]
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\tcbitem[colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white,raster multirow=2]
multirow=2
\tcbitem[raster multicolumn=2,raster multirow=2,blankest]
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster rows=2,raster columns=2,raster height=\tcbtextheight]
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\end{tcbitemize}
\end{tcbitemize}
multirow=2
291
For rasters without fixed /tcb/raster heightÕ P. 284 , /tcb/raster multirowÕ P. 291 can-
not be used. Note that \tcbtextheightÕ P. 147 also cannot be used like in the previous
example.
But, with combination of /tcb/raster equal heightÕ P. 287 and /tcb/space toÕ P. 59 , a
similar effect can be created:
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=3,raster equal height=rows,
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\tcbitem
\tcbitem[colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!10!white]
\lipsum[2]
\tcbitem[raster multicolumn=2,blankest,space to=\myspace]
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=2]
\tcbitem This is a box of the inner raster.
\tcbitem
\tcbitem[height=\myspace]
\tcbitem[height=\myspace]
\end{tcbitemize}
\end{tcbitemize}
Nam dui ligula, fringilla This is a box of the inner

a, euismod sodales, raster.
sollicitudin vel, wisi.
Morbi auctor lorem
non justo. Nam lacus
libero, pretium at,
lobortis vitae, ultricies
et, tellus. Donec aliquet,
tortor sed accumsan
bibendum, erat ligula
aliquet magna, vitae
ornare odio metus a
mi. Morbi ac orci et
nisl hendrerit mollis.
Suspendisse ut massa.
Cras nec ante. Pellen-
tesque a nulla. Cum
sociis natoque penatibus
et magnis dis parturi-
ent montes, nascetur
ridiculus mus. Aliquam
tincidunt urna. Nulla
ullamcorper vestibulum
turpis. Pellentesque
cursus luctus mauris.
292
14.6 Rasters inside Rasters
A raster inside a raster cannot be used directly, because a raster can only contain a tcolorbox
or something derived from a tcolorbox. So, a raster can be put inside a tcolorbox inside a raster.
Some examples for such constructions can be found at tcboxedrasterÕ P. 281 , /tcb/raster
multicolumnÕ P. 290 , /tcb/raster multirowÕ P. 291 .
14.6.1 Raster Setup
The intermediating tcolorboxÕ P. 12 can be made invisible by using /tcb/blankestÕ P. 239 .

\begin{tcolorbox}[blankest]
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=1]
\end{tcbraster}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}raster+tcolorbox+raster\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
One raster+tcolorbox+raster
Two

\begin{tcboxedraster}[raster columns=1]{blankest}
\end{tcboxedraster}
\begin{tcolorbox}raster+tcboxedraster\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbraster}
One raster+tcboxedraster
Two

\tcbitem[blankest]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\end{tcbitemize}
\tcbitem tcbitemize+tcbitem+tcbitemize
\end{tcbitemize}
One tcbitemize+tcbitem+tcbitemize
Two
293
14.6.2 Placing Spaces
If the heights of boxes inside staggered rasters should be matched, the space has to be distributed
accordingly.
• For fixed height boxes/rasters using /tcb/raster heightÕ P. 284 , the height of boxes is
available by \tcbtextheightÕ P. 147 . This can be used to size deeper layered boxes/rasters.
• For boxes/rasters layed out using /tcb/raster equal heightÕ P. 287 , space can be dis-
tributed by /tcb/space toÕ P. 59 . It can take several compilations until all spaces are
distributed correctly.
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster rows=2,raster height=6cm,

\tcbitem[blankest]
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=1,raster rows=2,raster height=\tcbtextheight]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\end{tcbitemize}
\tcbitem This is a fixed height box.
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
One This is a fixed height box.
Two
Three Four
294
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=4,raster rows=4,raster height=0.8\linewidth,
raster every box/.style={size=small,beamer,
colframe=blue!75!yellow,colback=red!75!yellow!20,
center title,title=Box}]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\tcbitem[raster multirow=2,blankest]
\tcbitem Twelve
\tcbitem Eleven
\end{tcbitemize}
\tcbitem[raster multirow=2,raster multicolumn=2,
colframe=red!75!yellow,colback=blue!75!yellow!20]
This is an example with fixed height boxes.
\tcbitem[raster multirow=2,blankest]
\tcbitem Five
\tcbitem Six
\end{tcbitemize}
\tcbitem Ten
\tcbitem Nine
\tcbitem Eight
\tcbitem Seven
\end{tcbitemize}
Box Box Box Box

One Two Three Four
Box Box Box

Twelve This is an example with fixed height boxes. Five
Box Box
Eleven Six
Box Box Box Box

Ten Nine Eight Seven
295
\tcbitem[blankest,space to=\myspace]
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem[add to natural height=\myspace]
This box will adapt its height.
\end{tcbitemize}
\tcbitem This is a flexible height box.
\tcbitem \lipsum[4]
\tcbitem One
\end{tcbitemize}
\end{tcbitemize}
One This is a flexible height box.
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras One

nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt
ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, con-
sectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse This box will adapt its height.
platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis
augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum
fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut im-
perdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis
odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus
eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus
nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae
risus porta vehicula.
296
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem \lipsum[4]
\end{tcbitemize}
\tcbitem[blankest]\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{goldshade.png}
\end{tcbitemize}
\end{tcbitemize}
One
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras

ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, con-
sectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse
platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis
augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum
fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut im-
perdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis
odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus
eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus
nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae
risus porta vehicula. This box will adapt its height.
297
15 Libraries listings , listingsutf8 , and minted
LIB
LIB
LIB
15.1 Loading the Libraries
In contrast to other tcolorbox libraries, the libraries listings , listingsutf8 , and minted
LIB
LIB
LIB
are concurrent in the sense that they all do the same thing, i. e. displaying listings with or without
typesetting the listing in LATEX parallel. The difference is the underlying LATEX package which
does the core job for displaying a listing. So, typically, you need just one of these libraries. If
you do not have a clue, which one of them you should use, you should take listingsutf8 .
LIB
The order in which the libraries are included influences the default settings and the
! /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 behavior. The settings of a later loaded library overwrite the settings
of a previous loaded library. A library is never loaded twice.
15.1.1 Loading listings

LIB
This library uses the package listings [6] to typeset listings. It is loaded by a package option
or inside the preamble by:
\tcbuselibrary{listings}
This also loads the package listings [6].

The /tcb/listing engineÕ P. 310 is set to listings by the library. To reactivate this setting,
if overwritten by other libraries, use
\tcbset{listing engine=listings}
15.1.2 Loading listingsutf8

LIB
! This library is not needed (and troublesome) when using XeL TEX. A
To extend listings for UTF-8 encoded sources, you can use the support from the package
listingsutf8 [10] by loading the library variant listingsutf8 .
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{listingsutf8}
\tcbset{listing utf8=latin1}% optional; 'latin1' is the default.
This also loads the library listings and the packages listings [6] and listingsutf8 [10].
LIB
The /tcb/listing engineÕ P. 310 is set to listings by the library. To reactivate this setting,
if overwritten by other libraries, use
\tcbset{listing engine=listings}
298
15.1.3 Loading minted
LIB
This library uses the package minted [12] to typeset listings. It is loaded by a package option
or inside the preamble by:
\tcbuselibrary{minted}
This also loads the package minted [12].
The minted package uses the external tool Pygments [14] to apply syntax highlighting.
! It has to be installed and set up, before the library can be used, see [12] and [14]. The
tcolorbox library minted does not work, if the package minted [12] does not work.
LIB
The /tcb/listing engineÕ P. 310 is set to minted by the library. To reactivate this setting, if
overwritten by other libraries, use
\tcbset{listing engine=minted}
15.2 Common Macros of the Libraries

\begin{tcblisting}{hoptionsi}
\end{tcblisting}
Creates a colored box based on a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . Controlled by the given hoptionsi, the
environment content is typeset normally and/or as a listing. Furthermore, the hoptionsi
control appearance and functions of the tcolorbox. By default, the listing is interpreted
as a LATEX listing.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black}
This is a \LaTeX\ example which displays the text as source code
and in compiled form.
\end{tcblisting}

This is a LATEX example which displays the text as source code and in compiled form.
299
% \tcbuselibrary{listings} /or/ \tcbuselibrary{listingsutf8}
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=yellow!5,colframe=yellow!50!black,listing only,
title=This is source code in another language (XML), fonttitle=\bfseries,
listing options={language=XML,columns=fullflexible,keywordstyle=\color{red}}}
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<project name="Package tcolorbox" default="documentation" basedir=".">
<description>
Apache Ant build file (http://ant.apache.org/)
</description>
</project>
\end{tcblisting}
This is source code in another language (XML)
<project name="Package␣tcolorbox" default="documentation" basedir=".">
<description>
</description>
</project>
% \tcbuselibrary{minted}
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=yellow!5,colframe=yellow!50!black,listing only,
title=This is source code in another language (XML), fonttitle=\bfseries,
listing engine=minted,minted language=xml}
<description>
</description>
</project>
\end{tcblisting}
This is source code in another language (XML)
<description>
</description>
</project>
% This box is as wide as needed (listing only !!)

\begin{tcblisting}{colback=green!5!white,colframe=green!50!black,listing only,
hbox,enhanced,drop fuzzy shadow,before=\begin{center},after=\end{center}}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\fill[red] (0,0) rectangle (1,1);
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{tcblisting}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
300
\begin{tcboutputlisting}
\end{tcboutputlisting}
Saves the environment content to a file which is named by the key value of listing file.
Later, this file can be loaded by \tcbinputlisting or \tcbuselistingtext or
\tcbuselistinglisting.
This \textbf{text} is written to a standardized file for later usage.
\tcbinputlisting{hoptionsi}
Creates a colored boxed based on a tcolorbox. The text content is read from a file named
by the key value of listing file. Apart from that, the function is equal to that of
tcblistingÕ P. 299 .
\tcbinputlisting{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,text only}
\tcbinputlisting{colback=green!5,colframe=green!75!black,listing only}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\tcbuselistingtext
Loads text from a file named by the key value of listing file.
\tcbuselistingtext
\tcbuselistinglisting
Typesets text as listing from a file named by the key value of listing file.
\tcbuselistinglisting
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\tcbusetemplisting
Typesets text as listing from a temporary file which was written by tcbwritetempÕ P. 126 .
301
! See Section 22.4 on page 442 and Section 22.5 on page 444 for more elaborate methods to
create new environments and commands.
If a new sort of tcblisting environments should be created with one optional

! argument only, one is highly recommended to use \DeclareTCBListingÕ P. 442 or
\NewTCBListingÕ P. 442 instead of \newtcblisting to avoid content scanning problems.
\newtcblisting[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on tcblistingÕ P. 299 . Basically, \newtcblisting
operates like \newenvironment. This means, the new environment hnamei option-
ally takes hnumberi arguments, where hdefaulti is the default value for the optional
first argument. The hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcblisting. Note that
/tcb/savedelimiterÕ P. 26 is set to the given hnamei automatically. The hinit optionsi
allow setting up automatic numbering, see Section 5 from page 108.
\newtcblisting{mybox}{%
colframe=red!75!black} This is my \LaTeX\ box.
\begin{mybox} This is my LATEX box.

This is my \LaTeX\ box.
\end{mybox}
\newtcblisting{mybox}[1]{%
Listing Box
title=#1}
\begin{mybox}{Listing Box} This is my LATEX box.

\end{mybox}
\newtcblisting{mybox}[2][]{%
fonttitle=\bfseries, Listing Box
title=#2,#1}
\begin{mybox}[listing only]
{Listing Box}
\end{mybox} Listing Box
\bigskip
This is my This is my
\begin{mybox}[listing side text] \LaTeX\ box. LATEX box.
{Listing Box}
This is my
\LaTeX\ box.
\end{mybox}
302
\newtcblisting[auto counter]{mycbox}[1]{%
title=Listing \thetcbcounter: #1}
Listing 1: Listing Box

\begin{mycbox}{Listing Box}
\end{mycbox}
This is my LATEX box.
\renewtcblisting[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Operates like \newtcblistingÕ P. 302 , but based on \renewenvironment instead of
303
\newtcbinputlisting[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Creates a new macro \hnamei based on \tcbinputlistingÕ P. 301 . Basically,
\newtcbinputlisting operates like \newcommand. The new macro \hnamei option-
ally takes hnumberi arguments, where hdefaulti is the default value for the optional first
argument. The hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcbinputlisting. The hinit optionsi
allow setting up automatic numbering, see Section 5 from page 108.
\newtcbinputlisting[use counter from=mycbox]{\mylisting}[2][]{%

listing file={#2},
title=Listing (\thetcbcounter) of \texttt{#2},
listing only,breakable,#1}
\mylisting[before upper=\textit{This is the included file content:}]

{\jobname.tcbtemp}
Listing (2) of tcolorbox.tcbtemp
This is the included file content:

listing file={#2},

{\jobname.tcbtemp}

listing engine=minted,minted language=latex,minted style=colorful,
listing file={#2},

{\jobname.tcbtemp}
Listing (3) of tcolorbox.tcbtemp

listing engine=minted,minted language=latex,minted style=colorful,
listing file={#2},

{\jobname.tcbtemp}
\renewtcbinputlisting[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Operates like \newtcbinputlisting, but based on \renewcommand instead of \newcommand.
An existing macro is redefined.
304
15.3 Option Keys of the listings Library
LIB
/tcb/listing options=hkey listi (no default, initially style=tcblatex)
Sets the options from the package listings [6] which are used during typesetting of the
listing. For LATEX listings, there is a predefined listings style named tcblatex which can
be used.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!25,left=6mm,
listing options={style=tcblatex,numbers=left,numberstyle=\tiny\color{red!75!black}}}
and in compiled form. Additionally, we use line numbers here.
\end{tcblisting}
1 This is a \LaTeX\ example which displays the text as source code

2 and in compiled form. Additionally, we use line numbers here.
Additionally, we use line numbers here.
/tcb/no listing options (no value, initially unset)

Abbreviation for listing options={}. This removes all options for the listings package.
This includes the tcblisting standard style tcblatex and the encoding presets. Use this
option, if you want to set the listings options outside of tcblisting, e. g. globally in the
preamble.
\begin{tcblisting}{no listing options}

All \textit{listings} options removed.
\end{tcblisting}
A l l \ t e x t i t { l i s t i n g s } o p t i o n s removed .
All listings options removed.
/tcb/listing style=hstylei (no default, initially tcblatex)

Abbreviation for listing options={style=...}. This key sets a hstylei for the listings
package, see [6]. For LATEX, there is a predefined style named tcblatex.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
listing style=tcblatex}
Here, we use the predefined style.
\end{tcblisting}
305
/tcb/listing inputencoding=hencodingi (no default, initially \inputencodingname)
Sets the input encoding value for the predefined listing style tcblatex and
tcbdocumentation from the library documentation . The initial value is derived
LIB
from the package inputenc if used.
/tcb/listing remove caption=true|false (default true, initially true)
If set to true, some part of the caption building code of the listings package is silenced to
prevent some unwanted interaction with the hyperref package resulting in additional verti-
cal space. If set to false, the listings package code is kept unchanged. Note that listings
outside tcblistingÕ P. 299 and \tcbinputlistingÕ P. 301 are always processed normally.
Typically, a user is not expected to use this key at all.
/tcb/every listing line=htexti (no default, initially unset/empty)
Inserts some htexti to the begin of every line of a listing. Note that this a hack of the
listings package code. This may become unusable or superfluous in the future.
\newtcblisting{commandshell}{colback=black,colupper=white,colframe=yellow!75!black,
listing only,listing options={style=tcblatex,language=sh},
every listing line={\textcolor{red}{\small\ttfamily\bfseries root \$> }}}
\begin{commandshell}
ls -al
cd /usr/lib
\end{commandshell}
root $> ls -al

root $> cd /usr/lib
/tcb/every listing line*=htexti (no default, initially unset/empty)

Identical to /tcb/every listing line plus additional enlargement of /tcb/rightupperÕ P. 41
by the width of htexti. Therefore, this option has to be used after the geometry settings
are done. This option is intended to be used in conjunction with /tcb/hboxÕ P. 94 .
\newtcblisting{commandshell}{colback=black,colupper=white,colframe=yellow!75!black,
listing only,listing options={style=tcblatex,language=sh},hbox,
every listing line*={\textcolor{red}{\small\ttfamily\bfseries root \$> }}}
\begin{commandshell}
ls -al
cd /usr/lib
\end{commandshell}
root $> ls -al

root $> cd /usr/lib
See further options in Section 15.6 on page 310.
! For an combined example

\DeclareTotalTCBox . Õ P. 440
of using \lstinline inside a tcolorbox, see
306
15.4 Option Keys of the listingsutf8 Library
LIB
! The listingsutf8 library is not needed (and troublesome) when using XeLATEX.
The LIB
listingsutf8 library is an extension of the listings library, so all options from Sec-
LIB
LIB
tion 15.3 on page 305 are applicable.
/tcb/listing utf8=hone-byte-encodingi (style, no default, initially latin1)
Abbreviation for using /tcb/listing inputencoding P. 306 together with UTF-8 support
Õ
from the package listingsutf8 [10]. This option is available only for the library variant
listingsutf8 . The hone-byte-encodingi is one of the applicable encodings from [10], e. g.
LIB
latin1 which is the default.

Be aware that this means restriction to this specific hone-byte-encodingi: e. g. latin1 com-
prises umlauts and other accented characters, but not the Euro sign. If you want to use
the listings package and «real» UTF-8 source code, then do not use listingsutf8 but
LIB
listings with /tcb/listing inputencoding Õ P. 306 =utf8 and with specific manual hacks
LIB
for specific UTF-8-encoded characters.

See further options in Section 15.6 on page 310.
307
15.5 Option Keys of the minted Library
LIB
/tcb/minted language=hprogramming languagei (no default, initially latex)
Sets a hprogramming languagei known to Pygments [14].
\begin{tcblisting}{listing engine=minted,minted style=trac,

minted language=java,
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing only}
public class HelloWorld {
// A 'Hello World' in Java
public static void main(String[] args) {
System.out.println("Hello World!");
}
}
\end{tcblisting}

}
}
U 2017-07-05 /tcb/minted options=hkey listi (no default, initially tabsize=2,fontsize=\small,

breaklines,autogobble)
Sets the options from the package minted [12] which are used during typesetting of the
listing.
\newtcblisting{myjava}{listing engine=minted,
minted style=colorful,
minted language=java,
minted options={fontsize=\small,breaklines,autogobble,linenos,numbersep=3mm},
colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,listing only,
left=5mm,enhanced,
overlay={\begin{tcbclipinterior}\fill[red!20!blue!20!white] (frame.south west)
rectangle ([xshift=5mm]frame.north west);\end{tcbclipinterior}}}
\begin{myjava}
}
}
\end{myjava}
1 public class HelloWorld {

2 // A 'Hello World' in Java
3 public static void main(String[] args) {
4 System.out.println("Hello World!");
5 }
6 }
308
/tcb/minted style=hstylei (no default, initially unset)
Sets a hstylei known to Pygments [14]. This is independent from /tcb/minted
optionsÕ P. 308 . Note that styles are always applied globally; all following examples
will be set in the given hstylei until a new style is set. Also note that setting
\usemintedstyle{hstylei} only once per document is more economic, if all styles in a
document are the same. For examples of different styles, see /tcb/minted languageÕ P. 308
and /tcb/minted optionsÕ P. 308 .
See further options in Section 15.6 on the following page.
309
15.6 Common Option Keys of all Libraries
For the hoptionsi in tcblistingÕ P. 299 respectively \tcbinputlistingÕ P. 301 the following pgf
keys can be applied. The key tree path /tcb/ is not to be used inside these macros.
/tcb/listing engine=henginei (no default)
Sets the henginei which typesets the listings. Feasible values are
• listings, if library listings or listingsutf8 is loaded.
LIB
LIB
• minted, if library minted is loaded.
LIB
/tcb/listing file=hfile namei (no default, initially \jobname.listing)
Sets the hfile namei of the file which is used to save listings.
/tcb/listing and text (no value, initially set)
Typesets the environment content as listing in the upper part and as compiled text in the
lower part.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing and text}

This is a \LaTeX\ example.
\end{tcblisting}
This is a LATEX example.
/tcb/text and listing (no value)

Typesets the environment content as compiled text in the upper part and as listing in the
lower part.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,text and listing}

\end{tcblisting}
/tcb/listing only (no value)

Typesets the environment content as listing.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing only}
\end{tcblisting}
310
/tcb/text only (no value)
Typesets the environment content as compiled text.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,text only}
\end{tcblisting}
/tcb/comment=htexti (no default, initially empty)

Records a comment with htexti as content. The comment is displayed e. g. in conjunction
with /tcb/listing and commentÕ P. 314 and /tcb/comment and listingÕ P. 314 .
\begin{tcblisting}{comment={This comment is really only a comment},

colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black}
\end{tcblisting}
N 2014-11-17 /tcb/comment only (no value)

Typesets the environment content with the comment text.
\begin{tcblisting}{comment only,
comment={This is a comment.},
colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black}
\end{tcblisting}
This is a comment.
/tcb/image comment={hoptionsi}{hfilenamei} (style, no default, initially unset)

Uses an image denoted by hfilenamei as comment for the listing. The image is included by
the standard \includegraphics macro with given hoptionsi.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing side comment,

image comment={width=2.5cm}{example-image-a.pdf},center lower}
\end{tcblisting}

A
311
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/tcbimage comment=hfilenamei (style, no default, initially unset)
Uses an image denoted by hfilenamei as comment for the listing. The image is included by
the \tcbincludegraphicsÕ P. 251 macro. The inclusion can be customized by /tcb/comment
styleÕ P. 314 .
! The library skins is needed to apply this option.
LIB
righthand width=3cm,lower separated=false,
tcbimage comment={example-image-a.pdf},
comment style={size=fbox,colframe=blue,colback=blue!50,sharp corners,
drop fuzzy shadow}}
\end{tcblisting}

A
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/pdf comment=hfilenamei (style, default listing file, initially unset)
Uses a PDF file denoted by hfilenamei as comment for the listing. The image is included
by \tcbincludepdfÕ P. 253 inside a tcbrasterÕ P. 279 . The inclusion can be customized by
/tcb/comment styleÕ P. 314 .
! The libraries skins and raster are needed to apply this option.
LIB
LIB
312
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing and comment,
righthand width=3cm,lower separated=false,middle=1mm,
pdf comment={tcolorbox-example.pdf},
comment style={raster columns=3,graphics pages={1,2,3},
colframe=blue,drop fuzzy shadow}}
\end{tcblisting}
1 Colored boxes 2 LATEX-Examples 4 Watermarks

Box with a watermark picture
\begin{equation} Here, you see my nice box with a picture as a watermark. This picture
My title \sum\limits_{i=1}ˆn i = \frac{n(n+1)}{2}. is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of my box. Instead of a
\end{equation} picure, some text could be used or arbitrary graphical code. See the
My box with my title. documentation for more options.

n
X
i= (1)
i=1
2
.
5 Boxes in boxes
Box
Side by side
My title Box inside box
I can do this also with a title. \begin{equation} Box inside box inside box
X n(n + 1)
Lower part of my box. \frac{n(n+1)}{2}. i= . (2) And now for something completely different: Boxes!
2
\end{equation} i=1
This is another box.
3 Theorems
I
Here I am
For all natural number n it holds: 6 Breakable Boxes
Breakable box
n(n + 1)
n
X
i= . (3) Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit,
2
vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum
i=1
Funny settings. gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulpu-
tate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant
morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibu-
My title 3.2 Theorem (Summation of Numbers): For all natural number n it holds: lum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida
This box is filled with an external image. placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc.
Title and interior are made partly transparent to show the image. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi
n(n + 1)
n
X
i= . (4) dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auc-
i=1
2 tor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue
My title eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci
This box uses a boxed title. The box of the title can be formatted inde- dignissim rutrum.
pendently from the main box. Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi
auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae,
1 2 3
313
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/pdf extension=hextensioni (no default, initially pdf)
Sets the PDF file name extension for /tcb/pdf commentÕ P. 312 to hextensioni. Note that
hextensioni always overwrites any actual extension given inside /tcb/pdf commentÕ P. 312 .
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/comment style=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
Sets the hoptionsi for /tcb/tcbimage commentÕ P. 312 and /tcb/pdf commentÕ P. 312 . These
are tcolorbox options to customize the colored box drawn around the image(s), also image
options encapsulated by /tcb/graphics optionsÕ P. 254 , and tcbrasterÕ P. 279 options for
/tcb/pdf commentÕ P. 312 .
/tcb/listing and comment (no value)
Typesets the environment content as listing in the upper part and a given comment in the
lower part.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing and comment,

comment={This is my comment. It may contain line breaks.\par
It can even use the environment content
\flqq\ignorespaces\tcbuselistingtext\unskip\frqq}}
\end{tcblisting}
This is my comment. It may contain line breaks.

It can even use the environment content «This is a LATEX example.»
/tcb/comment and listing (no value)

Typesets a given comment in the upper part and the environment content as listing in the
lower part.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,comment and listing,

comment={This is my comment.}}
\end{tcblisting}
This is my comment.
314
/tcb/listing side text (style, no value)
Typesets the environment content side by side as listing in the left (upper) part and as
compiled text in the right (lower) part. This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/listing and
textÕ P. 310 and /tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing side text}

\end{tcblisting}
This is a \LaTeX\ example. This is a LATEX example.
! Note that sidebyside=false has to be added, if the setting of /tcb/listing side

text is to be annihilated.
/tcb/text side listing (style, no value)
Typesets the environment content side by side as compiled text in the left (upper) part
and as listing in the right (lower) part. This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/text and
listingÕ P. 310 and /tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,text side listing}

\end{tcblisting}
This is a LATEX example. This is a \LaTeX\ example.
/tcb/listing outside text (no value)

Typesets the environment content side by side as listing in a tcolorbox and as compiled
text outside the box in the right part of the page. Nevertheless, the outside text is treated
as lower part of the tcolorbox and can be formatted with all lower part options. The space
partitioning is done with the side by side options from Section 6 on page 116.
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing outside text}

\end{tcblisting}
/tcb/text outside listing (no value)

Typesets the environment content side by side as listing in a tcolorbox and as compiled
text outside the box in the left part of the page. Nevertheless, the outside text is treated as
lower part of the tcolorbox and can be formatted with all lower part options. The space
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,text outside listing}

\end{tcblisting}
This is a LATEX example. This is a \LaTeX\ example.
315
/tcb/listing side comment (style, no value)
Typesets the environment content side by side as listing in the left (upper) part and a
given comment in the right (lower) part. This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/listing and
commentÕ P. 314 and /tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 .

righthand width=1.5cm,image comment={width=1.5cm}{example-image-a.pdf}}
\end{tcblisting}

A
/tcb/comment side listing (style, no value)

Typesets the environment content side by side with a given comment in the left (upper)
part and as listing in the right (lower) part. This is a shortcut for setting /tcb/comment
and listingÕ P. 314 and /tcb/sidebysideÕ P. 116 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,comment side listing,

lefthand width=1.5cm,image comment={width=1.5cm}{example-image-a.pdf}}
\end{tcblisting}
A This is a \LaTeX\ example.
/tcb/listing outside comment (no value)

Typesets the environment content side by side as listing in a tcolorbox and a given com-
ment outside the box in the right part of the page. Nevertheless, the outside text is treated
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing outside comment,

righthand width=1.5cm,image comment={width=1.5cm}{example-image-a.pdf}}
\end{tcblisting}

A
/tcb/comment outside listing (no value)
Typesets the environment content side by side as listing in a tcolorbox and a given com-
ment outside the box in the left part of the page. Nevertheless, the outside text is treated
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,comment outside listing,

lefthand width=1.5cm,image comment={width=1.5cm}{example-image-a.pdf}}
\end{tcblisting}
A This is a \LaTeX\ example.
316
/tcb/listing above text (no value)
Typesets the environment content as listing in a tcolorbox and as compiled text outside
and below the box. The outside text is treated as lower part of the tcolorbox and can be
formatted with all lower part options. The distance between box and text is controlled by
/tcb/middleÕ P. 43 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing above text}

\end{tcblisting}
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/listing above* text (no value)

Widely equal to /tcb/listing above text, but the outside text is not formatted with the
lower part options. Also, it is not put into a minipage and it may span several pages. The
distance between box and text is controlled by /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 .
/tcb/text above listing (no value)
Typesets the environment content as listing in a tcolorbox and as compiled text outside
and above the box. The outside text is treated as lower part of the tcolorbox and can be
formatted with all lower part options. The distance between box and text is controlled by
/tcb/middleÕ P. 43 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,text above listing}

\end{tcblisting}
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/text above* listing (no value)

Widely equal to /tcb/text above listing, but the outside text is not formatted with the
lower part options. Also, it is not put into a minipage and it may span several pages. The
distance between box and text is controlled by /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 .
317
/tcb/listing above comment (no value)
Typesets the environment content as listing in a tcolorbox and a given comment outside
and below the box. The outside text is treated as lower part of the tcolorbox and can be
formatted with all lower part options. The distance between box and comment is controlled
by /tcb/middleÕ P. 43 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,listing above comment,

center lower,image comment={width=3cm}{example-image-a.pdf}}
\end{tcblisting}
A
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/listing above* comment (no value)
Widely equal to /tcb/listing above comment, but the outside comment is not formatted
with the lower part options. Also, it is not put into a minipage and it may span several
pages. The distance between box and comment is controlled by /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 .
/tcb/comment above listing (no value)
Typesets the environment content as listing in a tcolorbox and a given comment outside
and above the box. The outside text is treated as lower part of the tcolorbox and can be
formatted with all lower part options. The distance between box and comment is controlled
by /tcb/middleÕ P. 43 .
\begin{tcblisting}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,comment above listing,

center lower,image comment={width=3cm}{example-image-a.pdf}}
\end{tcblisting}
A
N 2014-11-07 /tcb/comment above* listing (no value)

Widely equal to /tcb/comment above listing, but the outside comment is not formatted
with the lower part options. Also, it is not put into a minipage and it may span several
pages. The distance between box and comment is controlled by /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 .
318
15.7 Option Keys for Processing and Full Document Examples
A complete LATEX document including \documentclass, \begin{document} and

\end{document} cannot be processed directly by tcolorbox. It always has to be com-
piled separately. There are two methods supported by the package to process and display such
a full document example:
• Prepare and compile the example document independent from your main document. The
source file and the resulting PDF file can be included into the main document afterwards.
This is the most economic way since the example document can be left untouched after
the example is complete.
• The other possibility is to compile the example on the fly while the main document is
compiled. This way has some charm, because the example can be edited inside the main
document. But be aware that the compilation of the example is issued on every run of the
main document. Also, there are fewer degrees of freedom how the example is compiled.
For both methods, the resulting example PDF file can be included as a /tcb/pdf commentÕ P. 312 .
The following example shows how to apply the first method. There already is a file
tcolorbox-example.tex and a PDF file tcolorbox-example.pdf. Both of them are input
partly by the following:
% \tcbuselibrary{breakable,skins,raster}
\tcbinputlisting{
enhanced jigsaw,breakable,pad at break*=2mm,height fixed for=first and middle,
lower separated=false,
leftlower=0pt,rightlower=0pt,middle=0pt,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=yellow!10!white,
listing and comment,
listing file={tcolorbox-example},
listing options=
{style=tcblatex,texcsstyle=*\color{red!70!black},firstline=20,lastline=85},
after upper={\par\bigskip\texttt{\ldots}\par},
pdf comment,
comment style={drop lifted shadow,graphics pages={1,...,4}},
}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{tikz,lipsum,lmodern}
\usepackage[most]{tcolorbox}
\begin{document}
%----------------------------------------------------------
\section{Colored boxes}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black]
My box.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,title=My title]
My box with my title.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=green!5!white,colframe=green!75!black]
Upper part of my box.
\tcblower
319
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=yellow!5!white,colframe=yellow!50!black,
colbacktitle=yellow!75!black,title=My title]
I can do this also with a title.
\tcblower
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!75!black,lowerbox=invisible,
savelowerto=\jobname_ex.tex]
\tcblower
I'm invisible until you find me.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!75!black,title=Here I am]
\input{\jobname_ex.tex}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,sharp corners=uphill,
colback=blue!50!white,colframe=blue!25!black,coltext=yellow,
fontupper=\Large\bfseries,arc=6mm,boxrule=2mm,boxsep=5mm,
borderline={0.3mm}{0.3mm}{white}]
Funny settings.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,frame style image=blueshade.png,

opacityback=0.75,opacitybacktitle=0.25,
colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,
title=My title]
This box is filled with an external image.\par
Title and interior are made partly transparent to show the image.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,attach boxed title to top

center={yshift=-3mm,yshifttext=-1mm},
colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black,colbacktitle=red!80!black,
title=My title,fonttitle=\bfseries,
boxed title style={size=small,colframe=red!50!black} ]
This box uses a \textit{boxed title}. The box of the title can
be formatted independently from the main box.
\end{tcolorbox}
...
320
1 Colored boxes 2 LATEX-Examples
\begin{equation}
My title \sum\limits_{i=1}ˆn i = \frac{n(n+1)}{2}.
\end{equation}
My box with my title.

n
X
i= . (1)
i=1
2
Side by side
My title
I can do this also with a title. \begin{equation}
X n(n + 1)
Lower part of my box. \frac{n(n+1)}{2}. i= . (2)
2
\end{equation} i=1
3 Theorems
Here I am
For all natural number n it holds:
n(n + 1)
n
X
i= . (3)
i=1
2
Funny settings.
My title 3.2 Theorem (Summation of Numbers): For all natural number n it holds:
This box is filled with an external image.
Title and interior are made partly transparent to show the image. n
X n(n + 1)
i= . (4)
i=1
2
My title
This box uses a boxed title. The box of the title can be formatted inde-
pendently from the main box.
1 2
4 Watermarks ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat
II
ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et
Box with a watermark picture nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellen-
tesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient
Here, you see my nice box with a picture as a watermark. This picture montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam-
is automatically resized to fit the dimensions of my box. Instead of a corper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
picure, some text could be used or arbitrary graphical code. See the Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat
documentation for more options. at, tincidunt tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec
nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. Proin fer-
mentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat a,
molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, ac-
5 Boxes in boxes cumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc
eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tin-
Box
cidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu
purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus.
Box inside box
Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque
felis eu massa.
Box inside box inside box
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vi-
And now for something completely different: Boxes! tae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer
adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus con-
This is another box. vallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean
placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat
quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus
nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a
I
faucibus semper, leo velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl.
Vestibulum diam. Aliquam pellentesque, augue quis sagittis posuere,
6 Breakable Boxes turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus eros eget felis. Maecenas
eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi.
Breakable box Sed a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui cursus dui.
vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras ac
gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulpu- magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi
tate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant eget nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur consectetuer.
morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, tincidunt sit amet,
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibu- laoreet vitae, arcu. Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit,
lum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel, nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit
placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu purus. Quisque
Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis
dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auc- elit erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor
tor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue odio, commodo pretium, ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu
eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio.
dignissim rutrum. Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut quis purus. Sed ac odio.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi Sed vehicula hendrerit sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accumsan
auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, risus eget odio. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Pellentesque non elit.
3 4
321
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/no process (no default)
Removes all processing commands if set before.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/process code=hcodei (no default, initially empty)
Adds hcodei which is executed during \tcbinputlisting Õ P. 301 and tcblistingÕ P. 299 . At
the time of executing the given hcodei, the listing is already written to /tcb/listing
fileÕ P. 310 , but the colored box is not constructed yet. Its intended use is to pro-
cess the listing somehow before displaying. The processing result can be used inside a
/tcb/commentÕ P. 311 . Several /tcb/process code options can be given which are pro-
cessed in the given order. Typically, hcodei is added by using the following styles /tcb/run
system command, /tcb/run pdflatex, etc.
To use the further options, the compiler has to be called with the -shell-escape permis-
!
sion to authorize potentially dangerous system calls. Be warned that this is a security risk.
Anyway, it’s more economic to compile examples independent from the main document
and to include them as shown in the previous pages.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run system command=hsystem commandi (style, no default, initially unset)

Runs a hsystem commandi, if the document is compiled with the -shell-escape permission.
The current listing file can be accessed as \filename@area\filename@base\filename@ext.
This hsystem commandi is added to /tcb/process code.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/compilable listing (style, no default)
Sets /tcb/listing fileÕ P. 310 to \jobname-listing-hcounteri.
U 2016-05-27
The default /tcb/listing fileÕ P. 310 setting cannot be used to compile a listing,
! since the base name equals the \jobname and the included PDF files should be unique.
Therefore, to use /tcb/run pdflatex etc., the /tcb/listing fileÕ P. 310 has to be
set to a unique value. One may use /tcb/compilable listing for this purpose.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run pdflatex=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)

Issues a pdflatex compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
• The main document has to be compiled with the -shell-escape permission.
• The /tcb/listing fileÕ P. 310 has to be unique for the listing.
• If the listing has to be compiled twice, add run pdflatex two times to the option list.
\begin{tcblisting}{enhanced jigsaw,lower separated=false,

leftlower=0pt,rightlower=0pt,
listing options={style=tcblatex,texcsstyle=*\color{red!70!black}},
listing and comment,
pdf comment,freeze pdf,
compilable listing,
run pdflatex
}
\usetheme{Warsaw}
\begin{document}
\begin{frame}{Beamer example}
\begin{block}{Hello World}
\item One
\item Two
\end{itemize}
\end{block}
\begin{alertblock}{Integral}
\begin{equation}
322
\visible<3->{\int\limits_1^x \frac{1}{t}~dt}
\visible<4->{ = \ln(x).}
\end{equation}
\end{alertblock}
\end{frame}
\end{document}
\end{tcblisting}
\usetheme{Warsaw}
\begin{document}
\begin{frame}{Beamer example}
\begin{block}{Hello World}
\item One
\item Two
\end{itemize}
\end{block}
\begin{alertblock}{Integral}
\begin{equation}
\visible<3->{\int\limits_1^x \frac{1}{t}~dt}
\visible<4->{ = \ln(x).}
\end{equation}
\end{alertblock}
\end{frame}
\end{document}
Beamer example Beamer example
Hello World Hello World

One One
Two
Integral Integral
(1) (1)
Beamer example Beamer example
Hello World Hello World

One One
Two Two
Integral Integral
Zx Zx
1 1
dt (1) dt = ln(x). (1)
t t
1 1
323
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run xelatex=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a xelatex compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run lualatex=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a lualatex compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run makeindex=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a makeindex compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run bibtex=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a bibtex compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run biber=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a biber compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run arara=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues an arara compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run latex=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a latex compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run dvips=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a dvips compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
N 2014-11-14 /tcb/run ps2pdf=hargumentsi (style, no default, initially unset)
Issues a ps2pdf compilation of the listing with the given hargumentsi.
\begin{tcblisting}{enhanced jigsaw,
title={PSTricks with pdflatex},fonttitle=\bfseries,
lower separated=false,middle=0pt,
listing side comment,righthand width=4cm,
compilable listing,
run latex,run dvips,run ps2pdf,
pdf comment,freeze pdf,
comment style={raster columns=1,
graphics options={viewport=0.5in 7.7in 3.5in 10.5in,clip}},
}
\usepackage{pstricks,multido}
\begin{document}
\psset{unit=3}%
\multido{\nHue=0.01+0.01}{100}{%
\definecolor{MyColor}{hsb}{\nHue,1,1}%
\pscircle[linewidth=0.01,linecolor=MyColor]{\nHue}}
\end{document}
\end{tcblisting}
PSTricks with pdflatex
\usepackage{pstricks,multido}
\begin{document}
\psset{unit=3}%
\multido{\nHue=0.01+0.01}{100}{%
\definecolor{MyColor}{hsb}{\nHue,1,1}%
\pscircle[linewidth=0.01,linecolor=MyColor]{\nHue}}
\end{document}
324
! pdf file is only refreshed, if the source for this file has changed.
For most applications, you will like to add /tcb/freeze pdf as option, since the included
N 2016-07-14 /tcb/freeze file=hfilei (no default, initially unset)

Observes some hfilei, usually the final file produced by /tcb/process codeÕ P. 322 ,
/tcb/run system commandÕ P. 322 , /tcb/run pdflatexÕ P. 322 , etc. If the MD5 checksum
of the current /tcb/listing fileÕ P. 310 is unchanged and hfilei exists, the processing is
skipped and the hfilei is kept (frozen). Typically, the style /tcb/freeze pdf can be used
for convenience.
N 2016-07-14 /tcb/freeze none (no default, initially set)
Freeze no file and always execute the given process commands.
N 2016-07-14 /tcb/freeze extension=htexti (style, no default)
Calls /tcb/freeze file with the current /tcb/listing fileÕ P. 310 stripped with its ex-
tension plus htexti as new extension.
...
listing file=myfile.tex,
freeze extension=-modified.pdf, % -> myfile-modified.pdf is observed
...
N 2016-07-14 /tcb/freeze pdf (no value)

tension plus .pdf as new extension.
N 2016-07-14 /tcb/freeze png (no value)
Calls /tcb/freeze file with the current /tcb/listing file Õ P. 310 stripped with its ex-
tension plus .png as new extension. See the examples for /tcb/run pdflatexÕ P. 322 and
/tcb/run ps2pdfÕ P. 324 .
N 2016-07-14 /tcb/freeze jpg (no value)
tension plus .jpg as new extension.
325
15.8 Creation of LATEX Tutorials
The following source code gives a guideline for the creation of LATEX tutorials. In the next section,
a framework for LATEX exercises is described. All examples shall be numbered optionally.
Firstly, some additional tcb keys are defined for the appearance. For the examples, three
environments texexp, texexptitled, and texexptitledspec are defined with automatic num-
bering.
• texexp is used for untitled examles,
• texexptitled is used for titled examles,
• texexptitledspec is used for titled examles with special treatment.

\tcbset{
texexp/.style={colframe=red!50!yellow!50!black, colback=red!50!yellow!5!white,
coltitle=red!50!yellow!3!white,
fonttitle=\small\sffamily\bfseries, fontupper=\small, fontlower=\small},
example/.style 2 args={texexp,
title={Example \thetcbcounter: #1},label={#2}},
}
\newtcblisting{texexp}[1]{texexp,#1}
\newtcblisting[auto counter,number within=section]{texexptitled}[3][]{%
example={#2}{#3},#1}
\newtcolorbox[use counter from=texexptitled]{texexptitledspec}[3][]{%
example={#2}{#3},#1}
\begin{tcblisting}{texexp}
\end{tcblisting}

\begin{texexptitled}{First example with a title line}{firstExample}

Here, we use Example \ref{firstExample} with a title line.
\end{texexptitled}
Example 15.1: First example with a title line
Here, we use Example \ref{firstExample} with a title line.
Here, we use Example 15.1 with a title line.
326
\begin{texexp}{}
\end{texexp}

\begin{texexp}{text and listing}

\end{texexp}

\begin{texexp}{listing only}
This is a \LaTeX\ example which displays the text as source code only.
\end{texexp}
This is a \LaTeX\ example which displays the text as source code only.
\begin{texexp}{text only}
This is a \LaTeX\ example which displays the text in compiled form only.
\end{texexp}
This is a LATEX example which displays the text in compiled form only.
\begin{texexptitled}{An Example with a Heading}{heading1}

This is a \LaTeX\ example with a numbered heading line
which can be referred to.
\end{texexptitled}
Here, we see Example \ref{heading1}.
Example 15.2: An Example with a Heading
This is a \LaTeX\ example with a numbered heading line

which can be referred to.
This is a LATEX example with a numbered heading line which can be referred to.
Here, we see Example 15.2.
327
\begin{texexptitled}[listing only]{Another Example with a Heading}{heading2}
The keys can be used in combination. Here, an example with a heading line
and source code only is given.
\end{texexptitled}
Here, we see Example \ref{heading2}.
Example 15.3: Another Example with a Heading
The keys can be used in combination. Here, an example with a heading line
and source code only is given.
Here, we see Example 15.3.
\begin{texexptitled}[float]{A floating Example with a Heading}{heading3}

This is another \LaTeX\ example with numbered heading line.
But now, the box is a floating object.
\end{texexptitled}
Example 15.4: A floating Example with a Heading
This is another \LaTeX\ example with numbered heading line.

But now, the box is a floating object.
This is another LATEX example with numbered heading line. But now, the box is a floating object.
The floating box of the last example is seen as Example \ref{heading3}

on page \pageref{heading3}.
The floating box of the last example is seen as Example 15.4 on page 328.
\begin{texexptitledspec}{Special application}{texexpbox1}
\begin{lstlisting}[style=tcblatex]
Some \LaTeX\ source code.
\end{lstlisting}
\tcblower
For special cases, the environment |texexptitledspec| with style
|example| can be used directly. As one can see, the upper and the lower
part of the box can be used uncoupled also.
\end{texexptitledspec}
Example 15.5: Special application
Some \LaTeX\ source code.
For special cases, the environment texexptitledspec with style example can be used
directly. As one can see, the upper and the lower part of the box can be used uncoupled
also.
The following series of examples demonstrate the application of tcolorboxÕ P. 12 options for
diversification.
328
\begin{texexptitled}{How to use options (1):\par The basic example}{options1}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\path[fill=yellow!50!white] (0,0) circle (11mm);
\path[fill=white] (0,0) circle (9mm);
\foreach \w/\c in {90/red,210/green,330/blue}
{\path[shading=ball,ball color=\c] (\w:1cm) circle (7mm);}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{texexptitled}
Example 15.6: How to use options (1):

The basic example
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{texexptitled}[center lower,enhanced,segmentation hidden,middle=0mm]

{How to use options (2):\par The text output is centered and the
segmentation line has vanished.}{options2}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{texexptitled}

The text output is centered and the segmentation line has vanished.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
329
\begin{texexptitled}[tikz lower,bicolor,colbacklower=white]
{How to use options (3):\par Here, the |tikzpicture| is totally hidden.
The |bicolor| skin highlights the output.}{options3}
\end{texexptitled}

Here, the tikzpicture is totally hidden. The bicolor skin highlights the output.

\begin{texexptitled}[center lower,listing side text,righthand width=3.5cm,

bicolor,colbacklower=white]
{How to use options (4):\par The |bicolor| skin also works with side
by side mode}{options4}
\begin{tikzpicture}
{\path[shading=ball,ball color=\c]
(\w:1cm) circle (7mm);}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{texexptitled}

The bicolor skin also works with side by side mode
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
330
\begin{texexptitled}[center lower,listing outside text,righthand width=3.5cm]
{How to use options (5):\par Putting our picture outside is just
a matter of one word.}{options5}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{texexptitled}

Putting our picture outside is just a matter of one word.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\begin{texexptitled}[center lower,text above listing]

{How to use options (6):\par The picture may also be put above
the listing box.}{options6}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{texexptitled}

The picture may also be put above the listing box.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
331
\begin{texexptitled}[beamer,center lower,text outside listing,lefthand width=3.5cm]
{How to use options (7):\par Our style is easily transformed into
a beamerish one.}{options7}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{texexptitled}

Our style is easily transformed into a beamerish one.
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
332
15.9 Creation of LATEX Exercises
In the following, a guideline is given for the creation of LATEX exercises with solutions. These
solutions are saved to disk for application at a place of choice. Therefore, all used exercises are
logged to a file \jobname.records for automatic processing. The solution contents themselves
are saved to a subdirectory named solutions. Also see Section 8 on page 128.
• Before the first exercise is given, \tcbstartrecordingÕ P. 128 has to be called to start
recording.
• The solution is given as content of a tcboutputlistingÕ P. 301 environment. Note, that you
can use this content also inside the exercise with \tcbuselistingtextÕ P. 301 in compiled
form.
• After the last exercise is given (and before using the solutions), \tcbstoprecordingÕ P. 128
has to be called to stop recording.
• The solutions are loaded by \tcbinputrecordsÕ P. 128 .
Inside the exercise text, there may be text parts which are needed as LATEX source code and as
compiled text as well. These parts can be saved by tcbwritetempÕ P. 126 and used in compiled
form by \tcbusetempÕ P. 126 or as source code by \tcbusetemplistingÕ P. 301 .
At first, we generate some a common style for the exercises and the solutions. Further, since
exercises and solutions should be numbered, we force to use a label hmarkeri. Automatically,
the label exe:hmarkeri is used to mark the exercise and the label sol:hmarkeri is used to mark
the solution.
\tcbset{texercisestyle/.style={arc=0.5mm, colframe=blue!25!yellow!90!white,
colback=blue!25!yellow!5!white, coltitle=blue!25!yellow!40!black,
fonttitle=\small\sffamily\bfseries, fontupper=\small, fontlower=\small,
}}
With these preparations, the kernel environment texercise for our exercises is created quickly:

\newtcolorbox[auto counter,number within=section,list inside=exam]{texercise}[2][]{%
texercisestyle,
listing file={solutions/texercise\thetcbcounter.tex},
label={exe:#2},
record={\string\processsol{solutions/texercise\thetcbcounter.tex}{#2}},
title={Exercise \thetcbcounter\hfill\mdseries Solution on page \pageref{sol:#2}},
list text={Exercise with solution on page \pageref{sol:#2}},#1}
333
The following examples demonstrate the application.
\tcbstartrecording
\begin{texercise}{tabular_example}
\textit{Create the following table:}\par\smallskip%
\begin{tabular}{|p{3cm}|p{3cm}|p{3cm}|p{3cm}|}\hline
\multicolumn{4}{|c|}{\bfseries\itshape Das alte Italien}\\\hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{\bfseries Antike} &
\multicolumn{2}{c|}{\bfseries Mittelalter}\\\hline
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\itshape Republik}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape Kaiserreich}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape Franken}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape Teilstaaten}\\\hline
In den Zeiten der r\"{o}mischen Republik standen dem Staat jeweils zwei
Konsuln vor, deren Machtbefugnisse identisch waren. &
Das r\"{o}mische Kaiserreich wurde von einem Alleinherrscher, dem Kaiser,
regiert.
& In der V\"{o}lkerwanderungszeit \"{u}bernahmen die Goten und sp\"{a}ter die
Franken die Vorherrschaft.
& Im sp\"{a}teren Mittelalter regierten F\"{u}rsten einen Fleckenteppich
von Einzelstaaten.\\\hline
\end{tabular}
\tcbuselistingtext%
\end{texercise}
Exercise 15.1 Solution on page 337
Create the following table:

Das alte Italien
Antike Mittelalter
Republik Kaiserreich Franken Teilstaaten
In den Zeiten der Das römische In der Völker- Im späteren Mit-
römischen Repub- Kaiserreich wurde wanderungszeit telalter regierten
lik standen dem von einem Allein- übernahmen die Fürsten einen
Staat jeweils zwei herrscher, dem Goten und später Fleckenteppich von
Konsuln vor, deren Kaiser, regiert. die Franken die Einzelstaaten.
Machtbefugnisse Vorherrschaft.
identisch waren.
334
\begin{texercise}{macro_oneparam}
\newcommand{\headingline}[1]{%
\begin{center}\Large\bfseries #1\end{center}}
\tcbuselistingtext%
Create a new macro \verb+\headingline+ which produces the

following output:\par\smallskip
\headingline{Very important heading}
\end{tcbwritetemp}
\tcbusetemplisting\tcbusetemp%
\end{texercise}
Create a new macro \headingline which produces the following output:

\headingline{Very important heading}
Very important heading
\begin{texercise}{macro_twoparam}
\newcommand{\minitable}[2]{%
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{p{10cm}}\hline%
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bfseries#1}\\\hline%
#2\\\hline%
\end{tabular}\end{center}}
\tcbuselistingtext%
Create a new macro \verb+\minitable+ which produces the
following output:\par\smallskip
\minitable{My heading}{In this tiny tabular, there is only a heading
and some text below which has a width of ten centimeters.}
\end{tcbwritetemp}
\tcbusetemplisting\par\smallskip\tcbusetemp%
\end{texercise}
Create a new macro \minitable which produces the following output:

\minitable{My heading}{In this tiny tabular, there is only a heading
and some text below which has a width of ten centimeters.}
My heading
In this tiny tabular, there is only a heading and some text below
which has a width of ten centimeters.
335
\begin{texercise}{macro_threeparam}
\newcommand{\synop}[3]{%
\begin{tabular}{@{}p{(\linewidth-\tabcolsep*2-\arrayrulewidth)/2}|%
p{(\linewidth-\tabcolsep*2-\arrayrulewidth)/2}@{}}\hline
\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bfseries #1}\\\hline
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape English}&
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\itshape German}\\\hline
#2 & #3
\end{tabular}}
\tcbuselistingtext%
Create a new macro \verb+\synop+ which typesets a synoptic text according
to the following example. Base your macro on a tabular which takes the
total line width.\par\smallskip
\synop{Neil Armstrong}%
{That's one small step for a man, one giant leap for mankind.}%
{Das ist ein kleiner Schritt f\"{u}r einen Mann,
ein riesiger Sprung f\"{u}r die Menschheit.}
\end{tcbwritetemp}
\tcbusetemplisting\par\smallskip\tcbusetemp%
\end{texercise}
Create a new macro \synop which typesets a synoptic text according to the following
example. Base your macro on a tabular which takes the total line width.
\synop{Neil Armstrong}%
{That's one small step for a man, one giant leap for mankind.}%
{Das ist ein kleiner Schritt f\"{u}r einen Mann,
ein riesiger Sprung f\"{u}r die Menschheit.}
Neil Armstrong
English German
That’s one small step for a man, one giant Das ist ein kleiner Schritt für einen Mann,
leap for mankind. ein riesiger Sprung für die Menschheit.
\tcbstoprecording
Now, we give a list of all exercises with:
\tcblistof[\subsection]{exam}{List of Exercises%
\label{listofexercises}}
15.10 List of Exercises

15.1 Exercise with solution on page 337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
336
15.11 Solutions for the given LATEX Exercises
For all solutions, a macro \processsol was written to the file \jobname.records. Now, we
need a definition for this macro to use the solutions.
% \usepackage{hyperref} % for phantomlabel
\newtcbinputlisting{\processsol}[2]{%
texercisestyle,
listing only,
listing file={#1},
phantomlabel={sol:#2},%
title={Solution for Exercise \ref{exe:#2} on page \pageref{exe:#2}},
}
The loading of all solutions is done by:
\tcbinputrecords
With this, we get:

Solution for Exercise 15.1 on page 334
\begin{tabular}{|p{3cm}|p{3cm}|p{3cm}|p{3cm}|}\hline
\multicolumn{4}{|c|}{\bfseries\itshape Das alte Italien}\\\hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{\bfseries Antike} &
\multicolumn{2}{c|}{\bfseries Mittelalter}\\\hline
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\itshape Republik}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape Kaiserreich}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape Franken}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape Teilstaaten}\\\hline
In den Zeiten der r\"{o}mischen Republik standen dem Staat jeweils zwei
Konsuln vor, deren Machtbefugnisse identisch waren. &
Das r\"{o}mische Kaiserreich wurde von einem Alleinherrscher, dem Kaiser,
regiert.
& In der V\"{o}lkerwanderungszeit \"{u}bernahmen die Goten und sp\"{a}ter die
Franken die Vorherrschaft.
& Im sp\"{a}teren Mittelalter regierten F\"{u}rsten einen Fleckenteppich
von Einzelstaaten.\\\hline
\end{tabular}
\newcommand{\headingline}[1]{%
\begin{center}\Large\bfseries #1\end{center}}
\newcommand{\minitable}[2]{%
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{p{10cm}}\hline%
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\bfseries#1}\\\hline%
#2\\\hline%
\end{tabular}\end{center}}
337
\newcommand{\synop}[3]{%
\begin{tabular}{@{}p{(\linewidth-\tabcolsep*2-\arrayrulewidth)/2}|%
p{(\linewidth-\tabcolsep*2-\arrayrulewidth)/2}@{}}\hline
\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bfseries #1}\\\hline
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{\itshape English}&
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\itshape German}\\\hline
#2 & #3
\end{tabular}}
338
16 Library theorems
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{theorems}
This also loads the package amsmath.

U 2016-06-22 \newtcbtheorem[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hdisplay namei}{hoptionsi}{hprefixi}
Creates new environments hnamei and hnamei* based on tcolorbox to frame a (math-
ematical) theorem. The hdisplay namei is used in the title line with a number, e. g.
«Theorem 5.1». The hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcolorbox to control the appear-
ance. The hinit optionsi allow setting up automatic numbering, see Section 5 on page 108.
The new environment hnamei takes one optional and two mandatory parameters. The op-
tional parameter supplements the options and should be used only in rare cases. The first
mandatory parameter is the title text for the theorem and is also set as /tcb/namerefÕ P. 99
identifier. The second mandatory parameter is a hmarkeri. The theorem is automati-
cally labeled with hprefixihseparatorihmarkeri where hseparatori is predefined as ’:’, see
/tcb/label separatorÕ P. 346 .
The new environment hnamei* takes one optional and one mandatory parameter and rep-
resents an unnumbered variant of the environment hnamei. This variant is not labeled and
not listed in lists of theorems.
\newtcbtheorem[number within=section]{mytheo}{My Theorem}%
{colback=green!5,colframe=green!35!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}{th}
% usage of '\nameref' needs 'nameref' or 'hyperref' to be loaded

\begin{mytheo}{This is my title}{theoexample}
This is the text of the theorem. The counter is automatically assigned and,
in this example, prefixed with the section number. This theorem is numbered with
\ref{th:theoexample}, it is given on page~\pageref{th:theoexample},
and it is titled \flqq\nameref{th:theoexample}\frqq.
\end{mytheo}
My Theorem 16.1: This is my title
This is the text of the theorem. The counter is automatically assigned and, in this exam-
ple, prefixed with the section number. This theorem is numbered with 16.1, it is given on
page 339, and it is titled «This is my title».
\begin{mytheo}[label=myownlabel]{This is my title}{}
The label parameter can be left empty without \LaTeX\ error.
Or you may use an own label to reference Theorem \ref{myownlabel}.
\end{mytheo}
My Theorem 16.2: This is my title
The label parameter can be left empty without LATEX error. Or you may use an own label
to reference Theorem 16.2.
339
\begin{mytheo}{}{}
The title can also be left empty without problem. Note that the ':'
vanished magically.
\end{mytheo}
My Theorem 16.3
The title can also be left empty without problem. Note that the ’:’ vanished magically.
\begin{mytheo*}{Unnumbered Theorem}
This theorem is not numbered.
\end{mytheo*}
My Theorem: Unnumbered Theorem
This theorem is not numbered.
\begin{mytheo*}{}
This theorem has no number and no title.
\end{mytheo*}
My Theorem
This theorem has no number and no title.
! hoptionsi list.
To switch off the nameref feature permanently, add nameref/.style={} inside the
\renewtcbtheorem[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hdisplay namei}{hoptionsi}{hprefixi}

Operates like \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 , but based on \renewenvironment instead of
\tcbmaketheorem{hnamei}{hdisplay namei}{hoptionsi}{hcounteri}{hprefixi}
! \newtcbtheorem Õ P. 339 supersedes this macro.
Creates a new environment hnamei based on tcolorbox to frame a (mathematical) theorem.
deprecated
The hdisplay namei is used in the title line with a number, e. g. «Theorem 5.1». The
hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcolorbox to control the appearance. The hcounteri
is used for automatic numbering. The new environment hnamei takes one optional and two
mandatory parameters. The optional parameter supplements the options and should be
used only in rare cases. The first mandatory parameter is the title text for the theorem
and the second mandatory parameter is a hmarkeri. The theorem is automatically labeled
with hprefixihseparatorihmarkeri where hseparatori is predefined as ’:’, see /tcb/label
separatorÕ P. 346 .
340
\tcboxmath[hoptionsi]{hmathematical box contenti}
Creates a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 which is fitted to the width of the given hmathematical box
contenti. This box is intended to be applied as part of a larger formula and may be used
as replacement for the \boxed macro of amsmath.
\begin{equation}
\tcbset{fonttitle=\scriptsize}
\tcboxmath[colback=LightBlue!25!white,colframe=blue]{ a^2 = 16 }
\quad \Rightarrow \quad
\tcboxmath[colback=Salmon!25!white,colframe=red,title=Implication]%
{ a = 4 ~\vee~ a=-4. }
\end{equation}
Implication
a2 = 16 ⇒ a = 4 ∨ a = −4. (3)
\tcbhighmath[hoptionsi]{hmathematical box contenti}

This is a special case of the \tcboxmath macro which uses the style /tcb/highlight
mathÕ P. 349 . It is intended to provide context sensitive highlighting of formula parts. The
color settings via /tcb/highlight math styleÕ P. 349 may be different inside theorems or
other colored areas and outside.
\tcbset{myformula/.style={colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black,
every box/.style={highlight math style={colback=LightBlue!50!white,colframe=Navy}}
}}
\begin{align}
\tcbhighmath{\sum\limits_{n=1}^{\infty} \frac{1}{n}} &= \infty.\\
\int x^2 ~\text{d}x &= \frac13 x^3 + c.
\end{align}
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams align,myformula]
\tcbhighmath{\sum\limits_{n=1}^{\infty} \frac{1}{n}} &= \infty.\\
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞. (4)
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c. (5)
3
X
∞
1
= ∞. (6)
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c. (7)
3
341
\tcbhighmathÕ P. 341 can be used in symbiosis with the empheq package which allows to
specify own boxing commands to mark multiline formulas.
% \usepackage{empheq}
\begin{empheq}[box=\tcbhighmath]{align}
a&=\sin(z)\\
E&=mc^2 + \int_a^b x\, dx
\end{empheq}
\tcbset{highlight math style={enhanced,

colframe=red!60!black,colback=yellow!50!white,arc=4pt,boxrule=1pt,
drop fuzzy shadow}}
\begin{empheq}[box=\tcbhighmath]{align}
a&=\sin(z)\\
\end{empheq}
a = sin(z) (8)
Z b
E = mc2 + x dx (9)
a
a = sin(z) (10)
Z b
E = mc2 + x dx (11)
a
Besides \tcbhighmathÕ P. 341 , one can easily define an independent new box based on
\tcboxÕ P. 14 which acts like \tcbhighmathÕ P. 341 :
% \usepackage{empheq}
\newtcbox{\otherbox}[1][]{nobeforeafter,math upper,tcbox raise base,
enhanced,frame hidden,boxrule=0pt,interior style={top color=green!10!white,
bottom color=green!10!white,middle color=green!50!yellow},
fuzzy halo=1pt with green,#1}
\begin{empheq}[box=\otherbox]{align}
a&=\sin(z)\\
\end{empheq}
\begin{equation}
\tcbhighmath{E} = \otherbox{mc^2}
\end{equation}
a = sin(z) (12)
Z b
E = mc2 + x dx (13)
a
E = mc2 (14)
342
/tcb/separator sign=hsigni (no default, initially :)
The given hsigni is used inside the title text of a theorem as separater between display name
combined with number and the specific title text. It is omitted, if there is no specific title
text.
% \usepackage{amssymb}
\newtcbtheorem[use counter from=mytheo]{sometheorem}{Theorem}%
{colback=white,colframe=red!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
separator sign={\ $\blacktriangleright$}}{theo}
\begin{sometheorem}{My example}{}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.4 I My example
My theorem text.
/tcb/separator sign colon (style, no value, initially set)

Sets /tcb/separator sign to the default colon : sign.
/tcb/separator sign dash (style, no value)
Sets /tcb/separator sign to an en-dash sign.

separator sign dash}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.5 – My example
My theorem text.
/tcb/separator sign none (style, no value)

Sets /tcb/separator sign to empty.

separator sign none}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.6 My example
My theorem text.
343
/tcb/description delimiters={hlefti}{hrighti} (no default, initially empty)
The given hlefti and hrighti delimiter signs are used to frame the descriptive title text of a
theorem.
description delimiters={\flqq}{\frqq}}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.7: «My example»
My theorem text.
/tcb/description delimiters parenthesis (style, no value)

Sets /tcb/description delimiters to ( and ).

description delimiters parenthesis}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.8: (My example)
My theorem text.
/tcb/description delimiters none (style, no value, initially set)

Sets /tcb/description delimiters to the default empty texts.
/tcb/description color=hcolori (default empty, initially empty)
Sets the hcolori of the descriptive title text deviating from /tcb/coltitleÕ P. 28 . The color
is reset to /tcb/coltitleÕ P. 28 , if description color is used without value.

description color=red!25!yellow}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.9: My example
My theorem text.
344
/tcb/description font=htexti (default empty, initially empty)
Sets htexti (e. g. font settings) before the descriptive title text deviating from
/tcb/fonttitleÕ P. 29 . The htexti is removed, if description font is used without
value.
description delimiters={\glqq}{\grqq},
description font=\mdseries\itshape}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.10: „My example“
My theorem text.
/tcb/description formatter=hmacroi (default empty, initially empty)

Sets hmacroi as formatter for the descriptive title text. The hmacroi has to take one manda-
tory argument (the description text).
Note that /tcb/description delimitersÕ P. 344 , /tcb/description colorÕ P. 344 , and
/tcb/description font are ignored, if this option is used.
If description formatter is used without value, the formatter is reset to its standard
behavior.
\newtcbox{\formbox}{enhanced,frame empty,size=minimal,boxsep=2pt,arc=1pt,
on line,interior style image=goldshade.png}

description formatter=\formbox}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
My theorem text.
/tcb/terminator sign=hsigni (no default, initially empty)

The given hsigni is used as terminator at the end of the title text of a theorem.

terminator sign={.}}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.12: My example.
My theorem text.
345
/tcb/terminator sign colon (style, no value, initially set)
Sets /tcb/terminator signÕ P. 345 to the colon : sign.

separator sign dash,terminator sign colon}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.13 – My example:
My theorem text.
/tcb/terminator sign dash (style, no value)

Sets /tcb/terminator signÕ P. 345 to an en-dash sign.

terminator sign dash}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem 16.14: My example –
My theorem text.
/tcb/terminator sign none (style, no value)

Sets /tcb/terminator signÕ P. 345 to the default empty text.
N 2016-04-19 /tcb/label separator=hseparatori (no default, initially :)
The given hseparatori is used for labels created with environments which are defined them-
selves by \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 . This hseparatori is put between hprefixi (defined by
\newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 ) and hmarkeri (defined by an actual theorem environment).

label separator=*}{theo}
\begin{sometheorem}{My example}{myex}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
See Example~\ref{theo*myex}.
My theorem text.
See Example 16.15.
346
N 2018-01-12 /tcb/theorem full label supplement={hstylei} (no default, initially empty)
The given hstylei is used in connection with labels created with environments which are
defined themselves by \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 . This hstylei uses one argument which is
automatically set to the full label marker of the environment, i.e. a text consisting of
hprefixi (defined by \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 ), /tcb/label separatorÕ P. 346 , and hmarkeri
(defined by an actual theorem environment).
% The following adds a hyper target to all environments

% created with \newtcbtheorem
\tcbset{theorem full label supplement={hypertarget={#1}}}

{colback=white,colframe=red!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries}{theo}
\begin{sometheorem}{My example}{myex2}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
This automated \hyperlink{theo:myex2}{hyper target can be linked to with a
hyper link}.
My theorem text.
This automated hyper target can be linked to with a hyper link.
A second usage of /tcb/theorem full label supplement overwrites the first setting.
N 2018-01-12 /tcb/theorem label supplement={hstylei} (no default, initially empty)
The given hstylei is used in connection with labels created with environments which are
defined themselves by \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 . This hstylei uses one argument which is
automatically set to the label hmarkeri defined by an actual theorem environment.
A second usage of /tcb/theorem label supplement overwrites the first setting, but
/tcb/theorem full label supplement and /tcb/theorem label supplement can be
used independently.
% 'marginnote' has to be loaded

theorem label supplement={hypertarget={XYZ-##1}},
theorem full label supplement={code={\marginnote{##1}}}
}{theo}
\begin{sometheorem}{My example}{myex3}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
This automated \hyperlink{XYZ-myex3}{hyper target can be linked to with a
hyper link}.
theo:myex3 Theorem 16.17: My example
My theorem text.
This automated hyper target can be linked to with a hyper link.
347
/tcb/theorem name and number (style, no value, initially set)
Prints theorem name followed by theorem number inside the title.

theorem name and number}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
My theorem text.
/tcb/theorem number and name (style, no value)

Prints theorem number followed by theorem name inside the title.

theorem number and name}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
16.19 Theorem: My example
My theorem text.
/tcb/theorem name (style, no value)

Prints theorem name without number inside the title.
theorem name,enhanced,watermark text={\thetcbcounter}}{theo}
My theorem text.
\end{sometheorem}
Theorem: My example
My theorem text.
16.20
348
/tcb/theorem={hdisplay namei}{hcounteri}{htitlei}{hmarkeri} (no default)
This key is internally used by \tcbmaketheoremÕ P. 340 , but can be used directly in a
tcolorbox for a more flexible approach. The hdisplay namei is used together with the
increased hcounteri value and the htitlei for the title line of the box. Additionally, a \label
with the given hmarkeri is created.
% \newcounter{texercise}% preamble
\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=green!10,colframe=green!50!black,arc=4mm,
theorem={Test}{texercise}{Direct usage}{myMarker}]
Here, we see the test \ref{myMarker}.
\end{tcolorbox}
Test 1: Direct usage
Here, we see the test 1.
For a common appearance inside the document, the key theorem should not be used directly
as in the example above, but as part of a new environment created by hand or using
\tcbmaketheoremÕ P. 340 or using its successor \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 .
/tcb/highlight math (style, no value)
Predefined style which is used for \tcbhighmathÕ P. 341 . It can be changed comfortable with
/tcb/highlight math style.
/tcb/highlight math style=hstyle definitioni (style, no default)
Changes the definition for /tcb/highlight math to the given hstyle definitioni. See
\tcbhighmathÕ P. 341 for another example.
\tcbset{highlight math style={enhanced,%<-- needed for the 'remember' options
colframe=red,colback=red!10!white,boxsep=0pt}}
\begin{align*}
\tcbhighmath[remember as=fx]{f(x)}
&= \int\limits_{1}^{x} \frac{1}{t^2}~dt
= \left[ -\frac{1}{t} \right]_{1}^{x}\\
&= -\frac{1}{x} + \frac{1}{1}\\
&=
\tcbhighmath[remember,overlay={%
\draw[blue,very thick,->] (fx.south) to[bend right] ([yshift=2mm]frame.west);}]
{1-\frac{1}{x}.}
\end{align*}
Zx h ix
1 1
f (x) = dt = −
t2 t 1
1
1 1
=− +
x 1
1
= 1− .
x
349
/tcb/math upper (style, no value)
Sets the upper part to mathematical mode with font \displaystyle.
/tcb/math lower (style, no value)
Sets the lower part to mathematical mode with font \displaystyle.
/tcb/math (style, no value)
Sets the upper part and lower part to mathematical mode with font \displaystyle.
\begin{tcolorbox}[math,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\sum\limits_{n=1}^{\infty} \frac{1}{n} = \infty.
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞.
n
n=1
The following styles are only tested to work with the original amsmath environments. If
! e.g. the equation environment is redefined as gather, then /tcb/ams equation should /
could not be used. Obviously, you are encouraged to use /tcb/ams gatherÕ P. 352 in this
case.
U 2014-10-30 /tcb/ams equation upper (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath equation environment to the start and end of the upper part.
U 2014-10-30 /tcb/ams equation lower (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath equation environment to the start and end of the lower part.
U 2014-10-30 /tcb/ams equation (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath equation environment to the start and end of the upper and lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams equation,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞. (15)
n
n=1
U 2014-10-30 /tcb/ams equation* upper (style, no value)

Adds an amsmath equation* environment to the start and end of the upper part.
U 2014-10-30 /tcb/ams equation* lower (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath equation* environment to the start and end of the lower part.
U 2014-10-30 /tcb/ams equation* (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath equation* environment to the start and end of the upper and lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams equation*,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞.
n
n=1
350
/tcb/ams align upper (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath align environment to the start and end of the upper part.
/tcb/ams align lower (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath align environment to the start and end of the lower part.
/tcb/ams align (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath align environment to the start and end of the upper and lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams align,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\sum\limits_{n=1}^{\infty} \frac{1}{n} &= \infty.\\
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞. (16)
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c. (17)
3
/tcb/ams align* upper (style, no value)

Adds an amsmath align* environment to the start and end of the upper part.
/tcb/ams align* lower (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath align* environment to the start and end of the lower part.
/tcb/ams align* (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath align* environment to the start and end of the upper and lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams align*,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞.
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c.
3
351
/tcb/ams gather upper (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath gather environment to the start and end of the upper part.
/tcb/ams gather lower (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath gather environment to the start and end of the lower part.
/tcb/ams gather (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath gather environment to the start and end of the upper and lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams gather,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\sum\limits_{n=1}^{\infty} \frac{1}{n} = \infty.\\
\int x^2 ~\text{d}x = \frac13 x^3 + c.
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞. (18)
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c. (19)
3
/tcb/ams gather* upper (style, no value)

Adds an amsmath gather* environment to the start and end of the upper part.
/tcb/ams gather* lower (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath gather* environment to the start and end of the lower part.
/tcb/ams gather* (style, no value)
Adds an amsmath gather* environment to the start and end of the upper and lower part.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams gather*,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞.
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c.
3
352
/tcb/ams nodisplayskip upper (style, no value)
Neutralizes the \abovedisplayskip of a following align or gather environment for the
upper part. Note that the text content has to start with such a formula.
/tcb/ams nodisplayskip lower (style, no value)
lower part. Note that the text content has to start with such a formula.
/tcb/ams nodisplayskip (style, no value)
upper part and lower part. Note that the text content has to start with such a formula.
\begin{tcolorbox}[ams nodisplayskip,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black]
\begin{gather}
\end{gather}
And now for something completely different.
\end{tcolorbox}
X
∞
1
= ∞. (20)
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c. (21)
3
And now for something completely different.
New colored mathematical environments are easily created using \newtcolorboxÕ P. 15 :
\newtcolorbox{mymath}{ams gather*,colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black}
\begin{mymath}
\end{mymath}
X
∞
1
= ∞.
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c.
3
All described options like /tcb/ams gather upperÕ P. 352 , /tcb/ams gather
lower Õ P. 352 , /tcb/ams gather Õ P. 352 are (partially) setting (overwritting) the
keys /tcb/before upperÕ P. 65 , /tcb/after upperÕ P. 65 , /tcb/before lowerÕ P. 66 ,
! /tcb/after lowerÕ P. 66 .
Therefore, e. g. \tcbset{ams gather,before upper={\text{Pythagoras:}}} produces
an invalid result. For this case, you are invited to use
\tcbset{ams gather,before upper app={\text{Pythagoras:}}},
see /tcb/before upper appÕ P. 424 .
353
/tcb/theorem style=hnamei (no default, initially standard)
Applies a predefined style hnamei to the theorem environment. Some of the feasible hnamei
values resemble style names from the packages theorem and ntheorem to give convenient
access to known patterns.
The styles alter /tcb/separator signÕ P. 343 , /tcb/description

! delimiters Õ P. 344 , /tcb/terminator signÕ P. 345 , and more.
should apply such keys after a theorem style.
Therefore, one
For the following examples, we use:

\newtcbtheorem[use counter from=mytheo]{theorem}{Theorem}{%
fonttitle=\bfseries\upshape,fontupper=\itshape,
colframe=green!50!black,colback=green!10!white,
colbacktitle=green!20!white,coltitle=blue!75!black}{theo}
The predefined styles are:

• standard: This is the initial value.
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=standard]{standard}{}
This is my theorem. \begin{equation*} a^2 + b^2 = c^2. \end{equation*}
\end{theorem}
Theorem 16.21: standard
This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• change standard
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=change standard]{change standard}{}

\end{theorem}
16.22 Theorem: change standard
This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• plain
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=plain]{plain}{}
\end{theorem}
Theorem 16.23 (plain): This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
354
• break
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=break]{break}{}
\end{theorem}
Theorem 16.24 (break):

This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• plain apart
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=plain apart]{plain apart}{}

\end{theorem}
Theorem 16.25 (plain apart)
This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• change
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=change]{change}{}
\end{theorem}
16.26 Theorem (change): This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• change break
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=change break]{change break}{}

\end{theorem}
16.27 Theorem (change break):

This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• change apart
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=change apart]{change apart}{}

\end{theorem}
16.28 Theorem (change apart)
This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
355
• margin
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=margin,left=10mm]{margin}{}
\end{theorem}
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=margin,left=10mm,oversize]{margin}{}
\end{theorem}
16.29 Theorem (margin): This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
16.30 Theorem (margin): This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• margin break
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=margin break,left=10mm]{margin break}{}

\end{theorem}
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=margin break,left=10mm,oversize]{margin break}{}
\end{theorem}
16.31 Theorem (margin break):

This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
16.32 Theorem (margin break):

This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
• margin apart
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=margin apart,left=10mm]{margin apart}{}

\end{theorem}
\begin{theorem}[theorem style=margin apart,left=10mm,oversize]{margin apart}{}
\end{theorem}
16.33 Theorem (margin apart)
This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
16.34 Theorem (margin apart)
This is my theorem.
a2 + b2 = c2 .
356
16.3 Examples for Definitions and Theorems
In the following, the application of \tcbmaketheoremÕ P. 340 to highlight mathematical defini-

tions, theorems, or the like is demonstrated.
At first, additional tcb keys are created for the appearance of the colored boxes. It is assumed
that theorems and corollaries should be identically colored. All following environments are
numbered with a common counter, but this can be changed easily. Here, the counter output is
supplemented by the subsection number. Further, the cleveref package [5] is used for clever
references.

\tcbset{
defstyle/.style={fonttitle=\bfseries\upshape, fontupper=\slshape,
arc=0mm, colback=blue!5!white,colframe=blue!75!black},
theostyle/.style={fonttitle=\bfseries\upshape, fontupper=\slshape,
colback=red!10!white,colframe=red!75!black},
}
\newtcbtheorem[number within=subsection,crefname={definition}{definitions}]%
{Definition}{Definition}{defstyle}{def}
\newtcbtheorem[use counter from=Definition,crefname={theorem}{theorems}]%
{Theorem}{Theorem}{theostyle}{theo}
\newtcbtheorem[use counter from=Definition,crefname={corollary}{corollaries}]%
{Corollary}{Corollary}{theostyle}{cor}
By \newtcbtheoremÕ P. 339 , commonly numbered theorem environments are created now.

defstyle and theostyle are used for the appearance.
Now, everything is prepared for the following examples.
The following theorem is numbered as \Cref{theo:diffbarstetig} and

referenced with the marker \texttt{theo:diffbarstetig}.\bigskip
\begin{Theorem}{Differenzierbarkeit bedingt Stetigkeit, wobei diese Benennung

zu Testzwecken ungew\"{o}hnlich lang ist}{diffbarstetig}%
Eine Funktion $f:I\to\mathbb{R}$ ist in $x_0\in I$ stetig, wenn $f$ in
$x_0$ differenzierbar ist.
\end{Theorem}
The following theorem is numbered as Theorem 16.3.1 and referenced with the marker
theo:diffbarstetig.
Theorem 16.3.1: Differenzierbarkeit bedingt Stetigkeit, wobei diese Benennung zu

Testzwecken ungewöhnlich lang ist
Eine Funktion f : I → R ist in x0 ∈ I stetig, wenn f in x0 differenzierbar ist.
357
The following definition is numbered as \Cref{def:diffbarkeit} and
referenced with the marker \texttt{def:diffbarkeit}.\bigskip
\begin{Definition}{Differenzierbarkeit}{diffbarkeit}
Eine Funktion $f:~I\to\mathbb{R}$ auf einem Intervall $I$ hei\ss{}t in
$x_0\in I$ differenzierbar oder linear approximierbar,
wenn der Grenzwert
\begin{equation*}
\lim\limits_{x\to x_0}\frac{f(x)-f(x_0)}{x-x_0}=
\lim\limits_{h\to 0}\frac{f(x_0+h)-f(x_0)}{h}
\end{equation*}
existiert. Bei Existenz hei\ss{}t dieser Grenzwert Ableitung
oder Differentialquotient von $f$ in $x_0$ und man
schreibt f\"{u}r ihn
\begin{equation*}
f'(x_0)\quad\text{oder}\quad\frac{df}{dx}(x_0).
\end{equation*}
\end{Definition}
The following definition is numbered as Definition 16.3.2 and referenced with the marker def:diffbarkeit.
Definition 16.3.2: Differenzierbarkeit
Eine Funktion f : I → R auf einem Intervall I heißt in x0 ∈ I differenzierbar oder linear

approximierbar, wenn der Grenzwert
f (x) − f (x0 ) f (x0 + h) − f (x0 )
lim = lim
x→x0 x − x0 h→0 h
existiert. Bei Existenz heißt dieser Grenzwert Ableitung oder Differentialquotient von f in x0 und
man schreibt für ihn
df
f 0 (x0 ) oder (x0 ).
dx
The following corollary is numbered as \Cref{cor:nullstellen} and

referenced with the marker \texttt{cor:nullstellen}.\bigskip
\begin{Corollary}{Nullstellenexistenz}{nullstellen}
Ist $f:[a,b]\to\mathbb{R}$ stetig und haben $f(a)$ und $f(b)$ entgegengesetzte
Vorzeichen, also $f(a)f(b)<0$, so besitzt $f$ eine Nullstelle $x_0\in]a,b[$,
also $f(x_0)=0$.
\end{Corollary}
The following corollary is numbered as Corollary 16.3.3 and referenced with the marker cor:nullstellen.
Corollary 16.3.3: Nullstellenexistenz
Ist f : [a, b] → R stetig und haben f (a) und f (b) entgegengesetzte Vorzeichen, also f (a)f (b) < 0,
so besitzt f eine Nullstelle x0 ∈]a, b[, also f (x0 ) = 0.
358
\begin{Theorem}[boxrule=2mm,toptitle=-1.5mm,bottomtitle=-1.5mm]{%
Hinreichende Bedingung f\"{u}r Wendepunkte}{wendehinreichend}%
$f$ sei eine auf einem Intervall $]a,b[$ dreimal stetig differenzierbare Funktion.
Ist $f''(x_0)=0$ in $x_0\in]a,b[$ und $f'''(x_0)\ne 0$, so ist
$(x_0,f(x_0))$ ein Wendepunkt von $f$.
\end{Theorem}
Theorem 16.3.4: Hinreichende Bedingung für Wendepunkte
f sei eine auf einem Intervall ]a, b[ dreimal stetig differenzierbare Funktion. Ist f 00 (x0 ) = 0 in
x0 ∈]a, b[ und f 000 (x0 ) 6= 0, so ist (x0 , f (x0 )) ein Wendepunkt von f .
% \usepackage{varioref}
\newtcbtheorem[use counter from=Definition]{YetAnotherTheorem}{Theorem}%
{theorem style=plain apart,label type=theorem,enhanced,frame hidden,
boxrule=2mm,titlerule=0mm,toptitle=1mm,bottomtitle=1mm,
fonttitle=\bfseries\large,fontupper=\normalsize,
coltitle=green!35!black,colbacktitle=green!15!white,
colback=green!50!yellow!15!white,borderline={1pt}{0pt}{green!25!blue},
}{theo}
\begin{YetAnotherTheorem}{Mittelwertsatz f\"{u}r $n$ Variable}{meanvaluetheorem}%

Es sei $n\in\mathbb{N}$, $D\subseteq\mathbb{R}^n$ eine offene Menge und
$f\in C^{1}(D,\mathbb{R})$. Dann gibt es auf jeder Strecke
$[x_0,x]\subset D$ einen Punkt $\xi\in[x_0,x]$, so dass gilt
\begin{equation*}
f(x)-f(x_0) = \operatorname{grad} f(\xi)^{\top}(x-x_0)
\end{equation*}
\end{YetAnotherTheorem}
\medskip
Here, |cleveref| support is used to reference \Cref{theo:meanvaluetheorem}
on \Cpageref{theo:meanvaluetheorem}. This \namecref{theo:meanvaluetheorem}
can also be referenced by |\Vref| resulting in \Vref{theo:meanvaluetheorem}.
Theorem 16.3.5 (Mittelwertsatz für n Variable)
Es sei n ∈ N, D ⊆ Rn eine offene Menge und f ∈ C 1 (D, R). Dann gibt es auf
jeder Strecke [x0 , x] ⊂ D einen Punkt ξ ∈ [x0 , x], so dass gilt
f (x) − f (x0 ) = grad f (ξ)> (x − x0 )
Here, cleveref support is used to reference Theorem 16.3.5 on Page 359. This theorem can also be
referenced by \Vref resulting in Theorem 16.3.5.
! Note that /tcb/label typeÕ P. 98 was used in the example above to feed cleveref [5]
with the needed name information.
359
Here, using |\Vref| resulting in \Vref{theo:meanvaluetheorem} is more interesting\ldots
Here, using \Vref resulting in Theorem 16.3.5 on the preceding page is more interesting. . .
{theorem style=change apart,enhanced,arc=0mm,outer arc=0mm,
boxrule=0mm,toprule=1mm,bottomrule=1mm,left=1mm,right=1mm,
titlerule=0mm,toptitle=0mm,bottomtitle=1mm,top=0mm,
colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!5!white,coltitle=red!50!black,
title style={top color=yellow!50!white,bottom color=red!5!white,
middle color=yellow!50!white},
fonttitle=\bfseries\sffamily\normalsize,fontupper=\normalsize\itshape,
}{theo}
\begin{YetAnotherTheorem}{Mittelwertsatz f\"{u}r $n$ Variable}{mittelwertsatz_n2}%

\begin{equation*}
\end{equation*}
16.3.6 Theorem (Mittelwertsatz für n Variable)

Es sei n ∈ N, D ⊆ Rn eine offene Menge und f ∈ C 1 (D, R). Dann gibt es auf jeder
Strecke [x0 , x] ⊂ D einen Punkt ξ ∈ [x0 , x], so dass gilt
f (x) − f (x0 ) = grad f (ξ)> (x − x0 )
% \usepackage{varwidth} \tcbuselibrary{skins}
{enhanced,frame empty,interior empty,colframe=ForestGreen!50!white,
coltitle=ForestGreen!50!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,colbacktitle=ForestGreen!15!white,
borderline={0.5mm}{0mm}{ForestGreen!15!white},
borderline={0.5mm}{0mm}{ForestGreen!50!white,dashed},
attach boxed title to top center={yshift=-2mm},
boxed title style={boxrule=0.4pt},varwidth boxed title}{theo}

\begin{equation*}
\end{equation*}
Theorem 16.3.7: Mittelwertsatz für n Variable

Es sei n ∈ N, D ⊆ Rn eine offene Menge und f ∈ C 1 (D, R). Dann gibt es auf jeder Strecke
[x0 , x] ⊂ D einen Punkt ξ ∈ [x0 , x], so dass gilt
f (x) − f (x0 ) = grad f (ξ)> (x − x0 )
360
You need more attention for your theorems? Here, you are . . .
% tcbuselibrary{skins} % preamble
\begin{Theorem}[enhanced,
fuzzy halo=3mm with yellow,
fuzzy halo=2mm with red,
fuzzy halo=1mm with yellow,
watermark color=red!35!white,
watermark text={Overacting\\Fundamental Theorem}]%
{Fundamental Theorem of Theorems}{fundamental}%
\lipsum[1-2]
\end{Theorem}
Theorem 16.3.8: Fundamental Theorem of Theorems
Overacting
Fundamental Theorem
Let’s try a more conservative approach:
{theorem style=plain,enhanced,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=yellow!20!white,
coltitle=red!50!black,fonttitle=\upshape\bfseries,fontupper=\itshape,
drop fuzzy shadow=blue!50!black!50!white,boxrule=0.4pt}{theo}

\begin{equation*}
\end{equation*}
Theorem 16.3.9 (Mittelwertsatz für n Variable): Es sei n ∈ N, D ⊆ Rn eine offene Menge

und f ∈ C 1 (D, R). Dann gibt es auf jeder Strecke [x0 , x] ⊂ D einen Punkt ξ ∈ [x0 , x], so dass gilt
f (x) − f (x0 ) = grad f (ξ)> (x − x0 )
361
16.4 Using other theorem environments with tcolorbox
Instead of creating theorem environments with the methods described before, environments from
other packages can be boxed with a tcolorbox.
Environments may be created e.g. by methods from the theorem package or the amsthm package.
\tcolorboxenvironmentÕ P. 17 can be used to put a box around these environments.

\usepackage{amsthm}
\theoremstyle{plain}% from 'amsthm'

\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma}% from 'amsthm'
\tcolorboxenvironment{lem}{
enhanced jigsaw,colframe=cyan,interior hidden,
breakable,before skip=10pt,after skip=10pt }
\tcolorboxenvironment{proof}{% 'proof' from 'amsthm'

blanker,breakable,left=5mm,
before skip=10pt,after skip=10pt,
borderline west={1mm}{0pt}{red}}
\begin{lem}
\lipsum[2]
\end{lem}
\lipsum[3]
\begin{proof}
\lipsum*[4]
\end{proof}
Lemma 1. Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem
non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor
sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci
et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique, libero.
Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit.
Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas
lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat
magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel
magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam
cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu
massa.
Proof. Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer
tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut
imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim.
Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
362
17 Library breakable
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{breakable}
17.1 Technical Overview
The library breakable supports the automatic breaking of a tcolorbox. This feature is
LIB
enabled by /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 and disabled by /tcb/unbreakableÕ P. 366 .

If a tcolorbox is set to be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 , then the following algorithm is executed:
1. The box content is read to a box register similar but not identical to the unbreakable case.
2. If the total box fits into the current page, it is shipped out visibly unbroken and the
algorithm stops.
Unbroken Box
The box. unbroken
3. Otherwise, it is checked if at least /tcb/lines before breakÕ P. 366 of the upper box can
be placed on the current page. If not, a page break is inserted and the algorithm goes
back to Step 2.
4. Now, the break sequence starts. The upper box part or the lower box part is split such
that it fits into the current page. The fitting part is named first part of the break sequence
and shipped out.
Broken Box
The box. first
5. If the remaining content of the total box fits into the current page, the algorithm continues
with Step 7, else with Step 6.
6. The upper box part or the lower box part is split such that it fits into the current page.
The fitting part is named middle part of the break sequence and shipped out. Then, the
algorithm goes back to Step 5.
The box. middle

7. The remaining part is named last part of the break sequence and shipped out. The algo-
rithm stops.
The box. last

The algorithm takes care that the optional segmentation line never appears at the end of a box.
The optional lower box part is also checked to have at least /tcb/lines before breakÕ P. 366 .
363
In principle, all boxes of the break sequence share the same geometric parameters. The differences
are:
• The given /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 values are used only before the first
and after the last part of the break sequence.
• A special behavior between the parts of the break sequence can be given by /tcb/toprule
at breakÕ P. 369 , /tcb/bottomrule at breakÕ P. 369 , /tcb/enlarge top at break
byÕ P. 83 , and /tcb/enlarge bottom at break by Õ P. 83 .
• The /tcb/skinÕ P. 134 decides how the first, middle, and last part look like. Actually,
every part type has its own skin given by the options /tcb/skin firstÕ P. 134 , /tcb/skin
middleÕ P. 134 , and /tcb/skin lastÕ P. 134 . Typically, these options are set automatically
by the main skin, see Subsection 17.8 from page 378.
17.2 Limitations and Known Bugs
• The maximal total height of the upper and of the lower part of normal breakable
tcolorboxes is about 65536pt (ca. 2300cm) apiece. If such a part gets longer, the output
will get buggy without warning. For very oversized boxes which are longer than 65536pt,
use the unlimited value for /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 . With the unlimited setting, the
applied algorithm has (virtually) no height limit for boxes, but very likely the compiler
memory will have to be increased for boxes longer than 300 pages (depending on compiler
settings and box content). But it is recommended to use unlimited for critical large boxes
only.
• You can nest an unbreakable tcolorbox inside another tcolorbox, even inside a break-
able one. But you cannot not nest a breakable box inside a breakable box. The
/tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 key for a nested box is ignored automatically3 , i. e. inner boxes
are always unbreakable.
After all, in the unlikely case you really want to have the nested box to be breakable, use
/tcb/enforce breakableÕ P. 366 for the nested box4 . But, a breakable box inside a
breakable box will usually give a mess.
• If your text content contains some text color changing commands, your color will not
survive the break to the next box. But, with the fontspec package and xelatex or
lualatex, you can use \addfontfeatures{Color=mycolor} to add a font color which
survives the break.
N 2014-10-30
• The perpage option of the footmisc package is deliberately deactivated inside a breakable
box since all footnotes are placed at the end of the box (possibly far away from the reference
point).
N 2016-02-15
• Making a box /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 which actually is not broken creates a box which acts
almost like an unbreakable box. Visual differences are kept as indiscernible as possible,
but can appear with certain /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 settings, especially,
if there is an automatic page break before the box.
N 2016-05-25
• LuaTEX version 0.95 changes the behaviour of the basic \vsplit (a bug?!) resulting in
badly broken boxes. Thanks to Jeremy Engel, the breakable library contains a patch
LIB
for this which also loads the the ifluatex package.
3
Until tcolorbox 3.04, the /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 key was not ignored for nested boxes.
4
/tcb/enforce breakableÕ P. 366 acts like /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 until tcolorbox 3.04.
364
17.3 Main Option Keys
U 2017-02-01 /tcb/breakable=true|false|unlimited (default true, initially false)
Allows the tcolorbox to be breakable. If the box is larger than the available space at the
current page, the box is automatically broken and continued to the next next page. All
sorts of tcolorbox can be made breakable. It depends on the skin how the breaking looks
like. If you do not know better, use /tcb/enhancedÕ P. 206 for breaking a box. The parts
of the break sequence are numbered by the counter tcbbreakpart.
• false: Sets the tcolorbox to be unbreakable.
• true: Breaks the tcolorbox from one page to another. The maximal total height of
the upper and of the lower part is about 65536pt (ca. 2300cm or ca. 90 pages) apiece.
1
• unlimited: Experimental code for unlimited total height of breakable boxes. For
boxes longer than 300 pages (or even shorter ones) the compiler memory will have to
be increased.
\tcbset{enhanced jigsaw,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
watermark color=yellow!25!white,watermark text=\arabic{tcbbreakpart},
\begin{tcolorbox}[breakable,title=My breakable box]

\lipsum[1-6]
\end{tcolorbox}
My breakable box
luctus mauris.
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt
tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante.
Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis,
molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend
at, accumsan nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend
consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna.
Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus.
Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum
pellentesque felis eu massa.
ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse platea
365
2
dictumst. Integer tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum
wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat
quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet
nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper,
leo velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum diam. Aliquam
pellentesque, augue quis sagittis posuere, turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus
eros eget felis. Maecenas eget erat in sapien mattis porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor.
Nulla facilisi. Sed a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, wisi in dignissim
interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui cursus dui. Mauris tempor
ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras ac magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas.
Curabitur a leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est. Curabitur
consectetuer.
Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel,
nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu
purus. Quisque vehicula, urna sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis elit
erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et nunc. Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium,
ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus,
egestas vel, odio.
/tcb/unbreakable (no value, initially set)

Sets the tcolorbox to be unbreakable.
/tcb/enforce breakable (no value)
A tcolorbox inside a tcolorbox is automatically set to be unbreakable. Using
/tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 on such an inner box has no effect. If one really wants the in-
ner box to be breakable, use /tcb/enforce breakable. This will usually give a mess
of shattered boxes. You are advised to not use this option.
Note that /tcb/enforce breakable has the functionality that /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 had
until package version 3.04 and exists for backward compatibility.
U 2018-07-26 /tcb/title after break=htexti (no default, initially empty)
The /tcb/title Õ P. 18 is used only for the first part of a break sequence. Use
title after break to create a heading line with htexti as content for all following parts.
Also see /tcb/extras title after breakÕ P. 372 for formatting the title text.
/tcb/notitle after break (no value, initially set)
Removes the title line or following parts in a break sequence if set before.
/tcb/adjusted title after break=htexti (style, no default, initially unset)
Works like /tcb/adjusted titleÕ P. 18 but applied to /tcb/title after break.
/tcb/lines before break=hnumberi (no default, initially 2)
Assures that the given hnumberi of lines of the upper box part or the lower box part are
placed before a break happens.
366
U 2017-07-05 /tcb/break at=hlengthi/hlengthi/.../hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Defines break points at the given hlengthi values. The first hlengthi defines the (maximal)
height of the first partial box, the second hlengthi defines the (maximal) height of the second
partial box, and so on. The last hlengthi value is applied to all following partial boxes if
any.
• Setting a hlengthi to 0pt means that the naturally available space is used for breaking.
• Setting a hlengthi to a negative value means that the sum of this negative value and
the naturally available space is used for breaking (boxes will shrink in height). That
that before version 4.10 negative values were treated like 0pt.
% \usepackage{multicol,lipsum}
\begin{multicols}{3}\footnotesize
Breakable boxes inside a |multicols| environment need special attendance.
They are broken by default at |\textheight|.
The |break at| option can be used to insert better break points by hand.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,size=small,vfill before first,
colframe=red,colback=yellow!10!white,before title=\raggedright,
title={Broken box inside a |multicols| environment},fonttitle=\bfseries,
enforce breakable,% use only breakable in the real world!
pad at break=1mm,break at=3cm/6.3cm ]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
\refKey{/tcb/height fixed for} may also be considered for |multicols| environments.
\end{multicols}
Breakable boxes inside a tum gravida mauris. Nam viverra ac, nunc. Prae-
multicols environment need arcu libero, nonummy eget, sent eget sem vel leo ultri-
special attendance. They consectetuer id, vulputate ces bibendum. Aenean fau-
are broken by default at a, magna. Donec vehicula cibus. Morbi dolor nulla,
\textheight. The break at augue eu neque. Pellen- malesuada eu, pulvinar at,
option can be used to insert tesque habitant morbi tris- mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur
better break points by hand. tique senectus et netus et auctor semper nulla. Donec
malesuada fames ac turpis varius orci eget risus. Duis
egestas. Mauris ut leo. nibh mi, congue eu, accum-
Broken box inside a Cras viverra metus rhon- san eleifend, sagittis quis,
multicols environment cus sem. Nulla et lectus diam. Duis eget orci sit amet
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, vestibulum urna fringilla ul- orci dignissim rutrum.
consectetuer adipiscing elit. trices. Phasellus eu tel-
/tcb/height fixed forÕ P. 370
Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, lus sit amet tortor gravida
may also be considered for
placerat ac, adipiscing vi- placerat. Integer sapien
multicols environments.
tae, felis. Curabitur dic- est, iaculis in, pretium quis,
/tcb/enlargepage=hlengthi/hlengthi/.../hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

Inserts a \enlargethispage{hlengthi} to the pages of the break sequence, i. e. allows one
to enlarge (or shrink) partial boxes. The first hlengthi is applied to the first partial box, the
second hlengthi is applied to the second partial box, and so on. The last hlengthi value is
applied to all following partial boxes if any. Note that floating boxes will not be enlarged.
\begin{tcolorbox}[breakable,enlargepage=0mm/\baselineskip/2\baselineskip/0mm,...
The example code enlarged the second partial box by one line, the third partial box by two
lines, and all following parts are not enlarged.
If an automated page break occures before the first partial box, the page enlargement
is applied to the page before the first partial box and again to the page of the first
! partial box. Insert a manual break to prevent this.
In general, enlargepage should be used at the final stage of a document for fine-tuning
only.
367
/tcb/enlargepage flexible=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
This allows an automated page enlargement for up to hlengthi. The algorithm can use this
to avoid breaking a box, if there is anough room after enlargement. Also, the last partial
box of a break sequence may be enlarged to avoid further breaking.
Note that this potential enlargement is additive to settings of /tcb/enlargepageÕ P. 367 .
But /tcb/enlargepage flexible overwrites settings of /tcb/pad before break*Õ P. 369
or /tcb/pad at break*Õ P. 369 .
% The following setting hinders orphan lines for the last partial box
\tcbset{enlargepage flexible=\baselineskip}
N 2014-12-15 /tcb/compress page=hoptioni (default all, initially baselineskip)

This option controls the space management on the page which contains the unbroken box
or the first part of a break sequence. Feasible hoptioni values are:
• all (default value): All shrinkable glue on the page is potentially used for the unbroken
box or the first part of a break sequence. Thus, all vertical spaces on the page will
potentially be reduced to their minimal values.
• baselineskip (initial value): Shrinkable glue up to one \baselineskip on the page
is potentially used for the unbroken box or the first part of a break sequence.
• none: The break algorithm respects the target size of the given glue values on the
page. This was the inital value before version 3.34.
! Note that the box content is not influenced by this option.

/tcb/shrink break goal=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
This is an emergency parameter if the break algorithm produces unpleasant breaks. It
shrinks the goal height of the current box part by hlengthi which may result in smaller
boxes. Never use negative values. Usually, this option will never be needed at all.
368
17.4 Option Keys for the Break Appearance
/tcb/toprule at break=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)
Sets the line width of the top rule to hlengthi if the box is /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 .
In this case, it is applied to middle and last parts in a break sequence. Note that
/tcb/topruleÕ P. 35 overwrites this value if used afterwards.
/tcb/bottomrule at break=hlengthi (no default, initially 0.5mm)
Sets the line width of the bottom rule to hlengthi if the box is /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 .
In this case, it is applied to first and middle parts in a break sequence. Note that
/tcb/bottomruleÕ P. 35 overwrites this value if used afterwards.
/tcb/topsep at break=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Additional vertical space of hlengthi which is added at the top of middle and last parts in a
break sequence. In general, it is not advisable to change this value if these parts start with
a rule or a title.
/tcb/bottomsep at break=hlengthi (no default, initially 0mm)
Additional vertical space of hlengthi which is added at the bottom of first and middle parts
in a break sequence. In general, it is not advisable to change this value if these parts end
with a rule.
/tcb/pad before break=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 3.5mm)
Sets the total amount of vertical space after the text content and before the break point
to hlengthi. This style sets /tcb/toprule at break to 0pt and changes /tcb/topsep at
break as required. In general, it is not advisable to change this value if the middle and last
parts in a break sequence start with a rule or a title.
/tcb/pad before break*=hlengthi (style, no default)
Sets /tcb/pad before break to hlengthi and /tcb/enlargepage flexibleÕ P. 368 to an
appropriate value such that empty closing frames are avoided.
/tcb/pad after break=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 3.5mm)
Sets the total amount of vertical space after the break point and before the text content to
hlengthi. This style sets /tcb/bottomrule at break to 0pt and changes /tcb/bottomsep
at break as required. In general, it is not advisable to change this value if the first and
middle parts in a break sequence end with a rule.
/tcb/pad at break=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 3.5mm)
Abbreviation for setting hlengthi to /tcb/pad before break and /tcb/pad after break.
/tcb/pad at break*=hlengthi (style, no default)
Sets /tcb/pad at break to hlengthi and /tcb/enlargepage flexibleÕ P. 368 to an appro-
priate value such that empty closing frames are avoided.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,breakable,pad at break*=0mm,

title={For this box, the pad space at the break point is set to 0mm}]
\lipsum[1-2]
\end{tcolorbox}
For this box, the pad space at the break point is set to 0mm
369
luctus mauris.
! /tcb/pad at breakÕ P. 369 or /tcb/pad at break*Õ P. 369 should be used as very last op-
tion in an option list, because they adapt other settings.
! Also see /tcb/enlarge top at break byÕ P. 83 and /tcb/enlarge bottom at break
byÕ P. 83 .
/tcb/height fixed for=hparti (no default, initially none)

When certain amount of space is available for a partial box of a break sequence, the partial
box typically is smaller than this space (depending on the box content). For given hparti(s),
the height can be set to all available space.
• none: Every partial tcolorbox is set with its natural height.
• first: The first partial box is set to a height which matches the available space.
• middle: All middle partial boxes are set to a height which matches the available space.
• last: The last partial box is set to a height which matches the available space.
• first and middle: The first and all middle partial boxes are set to a height which
matches the available space.
• middle and last: All middle partial boxes and the last partial box are set to a height
which matches the available space.
• all: All partial boxes are set to a height which matches the available space.
If the box keeps unbroken, this option is not applied. See /tcb/heightÕ P. 53 for
! setting a fixed height for unbroken boxes. See /tcb/height fillÕ P. 56 for giving
unbroken boxes maximum height.
/tcb/vfill before first=true|false (default true, initially false)

Inserts a \vfill at the begin of the first partial box to move this partial box to the end of
the current page. This may be used as an alternative to /tcb/height fixed for=first
to get justified columns or pages. The \vfill is not inserted, if the box gets not actually
broken.
N 2017-03-20 /tcb/segmentation at break=true|false (default true, initially true)
If a breakable box contains an upper part and a lower part and the break happens at the
segmentation between both parts, then
• the segmenation line (or similar) is drawn as first element of the partial box containing
the lower part, if /tcb/segmentation at break is set to be true.
• the segmenation line (or similar) is not drawn at all, if /tcb/segmentation at break
is set to be false. This may be preferable for skins like bicolorÕ P. 219 , tileÕ P. 224 ,
or beamerÕ P. 228 .
370
17.5 Extra Options for Partial Boxes
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)

Adds tcolorbox hoptionsi to every box of a break sequence after skin settings are done.
This is quite late in box processing. Geometry and break settings should not be used here,
because they will either be ignored or have unexpected negative results. But it is possible
to change most colors, skin effects, shadows, borders, frame code, etc. Note that using
/tcb/extras for every box is very seldom an advantage over setting the options directly.
Usually, /tcb/extras first, /tcb/extras middle, etc. are sensible to apply.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/no extras (style, no default, initially set)
Removes all extras if set before.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras broken={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the hoptionsi are
added to every box of the break sequence. /tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras unbroken={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
set to be /tcb/unbreakableÕ P. 366 , then the hoptionsi are added to the box. /tcb/extras
overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/no extras unbroken (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the unbroken extras if set before.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras first={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakable Õ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the hoptionsi are
added to the first box of the break sequence. /tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/no extras first (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the first extras if set before.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras middle={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakable Õ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the hoptionsi are
added to every middle box (if any) of the break sequence. /tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/no extras middle (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the middle extras if set before.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras last={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
If the box is set to be /tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 and is broken actually, then the hoptionsi are
added to the last box of the break sequence. /tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/no extras last (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the last extras if set before.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras unbroken and first={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/extras unbroken and /tcb/extras first to-
gether. /tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras middle and last={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/extras middle and /tcb/extras last together.
/tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras unbroken and last={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/extras unbroken and /tcb/extras last to-
gether. /tcb/extras overwrites this key.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras first and middle={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
This is an abbreviation for setting /tcb/extras first and /tcb/extras middle together.
/tcb/extras overwrites this key.
371
N 2018-07-26 /tcb/extras title after break={hoptionsi} (no default, initially unset)
If the box has a /tcb/title after breakÕ P. 366 , then the hoptionsi are added for all
titles after the first break, i.e. all middle and last. The color, font, and alignment
of titles after break can be adapted choosing hoptionsi, e.g. by /tcb/coltitleÕ P. 28 ,
/tcb/fonttitleÕ P. 29 , /tcb/halign titleÕ P. 32 . Note that /tcb/colbacktitleÕ P. 27 has
to be placed into /tcb/extras middle and lastÕ P. 371 .
N 2018-07-26 /tcb/no extras title after break (style, no default, initially set)
Removes the title after break extras if set before.
372
% \usepackage{lipsum,multicol}
% \usetikzlibrary{decorations.pathmorphing}
\newtcolorbox{mybox}[1][]{
tile,
colback=green!7,coltitle=blue!50!black,colbacktitle=blue!5,
center title,
toprule=1.25mm,bottomrule=1.25mm,
extras unbroken and first={
borderline north={0.25mm}{0.5mm}{blue,decoration={zigzag,amplitude=0.5mm},decorate}},
extras unbroken and last={
borderline south={0.25mm}{0.5mm}{blue,decoration={zigzag,amplitude=0.5mm},decorate}},
#1
}
\begin{mybox}[title=My unbroken box]

\lipsum[1]
\end{mybox}
\begin{multicols}{3}
\begin{mybox}[title=My broken box,
break at=4.2cm,pad at break=2mm,
height fixed for=first and middle, ]
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
\end{multicols}
My unbroken box
My broken box dum, erat ligula aliquet mus. Aliquam tincidunt

magna, vitae ornare odio urna. Nulla ullamcorper
Nam dui ligula, fringilla metus a mi. Morbi ac vestibulum turpis. Pellen-
a, euismod sodales, sollici- orci et nisl hendrerit mol- tesque cursus luctus mau-
tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc- lis. Suspendisse ut massa. ris.
tor lorem non justo. Nam Cras nec ante. Pellen-
lacus libero, pretium at, tesque a nulla. Cum
lobortis vitae, ultricies et, sociis natoque penatibus
tellus. Donec aliquet, tor- et magnis dis parturient
tor sed accumsan biben- montes, nascetur ridiculus
373
17.6 Breakable boxes and the multicol package
With version 4.10, the algorithm for detecting the available height for a tcolorbox inside
! a multicol environment was improved with help of Frank Mittelbach. This change may
impact existing user code which may have to be adapted.
Unbreakable tcolorboxes can be used with- for a breakable box cannot be done by the
out special care inside a multicols environ- balancing routine of multicols. By de-
ment from the multicol package [9]. fault, boxes will break at maximum col-
Since version 3.10, a breakable tcolorbox umn height. To get pleasant results, use
detects, if it is used inside a multicols the /tcb/break atÕ P. 367 and /tcb/height
environment. But choosing break points fixed forÕ P. 370 options.
% \usepackage{lipsum,multicol} % preamble
\footnotesize
\lipsum[1]
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,breakable,size=title,
title=My breakable box,pad at break=1mm, break at=-\baselineskip/0pt ]
\lipsum[2-4]
\end{tcolorbox}
\lipsum[4]
\end{multicols}
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit.
elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipisc- Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis,
ing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maece-
arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate nas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accum-
a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque san nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feu-
habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada giat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed
fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt pu-
metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna rus vel magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euis-
fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor mod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in
gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et
quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum
bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, male- pellentesque felis eu massa.
suada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh.
semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices.
mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipisc-
Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum. ing elit. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer
tempus convallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc el-
ementum fermentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut
My breakable box
imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollici- placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim.
tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl.
lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan biben-
dum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. Morbi
metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis.
vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem ipsum
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis
habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis au-
dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ali-
gue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fermentum wisi.
quam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibu-
Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim sed gravida sollic-
lum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
itudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac pulvinar elit purus
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat,
eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit
congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique, libero.
amet nisl. Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehic-
Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy
ula.
374
This example is already set inside a multicols en- adipiscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa
vironment. This time, a middle part has full column ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, plac-
height (here \textheight). /tcb/height fixed erat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia.
forÕ P. 370 is used to spread this box part over the Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan nec,
full height to align with neighboring columns. suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat
magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed
% \usepackage{lipsum,multicol} lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt
\lipsum[1] purus vel magna. Integer non enim. Prae-
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw, sent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum
breakable, quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus.
size=title, Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim.
colback=red!5!white, Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu massa.
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras
title=My breakable box,
pad at break=2mm, ultrices. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, con-
break at=-\baselineskip/0pt, sectetuer adipiscing elit. In hac habitasse
height fixed for=middle ] platea dictumst. Integer tempus convallis au-
\lipsum[2-7] gue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fer-
\end{tcolorbox} mentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet,
\lipsum[8] enim sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat
quam, ac pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc
vitae tortor. Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl.
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing Vivamus quis tortor vitae risus porta vehicula.
elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adip- Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lec-
iscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mau- tus. Sed bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper,
ris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer leo velit ultricies tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi
id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu vel nisl. Vestibulum diam. Aliquam pellen-
neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senec- tesque, augue quis sagittis posuere, turpis la-
tus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. cus congue quam, in hendrerit risus eros eget
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. felis. Maecenas eget erat in sapien mattis port-
Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. titor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Sed
Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi
Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra fringilla, wisi in dignissim interdum, justo lec-
ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices biben- tus sagittis dui, et vehicula libero dui cursus
dum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, male- dui. Mauris tempor ligula sed lacus. Duis cur-
suada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur sus enim ut augue. Cras ac magna. Cras nulla.
auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a leo. Quisque eges-
Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagit- tas wisi eget nunc. Nam feugiat lacus vel est.
tis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim Curabitur consectetuer.
rutrum. Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, inter-
dum eu, tincidunt sit amet, laoreet vitae, arcu.
My breakable box Aenean faucibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, elit, rutrum at, molestie non, nonummy vel,
sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non nisl. Ut lectus eros, malesuada sit amet, fer-
justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis mentum eu, sodales cursus, magna. Donec eu
vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tor- purus. Quisque vehicula, urna sed ultricies auc-
tor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula ali- tor, pede lorem egestas dui, et convallis elit
quet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur et
Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus- nunc. Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium,
pendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et mag- est, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas
nis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus vel, odio.
mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam- Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut
corper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus quis purus. Sed ac odio. Sed vehicula hendrerit
luctus mauris. sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accum-
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis san risus eget odio. In hac habitasse platea dic-
erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tris- tumst. Pellentesque non elit. Fusce sed justo
tique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. eu urna porta tincidunt. Mauris felis odio, sol-
Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus licitudin sed, volutpat a, ornare ac, erat. Morbi
375
quis dolor. Donec pellentesque, erat ac sagittis odio elit, dictum in, hendrerit sit amet, egestas sed,
semper, nunc dui lobortis purus, quis congue leo. Praesent feugiat sapien aliquet odio. Integer
purus metus ultricies tellus. Proin et quam. vitae justo. Aliquam vestibulum fringilla lorem.
Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent Sed neque lectus, consectetuer at, consectetuer sed,
per conubia nostra, per inceptos hymenaeos. eleifend ac, lectus. Nulla facilisi. Pellentesque eget
Praesent sapien turpis, fermentum vel, eleifend lectus. Proin eu metus. Sed porttitor. In hac
faucibus, vehicula eu, lacus. habitasse platea dictumst. Suspendisse eu lectus.
Ut mi mi, lacinia sit amet, placerat et, mollis vi-
tae, dui. Sed ante tellus, tristique ut, iaculis eu,
Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et malesuada ac, dui. Mauris nibh leo, facilisis non,
netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Donec adipiscing quis, ultrices a, dui.
The following example has a \tcolorbox which fills the \multicols environment completely.
Here, /tcb/height fixed forÕ P. 370 is used to give all three columns the full height. Note that
the appropriate /tcb/break atÕ P. 367 value is not computed automatically but set manually.
\small
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,breakable,size=small,
title=My breakable box,pad at break=2mm,drop fuzzy shadow,
height fixed for=all, break at=11.4cm ]
\lipsum[1-3]
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{multicols}
My breakable box auctor semper nulla. Donec Nulla malesuada porttitor

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, varius orci eget risus. Duis diam. Donec felis erat, congue
consectetuer adipiscing elit. nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan non, volutpat at, tincidunt
Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. tristique, libero. Vivamus
placerat ac, adipiscing vi- Duis eget orci sit amet orci viverra fermentum felis.
tae, felis. Curabitur dic- dignissim rutrum. Donec nonummy pellentesque
tum gravida mauris. Nam Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, ante. Phasellus adipiscing
arcu libero, nonummy eget, euismod sodales, sollicitudin semper elit. Proin fermentum
consectetuer id, vulputate a, vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem massa ac quam. Sed diam
magna. Donec vehicula augue non justo. Nam lacus libero, turpis, molestie vitae, placerat
eu neque. Pellentesque habi- pretium at, lobortis vitae, ul- a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas
tant morbi tristique senectus tricies et, tellus. Donec ali- lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula,
et netus et malesuada fames quet, tortor sed accumsan eleifend at, accumsan nec, sus-
ac turpis egestas. Mauris bibendum, erat ligula aliquet cipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit
ut leo. Cras viverra metus magna, vitae ornare odio me- ligula feugiat magna. Nunc
rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl eleifend consequat lorem.
tus vestibulum urna fringilla hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim.
ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pel- Pellentesque tincidunt purus
sit amet tortor gravida plac- lentesque a nulla. Cum sociis vel magna. Integer non enim.
erat. Integer sapien est, iac- natoque penatibus et magnis Praesent euismod nunc eu pu-
ulis in, pretium quis, viverra dis parturient montes, nasce- rus. Donec bibendum quam in
ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem tur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar
vel leo ultrices bibendum. Ae- tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam- lectus. Donec et mi. Nam
nean faucibus. Morbi dolor corper vestibulum turpis. Pel- vulputate metus eu enim.
nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar lentesque cursus luctus mau- Vestibulum pellentesque felis
at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur ris. eu massa.
376
17.7 Break Point Insertion
N 2017-07-05 \tcbbreak
A breakable box is not broken, if there is enough space on the current page or column.
Therefore, typical penalty insertion with \break, \pagebreak, \columnbreak, . . . may only
work as expected, if the box is broken at least into two parts without inserting the penalties.
To force a page or column break, \tcbbreak starts a new paragraph and inserts an insane
tall rule which causes a break and which is immediately discarded. You may ignore this
technical information and just use it as you would use \pagebreak.
For an unbreakable box, \tcbbreak is identical to insert \par, i.e. it just starts a new
paragraph.
Also see /tcb/break atÕ P. 367 for defining height dependend breaks.
\begin{tcolorbox}[breakable,enhanced jigsaw,size=small,
title=Break into parts
]
First part\tcbbreak
Second part\tcbbreak
Third part
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{multicols}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,size=small,
title=You shall not break
]
First part\tcbbreak
Second part\tcbbreak
Third part
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{multicols}
Break into parts Second part Third part

First part
You shall not break

First part
Second part
Third part
377
17.8 Break Sequence for the Skins
The following diagrams document the break sequence for different skins. Depending on the main
skin of a tcolorbox, the actual skins of the break sequence parts are displayed.
Unbroken Box Broken Boxes

skin=standard skin=standard
skin=standard
skin=standard

skin=standard jigsaw skin=standard jigsaw
skin=standard jigsaw
skin=standard jigsaw

skin=spartan skin=spartan
skin=spartan
skin=spartan
378
skin=enhanced first
skin=enhancedfirst
unbroken middle
skin=enhancedmiddle
last
skin=enhancedlast

skin=enhancedfirst first
skin=enhancedfirst
unbroken middle
skin=enhancedmiddle
last
skin=enhancedmiddle

skin=enhancedmiddle first
skin=enhancedmiddle
unbroken middle
skin=enhancedmiddle
last
skin=enhancedmiddle

skin=enhancedlast first
skin=enhancedmiddle
unbroken middle
skin=enhancedmiddle
last
skin=enhancedlast
379
skin=enhanced jigsaw first
skin=enhancedfirst jigsaw
unbroken middle
skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw
last
skin=enhancedlast jigsaw

skin=enhancedfirst jigsaw first
skin=enhancedfirst jigsaw
unbroken middle
last

skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw first
unbroken middle
last

skin=enhancedlast jigsaw first
unbroken middle
last
skin=enhancedlast jigsaw
380
skin=empty first
skin=emptyfirst
unbroken middle
skin=emptymiddle
last
skin=emptylast

skin=emptyfirst first
skin=emptyfirst
unbroken middle
skin=emptymiddle
last
skin=emptymiddle

skin=emptymiddle first
skin=emptymiddle
unbroken middle
skin=emptymiddle
last
skin=emptymiddle

skin=emptylast first
skin=emptymiddle
unbroken middle
skin=emptymiddle
last
skin=emptylast
381
skin=bicolor first
skin=bicolorfirst
unbroken middle
skin=bicolormiddle
last
skin=bicolorlast

skin=bicolorfirst first
skin=bicolorfirst
unbroken middle
skin=bicolormiddle
last
skin=bicolormiddle

skin=bicolormiddle first
skin=bicolormiddle
unbroken middle
skin=bicolormiddle
last
skin=bicolormiddle

skin=bicolorlast first
skin=bicolormiddle
unbroken middle
skin=bicolormiddle
last
skin=bicolorlast
382
skin=tile
first
skin=tilefirst
unbroken middle
skin=tilemiddle
last
skin=tilelast

skin=tilefirst
first
skin=tilefirst
unbroken middle
skin=tilemiddle
last
skin=tilemiddle

skin=tilemiddle
first
skin=tilemiddle
unbroken middle
skin=tilemiddle
last
skin=tilemiddle

skin=tilelast
first
skin=tilemiddle
unbroken middle
skin=tilemiddle
last
skin=tilelast
383
skin=beamer first
skin=beamerfirst
unbroken middle
skin=beamermiddle
last
skin=beamerlast

skin=beamerfirst first
skin=beamerfirst
unbroken middle
skin=beamermiddle
last
skin=beamermiddle

skin=beamermiddle first
skin=beamermiddle
unbroken middle
skin=beamermiddle
last
skin=beamermiddle

skin=beamerlast first
skin=beamermiddle
unbroken middle
skin=beamermiddle
last
skin=beamerlast
384
skin=widget first
skin=widgetfirst
unbroken middle
skin=widgetmiddle
last
skin=widgetlast

skin=widgetfirst first
skin=widgetfirst
unbroken middle
skin=widgetmiddle
last
skin=widgetmiddle

skin=widgetmiddle first
skin=widgetmiddle
unbroken middle
skin=widgetmiddle
last
skin=widgetmiddle

skin=widgetlast first
skin=widgetmiddle
unbroken middle
skin=widgetmiddle
last
skin=widgetlast
frame: w=199.16928pt, h=108.12054pt frame: w=199.16928pt, h=39.83368pt
title: w=167.87134pt, h=7.65457pt title: w=167.87134pt, h=7.65457pt
upper: w=167.87134pt, h=5.14912pt
skin=draft skin=draft
interior: w=196.32404pt, h=22.22072pt
frame: w=199.16928pt, h=28.45274pt
upper: w=167.87134pt, h=73.43599pt upper: w=167.87134pt, h=8.5359pt
skin=draft
interior: w=196.32404pt, h=25.6075pt
frame: w=199.16928pt, h=28.45274pt
upper: w=167.87134pt, h=8.5359pt
interior: w=196.32404pt, h=90.50758pt
skin=draft
interior: w=196.32404pt, h=25.6075pt
385
skin=freelance first
skin=freelancefirst
unbroken middle
skin=freelancemiddle
last
skin=freelancelast

skin=freelancefirst first
skin=freelancefirst
unbroken middle
last

skin=freelancemiddle first
unbroken middle
last

skin=freelancelast first
unbroken middle
last
skin=freelancelast
386
17.9 Break by Hand (Faked Break)
! See Section 17.6 on page 374 for real column breaks.

Since the appearance of broken boxes is done by skins, it is quite easy to ’fake a break’. For this,
you actually don’t need the breakable library at all.
LIB
\tcbset{enhanced,equal height group=fakedbreak,
width=(\linewidth-6mm)/3,nobeforeafter,
left=1mm,right=1mm,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,middle=1mm}
%
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My broken box,skin=enhancedfirst]
This is a box which breaks from one column to another
\begin{tcolorbox}[skin=enhancedmiddle]
column. I am sorry to say that this is a trick.
Nevertheless, you may use this trick for your
\begin{tcolorbox}[skin=enhancedlast]
own purposes.
\end{tcolorbox}
My broken box column. I am sorry to say that own purposes.

This is a box which breaks this is a trick. Nevertheless,
from one column to another you may use this trick for your
387
18 Library magazine
LIB
1
The main purpose of this library is to store a tcolorbox Example Article
into an array of box registers for later usage.
This is an example for an arti-
If the tcolorbox is not breakable, there is not much add- cle which starts right here and is
on compared to usual TEX/LATEX box storage and usage continued to the following pages.
The body text for the article is
(and you do not really need this library for that use case).
written inside a single tcolorbox.
For a breakable tcolorbox, this library allows to capture This box is split into parts us-
all partial boxes into a sequence of registers. The partial ing the tools from this section,
boxes can be used anywhere in arbitrary order. — continued on page 391 —
The name of this library indicates magazine in the sense of storage, but also in the sense of a
journal where an article often is continued on page x. An example for this kind of application is
given throughout this section starting on the right hand side. The creation of this library was
motivated by Ulrike Fischer and Steven B. Segletes.
\tcbuselibrary{magazine}
This also loads the library breakable , see Section 17 on page 363.
LIB
The box register operations of this library are global. TEX grouping will not clear the
! registers when leaving the current group. Also be aware that extensive use of large box
arrays may eat up TEX’s available memory and registers.
18.1 Creation and Resetting of Box Arrays
N 2015-07-13 \newboxarray{hnamei}
This creates a new box array called hnamei. There already is a box array available with
name default which can be used directly. Note that the creation is a global operation.
\newboxarray{myarray}
N 2015-07-13 \boxarrayreset[hnamei]
Resets the size counter of a box array hnamei to zero. If hnamei is not provided, default
is used as name. Use this or /tcb/reset box array before you apply /tcb/store to box
arrayÕ P. 389 . Otherwise, all boxes would be appended to the already existing boxes. This
command does not clear box registers.
\boxarrayreset % resets 'default'

\boxarrayreset{myarray} % resets 'myarray'
N 2015-07-13 /tcb/reset box array=hnamei (default default, initially unset)

Resets the size counter of a box array hnamei to zero. Use this or \boxarrayreset (which
does the same) before you apply /tcb/store to box arrayÕ P. 389 .
\tcbset{
reset box array, % resets 'default'
reset box array=myarray, % resets 'myarray'
}
388
N 2015-07-13 \boxarrayclear[hnamei]
Works like \boxarrayresetÕ P. 388 to reset the size counter of a box array hnamei to
zero. Additionally, all allocated box registers of the box array are cleared of their con-
tent. Note that the allocated box registers stay allocated. So, this may be useful to clear
memory, but not to free registers for other applications. If \consumeboxarrayÕ P. 392 or
\consumetcboxarrayÕ P. 392 was used to apply the stored boxes, there is no advantage in
using \boxarrayclear.
\boxarrayclear % clears 'default'

\boxarrayclear{myarray} % clears 'myarray'
18.2 Storing Content
N 2015-07-13 /tcb/store to box array=hnamei (default default, initially unset)

Stores a tcolorbox or all parts of a break sequence of a tcolorbox into a box array hnamei.
If no hnamei is given, the already existing default box array is used. Otherwise, the box
array has to be created beforehand with \newboxarrayÕ P. 388 . Note that the box has to be
/tcb/breakableÕ P. 365 , if the box shall break into several parts. Typically, manual break
points are additionally defined by /tcb/break atÕ P. 367 . Otherwise, the box parts will
have a length of about \textheight. For most use cases, a /tcb/reset box arrayÕ P. 388
should be applied to reset the box array counter.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,size=fbox,width=4cm,
colback=yellow!10,colframe=yellow!10!black,
break at=7cm/4cm,
height fixed for=all,
watermark text=\arabic{tcbbreakpart},
reset box array,
store to box array
]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
\useboxarray{1}\hfill
\begin{tabular}[b]{cc}
\multicolumn{2}{c}{\includegraphics[width=7cm]{Basilica_5.png}}\\
\useboxarray{2} & \useboxarray{3}
\end{tabular}
Lorem ipsum dolor sit

amet, consectetuer adip-
iscing elit. Ut purus
elit, vestibulum ut, plac-
1 23
erat ac, adipiscing vi-
tae, felis. Curabitur
dictum gravida mauris.
Nam arcu libero, non-
ummy eget, consectetuer cus sem. Nulla et lectus lor nulla, malesuada eu,
id, vulputate a, magna. vestibulum urna fringilla pulvinar at, mollis ac,
Donec vehicula augue eu ultrices. Phasellus eu tel- nulla. Curabitur auctor
neque. Pellentesque habi- lus sit amet tortor gravida semper nulla. Donec var-
tant morbi tristique senec- placerat. Integer sapien ius orci eget risus. Duis
tus et netus et male- est, iaculis in, pretium nibh mi, congue eu, ac-
suada fames ac turpis eges- quis, viverra ac, nunc. cumsan eleifend, sagittis
tas. Mauris ut leo. Praesent eget sem vel leo quis, diam. Duis eget
Cras viverra metus rhon- ultrices bibendum. Ae- orci sit amet orci dignissim
nean faucibus. Morbi do- rutrum.
389
If the first box part should fill the rest of the available space of the current page, you can use
\pagegoal-\pagetotal minus some distance for the first element of /tcb/break atÕ P. 367 .
You may want to have some additional distance to the preceeding text.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,breakable,
reset box array,
store to box array,
break at=\pagegoal-\pagetotal-5mm/0pt,
height fixed for=first and middle]
\lipsum[1-15]
\end{tcolorbox}%
%
\consumetcboxarray{1}{blanker,before=\par\vfill\noindent}
\begin{tcolorbox}[blanker,width=4cm,
fontupper=\footnotesize,
break at=4cm,
reset box array,
store to box array
]
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Basilica_5.png}\par
\lipsum[1-2]
\end{tcolorbox}

size=small,halign=center,sharp corners,colback=blue!5]
\tcbitem\consumeboxarray{5}
\end{tcbitemize}
lorem non justo. Nam la- ante. Pellentesque a nulla.
5 6 1
cus libero, pretium at, lobor- Cum sociis natoque penat-
tis vitae, ultricies et, tel- ibus et magnis dis parturi-
lus. Donec aliquet, tor- ent montes, nascetur ridicu-
tor sed accumsan bibendum, lus mus. Aliquam tincidunt
erat ligula aliquet magna, urna. Nulla ullamcorper Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
vitae ornare odio metus a vestibulum turpis. Pellen- consectetuer adipiscing elit.
mi. Morbi ac orci et tesque cursus luctus mauris. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut,
nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus- placerat ac, adipiscing vi-
pendisse ut massa. Cras nec tae, felis. Curabitur dic-
tum gravida mauris. Nam
arcu libero, nonummy eget, vestibulum urna fringilla ul- mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur
2 3 4
consectetuer id, vulputate trices. Phasellus eu tel- auctor semper nulla. Donec
a, magna. Donec vehicula lus sit amet tortor gravida varius orci eget risus. Duis
augue eu neque. Pellen- placerat. Integer sapien nibh mi, congue eu, accum-
tesque habitant morbi tris- est, iaculis in, pretium quis, san eleifend, sagittis quis,
tique senectus et netus et viverra ac, nunc. Prae- diam. Duis eget orci sit
malesuada fames ac turpis sent eget sem vel leo ultri- amet orci dignissim rutrum.
egestas. Mauris ut leo. ces bibendum. Aenean fau- Nam dui ligula, fringilla a,
Cras viverra metus rhon- cibus. Morbi dolor nulla, euismod sodales, sollicitudin
cus sem. Nulla et lectus malesuada eu, pulvinar at, vel, wisi. Morbi auctor
390
N 2015-07-13 /tcb/reset and store to box array=hnamei (style, default default, initially unset)
Combination of /tcb/reset box arrayÕ P. 388 and /tcb/store to box arrayÕ P. 389 .
N 2015-07-13 /tcb/do not store to box array (style, no default, initially set)
Disables the /tcb/store to box arrayÕ P. 389 option, if set before.
N 2015-07-13 \begin{boxarraystore}{hnamei}
\end{boxarraystore}
Stores the environment content into a box array hnamei. This corresponds to the
standard LATEX environment lrbox, but the storage operation is global. As long as
\boxarrayresetÕ P. 388 is not used, every new boxarraystore adds a further box to the
array.
\boxarrayreset
\begin{boxarraystore}{default}\fbox{Mary}\end{boxarraystore}
\begin{boxarraystore}{default}\fbox{Had}\end{boxarraystore}
\begin{boxarraystore}{default}\fbox{a}\end{boxarraystore}
\begin{boxarraystore}{default}\fbox{Little}\end{boxarraystore}
\begin{boxarraystore}{default}\fbox{Lamb}\end{boxarraystore}
\useboxarray{5}\useboxarray{4}\useboxarray{3}\useboxarray{2}\useboxarray{1}\hfill
\useboxarray{1}\useboxarray{5}
Lamb Little a Had Mary Mary Lamb
2
18.3 Retrieving Content
N 2015-07-13 \boxarraygetsize[hnamei]{hmacroi}
Stores the current size of a box array hnamei into — continued from page 388 —
a given hmacroi. If no hnamei is given, the already namely /tcb/reset and store to
existing default box array is used. box arrayÕ P. 391 with a new box ar-
ray myarticle which was created by
\boxarraygetsize{\mysize} \newboxarray{myarticle}.
Current size of the default box array: The resulting parts are dis-
\mysize. tributed throughout this Sec-
tion 18 on page 388 using
Current size of the default box array: 5. \consumetcboxarrayÕ P. 392 at
— continued on page 392 —
N 2015-07-13 \useboxarray[hnamei]{hindexi}
Typesets the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei. If no hnamei
is given, the already existing default box array is used. It is considered an error, if a not
existing box array hnamei is used. It is silently ignored, if the hindexi is out of range. Note
that \useboxarray corresponds to the standard \usebox macro, respectively, \copy.
\boxarraygetsize{\mysize}
\foreach \n in {1,...,\mysize} { \useboxarray{\n} }
Mary Had a Little Lamb
391
N 2015-07-13 \usetcboxarray[hnamei]{hindexi}{hoptionsi}
Typesets the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei using
\useboxarrayÕ P. 391 as content of a \tcboxÕ P. 14 . If no hnamei is given, the already ex-
isting default box array is used. It is considered an error, if a not existing box array
hnamei is used. It is silently ignored, if the hindexi is out of range. The \tcboxÕ P. 14 can
be customized by tcolorbox hoptionsi.
\foreach \n in {1,...,\mysize} { \usetcboxarray{\n}{on line,colframe=yellow,
colback=yellow!10} }
Mary Had a Little Lamb
N 2015-07-13 \consumeboxarray[hnamei]{hindexi}
Typesets the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei. If no hnamei
is given, the already existing default box array is used. It is considered an error, if a
not existing box array hnamei is used. It is silently ignored, if the hindexi is out of range.
In contrast to \useboxarrayÕ P. 391 , \consumeboxarray corresponds to the standard \box
macro, i.e. after typesetting the box register is cleared and cannot be used again.
First run: \foreach \n in {1,...,\mysize} { \consumeboxarray{\n} }
\par
Second run: \foreach \n in {1,...,\mysize} { \consumeboxarray{\n} }
3
First run: Mary Had a Little Lamb
Second run:
N 2015-07-13 \consumetcboxarray[hnamei]{hindexi}{hoptionsi}
Typesets the box with the given hindexi number — continued from page 391 —
from the box array hnamei using \consumeboxarray the appropriate places you see. The
as content of a \tcboxÕ P. 14 . If no hnamei is given, linking texts like continued on page x
the already existing default box array is used. It are created by /tcb/finishÕ P. 197
commands for the embedding
is considered an error, if a not existing box array
\tcboxÕ P. 14 . To label the box
hnamei is used. It is silently ignored, if the hindexi parts, /tcb/phantomlabelÕ P. 98 is
is out of range. The \tcboxÕ P. 14 can be customized used.
by tcolorbox hoptionsi. After typesetting the box These quite small partial boxes are
register is cleared and cannot be used again. — continued on page 395 —
392
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw,size=fbox,width=6cm,
colback=yellow!10,colframe=yellow!10!black,
break at=5cm,
reset and store to box array
]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
\consumeboxarray{2} \hfill \consumeboxarray{1} \hfill \consumeboxarray{1}
1
adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibu-
lus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. In- lum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, fe-
2
teger sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, lis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris.
viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, con-
leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. sectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec
Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulv- vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
inar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auc- habitant morbi tristique senectus et ne-
tor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget tus et malesuada fames ac turpis eges-
risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan tas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus
eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum
orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum. urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tel-
N 2015-07-13 \boxarraygetbox[hnamei]{hmacroi}{hindexi}
Assigns the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei to a hmacroi.
If no hnamei is given, the already existing default box array is used. It is considered an
error, if a not existing box array hnamei is used. If the hindexi is out of range, the hmacroi
will be undefined.
\tcbox[size=small,colframe=blue!20,colback=yellow!5,on line,
reset and store to box array]{Test}
\boxarraygetsize{\mysize} Array size: \mysize
\boxarraygetbox{\mybox}{1}
Box width: \the\wd\mybox
\quad\usebox{\mybox}
Array size: 1
Box width: 30.35799pt Test
N 2017-06-27 \ifboxarrayempty[hnamei]{hindexi}{htruei}{hfalsei}
Tests the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei for emptiness be
empty and executes htruei if it is empty, and hfalsei otherwise. If no hnamei is given, the
already existing default box array is used. It is considered an error, if a not existing box
array hnamei is used.
\ifboxarrayempty{1}{no Box~1}{Box~1: \useboxarray{1}},

\ifboxarrayempty{2}{no Box~2}{Box~2: \useboxarray{2}}
Box 1: Test , no Box 2
393
18.4 Box Dimensions
N 2015-07-13 \boxarraygetwidth[hnamei]{hmacroi}{hindexi}
Assigns the width of the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei
to a hmacroi. If no hnamei is given, the already existing default box array is used. It
is considered an error, if a not existing box array hnamei is used. If the hindexi is out of
range, the hmacroi will be set to 0pt.
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\useboxarray{1} & width of box 1: \boxarraygetwidth{\mylen}{1} \mylen\\
\useboxarray{2} & width of box 2: \boxarraygetwidth{\mylen}{2} \mylen
\end{tabular}
Test width of box 1: 30.35799pt

width of box 2: 0pt
N 2015-07-13 \boxarraygetheight[hnamei]{hmacroi}{hindexi}
Assigns the height of the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\useboxarray{1} & height of box 1: \boxarraygetheight{\mylen}{1} \mylen\\
\useboxarray{2} & height of box 2: \boxarraygetheight{\mylen}{2} \mylen
\end{tabular}
Test height of box 1: 9.89883pt

height of box 2: 0pt
N 2015-07-13 \boxarraygetdepth[hnamei]{hmacroi}{hindexi}
Assigns the depth of the box with the given hindexi number from the box array hnamei
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\useboxarray{1} & depth of box 1: \boxarraygetdepth{\mylen}{1} \mylen\\
\useboxarray{2} & depth of box 2: \boxarraygetdepth{\mylen}{2} \mylen
\end{tabular}
Test depth of box 1: 3.69884pt

depth of box 2: 0pt
394
4
N 2015-07-13 \boxarraygettotalheight[hnamei]{hmacroi}{hindexi}
Assigns the total height of the box with the given — continued from page 392 —
hindexi number from the box array hnamei to a for demonstration purposes. With
hmacroi. If no hnamei is given, the already exist- the tools of this section, a magazine
ing default box array is used. It is considered an type document could be created, but
error, if a not existing box array hnamei is used. If this still needs a lot of manual con-
trol.
the hindexi is out of range, the hmacroi will be set
to 0pt.
\boxarrayreset
store to box array]{Test}
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\useboxarray{1} & total height of box 1: \boxarraygettotalheight{\mylen}{1} \mylen\\
\useboxarray{2} & total height of box 2: \boxarraygettotalheight{\mylen}{2} \mylen
\end{tabular}
Test total height of box 1: 13.59767pt

total height of box 2: 0pt
395
18.5 Leaflet Example
The following full application example can be used to create leaflets. Obviously, the code can
be adapted and customized in many ways.
\documentclass[a4paper,landscape]{article}
\usepackage[noheadfoot,margin=0pt]{geometry}
\usepackage[skins,raster,magazine]{tcolorbox}
\usepackage{lipsum}
\newenvironment{leaflet}[1][]{%
\begin{tcolorbox}[nobeforeafter,empty,colback=white,
sharp corners,size=minimal,left=10mm,right=10mm,top=10mm,bottom=10mm,
width=\textwidth/3,
breakable,
break at=\textheight,
reset box array,
store to box array,#1]}
{\end{tcolorbox}%
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster columns=3,raster equal skip=0pt,blankest]
\end{tcbitemize}%
}
\pagestyle{empty}
\begin{document}
\begin{leaflet}[underlay={\node[above=5mm,font=\footnotesize]
at (frame.south) {- \arabic{tcbbreakpart} -};}]
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Basilica_5.png}
\begin{center}
\bfseries\LARGE Example
\end{center}
\section{Introduction}
\lipsum[1]
\section{Main Part A}
\lipsum[2-8]
\section{Main Part B}
\lipsum[9-15]
\section{Conclusion}
\lipsum[16-18]
\end{leaflet}
\end{document}
396
cursus sodales, augue est scelerisque sapien, vene- tum nunc. In wisi nisl, malesuada at, dignissim sit
natis congue nulla arcu et pede. Ut suscipit enim amet, lobortis in, odio. Aenean consequat arcu a
vel sapien. Donec congue. Maecenas urna mi, sus- ante. Pellentesque porta elit sit amet orci. Etiam
cipit in, placerat ut, vestibulum ut, massa. Fusce at turpis nec elit ultricies imperdiet. Nulla facil-
ultrices nulla et nisl. isi. In hac habitasse platea dictumst. Suspendisse
Etiam ac leo a risus tristique nonummy. Donec dig- viverra aliquam risus. Nullam pede justo, molestie
nissim tincidunt nulla. Vestibulum rhoncus molestie nonummy, scelerisque eu, facilisis vel, arcu.
odio. Sed lobortis, justo et pretium lobortis, mauris Curabitur tellus magna, porttitor a, commodo a,
turpis condimentum augue, nec ultricies nibh arcu commodo in, tortor. Donec interdum. Praesent
pretium enim. Nunc purus neque, placerat id, im- scelerisque. Maecenas posuere sodales odio. Viva-
perdiet sed, pellentesque nec, nisl. Vestibulum im- mus metus lacus, varius quis, imperdiet quis, rhon-
Example
perdiet neque non sem accumsan laoreet. In hac cus a, turpis. Etiam ligula arcu, elementum a, vene-
habitasse platea dictumst. Etiam condimentum fa- natis quis, sollicitudin sed, metus. Donec nunc pede, 1 Introduction
cilisis libero. Suspendisse in elit quis nisl aliquam tincidunt in, venenatis vitae, faucibus vel, nibh. Pel-
dapibus. Pellentesque auctor sapien. Sed egestas lentesque wisi. Nullam malesuada. Morbi ut tel- Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing
sapien nec lectus. Pellentesque vel dui vel neque lus ut pede tincidunt porta. Lorem ipsum dolor sit elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adip-
bibendum viverra. Aliquam porttitor nisl nec pede. amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Etiam congue iscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mau-
Proin mattis libero vel turpis. Donec rutrum mau- neque id dolor. ris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
ris et libero. Proin euismod porta felis. Nam lobor- Donec et nisl at wisi luctus bibendum. Nam inter- id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu
tis, metus quis elementum commodo, nunc lectus dum tellus ac libero. Sed sem justo, laoreet vitae, neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senec-
elementum mauris, eget vulputate ligula tellus eu fringilla at, adipiscing ut, nibh. Maecenas non sem tus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
neque. Vivamus eu dolor. quis tortor eleifend fermentum. Etiam id tortor ac Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem.
Nulla in ipsum. Praesent eros nulla, congue vitae, mauris porta vulputate. Integer porta neque vitae Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices.
euismod ut, commodo a, wisi. Pellentesque habi- massa. Maecenas tempus libero a libero posuere Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida placerat.
tant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada dictum. Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra
fames ac turpis egestas. Aenean nonummy magna orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae; Aenean ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices biben-
non leo. Sed felis erat, ullamcorper in, dictum non, quis mauris sed elit commodo placerat. Class aptent dum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, male-
ultricies ut, lectus. Proin vel arcu a odio lobortis taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nos- suada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur
euismod. Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus tra, per inceptos hymenaeos. Vivamus rhoncus tin- auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus.
orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae; Proin cidunt libero. Etiam elementum pretium justo. Vi- Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagit-
ut est. Aliquam odio. Pellentesque massa turpis, vamus est. Morbi a tellus eget pede tristique com- tis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim
cursus eu, euismod nec, tempor congue, nulla. Duis modo. Nulla nisl. Vestibulum sed nisl eu sapien rutrum.
viverra gravida mauris. Cras tincidunt. Curabitur cursus rutrum.
eros ligula, varius ut, pulvinar in, cursus faucibus,
augue. 2 Main Part A
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollici-
4 Conclusion tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam
lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et,
Nulla mattis luctus nulla. Duis commodo velit tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan biben-
at leo. Aliquam vulputate magna et leo. Nam dum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio
vestibulum ullamcorper leo. Vestibulum condimen- metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis.
tum rutrum mauris. Donec id mauris. Morbi mo- Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
lestie justo et pede. Vivamus eget turpis sed nisl a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis
cursus tempor. Curabitur mollis sapien condimen- dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ali-
-5- -6- -1-
quam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum malesuada sit amet, fermentum eu, sodales cursus, luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae; Pellentesque
turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris. magna. Donec eu purus. Quisque vehicula, urna sit amet pede ac sem eleifend consectetuer. Nullam
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, sed ultricies auctor, pede lorem egestas dui, et con- elementum, urna vel imperdiet sodales, elit ipsum
congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique, libero. vallis elit erat sed nulla. Donec luctus. Curabitur pharetra ligula, ac pretium ante justo a nulla. Cur-
Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy et nunc. Aliquam dolor odio, commodo pretium, abitur tristique arcu eu metus. Vestibulum lectus.
pellentesque ante. Phasellus adipiscing semper elit. ultricies non, pharetra in, velit. Integer arcu est, Proin mauris. Proin eu nunc eu urna hendrerit fau-
Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, nonummy in, fermentum faucibus, egestas vel, odio. cibus. Aliquam auctor, pede consequat laoreet var-
molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maece- Sed commodo posuere pede. Mauris ut est. Ut ius, eros tellus scelerisque quam, pellentesque hen-
nas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan quis purus. Sed ac odio. Sed vehicula hendrerit drerit ipsum dolor sed augue. Nulla nec lacus.
nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat sem. Duis non odio. Morbi ut dui. Sed accum- Suspendisse vitae elit. Aliquam arcu neque, ornare
magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia san risus eget odio. In hac habitasse platea dic- in, ullamcorper quis, commodo eu, libero. Fusce
nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel tumst. Pellentesque non elit. Fusce sed justo eu sagittis erat at erat tristique mollis. Maecenas
magna. Integer non enim. Praesent euismod nunc urna porta tincidunt. Mauris felis odio, sollicitudin sapien libero, molestie et, lobortis in, sodales eget,
eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam sed, volutpat a, ornare ac, erat. Morbi quis dolor. dui. Morbi ultrices rutrum lorem. Nam elementum
cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulpu- Donec pellentesque, erat ac sagittis semper, nunc ullamcorper leo. Morbi dui. Aliquam sagittis. Nunc
tate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis dui lobortis purus, quis congue purus metus ultricies placerat. Pellentesque tristique sodales est. Maece-
eu massa. tellus. Proin et quam. Class aptent taciti sociosqu nas imperdiet lacinia velit. Cras non urna. Morbi
Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum. Cras nibh. ad litora torquent per conubia nostra, per inceptos eros pede, suscipit ac, varius vel, egestas non, eros.
Morbi vel justo vitae lacus tincidunt ultrices. Lorem hymenaeos. Praesent sapien turpis, fermentum vel, Praesent malesuada, diam id pretium elementum,
ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. In eleifend faucibus, vehicula eu, lacus. eros sem dictum tortor, vel consectetuer odio sem
hac habitasse platea dictumst. Integer tempus con- Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et ne- sed wisi.
vallis augue. Etiam facilisis. Nunc elementum fer- tus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Donec Sed feugiat. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et mag-
mentum wisi. Aenean placerat. Ut imperdiet, enim odio elit, dictum in, hendrerit sit amet, egestas sed, nis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus.
sed gravida sollicitudin, felis odio placerat quam, ac leo. Praesent feugiat sapien aliquet odio. Inte- Ut pellentesque augue sed urna. Vestibulum diam
pulvinar elit purus eget enim. Nunc vitae tortor. ger vitae justo. Aliquam vestibulum fringilla lorem. eros, fringilla et, consectetuer eu, nonummy id,
Proin tempus nibh sit amet nisl. Vivamus quis tor- Sed neque lectus, consectetuer at, consectetuer sed, sapien. Nullam at lectus. In sagittis ultrices mau-
tor vitae risus porta vehicula. eleifend ac, lectus. Nulla facilisi. Pellentesque eget ris. Curabitur malesuada erat sit amet massa. Fusce
Fusce mauris. Vestibulum luctus nibh at lectus. Sed lectus. Proin eu metus. Sed porttitor. In hac blandit. Aliquam erat volutpat. Aliquam euismod.
bibendum, nulla a faucibus semper, leo velit ultricies habitasse platea dictumst. Suspendisse eu lectus. Aenean vel lectus. Nunc imperdiet justo nec dolor.
tellus, ac venenatis arcu wisi vel nisl. Vestibulum Ut mi mi, lacinia sit amet, placerat et, mollis vi- Etiam euismod. Fusce facilisis lacinia dui. Sus-
diam. Aliquam pellentesque, augue quis sagittis po- tae, dui. Sed ante tellus, tristique ut, iaculis eu, pendisse potenti. In mi erat, cursus id, non-
suere, turpis lacus congue quam, in hendrerit risus malesuada ac, dui. Mauris nibh leo, facilisis non, ummy sed, ullamcorper eget, sapien. Praesent
eros eget felis. Maecenas eget erat in sapien mattis adipiscing quis, ultrices a, dui. pretium, magna in eleifend egestas, pede pede
porttitor. Vestibulum porttitor. Nulla facilisi. Sed pretium lorem, quis consectetuer tortor sapien fa-
a turpis eu lacus commodo facilisis. Morbi fringilla, cilisis magna. Mauris quis magna varius nulla
wisi in dignissim interdum, justo lectus sagittis dui, 3 Main Part B scelerisque imperdiet. Aliquam non quam. Aliquam
et vehicula libero dui cursus dui. Mauris tempor porttitor quam a lacus. Praesent vel arcu ut tortor
Morbi luctus, wisi viverra faucibus pretium, nibh est
ligula sed lacus. Duis cursus enim ut augue. Cras cursus volutpat. In vitae pede quis diam bibendum
placerat odio, nec commodo wisi enim eget quam.
ac magna. Cras nulla. Nulla egestas. Curabitur a placerat. Fusce elementum convallis neque. Sed do-
Quisque libero justo, consectetuer a, feugiat vitae,
leo. Quisque egestas wisi eget nunc. Nam feugiat lor orci, scelerisque ac, dapibus nec, ultricies ut, mi.
porttitor eu, libero. Suspendisse sed mauris vitae
lacus vel est. Curabitur consectetuer. Duis nec dui quis leo sagittis commodo.
elit sollicitudin malesuada. Maecenas ultricies eros
Suspendisse vel felis. Ut lorem lorem, interdum eu, Aliquam lectus. Vivamus leo. Quisque ornare tel-
sit amet ante. Ut venenatis velit. Maecenas sed mi
tincidunt sit amet, laoreet vitae, arcu. Aenean fau- lus ullamcorper nulla. Mauris porttitor pharetra
eget dui varius euismod. Phasellus aliquet volutpat
cibus pede eu ante. Praesent enim elit, rutrum at, tortor. Sed fringilla justo sed mauris. Mauris tel-
odio. Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci
molestie non, nonummy vel, nisl. Ut lectus eros, lus. Sed non leo. Nullam elementum, magna in
-2- -3- -4-
397
19 Library poster
LIB
The main purpose of this library is to support creation of single page posters with tcolorboxes.
A tcbposterÕ P. 399 is a tikzpicture where tcolorboxes can be placed in a column oriented
manner using \posterboxÕ P. 404 commands. This base concept is more or less copied from the
great baposter package.
The raster library, see Section 14 on page 277, can produce similar looking results and may
LIB
be more appropriate depending on the actual project.

• The raster library has a flow oriented concept, just like a convential text flow. The text
LIB
flow (box flow) is a merely endless ribbon which gets broken into lines (and paragraphs)
and the lines are broken into pages. raster shapes the boxes to convenient sizes to fill
LIB
lines and pages in a pleasant way.
• The tcbposter library supports a quite free placement of boxes inside a page. Basically,
LIB
boxes are placed like nodes are placed inside a tikzpicture. In contrast to raster , this
LIB
is a single page and not a flow of pages. The poster is divided into columns and rows.
There is a more or less gentle force to use the columns (or spans of columns) for positioning
and sizing while the row placement is completely optional.
The creation of this library was motivated by Ignasi.
Inside a tikzpicture there should be no embedded tikzpictures. This rule is violated
! by the poster library. Be aware that there may be some unwanted interactions between
LIB
the main tikzpicture and the embedded ones inside the tcolorboxes.
\tcbuselibrary{poster}
This also loads the libraries skins , see Section 10 on page 148, breakable , see Section 17 on
LIB
LIB
page 363, magazine , see Section 18 on page 388, and fitting , see Section 20 on page 411.
LIB
LIB
19.1 Overview
Click me to see the tutorial
You get the best overview of the poster library and its facilities, if you look at the
LIB
Poster Tutorial which is part of the tcolorbox documentation:

tcolorbox-tutorial-poster.pdf
398
19.2 Main Poster Environment
N 2017-07-03 \begin{tcbposter}[hoptionsi]
\end{tcbposter}
This creates a tikzpicture environment with suitable additional settings defined by the
given hoptionsi. Basically, \posterboxÕ P. 404 and posterboxenvÕ P. 404 are used to place
tcolorboxes as nodes into the environment, but additional TikZ code can also be used.
As hoptionsi all /tcb/posterset/ keys may be applied, namely:
• /tcb/posterset/posterÕ P. 401 : poster settings like columns, rows, sizes. . .
• /tcb/posterset/coverageÕ P. 402 and /tcb/posterset/no coverageÕ P. 402 : settings
for a surrounding tcolorbox for background and margins.
• /tcb/posterset/boxesÕ P. 403 : style of the tcolorboxes used for the poster.
• /tcb/posterset/fontsizeÕ P. 403 : scaling of used fonts.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {showframe,height=10cm,spacing=2mm},
boxes = {beamer,colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!50,colupper=yellow!50},
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=3,row=2}{My first box}
\posterbox[adjusted title=Second box]
{name=B,column=2,span=2,below=A}{My second box}
\posterbox[adjusted title=Third box]
{name=C,column=2,between=B and bottom}{My third box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
row2
My first box
row3 Second box
My second box
B
Third box
row4 My third box

C
399
Inside tcbposterÕ P. 399 , there are several predefined TikZ nodes. These nodes share a common
/tcb/poster/prefixÕ P. 401 which is TCBPOSTER@ by default. This prefix is used to discriminate
the poster nodes from local nodes of any embedded tikzpicture environment. You will never
need this prefix using \posterboxÕ P. 404 and its placement options, but if you want to refer to
a predefined node using pure TikZ code. The predefined nodes (shown without prefix) are:
• poster: defines the bounding box of the poster (without the coverage).
• top: top position plus row spacing
• bottom: bottom position minus row spacing
• middle: vertical middle position
• col1, col2, . . . : bounding box of column 1, column 2, . . .
• row1, row2, . . . : bounding box of row 1, row 2, . . .
Further nodes are defined using the /tcb/posterloc/nameÕ P. 405 option.
Never use a tcbposterÕ P. 399 inside a tcbposterÕ P. 399 . But, if you do anyway, use a
! different /tcb/poster/prefixÕ P. 401 for the embedded poster or you surely get a total
mess.
There are several properties inside a tcbposterÕ P. 399 which may be useful for advanced code
(skip the following on first reading):
• \tcbposterwidth: Width of the poster (without margins).
• \tcbposterheight: Height of the poster (without margins).
• \tcbpostercolspacing: Column distance.
• \tcbposterrowspacing: Row distance.
• \tcbpostercolumns: Column quantity.
• \tcbposterrows: Row quantity.
• \tcbpostercolwidth: Width of a column.
• \tcbposterrowheight: Height of a row.
N 2017-07-03 \tcbposterset{hoptionsi}
Sets options for every following tcbposterÕ P. 399 inside the current TEX group. For exam-
ple, the numbers for rows and columns may be defined for the whole document by this:
\tcbposterset{poster={columns=2,rows=3}}
See tcbposterÕ P. 399 for all feasible options.
400
19.3 Poster Settings
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterset/poster={hoption listi} (style, no default)

This option can be applied inside tcbposterÕ P. 399 and \tcbpostersetÕ P. 400 to set the
given poster hoption listi, e.g.
\tcbposterset{poster={width=20cm,height=15cm}}
For the hoption listi, see the following keys.

N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/columns=hnumberi (no default, initially 3)
Sets the hnumberi of columns for a tcbposter.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {showframe,columns=5,rows=2,spacing=1mm,height=4cm},
]
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3 col4 col5
row1
row2
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/rows=hnumberi (no default, initially 4)

Sets the hnumberi of rows for a tcbposter.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/colspacing=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)
Sets hlengthi as distance between columns.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/rowspacing=hlengthi (no default, initially 4mm)
Sets hlengthi as distance between rows.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/spacing=hlengthi (style, no default, initially 4mm)
Sets hlengthi as distance between columns and rows.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/showframe=true|false (default true, initially false)
Displays a red auxiliary mesh as optical support during poster creation. Also, every
/tcb/posterloc/nameÕ P. 405 is displayed.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/width=hlengthi (no default, initially \linewidth)
Sets hlengthi as width of the poster. For a typical poster, this has not to be set manually.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/height=hlengthi (no default, initially unset)
Sets hlengthi as height of the poster. For a typical poster, this has not to be set manually,
but is set automatically to an appropriate value.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/poster/prefix=hnamei (no default, initially TCBPOSTER@)
hnamei is set as prefix for any TikZ node which is generated automatically by the poster
LIB
library. This encompasses predefined nodes like top, bottom, . . . , and nodes defined by
using /tcb/posterloc/nameÕ P. 405 . Also, see Section 19.2 on page 399. For a typical
poster, this value can stay as it is.
401
19.4 Coverage
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterset/coverage={hoption listi} (style, no default)

This option can be applied inside tcbposter Õ P. 399 and \tcbposterset P. 400 and it adds
Õ
an optional coverage for the poster which is a surrounding tcolorbox with the given hoption
listi. Here, margins and background settings for the poster can be given. The coverage has
several default tcolorbox settings suitable for the purpose:
enhanced, frame hidden, sharp corners, boxsep=0pt, boxrule=0pt,

top=4mm, bottom=4mm, left=4mm, right=4mm,
toptitle=2mm, bottomtitle=2mm, colback=white
The hoption listi can contain any tcolorbox option.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {showframe,spacing=1mm},
coverage = {height=5cm,
interior style={top color=yellow,bottom color=yellow!50!red},
watermark text={My Poster},watermark color=white,
},
]
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3

row1
My Poster
row2
row3
row4
• For a typical poster, the option /tcb/spreadÕ P. 88 will use the whole page for the
poster coverage.
• Poster margins can be adapted by /tcb/leftÕ P. 39 , /tcb/rightÕ P. 40 , /tcb/topÕ P. 42 ,
/tcb/bottomÕ P. 43 .
• Poster background can be changed by /tcb/colbackÕ P. 27 , /tcb/interior
styleÕ P. 149 , /tcb/interior style imageÕ P. 150 , etc.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterset/no coverage (style, no value, initially set)
Removes the surrounding tcolorbox completely.
402
19.5 Common Box Settings
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterset/boxes={hoption listi} (style, no default)

This option can be applied inside tcbposter Õ P. 399 and \tcbposterset Õ P. 400 and it is used
to set up the style of the tcolorboxes inside the poster. The hoption listi can contain any
tcolorbox option, but box size options are not assumed to be useful here, because the size
will be determined by the placement options.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {spacing=2mm,columns=3,rows=2},
},
boxes = {sharp corners=downhill,arc=3mm,boxrule=1mm,
colback=white,colframe=cyan,
title style={left color=black,right color=cyan},
fonttitle=\bfseries\scshape}
]
\posterbox[adjusted title=First]{column=1,row=1,span=2}{First box}
\posterbox[adjusted title=Second]{column=1,row=2,span=2}{Second box}
\posterbox[adjusted title=Third]{column=3,row=1,rowspan=2}{Third box}
\end{tcbposter}
First Third
First box Third box
Second
Second box
19.6 Font Scaling
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterset/fontsize=hlengthi (style, no default, initially unset)

This option can be applied inside tcbposter Õ P. 399 and \tcbpostersetÕ P. 400 . It uses
/tcb/fit basedim Õ P. 414 and /tcb/fit fontsize macrosÕ P. 415 to redefine \normalsize
to hlengthi and all other standard font size macros like \small and \large accordingly.
This needs a freely scalable font family like lmodern to work. If /tcb/posterset/fontsize
is not applied, there standard font size macros are not changed in any way.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {spacing=2mm,columns=3,rows=2},
},
fontsize = 15pt, % <--- \normalsize is now 15pt
]
...
403
19.7 Box Placement
N 2017-07-03 \posterbox[hoptionsi]{hplacementi}{hbox contenti}

Inside a tcbposterÕ P. 399 environment, this places a tcolorbox with additional tcolorbox
hoptionsi and the given hbox contenti at a place determined by hplacementi. All hplacementi
options are described in the following. Note that hbox contenti cannot contain verbatim
material, see posterboxenv.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {showframe,height=4cm,spacing=2mm,rows=2},
]
\posterbox[title=My title]{name=A,column=2,row=2}{My first box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
row2 My title
A
My first box
N 2017-07-03 \begin{posterboxenv}[hoptionsi]{hplacementi}
\end{posterboxenv}
This is the environment version of \posterbox, i.e. inside a tcbposterÕ P. 399 environment,
this places a tcolorbox with additional tcolorbox hoptionsi and the given henvironment
contenti at a place determined by hplacementi. In contrast to \posterbox, the henvironment
contenti is allowed to contain verbatim material. Note that the implementation of
\posterbox is more efficient than the implementation of posterboxenv.
\begin{tcbposter}[
boxes = {size=small,beamer,
colframe=blue!50!black,colback=blue!50,colupper=yellow!50},
]
\begin{posterboxenv}[title=My title]{name=A,column=2,between=top and bottom}
My first box.
\begin{tcblisting}{size=small,colback=yellow!10}
My \textbf{first}
poster listing.
\end{tcblisting}
\end{posterboxenv}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1 My title
My first box.
My \textbf{first}
poster listing.
row2
A
My first poster listing.
404
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/name=hnamei (no default, initially @)
Sets hnamei as reference for the current \posterboxÕ P. 404 or posterboxenvÕ P. 404 . A TikZ
shape name is constructed automatically as combination of /tcb/poster/prefixÕ P. 401 and
hnamei.
\begin{tcbposter}[
poster = {showframe,height=2.5cm,spacing=2mm,rows=2},
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=2,row=2}{My first box}
\node[below right=4mm,fill=yellow] (X) at ([email protected] west) {Example A};
\draw[blue,very thick,->] (X) |- (TCBPOSTER@A);
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
Example A
row2
My first box
A
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/column=hnumberi (no default, initially 1)

Places the box at the column denoted by hnumberi. If /tcb/posterloc/spanÕ P. 406 is not
1, the box is aligned to the left side of column hnumberi.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{row=1,column=2,span=2}{First box}
\posterbox{row=2,column=2,span=0.8}{Second box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box
row2
Second box
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/column*=hnumberi (no default, initially unset)

Places the box at the column denoted by hnumberi. If /tcb/posterloc/spanÕ P. 406 is not
1, the box is aligned to the right side of column hnumberi.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{row=1,column*=2,span=2}{First box}
\posterbox{row=2,column*=2,span=0.8}{Second box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box
row2
Second box
405
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/span=hnumberi (no default, initially 1)
Sets the width of the current box to span hnumberi columns. hnumberi is also al-
lowed to be a real number like 0.5 or 1.7. See /tcb/posterloc/columnÕ P. 405 and
/tcb/posterloc/column*Õ P. 405 for examples.
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/row=hnumberi (no default, initially unset)
If this option is applied, the box is placed at the row denoted by hnumberi. Also, the height
is set as fixed according to /tcb/posterloc/rowspan.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{row=1,column=1}{First box}
\posterbox{row=1,column=2,rowspan=2}{Second box}
\posterbox[natural height]{row=1,column=3}{Third box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
row2
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/rowspan=hnumberi (no default, initially 1)

Sets the height of the current box to span hnumberi rows. hnumberi is also allowed to be a
real number like 0.5 or 1.7.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{row=1,column=1,rowspan=0.9}{First box}
\posterbox{row=1,column=2,rowspan=1.5}{Second box}
\posterbox{row=1,column=3,rowspan=2}{Third box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
row2
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/fixed height (no value, initially 0pt)

Sets the height of the current box span rows as denoted by /tcb/posterloc/rowspan. This
can be used, if not /tcb/posterloc/row, but another height placement option is applied.
406
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/below=hnamei (no default, initially top)
The box is placed below another box with the given hnamei. Also, hnamei can be a
predefined node, see Section 19.2 on page 399.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,below=top}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=1,below=A}{Second box}
\posterbox{name=C,column=2,below=B}{Third box}
\posterbox{name=D,column=3,below=row1}{Fourth box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box A
Second boxB
row2
Fourth box D
Third box C
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/above=hnamei (no default, initially unset)

The box is placed above another box with the given hnamei. Also, hnamei can be a
predefined node, see Section 19.2 on page 399.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,above=bottom}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=1,above=A}{Second box}
\posterbox{name=C,column=2,above=B}{Third box}
\posterbox{name=D,column=3,above=row2}{Fourth box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
Third box C
Fourth box D
Second boxB
row2
First box A
407
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/at=hnamei (no default, initially unset)
The box is placed at the position with the given hnamei. This is quite likely a predefined
node, see Section 19.2 on page 399.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,at=middle}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=2,at=row1}{Second box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
Second boxB
row2
First box A
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/between=hname1 i and hname2 i (no default, initially unset)

The box is placed below a box hname1 i and above another box hname2 i. Also, hname1 i
and hname2 i can be predefined nodes, see Section 19.2 on page 399.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,below=top}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=1,between=A and bottom}{Second box}
\posterbox{name=C,column=2,above=bottom}{Third box}
\posterbox{name=D,column=2,between=top and C,span=2}{Fourth box}
\posterbox{name=E,column=3,between=D and bottom}{Fifth box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box A Fourth box
D
Second box
row2
B
Third box C Fifth box E
408
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/sequence=hsequencei (no default, initially unset)
The box is broken into partial boxes. These partial boxes are placed following the given
hsequencei of placements. The feasible syntax for the hsequencei is:
hcolumn ai between hname a1 i and hname a2 i then
hcolumn bi between hname b1 i and hname b2 i then
hcolumn ci between hname c1 i and hname c2 i then. . .
Obviously, this places the first part box at hcolumn ai between hname a2 i and hname a2 i.
The second box part is placed at hcolumn bi between hname b2 i and hname b2 i, and so on.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox[adjusted title=A]{name=A,column=1,below=top,span=2}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=2,above=bottom,span=2}{Second box}
\posterbox[adjusted title=C,colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!50]{
name=C, sequence=1 between A and bottom then
2 between A and B then
3 between top and B
}{\lipsum[2]}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1 A tesque a nulla. Cum
A sociis natoque penatibus
First box et magnis dis parturi-
C sed accumsan bibendum, ridiculus mus. Aliquam
tincidunt urna.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla
erat ligula aliquet magna, C3 Nulla
ullamcorper vestibulum
vitae ornare odio metus
a, euismod sodales, a mi. Morbi turpis. Pellentesque
row2
sollicitudin vel, wisi.
C2 ac orci et
nisl hendrerit mollis. cursus luctus mauris.
Morbi auctorC1lorem non Suspendisse ut massa.
justo. Nam lacus libero, Cras nec ante. Pellen-
pretium at, lobortis
vitae, ultricies et, tellus.
Donec aliquet, tortor Second box B
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/placeholder (style, no value)

If the box content of a /tcb/posterloc/sequence is too short to fill all reserved box parts,
the empty boxes are drawn with the /tcb/placeholder style. This style can be redefined,
e.g. to /tcb/blankestÕ P. 239 , if nothing should be drawn for empty boxes.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,below=top,span=2}{First box}
\posterbox[colframe=red!50!black,colback=red!50]{
name=B, sequence=1 between A and bottom then
2 between A and bottom then
3 between top and bottom
}{Second box followed by placeholder boxes}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box A
row2 Second box followed by B3

placeholderB1
boxes B2
409
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/xshift=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)
Horizontal shift of a box by hlengthi.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,row=1,xshift=6mm}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=2,row=2,xshift=-6mm}{Second box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box
A
row2
Second box
B
N 2017-07-03 /tcb/posterloc/yshift=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

Vertical shift of a box by hlengthi.
\begin{tcbposter}[
]
\posterbox{name=A,column=1,row=1,yshift=-4mm}{First box}
\posterbox{name=B,column=2,row=2,yshift=4mm}{Second box}
\end{tcbposter}
col1 col2 col3
row1
First box
A
Second box
row2
B
410
20 Library fitting
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{fitting}

\tcboxfit[hoptionsi]{hbox contenti}
Creates a colored box where the given hbox contenti is fitted to the width and height of the
box. A tcboxfit has to have a fixed height. If no fixed height is given, a square box is
constructed. In principle, most hoptionsi for a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 can be used for \tcboxfit
with some restrictions. A \tcboxfit cannot have a lower part and cannot be broken.
% \usepackage{lipsum} \tcbuselibrary{raster}
\tcbset{colframe=blue!50!black,colback=red!10!white,
boxsep=0pt,top=1mm,bottom=1mm,left=1mm,right=1mm,
fit algorithm=hybrid*,raster equal skip=1mm}
\begin{tcbraster}[raster columns=3,raster valign=bottom]
\end{tcbraster}
\begin{tcbraster}[colback=green!10!white,boxsep=1mm]
\tcboxfit[height=4cm,title=With a title]{\lipsum[2]}
\end{tcbraster}
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, con-

sectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut pu-
rus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac,
adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu
libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
id, vulputate a, magna. Donec
vehicula augue eu neque. Pel-
lentesque habitant morbi tristique
senectus et netus et malesuada
fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris
ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhon-
cus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibu-
lum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasel- Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer
lus eu tellus sit amet tortor gravida adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut,
placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a,
magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pel-
Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices lentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et
bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi

netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus
dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pulvinar sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla
ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor
at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auc- gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus
elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dic-
tor semper nulla. Donec varius orci in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent
eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean
tum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellen-
eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue

tesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames
faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem.
eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis,

pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auc- Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tel-
lus sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in,
tor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices
diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, malesuada eu, pul-
vinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor semper nulla. Donec
dignissim rutrum.
sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend,
orci dignissim rutrum. sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollici- With a title

tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin
lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus
tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan biben- libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus.
dum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat
metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi.
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis
natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes,
dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ali- nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla
quam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus
turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris. luctus mauris.
411
! See Section 22.6 on page 445 for more elaborate methods to create new commands.
\newtcboxfit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Creates a new macro \hnamei based on \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 . Basically, \newtcboxfit oper-
ates like \newcommand. The new macro \hnamei optionally takes hnumberi+1 arguments,
where hdefaulti is the default value for the optional first argument. The hoptionsi are given
to the underlying tcboxfit. The hinit optionsi allow setting up automatic numbering, see
\newtcboxfit{\mybox}{colback=red!5!white, This is my
colframe=red!75!black,width=4cm,
own box.
height=1.5cm,halign=center}
\mybox{This is my own box.}\par This is my own

\mybox{This is my own box with more text box with more
to be written.} text to be written.
Second box
First box
with more text
\newtcboxfit{\mybox}[2]{colback=red!5!white,
Third box with text
boxsep=1mm,left=0mm,right=0mm,top=0mm,
bottom=0mm,halign=center,valign=center,
nobeforeafter,width=#1,height=#2}
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing
elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing
\mybox{2.5cm}{1cm}{First box}%
vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam
arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate
a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
\mybox{2.5cm}{1cm}{Second box with more text}\\ habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada
fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra
\mybox{5cm}{2cm}{Third box with text}\\ metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna
fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet tortor
\mybox{5cm}{3cm}{\lipsum[1]}
gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis in, pretium
quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel leo
ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla,
malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur
auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis
nibh mi, congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis,
diam. Duis eget orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
% \usepackage{lipsum} Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod so-

dales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc-
\newtcboxfit{\mybox}[2][]{colback=red!5!white, tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero,

pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tel-
lus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan
bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vi-
width=#2,height=#2/3*2,#1}
et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur
\mybox[colback=yellow]{5cm}% ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pel-
{\lipsum[2]} lentesque cursus luctus mauris.
\renewtcboxfit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}[hnumberi][hdefaulti]{hoptionsi}
Operates like \newtcboxfit, but based on \renewcommand instead of \newcommand. An
existing macro is redefined.
\tcbfontsize{hfactori}
Selects a font size inside a tcolorbox which is scaled with the given hfactori relative to
\tcbfitdim.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black} Very tiny,
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit basedim=10pt] Small,
{\tcbfontsize{0.25} Very tiny,}\\ Normal,

{\tcbfontsize{0.5} Small,}\\
{\tcbfontsize{1} Normal,}\\
Large,
{\tcbfontsize{2} Large,}\\
{\tcbfontsize{4} Huge.}
\end{tcolorbox}
Huge.
412
The font size for the content of a box with fixed width and fixed height can be adjusted auto-
matically. This is called the fitbox capture mode. Note that the fit control algorithm constructs
a series of versions for the box and selects the ’best’. Therefore, the compilation time is quite
longer than for a normal box. The algorithm will fail, if a different selected font size does not
change the overall size of the box content. The \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 macro uses this algorithm by
default.
!
The fit control keys are only applicable to unbreakable boxes without a lower part. The
box content should not change counters.
/tcb/fit (style, initially unset)

Sets the /tcb/captureÕ P. 94 mode to fitbox, i. e. enables the font size adjustment algo-
rithm. Thereby, a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 acts like \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 where the given hbox contenti
is fitted to the width and height of the box. Therefore, the box has to have a fixed height.
If no fixed height is given, a square box is constructed. The font dimension \tcbfitdim
can also be used to adjust the margins of the box since a box with a tiny font may not need
large margins. The number of constructed boxes is saved to the macro \tcbfitsteps for
analysis.
\newtcolorbox{fitting}[2][]{fit,height=#2,boxsep=1pt,valign=center,opacityupper=0.5,
top=0.4\tcbfitdim,bottom=0.4\tcbfitdim,left=0.75\tcbfitdim,right=0.75\tcbfitdim,
enhanced,watermark text={\tcbfitsteps},colframe=blue!75!black,colback=white,#1}
\begin{fitting}{4cm}
\lipsum[1]
\end{fitting}
\lipsum[2]
\end{fitting}
\lipsum[3]
\end{fitting}
77
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus
libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat ligula
aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa.
Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur
ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
9
Nulla malesuada porttitor diam. Donec felis erat, congue non, volutpat at, tincidunt tristique, libero. Vivamus viverra fermentum felis. Donec nonummy pellentesque ante. Phasellus
adipiscing semper elit. Proin fermentum massa ac quam. Sed diam turpis, molestie vitae, placerat a, molestie nec, leo. Maecenas lacinia. Nam ipsum ligula, eleifend at, accumsan
nec, suscipit a, ipsum. Morbi blandit ligula feugiat magna. Nunc eleifend consequat lorem. Sed lacinia nulla vitae enim. Pellentesque tincidunt purus vel magna. Integer non enim.
Praesent euismod nunc eu purus. Donec bibendum quam in tellus. Nullam cursus pulvinar lectus. Donec et mi. Nam vulputate metus eu enim. Vestibulum pellentesque felis eu
massa.
413
/tcb/fit to=hwidthi and hheighti (style, initially unset)
Shortcut for using /tcb/fitÕ P. 413 and setting the hwidthi and hheighti values separately.
This box con-
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to=3cm and 2cm] tent is fitted
This box content is fitted to the given to the given
dimensions. dimensions.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/fit to height=hheighti (style, initially unset)

Shortcut for using /tcb/fitÕ P. 413 and setting the hheighti value separately.
This box content is fitted to
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to height=2cm] the given height.
This box content is fitted to the given
height.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/fit basedim=hlengthi (no default, initially 10pt)

Sets the starting font dimension for the font size adjustment algorithm to hlengthi. The
algorithm never enlarges this dimension.
Too few words for
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to=4cm and 2cm] the box.
Too few words for the box.
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to=4cm and 2cm, Enough words

fit basedim=50pt]
Enough words for the box. for the box.
\end{tcolorbox}
/tcb/fit skip=hreal valuei (no default, initially 1.2)

Sets the skip value of the selected font to hreal valuei times \tcbfitdim.
adipiscing elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut,
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,
placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a,
colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pel-
lentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm} et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis eges-
tas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhon-
cus sem. Nulla et lectus vestibulum urna
fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus sit amet
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to=5cm and 4cm,
tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est,
iaculis in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc.
fit skip=1.0 ]
Praesent eget sem vel leo ultrices bibendum.
Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, male-
suada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Cur-
\lipsum[1] abitur auctor semper nulla. Donec varius orci
eget risus. Duis nibh mi, congue eu, accum-
\end{tcolorbox} san eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget
414
/tcb/fit fontsize macros (style, initially unset)
Redefines the standard LATEX font size macros \tiny, \scriptsize, \footnotesize,
\small, \normalsize, \large, \Large, \LARGE, \huge, and \Huge, to set font sizes relative
to the current \tcbfitdim. Note that the display skip values for mathematical formulas
are respected by the redefined macros.
This text is not

% \usepackage{lipsum} adapted:
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white, Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sol-
licitudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo.
colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm, Nam lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ul-
tricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed ac-
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm} cumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vi-
tae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl
hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec
ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque pe-
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to height=4cm] natibus et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur
ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ul-
{\Large\bfseries This text is lamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus
luctus mauris.
not adapted:\par}
\lipsum[2]
This text is adapted:
\end{tcolorbox} Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales,
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit to height=4cm, vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tor-
fit fontsize macros ]

{\Large\bfseries This text is adapted:\par} Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
\lipsum[2] a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et mag-
\end{tcolorbox} nis dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus
luctus mauris.
\tcbset{colback=red!5!white,
colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm,
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm}
\let\realHuge=\Huge
The relative relative font size macros are
also usable without the fit algorithm.
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit basedim=7pt,
fontupper=\normalsize, Adapted Huge —
fit fontsize macros]
The relative relative font size macros Original Huge
are also usable without the
\textit{fit} algorithm.\par
{\Huge Adapted Huge} ---
{\realHuge Original Huge}
\end{tcolorbox}
Adapted title
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod so-
\tcbset{size=fbox,colback=red!5!white, tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero,
colframe=red!75!black} pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et,
tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accum-
san bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna,
\tcboxfit[height=5cm, vitae ornare odio metus a mi. Morbi
fit fontsize macros, ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
fonttitle=\normalsize\bfseries, pendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pel-
lentesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque pe-
title=Adapted title] natibus et magnis dis parturient montes,
{\lipsum[2]} nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tin-
cidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibu-
lum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus
mauris.
415
/tcb/fit height plus=hdimensioni (no default, initially 0pt)
The box is allowed to enlarge the fixed height up to the given hdimensioni, before a font
size fit is applied. An optional /tcb/fit width plus is tried after the height adaption.
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,width=3cm,height=3cm,nobeforeafter}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit,fit height plus=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit,fit height plus=1cm]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a,

euismod sodales, sollicitudin
non justo. Nam lacus libero,
This is a tcolor- This is a tcolor-

pretium at, lobortis vitae,
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euis- ultricies et, tellus. Donec
mod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi.
aliquet, tortor sed accumsan
box. box.
Morbi auctor lorem non justo.
Nam lacus libero, pretium at, bibendum, erat ligula aliquet
lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. magna, vitae ornare odio me-
Donec aliquet, tortor sed accum- tus a mi. Morbi ac orci et
san bibendum, erat ligula aliquet nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
magna, vitae ornare odio metus a pendisse ut massa. Cras nec
mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit ante. Pellentesque a nulla.
mollis. Suspendisse ut massa.
Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a
Cum sociis natoque penati-
nulla. Cum sociis natoque pe- bus et magnis dis parturi-
natibus et magnis dis parturient ent montes, nascetur ridiculus
montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ul- Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum
lamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pel- turpis. Pellentesque cursus
lentesque cursus luctus mauris.
luctus mauris.
/tcb/fit width plus=hdimensioni (no default, initially 0pt)

The box is allowed to enlarge the fixed width up to the given hdimensioni, before a font
size fit is applied. An optional /tcb/fit height plus is tried before the width adaption.
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,width=3cm,height=3cm,nobeforeafter}
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit,fit width plus=1cm]
\end{tcolorbox}
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit,fit width plus=1cm]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}
This is a tcolor- This is a tcolor- Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euis-

mod sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi.
box. box.
Morbi auctor lorem non justo.
tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero,
Nam lacus libero, pretium at,
lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et,
Donec aliquet, tortor sed accum- tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed ac-
san bibendum, erat ligula aliquet cumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet
magna, vitae ornare odio metus a magna, vitae ornare odio metus a mi.
mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis.
mollis. Suspendisse ut massa.
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante.
Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a
nulla. Cum sociis natoque pe- Pellentesque a nulla. Cum sociis na-
natibus et magnis dis parturient toque penatibus et magnis dis parturi-
montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. ent montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ali-
Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ul- quam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper
lamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pel- vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus
lentesque cursus luctus mauris.
luctus mauris.
416
Typically but not necessarily, the optional title of a tcolorbox is not part of the fit
operation. If a /tcb/fit width plus is applied, the title is also adapted to the new
! width. If counters are increased inside the title text, they may be increased more than
one time. To avoid this, you are encouraged to use /tcb/phantomÕ P. 98 or /tcb/step and
labelÕ P. 98 to set counters or use automatic numbering, see Subsection 5.1 from page 108.
/tcb/fit width from=hmini to hmaxi (style, no default)

Sets the box width to hmini and allows the width to grow up to hmaxi.
right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,height=4cm}
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit,width=\linewidth/2]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}\par
\begin{tcolorbox}[fit width from=\linewidth/2 to \linewidth]
\lipsum[2]
\end{tcolorbox}\par
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollici-

tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam
lacus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et,
tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan biben-
dum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare odio
metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis.
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis
dis parturient montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ali-
quam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcorper vestibu-
lum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod sodales, sollicitudin vel,

wisi. Morbi auctor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero, pretium
at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed
accumsan bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare
odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. Sus-
pendisse ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellentesque a nulla. Cum
sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes,
nascetur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullam-
corper vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque cursus luctus mauris.
417
/tcb/fit height from=hmini to hmaxi (style, no default)
Sets the box height to hmini and allows the height to grow up to hmaxi.
\newtcolorbox{mybox}{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm,top=1mm,
bottom=1mm,right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,width=4cm,nobeforeafter,
fit height from=1cm to 8cm}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}
\lipsum[2]
\end{mybox}
Nam dui ligula, fringilla

a, euismod sodales, sollici-
tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc-
tor lorem non justo. Nam
lacus libero, pretium at,
lobortis vitae, ultricies et,
tellus. Donec aliquet, tor-
tor sed accumsan biben-
dum, erat ligula aliquet
magna, vitae ornare odio
metus a mi. Morbi ac
orci et nisl hendrerit mol-
lis. Suspendisse ut massa.
Cras nec ante. Pellentesque
a nulla. Cum sociis natoque
penatibus et magnis dis
parturient montes, nascetur
ridiculus mus. Aliquam tin-
cidunt urna. Nulla ullam-
This is a tcolorbox. This corper vestibulum turpis.
This is a tcolorbox. is a tcolorbox. This is a Pellentesque cursus luctus
tcolorbox. mauris.
418
/tcb/fit algorithm=hnamei (no default, initially fontsize)
Sets the algorithm for the fitting process after optionally width and height are adapted.
Feasible values for hnamei are:
• fontsize (initial): The algorithm is a bisection method that adapts the font size until
certain stop conditions are fulfilled. This is the most time-consuming method but it is
robust and gives pleasant results.
! is not scaled down. The aspect ratio is fully garanteed.

The used font has to be freely scalable for this method! Other content than text
N 2014-10-29 • fontsize*: First, the fontsize algorithm is applied. If the font was scaled down and
the resulting height is too small, the box is squeezed to fit the area.
! may be slightly rescaled. The aspect ratio cannot be fully garanteed.

• areasize: The algorithm calculates the area size for the text without scaling the font.
The text box is shaped for the needed aspect ratio in one or two steps. Finally, it is
scaled down with a standard \resizebox macro.
! aspect ratio cannot be fully garanteed.

The used font has not to be scalable. Every box content is scaled down. The
N 2014-10-29 • areasize*: The areasize algorithm is applied, but if the content was scaled down
and the resulting height is too small, the box is squeezed to fit the area.
! aspect ratio cannot be fully garanteed.

The used font has not to be scalable. Every box content is scaled down. The
• hybrid: First, this algorithm estimates the needed font size in one or two steps. Then
an areasize fitting as above is a applied.

N 2014-10-29 • hybrid*: First, this algorithm estimates the needed font size in one or two steps. Then
an areasize* fitting as above is a applied.

• squeeze: The text box is brutally scaled down to fit.
! The aspect ratio is very likely to be horrible. You should not use this method
for final documents.
419
\newtcboxfit{mybox}[1]{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm,top=1mm,
bottom=1mm,right=1mm,boxsep=0mm,width=3.5cm,height=7cm,nobeforeafter,
before upper=\textcolor{blue}{\rule{5mm}{5mm}}\ ,
enhanced,watermark text={\tcbfitsteps},
fonttitle=\bfseries,adjusted title=#1,fit algorithm=#1}
\mybox{fontsize}{\lipsum[2]}\hfill
\mybox{hybrid}{\lipsum[2]}\hfill
\mybox{areasize}{\lipsum[2]}\hfill
\mybox{squeeze}{\lipsum[2]}
Quality \dotfill versus \dotfill Speed
fontsize hybrid areasize squeeze

Nam dui ligula,
Nam dui ligula, Nam dui ligula, fringilla
Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod
fringilla a, euismod so- a, euismod sodales, sollici- sodales, sollicitudin
fringilla a, euismod sodales,
sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi dales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. tudin vel, wisi. Morbi auc- vel, wisi. Morbi
auctor lorem non
auctor lorem non justo. Morbi auctor lorem non tor lorem non justo. Nam la- justo. Nam lacus
cus libero, pretium at, lobor-
6421
Nam lacus libero, pretium justo. Nam lacus libero, libero, pretium at,
at, lobortis vitae, ultricies pretium at, lobortis vitae, tis vitae, ultricies et, tel- lobortis vitae, ul-
tricies et, tellus.
et, tellus. Donec aliquet, ultricies et, tellus. Donec lus. Donec aliquet, tor- Donec aliquet, tortor
tortor sed accumsan biben- aliquet, tortor sed accum- tor sed accumsan bibendum, sed accumsan biben-
dum, erat ligula aliquet san bibendum, erat ligula erat ligula aliquet magna, vi- dum, erat ligula
aliquet magna, vitae
magna, vitae ornare odio aliquet magna, vitae ornare tae ornare odio metus a mi. ornare odio metus
metus a mi. Morbi ac orci odio metus a mi. Morbi ac Morbi ac orci et nisl hen- a mi. Morbi ac orci
et nisl hendrerit mollis. orci et nisl hendrerit mollis. drerit mollis. Suspendisse ut
et nisl hendrerit
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras mollis. Suspendisse
Suspendisse ut massa. Cras massa. Cras nec ante. Pel- ut massa. Cras nec
nec ante. Pellentesque a nec ante. Pellentesque a ante. Pellentesque
lentesque a nulla. Cum sociis
nulla. Cum sociis natoque nulla. Cum sociis natoque a nulla. Cum sociis
penatibus et magnis dis penatibus et magnis dis natoque penatibus et magnis natoque penatibus et
parturient montes, nascetur parturient montes, nasce- dis parturient montes, nasce- magnis dis parturi-
ridiculus mus. Aliquam tur ridiculus mus. Aliquam tur ridiculus mus. Aliquam ridiculus mus. Ali-
tincidunt urna. Nulla tincidunt urna. Nulla tincidunt urna. Nulla ul- quam tincidunt
ullamcorper vestibulum ullamcorper vestibulum lamcorper vestibulum turpis. urna. Nulla ullam-
corper vestibulum
turpis. Pellentesque cursus turpis. Pellentesque cursus Pellentesque cursus luctus turpis. Pellentesque
luctus mauris. luctus mauris. mauris. cursus luctus mauris.
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . versus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed
\newtcboxfit{mybox}[2]{colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,left=1mm,top=1mm,
size=tight,width=7.2cm,height=5cm,nobeforeafter,
before upper=\textcolor{blue}{\rule{5mm}{5mm}}\ ,
enhanced,fonttitle=\bfseries,adjusted title=#2,fit algorithm=#1}
\mybox{hybrid}{hybrid (possible gap at end)}{\lipsum[1]}\hfill

\mybox{hybrid*}{hybrid* (no gap but possibly squeezed)}{\lipsum[1]}
hybrid (possible gap at end) hybrid* (no gap but possibly squeezed)
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit.
Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae,
felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero,
nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, magna. Donec
vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tris- vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tris-
tique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. tique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas.
Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem. Nulla et
lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus lectus vestibulum urna fringilla ultrices. Phasellus eu tellus
sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis sit amet tortor gravida placerat. Integer sapien est, iaculis
in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel in, pretium quis, viverra ac, nunc. Praesent eget sem vel
leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla, leo ultrices bibendum. Aenean faucibus. Morbi dolor nulla,
malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor malesuada eu, pulvinar at, mollis ac, nulla. Curabitur auctor
semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi, semper nulla. Donec varius orci eget risus. Duis nibh mi,
congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget congue eu, accumsan eleifend, sagittis quis, diam. Duis eget
orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum. orci sit amet orci dignissim rutrum.
420
The following options set control parameters for the fit algorithm. Mainly, they apply
! to the fontsize variant, see /tcb/fit algorithmÕ P. 419 . The options should be seen as
experimental and are likely to change in future versions, if necessary.
/tcb/fit maxstep=hnumberi (no default, initially 20)

Sets the maximal step size for the font size adjustment algorithm. In normal situations,
the algorithm stops before reaching the intial value of 20 steps. If the box content does not
shrink, this value prevents an endless loop.
/tcb/fit maxfontdiff=hdimensioni (no default, initially 0.1pt)
The algorithm stops, if the font size is determined within a deviation of hdimensioni.
/tcb/fit maxfontdiffgap=hdimensioni (no default, initially 1pt)
The algorithm stops, if the number of lines is determined and the font size is determined
within a deviation of hdimensioni.
/tcb/fit maxwidthdiff=hdimensioni (no default, initially 1pt)
The algorithm stops, if the (optionally) flexible box width is determined within a deviation
of hdimensioni.
/tcb/fit maxwidthdiffgap=hdimensioni (no default, initially 10pt)
The algorithm stops, if the number of lines is determined and the (optionally) flexible box
width is determined within a deviation of hdimensioni.
/tcb/fit warning=hvaluei (no default, initially off)
Typically, the fit control algorithm constructs several auxiliary boxes to determine the
optimal one. If not switched off, the construction of the auxiliary boxes may produce many
hbox warnings. This option key changes the \hbadness value.
• off: Most of ’Underfull \hbox’ and ’Overfull \hbox’ warnings are switched off
(including the ones for the finally used box).
• on: All warnings for all auxiliary boxes are displayed.
• final: Only warnings for the finally used box are displayed. Note that an additional
box has to be contructed for theses messages.
421
21 Library hooks
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{hooks}
For the skin related options, the library skins has to be loaded separately.
LIB
21.1 Concept of Hooks
A hook is a placeholder in some LATEX code where additional code can be added. For example,
the LATEX macro \AtBeginDocument adds code to a hook which is placed at the beginning of
every document.
Several option keys of tcolorbox allow providing some code which is added to specific places
of a colored box. For example, /tcb/before upperÕ P. 65 places code before the content of the
upper part. A following usage of this key overwrites any prior settings.
The library hooks extends /tcb/before upperÕ P. 65 and several more existing keys to ’hook-
LIB
able’ versions, e. g. /tcb/before upper appÕ P. 424 and /tcb/before upper preÕ P. 424 . The
’hookable’ keys don’t overwrite prior settings but either append or prepend the newly given
code to the existing code.
The general naming convention (with some small exceptions) is:
• hoption keyi app: works like hoption keyi but appends its code to the existing code.
• hoption keyi pre: works like hoption keyi but prepends its code to the existing code.
If the original hoption keyi is used (again), all code will be overwritten. Therefore, the order of
the option key usage is crucial.
422
\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\raggedleft\arraybackslash}X}% see tabularx
coltitle=black,center title,
tabularx={X||Y|Y|Y|Y||Y},% this sets 'before upper' and 'after upper'
before upper app={Group & One & Two & Three & Four & Sum\\\hline\hline} }
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My table]
Red & 1000.00 & 2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 10000.00\\\hline
Green & 2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 5000.00 & 14000.00\\\hline
Blue & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 5000.00 & 6000.00 & 18000.00\\\hline\hline
Sum & 6000.00 & 9000.00 & 12000.00 & 15000.00 & 42000.00
\end{tcolorbox}
My table
Red 1000.00 2000.00 3000.00 4000.00 10000.00
Green 2000.00 3000.00 4000.00 5000.00 14000.00
Blue 3000.00 4000.00 5000.00 6000.00 18000.00
Sum 6000.00 9000.00 12000.00 15000.00 42000.00
423
21.2 Box Content Additions
The following option keys extend the options given in Subsection 4.11 from page 64.
/tcb/before title app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/before titleÕ P. 64 after the color and font settings and
before the content of the title.
/tcb/before title pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/before titleÕ P. 64 after the color and font settings
and before the content of the title.
/tcb/after title app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/after titleÕ P. 64 after the content of the title.
/tcb/after title pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/after titleÕ P. 64 after the content of the title.
/tcb/before upper app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/before upper Õ P. 65 after the color and font settings and
before the content of the upper part.
/tcb/before upper pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/before upperÕ P. 65 after the color and font settings
and before the content of the upper part.
/tcb/after upper app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/after upper Õ P. 65 after the content of the upper part.
/tcb/after upper pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/after upperÕ P. 65 after the content of the upper part.
% \tcbuselibrary{theorems}
\tcbset{ams align,% this sets 'before upper' and 'after upper'
colback=yellow!10!white,colframe=red!50!black,
before upper app={\frac{2}{\sqrt{2}}&=\sqrt{2}.\\},
after upper pre={\\\sin\left(\frac{\pi}{2}\right)&=1.},
}
\begin{tcolorbox}
\end{tcolorbox}
2 √
√ = 2. (22)
2
X
∞
1
= ∞. (23)
n
n=1
Z
1 3
x2 dx = x + c. (24)
3

π
sin = 1. (25)
2
424
/tcb/before lower app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/before lowerÕ P. 66 after the color and font settings and
before the content of the lower part.
/tcb/before lower pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/before lowerÕ P. 66 after the color and font settings
and before the content of the lower part.
/tcb/after lower app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/after lowerÕ P. 66 after the content of the lower part.
/tcb/after lower pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/after lowerÕ P. 66 after the content of the lower part.
21.3 Embedding into the Surroundings
The ’hookable’ versions are usable inside the document. In the preamble, they can
! only be used after explicit setting of /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 or by e. g.
/tcb/parskipÕ P. 78 .
/tcb/before app=hcodei (no default)

Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 before the colored box.
/tcb/before pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 before the colored box.
/tcb/after app=hcodei (no default)
Appends the given hcodei to /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 after the colored box.
/tcb/after pre=hcodei (no default)
Prepends the given hcodei to /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 after the colored box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,before app={The box follows:\\[4pt]},

after app={This is the end.}]
\end{tcolorbox}
The box follows:

My title
This is the end.
425
21.4 Overlays
/tcb/overlay app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 .
% \usetikzlibrary{patterns} % preamble
\tcbset{frogbox/.style={enhanced,colback=green!10,colframe=green!65!black,
enlarge top by=5.5mm,
overlay={\foreach \x in {2cm,3.5cm} {
\begin{scope}[shift={([xshift=\x]frame.north west)}]
\path[draw=green!65!black,fill=green!10,line width=1mm] (0,0) arc (0:180:5mm);
\path[fill=black] (-0.2,0) arc (0:180:1mm);
\end{scope}}}]}}
\tcbset{ribbon/.style={overlay app={%
\path[fill=blue!75!white,draw=blue,double=white!85!blue,
preaction={opacity=0.6,fill=blue!75!white},
line width=0.1mm,double distance=0.2mm,
pattern=fivepointed stars,pattern color=white!75!blue]
([xshift=-0.2mm,yshift=-1.02cm]frame.north east)
-- ++(-1,1) -- ++(-0.5,0) -- ++(1.5,-1.5) -- cycle;}}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[frogbox,title=My title]
\end{tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[frogbox,ribbon,title=My title]
This is a \textbf{tcolorbox}.\par
Here, we apply a second overlay.
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
My title
Here, we apply a second overlay.
/tcb/overlay pre=hgraphical codei (no default)

Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlayÕ P. 71 .
/tcb/overlay unbroken app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay unbrokenÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay unbroken pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay unbrokenÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay first app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay firstÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay first pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay firstÕ P. 72 .
426
/tcb/overlay middle app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay middleÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay middle pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay middleÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay last app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay lastÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay lastÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay broken app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay brokenÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay broken pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay brokenÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay unbroken and first app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay unbroken and firstÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay unbroken and first pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay unbroken and firstÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay middle and last app=hgraphical codei (no default)

Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay middle and lastÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay middle and last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay middle and lastÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay unbroken and last app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay unbroken and lastÕ P. 72 .
/tcb/overlay unbroken and last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay unbroken and lastÕ P. 72 .
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/overlay first and middle app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay first and middleÕ P. 72 .
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/overlay first and middle pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/overlay first and middleÕ P. 72 .
427
21.5 Watermarks
! watermarks
Watermarks are special overlays. The hooks library allows the combination of several
LIB
and overlays.
/tcb/watermark text app=htexti (no default)

Appends a /tcb/watermark textÕ P. 165 to the colored box.
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title,watermark graphics=Basilica_5.png,

watermark opacity=0.25,
watermark text app=Basilica,watermark color=Navy
]
\lipsum[1-2]
\tcblower
This example uses a public domain picture from\\
\url{http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Basilica_5.png}
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
Basilica
This example uses a public domain picture from

http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Basilica_5.png
/tcb/watermark text pre=htexti (no default)

Prepends a /tcb/watermark textÕ P. 165 to the colored box.
/tcb/watermark text app on=hparti is htexti (no default)
Appends a /tcb/watermark text onÕ P. 165 the named hparti of a break sequence.
/tcb/watermark text pre on=hparti is htexti (no default)
Prepends a /tcb/watermark text onÕ P. 165 the named hparti of a break sequence.
428
/tcb/watermark graphics app=hfile namei (no default)
Appends a /tcb/watermark graphicsÕ P. 166 referenced by hfile namei to the colored box.
/tcb/watermark graphics pre=hfile namei (no default)
Prepends a /tcb/watermark graphicsÕ P. 166 referenced by hfile namei to the colored box.
/tcb/watermark graphics app on=hparti is hfile namei (no default)
Appends a /tcb/watermark graphics onÕ P. 166 the named hparti of a break sequence.
The picture is referenced by hfile namei.
/tcb/watermark graphics pre on=hparti is hfile namei (no default)
Prepends a /tcb/watermark graphics onÕ P. 166 the named hparti of a break sequence.
The picture is referenced by hfile namei.
/tcb/watermark tikz app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends a /tcb/watermark tikzÕ P. 167 with the given tikz hgraphical codei to the colored
box.
/tcb/watermark tikz pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends a /tcb/watermark tikzÕ P. 167 with the given tikz hgraphical codei to the colored
box.
% \usepackage{tikz}
watermark color=Navy,watermark opacity=0.25,
smiley/.style={watermark tikz pre={%
\draw[line width=1mm,red] (215:5mm) arc (215:325:5mm);}}}
\begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced,title=My title, watermark text=Watermark,

smiley]
\lipsum[1-2]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
Watermark
/tcb/watermark tikz app on=hparti is hgraphical codei (no default)

Appends a /tcb/watermark tikz onÕ P. 167 the named hparti of a break sequence.
/tcb/watermark tikz pre on=hparti is hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends a /tcb/watermark tikz onÕ P. 167 the named hparti of a break sequence.
429
21.6 Underlays
The following option keys extend the options given in Section 10.8 on page 195. There are no
app type keys since underlays are stackable by default.
/tcb/underlay pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlayÕ P. 195 .
/tcb/underlay unbroken pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay unbrokenÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay first pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay firstÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay middle pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay middleÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay lastÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay boxed title pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay boxed titleÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay broken pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay brokenÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay unbroken and first pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay unbroken and first P. 196 .
Õ
/tcb/underlay middle and last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)

Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay middle and lastÕ P. 196 .
/tcb/underlay unbroken and last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay unbroken and lastÕ P. 196 .
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/underlay first and middle pre=hgraphical codei (no default)

Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/underlay first and middleÕ P. 196 .
430
21.7 Finishes
app type keys since finishes are stackable by default.
/tcb/finish pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finishÕ P. 197 .
/tcb/finish unbroken pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish unbrokenÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish first pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish firstÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish middle pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish middleÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish lastÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish broken pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish brokenÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish unbroken and first pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish unbroken and firstÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish middle and last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish middle and lastÕ P. 198 .
/tcb/finish unbroken and last pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish unbroken and lastÕ P. 198 .
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/finish first and middle pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/finish first and middle Õ P. 198 .
21.8 Skin Code
/tcb/frame code app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/frame codeÕ P. 138 .
/tcb/frame code pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/frame codeÕ P. 138 .
/tcb/interior titled code app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/interior titled codeÕ P. 138 .
431
\begin{tcolorbox}[title=My title,enhanced,colframe=Navy,
frame code app={\draw[yellow,line width=1cm] (
frame.south west)--(frame.north east);},
interior titled code app={\draw[red,line width=1cm]
(frame.north west)--(frame.south east);},
]
\lipsum[1]
\end{tcolorbox}
My title
/tcb/interior titled code pre=hgraphical codei (no default)

Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/interior titled codeÕ P. 138 .
/tcb/interior code app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/interior codeÕ P. 139 .
/tcb/interior code pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/interior codeÕ P. 139 .
/tcb/segmentation code app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/segmentation codeÕ P. 139 .
/tcb/segmentation code pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/segmentation codeÕ P. 139 .
/tcb/title code app=hgraphical codei (no default)
Appends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/title codeÕ P. 140 .
/tcb/title code pre=hgraphical codei (no default)
Prepends the given hgraphical codei to /tcb/title codeÕ P. 140 .
432
21.9 Extras
app type keys since extras are stackable by default.
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extrasÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras unbroken pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras unbrokenÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras first pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras firstÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras middle pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras middleÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras last pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras lastÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras broken pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras brokenÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras unbroken and first pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras unbroken and firstÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras middle and last pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras middle and lastÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras unbroken and last pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras unbroken and lastÕ P. 371 .
N 2015-07-16 /tcb/extras first and middle pre={hoptionsi} (no default)
Prepends the given hoptionsi to /tcb/extras first and middleÕ P. 371 .
433
22 Library xparse
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{xparse}
This also loads the package xparse [13].

The purpose of this library is to give comfortable access to the powerful document command
production with xparse for tcolorbox. See the xparse package documentation [13] for details
about the argument hspecificationi used in this section.
22.1 Option Keys
/tcb/verbatim (style, no value)

Sets options for a verbatim style \tcboxÕ P. 14 . Since the indented boxes may contain
only very few words, the dimensions are made smaller and /tcb/nobeforeafterÕ P. 78 and
/tcb/tcbox raise baseÕ P. 96 are set.
\DeclareTotalTCBox{\myverb}{ v }{verbatim,
colframe=red!75!black,colupper=blue}{#1}
\textbf is a \LaTeX command.
\myverb{\textbf} is a \myverb{\LaTeX} command.
/tcb/IfNoValueTF={hargumenti}{htrue optionsi}{hfalse optionsi} (no default)

Wraps the \IfNoValueTF command of xparse for option setting. If the hargumenti has no
value, the htrue optionsi are set. Otherwise, the hfalse optionsi are set.
\DeclareTColorBox{mybox}{ o }{colframe=red!75!black,
IfNoValueTF={#1}{colback=red!5!white}{enhanced,interior style image=#1}}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[goldshade.png]
\end{mybox}
434
/tcb/IfValueTF={hargumenti}{htrue optionsi}{hfalse optionsi} (no default)
Wraps the \IfValueTF command of xparse for option setting. If the hargumenti has a
value, the htrue optionsi are set. Otherwise, the hfalse optionsi are set.
\DeclareTColorBox{mybox}{ o }{colframe=red!75!black,colback=red!5!white,
IfValueTF={#1}{title={\flqq #1\frqq},fonttitle=\bfseries}{}}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[My title]
\end{mybox}
«My title»
/tcb/IfBooleanTF={hargumenti}{htrue optionsi}{hfalse optionsi} (no default)

Wraps the \IfBooleanTF command of xparse for option setting. If the hargumenti is
\BooleanTue, the htrue optionsi are set. If the hargumenti is \BooleanFalse, the hfalse
optionsi are set.
\DeclareTColorBox{mybox}{ s }{colframe=red!75!black,
IfBooleanTF={#1}{colback=yellow!50!red}{colback=red!5!white}}
\begin{mybox}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}*
\end{mybox}
435
22.2 Producing tcolorbox Environments and Commands
\DeclareTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
Basically, \DeclareTColorBox operates like \DeclareDocumentEnvironment. This means,
the new environment hnamei is constructed with the given argument hspecificationi. The
hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
Note that /tcb/savedelimiterÕ P. 26 is set to the given hnamei automatically.
The hinit optionsi allow setting up automatic numbering, see Section 5 from page 108.
The new environment is always created, irrespective of an already existing environment
with the same name.
\DeclareTColorBox[use counter from=pabox]{mybox}{ O{red} m d"" !O{} }
{enhanced,colframe=#1!75!black,colback=#1!5!white,
fonttitle=\bfseries,title={\thetcbcounter~#2},
IfValueTF={#3}{watermark text={#3}}{},#4}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[blue]{My title}
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[green]{My title}"My Watermark"

\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[yellow]{My title}[colbacktitle=yellow!50!white,coltitle=black]
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[purple]{My title}"All together"[coltitle=yellow]

\end{mybox}
22.1 My title
22.2 My title
22.3 My title
This is a tcolorbox. My Watermark

22.4 My title
22.5 My title
This is a tcolorbox. All together
436
\NewTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTColorBoxÕ P. 436 , but based on \NewDocumentEnvironment instead
of \DeclareDocumentEnvironment. An error is issued if hnamei has already been defined.
\RenewTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTColorBoxÕ P. 436 , but based on \RenewDocumentEnvironment in-
stead of \DeclareDocumentEnvironment. An existing environment is redefined.
\ProvideTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTColorBoxÕ P. 436 , but based on \ProvideDocumentEnvironment
instead of \DeclareDocumentEnvironment. The environment hnamei is only created if it
is not already defined.
437
\DeclareTotalTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Creates a new command \hnamei based on tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . In contrast to
\DeclareTColorBox Õ P. 436 , also the hcontenti of the tcolorbox is specified.
Basically, \DeclareTotalTColorBox operates like \DeclareDocumentCommand. This
means, the new command \hnamei is constructed with the given argument hspecificationi.
The hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcolorboxÕ P. 12 which is filled with the specified
hcontenti.
The new command is always created, irrespective of an already existing command with the
same name.
\DeclareTotalTColorBox{\diabox}{ O{} v m }
{ bicolor,nobeforeafter,equal height group=diabox,width=5.7cm,
fonttitle=\bfseries\ttfamily,adjusted title={#2},center title,
colframe=blue!20!black,leftupper=0mm,rightupper=0mm,colback=black!75!white,#1}
{ \tikz\path[fill zoom image={#2}] (0,0) rectangle (\linewidth,4cm);%
\tcblower#3}
\diabox{blueshade.png}{Created with |GIMP|.\\\url{http://www.gimp.org}}

\diabox{goldshade.png}{Created with |GIMP|.\\\url{http://www.gimp.org}}
blueshade.png goldshade.png
Created with GIMP. Created with GIMP.

http://www.gimp.org http://www.gimp.org
\NewTotalTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTColorBox, but based on \NewDocumentCommand instead of
\DeclareDocumentCommand. An error is issued if \hnamei has already been defined.
\RenewTotalTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTColorBox, but based on \RenewDocumentCommand instead of
\DeclareDocumentCommand. An existing command is redefined.
\ProvideTotalTColorBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTColorBox, but based on \ProvideDocumentCommand instead
of \DeclareDocumentCommand. The command \hnamei is only created if it is not already
defined.
438
22.3 Producing tcbox Commands
\DeclareTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Creates a new command \hnamei based on \tcboxÕ P. 14 . Basically, \DeclareTCBox op-
erates like \DeclareDocumentCommand. This means, the new command \hnamei is con-
structed with the given argument hspecificationi. The hoptionsi are given to the underlying
\tcboxÕ P. 14 .
same name.
\DeclareTCBox[use counter from=pabox]{\mybox}{ s m s }
{ nobeforeafter,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,
title={#2 (Box \thetcbcounter)},fonttitle=\bfseries,
IfBooleanTF={#1}{enhanced,drop shadow}{},
IfBooleanTF={#3}{colbacktitle=red!50!white}{} }
\mybox{Bird}{This is my first box.}

\hfill
\mybox*{Tree}{This is my second box.}
\par\bigskip
\mybox{Bike}*{This is my third box.}
\hfill
\mybox*{City}*{This is my fourth box.}
Bird (Box 22.6) Tree (Box 22.7)
This is my first box. This is my second box.
Bike (Box 22.8) City (Box 22.9)
This is my third box. This is my fourth box.
\NewTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBox, but based on \NewDocumentCommand instead of
\RenewTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBox, but based on \RenewDocumentCommand instead of
\ProvideTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBox, but based on \ProvideDocumentCommand instead of
\DeclareDocumentCommand. The command \hnamei is only created if it is not already
defined.
439
\DeclareTotalTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Creates a new command \hnamei based on \tcboxÕ P. 14 . In contrast to
\DeclareTCBox Õ P. 439 , also the hcontenti of the tcbox is specified.
Basically, \DeclareTotalTCBox operates like \DeclareDocumentCommand. This means,
the new command \hnamei is constructed with the given argument hspecificationi. The
hoptionsi are given to the underlying \tcboxÕ P. 14 which is filled with the specified
hcontenti.
same name.
\DeclareTotalTCBox{\myverb}{ O{red} v !O{} }
{ fontupper=\ttfamily,nobeforeafter,tcbox raise base,arc=0pt,outer arc=0pt,
top=0pt,bottom=0pt,left=0mm,right=0mm,
leftrule=0pt,rightrule=0pt,toprule=0.3mm,bottomrule=0.3mm,boxsep=0.5mm,
colback=#1!10!white,colframe=#1!50!black,#3}{#2}
To set a word \textbf{bold} in \myverb{\LaTeX}, use

\myverb[green]{\textbf{bold}}. Alternatively, write
\myverb[yellow]{{\bfseries bold}}.
In \myverb[blue]{\LaTeX}[enhanced,fuzzy halo], other font settings are
done in the same way, e.\,g. \myverb{\textit}, \myverb{\itshape}\\
or \myverb[brown]{\texttt}, \myverb[brown]{\ttfamily}.
To set a word bold in \LaTeX , use \textbf{bold} . Alternatively, write {\bfseries bold} . In
\LaTeX , other font settings are done in the same way, e. g. \textit , \itshape
or \texttt , \ttfamily .
The next example uses \lstinline from the listings package to typeset the verbatim
content.
% \usepackage{listings} or \tcbuselibrary{listings}
\DeclareTotalTCBox{\commandbox}{ s v }
{verbatim,colupper=white,colback=black!75!white,colframe=black}
{\IfBooleanTF{#1}{\textcolor{red}{\ttfamily\bfseries > }}{}%
\lstinline[language=command.com,keywordstyle=\color{blue!35!white}\bfseries]^#2^}
\commandbox*{cd "My Documents"} changes to directory \commandbox{My Documents}.
\commandbox*{dir /A} lists the directory content.
\commandbox*{copy example.txt d:\target} copies \commandbox{example.txt} to

\commandbox{d:\target}.
> cd "My␣Documents" changes to directory My Documents .

> dir /A lists the directory content.
> copy example.txt d:\target copies example.txt to d:\target .
440
\NewTotalTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTCBoxÕ P. 440 , but based on \NewDocumentCommand instead of
\RenewTotalTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTCBoxÕ P. 440 , but based on \RenewDocumentCommand instead
of \DeclareDocumentCommand. An existing command is redefined.
\ProvideTotalTCBox[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTCBoxÕ P. 440 , but based on \ProvideDocumentCommand in-
stead of \DeclareDocumentCommand. The command \hnamei is only created if it is not
already defined.
\tcboxverb[hoptionsi]{hverbatim box contenti}
Creates a colored box based on \tcboxÕ P. 14 which is fitted to the width of the given
hverbatim box contenti. The underlying \tcboxÕ P. 14 is styled with /tcb/verbatimÕ P. 434
plus the given hoptionsi. The difference to \tcboxÕ P. 14 is that the hverbatim box contenti
is interpreted verbatim. Therefore, \tcboxverb acts similar to \verb.
\tcboxverb{\LaTeX}, \tcboxverb[colback=blue!10!white,colupper=blue]{\LaTeX},
\tcboxverb[blank,fuzzy halo]{\LaTeX}, \tcboxverb[beamer]{\LaTeX},
\tcboxverb[enhanced,skin=enhancedmiddle jigsaw,colframe=red]{\LaTeX}.
\LaTeX , \LaTeX , \LaTeX, \LaTeX , \LaTeX .
441
22.4 Producing tcblisting Environments
! Besides xparse , the following commands also need the listings library to be included.
LIB
LIB
\DeclareTCBListing[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on tcblistingÕ P. 299 .
Basically, \DeclareTCBListing operates like \DeclareDocumentEnvironment. This
means, the new environment hnamei is constructed with the given argument hspecificationi.
The hoptionsi are given to the underlying tcblistingÕ P. 299 .
The new environment is always created, irrespective of an already existing environment
with the same name.
\DeclareTCBListing{mybox}{ s O{} m }{%
IfBooleanTF={#1} Listing Box
{listing side text}
{text side listing}, This is my This is my
title=#3,#2} LATEX box. \LaTeX\ box.
\begin{mybox}{Listing Box}
This is my
Listing Box
\LaTeX\ box.
\end{mybox}
\bigskip This is my This is my
\LaTeX\ box. LATEX box.
\begin{mybox}*{Listing Box}
This is my
\LaTeX\ box. Listing Box
\end{mybox}
\bigskip This is my This is my
LATEX box. \LaTeX\ box.
\begin{mybox}[colback=yellow]
{Listing Box}
This is my
\LaTeX\ box.
\end{mybox}
\NewTCBListing[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBListing, but based on \NewDocumentEnvironment instead of
\DeclareDocumentEnvironment. An error is issued if hnamei has already been defined.
\RenewTCBListing[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBListing, but based on \RenewDocumentEnvironment instead of
\DeclareDocumentEnvironment. An existing environment is redefined.
\ProvideTCBListing[hinit optionsi]{hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBListing, but based on \ProvideDocumentEnvironment instead
of \DeclareDocumentEnvironment. The environment hnamei is only created if it is not
already defined.
442
With date of 2018-05-12, the xparse [13] package changed the argument collection process.
Now, spaces are ignored which leads to a serious change for listing environments ending
with an optional argument like O{}. The former behaviour of respecting spaces can be
preserved by adding a «!». Note that the following code uses !O{} now.
! • For older xparse versions, the following code is correct when using O{}.
• For xparse of 2018-05-12, only the first two examples of the following code using
O{} are really «good» – all others do not work.
• For xparse of 2018-05-12, the following code is correct when using !O{}.
• In the future, xparse may return to the old behaviour for environments.
Caveats of using an environment ending with an optional argument
\DeclareTCBListing{mybox}{ !O{} }{listing only,#1}
\begin{mybox}[colframe=red]
\good
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[colframe=red]\good\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}
\good
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox} \good\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}\bad!\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}
[\good]
\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox} [\good]\end{mybox}
\begin{mybox}[\bad!]\end{mybox}
443
22.5 Producing tcbinputlisting Commands
! The following commands need the listings library to be included.
LIB
\DeclareTCBInputListing[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Creates a new command \hnamei based on \tcbinputlistingÕ P. 301 . Basically,
\DeclareTCBInputListing operates like \DeclareDocumentCommand. This means, the new
command \hnamei is constructed with the given argument hspecificationi. The hoptionsi
are given to the underlying \tcbinputlistingÕ P. 301 .
same name.
\DeclareTCBInputListing[use counter from=pabox]{\mylisting}{ O{} O{red} m }{%
listing file={#3},title=Listing~\thetcbcounter,
colback=#2!5!white,colframe=#2!50!black,colbacktitle=#2!75!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,listing only,#1}

[blue]{\jobname.tcbtemp}
Listing 22.10

\DeclareTCBInputListing[use counter from=pabox]{\mylisting}{ O{}
O{red} m }{%
listing file={#3},title=Listing~\thetcbcounter,
colback=#2!5!white,colframe=#2!50!black,colbacktitle=#2!75!black,
fonttitle=\bfseries,listing only,#1}

[blue]{\jobname.tcbtemp}
\NewTCBInputListing[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBInputListing, but based on \NewDocumentCommand instead of
\RenewTCBInputListing[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBInputListing, but based on \RenewDocumentCommand instead
of \DeclareDocumentCommand. An existing command is redefined.
\ProvideTCBInputListing[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBInputListing, but based on \ProvideDocumentCommand instead
defined.
444
22.6 Producing tboxfit Commands
! The following commands need the fitting library to be included.
LIB
\DeclareTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Creates a new command \hnamei based on \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 . Basically, \DeclareTCBoxFit
operates like \DeclareDocumentCommand. This means, the new command \hnamei is con-
structed with the given argument hspecificationi. The hoptionsi are given to the underlying
\tcboxfitÕ P. 411 .
same name.

tor lorem non justo. Nam lacus libero,
pretium at, lobortis vitae, ultricies et, tel-
lus. Donec aliquet, tortor sed accumsan
% \usepackage{lipsum} bibendum, erat ligula aliquet magna, vi-
\DeclareTCBoxFit{\mybox}{ O{} m !o } a nulla. Cum sociis natoque penatibus
et magnis dis parturient montes, nascetur
{colback=red!5!white, ridiculus mus. Aliquam tincidunt urna.
Nulla ullamcorper vestibulum turpis. Pel-
colframe=red!75!black, lentesque cursus luctus mauris.
width=#2,height=#2/3*2,
IfValueTF={#3}{height=#3}{}, Nam dui ligula, fringilla a, euismod
#1} sodales, sollicitudin vel, wisi. Morbi
auctor lorem non justo. Nam la-
cus libero, pretium at, lobortis vitae,
ultricies et, tellus. Donec aliquet,
\mybox[colback=yellow]{5cm}% tortor sed accumsan bibendum, erat
ligula aliquet magna, vitae ornare
{\lipsum[2]} odio metus a mi. Morbi ac orci et
nisl hendrerit mollis. Suspendisse
ut massa. Cras nec ante. Pellen-
\mybox[colback=yellow]{5cm}[4cm]{\lipsum[2]} tesque a nulla. Cum sociis natoque

penatibus et magnis dis parturient
montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. Ali-
quam tincidunt urna. Nulla ullamcor-
per vestibulum turpis. Pellentesque
cursus luctus mauris.
\NewTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBoxFit, but based on \NewDocumentCommand instead of
\RenewTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBoxFit, but based on \RenewDocumentCommand instead of
\ProvideTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}
Operates like \DeclareTCBoxFit, but based on \ProvideDocumentCommand instead of
\DeclareDocumentCommand. The command \hnamei is only created if it is not already
defined.
445
\DeclareTotalTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Creates a new command \hnamei based on \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 . In contrast to
\DeclareTCBoxFit Õ P. 445 , also the hcontenti of the tcboxfit is specified.
Basically, \DeclareTotalTCBoxFit operates like \DeclareDocumentCommand. This means,
the new command \hnamei is constructed with the given argument hspecificationi. The
hoptionsi are given to the underlying \tcboxfitÕ P. 411 which is filled with the specified
hcontenti.
same name.
\DeclareTotalTCBoxFit{\multibox}{ O{} m O{10} m }

{nobeforeafter,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,width=#2,height=#2/3*2,
valign=center,#1}
{ \foreach \n in {1,...,#3} { #4} }
\multibox{5cm}{I shall not repeat.}

\multibox[colframe=blue!75!white]{5cm}[20]{I shall not repeat.}\\
\multibox[colback=yellow,height=5cm]{14cm}[100]{I shall not repeat.}
I shall not repeat. I shall I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
not repeat. I shall not re- I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
peat. I shall not repeat. I I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
shall not repeat. I shall not I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
repeat. I shall not repeat. I I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
shall not repeat. I shall not I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I
shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I
shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat. I shall not repeat.
\NewTotalTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTCBoxFit, but based on \NewDocumentCommand instead of
\RenewTotalTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTCBoxFit, but based on \RenewDocumentCommand instead of
\ProvideTotalTCBoxFit[hinit optionsi]{\hnamei}{hspecificationi}{hoptionsi}{hcontenti}
Operates like \DeclareTotalTCBoxFit, but based on \ProvideDocumentCommand instead
defined.
446
23 Library external
LIB
\tcbuselibrary{external}
The purpose of this library is to support externalization of document snippets like graphics or
boxes which can be compiled stand-alone. These snippets are written to external files, compiled
and the resulting pdf files are included to the main document as images. The whole procedure
saves compilation time, if such a snippet is costly to compile but needs to compile just once or
very seldom.
There are very good alternatives to this library. One should consider the standalone package
or the TikZ externalization library instead. The external library is something in between
LIB
and can be seen as poor man variant of the TikZ externalization library.
The main differences between TikZ externalization and external are:
LIB
• TikZ external compiles the whole original document in a sophisticated way while
external uses only the preamble or a part of the preamble of the original document.
LIB
• TikZ external can automatically externalize all tikzpicture environments while

external externalizes marked snippets only.
LIB
• Code snippets to be externalized by external are not restricted to tikzpicture envi-

LIB
ronments. But these snippets have to be stand-alone without dependencies to the rest of
the document.
Why should somebody use external instead of the more powerful TikZ external? One
LIB
reason could be compilation speed, but the main reason for creating the library at all was that
TikZ external tends to choke on complicated documents where the sophisticated mechanism
stumbles. Since external does not use the original document body for compilation, this
LIB
cannot happen.
Source snippets are compiled, if their md5 checksum has changed. They are not compiled
!
automatically, if option settings are changed or anything outside the snippet is changed.
Use /tcb/external/force remakeÕ P. 448 to force compilation in this case or simply delete
the externalized pdf oder md5 files.
To use the externalization options, the compiler has to be called with the -shell-escape
! permission to authorize potentially dangerous system calls. Be warned that this is a
security risk.
447
23.1 Preparation of a Document for Externalization
The preamble of the main document has to contain the \tcbEXTERNALIZE command. Without
this command, no externalization operation will be executed.
N 2015-03-11 \tcbEXTERNALIZE
It is mandatory for externalization that this command is used once in the preamble of the
main document. Every setting before \tcbEXTERNALIZE will also be used for compiling
an external snippet. Every setting after \tcbEXTERNALIZE will be ignored for compiling
an external snippet. Place this command right before \begin{document}, if you are not
absolutely sure about another place.
The main document has to look like the following:
\documentclass[a4paper]{book}% for example

\usepackage{...}% anything
% ...
% Tpyically, all or the very most settings for the document.
\tcbEXTERNALIZE% Typically, just before \begin{document}
% Additional settings which are ABSOLUTELY irrelevant for the

% stand-alone snippets.
%
\begin{document}
% The document.
% This also contains the marked snippets for externalization.
\end{document}
During compilation, a /tcb/external/runner file is dynamically created (several times). This

is the actual main file for compiling an externalized snippet.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/runner=hfile namei (no default, initially \jobname_run.tex)
Sets the hfile namei for dynamically created runner file. This is the actual main file for a
document snippet. Typically, the initial setting is not needed to be changed.
\tcbset{external/runner=myrunner.tex}
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/prefix=htexti (no default, initially external/)

The htexti is prefixed to any /tcb/external/name Õ P. 450 for an externalization snippet.
The initial setting implies saving all snippets into an external/ subdirectory. Depending
on the operation system, the subdirectory may have to be created manually once.
% Use a 'real' prefix instead of writing into a subdirectory:

\tcbset{external/prefix=ext_}
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/externalize=true|false (default true, initially true)

If set to true, the marked snippets are compiled if necessary. If set to false, the marked
snippets are not compiled but included as text. /tcb/external/externalize can only be
used after \tcbEXTERNALIZE.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/force remake=true|false (default true, initially false)
If set to true, the marked snippets are always compiled. If set to true, the marked snippets
are compiled only if necessary. The necessity is given, if a compiled pdf file is missing or
the md5 checksum of the source snippet has changed.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/! (style)
Shortcut for setting /tcb/external/force remake to true.
U 2017-02-24
N 2015-06-12 /tcb/external/- (style)

Shortcut for setting /tcb/external/externalize to false.
U 2017-02-24
448
23.2 Marking Externalization Snippets
N 2015-03-11 \begin{tcbexternal}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}
\end{tcbexternal}
Marks the environment content as a snippet for externalization. Typically, the content is a
tikzpicture or something similar. It is important to note that the snippet should not have
any dependencies with the rest of the document, e.g. referencing counters or setting counters
is not possible. The hnamei is automatically prefixed with /tcb/external/prefix. In
combination, this has to be a unique file name. It is advised to not use spaces or umlauts
for the name. The hoptionsi are keys from the /tcb/external/ key tree.
\begin{tcbexternal}{example_tikzpicture}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{tcbexternal}
If a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 is externalized, one should use /tcb/nobeforeafterÕ P. 78 for the box.

Indention and distances to the text before and after have to be given separately outside the
tcbexternal environment.
\noindent%
\begin{tcbexternal}[minipage]{example_tcolorbox}
\begin{tcolorbox}[nobeforeafter,enhanced,
fonttitle=\bfseries,title=Externalized Box,
colframe=red!50!black,drop fuzzy shadow,
interior style={fill overzoom image=goldshade.png}]
This complete tcolorbox is externalized. One cannot use numbered
boxes here. Note the \texttt{minipage} option which tells the
current line width to the external snippet.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{tcbexternal}
Externalized Box
This complete tcolorbox is externalized. One cannot use numbered boxes here. Note the
minipage option which tells the current line width to the external snippet.
449
\begin{tcolorbox}[nobeforeafter,enhanced,
fonttitle=\bfseries,title=Externalized Box,
colframe=blue!50!black,
interior style={fill overzoom image=blueshade.png}]
\begin{tcbexternal}[minipage]{example_tcolorbox2}
\color{white}%
The interior of the tcolorbox is externalized.
One can use numbered boxes without problems.
Note that the text color has to be set for the text manually
since it is converted into an image.
\end{tcbexternal}
\end{tcolorbox}
Externalized Box
The interior of the tcolorbox is externalized. One can use numbered boxes without problems.
Note that the text color has to be set for the text manually since it is converted into an image.
\begin{tcbexternal}[minipage]{example_tabularx}
\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\raggedleft\arraybackslash}X}%
\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{|l||Y|Y|Y|Y||Y|}\hline
Group & One & Two & Three & Four & Sum\\\hline\hline
Red & 1000.00 & 2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 10000.00\\\hline
Green & 2000.00 & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 5000.00 & 14000.00\\\hline
Blue & 3000.00 & 4000.00 & 5000.00 & 6000.00 & 18000.00\\\hline\hline
Sum & 6000.00 & 9000.00 & 12000.00 & 15000.00 & 42000.00\\\hline
\end{tabularx}
\end{tcbexternal}

Red 1000.00 2000.00 3000.00 4000.00 10000.00
Green 2000.00 3000.00 4000.00 5000.00 14000.00
Blue 3000.00 4000.00 5000.00 6000.00 18000.00
Sum 6000.00 9000.00 12000.00 15000.00 42000.00
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/name=hnamei (no default, initially unnamed)

The hnamei is automatically prefixed with /tcb/external/prefixÕ P. 448 . In combination,
this has to be a unique file name for externalization. Typically, this key is not used directly
but is set indirectly as mandatory parameter, see tcbexternalÕ P. 449 .
450
N 2015-03-11 \begin{extcolorbox}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}[htcolorbox optionsi]
\end{extcolorbox}
This is an externalized version of tcolorboxÕ P. 12 created using
\newtcbexternalizetcolorboxÕ P. 456 :
\newtcbexternalizetcolorbox{extcolorbox}{tcolorbox}{}{}
hoptionsi and hnamei are given to the underlying tcbexternalÕ P. 449 environment, while
htcolorbox optionsi are given to tcolorboxÕ P. 12 .
Note that you should not redefine /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 inside
! the htcolorbox optionsi, since the externalized version would not be identical to the
non-externalized otherwise.
\begin{extcolorbox}[minipage]{example_extcolorbox}
[ enhanced,colframe=red!50!black,colback=yellow!10,
fonttitle=\bfseries,drop fuzzy shadow,
title=My external box ]
This box is completely externalized.
\begin{tcolorbox}[colframe=blue,colback=blue!5,before skip=6pt]
Inner box.
\end{tcolorbox}
\end{extcolorbox}
My external box
This box is completely externalized.
Inner box.
• Never externalize numbered boxes.
!
• Never externalize boxes which contain references to other things, e.g. using \ref
or \cite.
• Never externalize breakable boxes.
451
N 2015-03-11 \begin{extikzpicture}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}[htikz optionsi]
\end{extikzpicture}
This is an externalized version of tikzpicture created using
\newtcbexternalizeenvironmentÕ P. 456 :
\newtcbexternalizeenvironment{extikzpicture}{tikzpicture}{}{}{}
hoptionsi and hnamei are given to the underlying tcbexternalÕ P. 449 environment, while
htikz optionsi are given to tikzpicture.
\begin{center}
\begin{extikzpicture}[
preamble={\usepackage{pgfplots}}, % add package for external graph
input source on error=false, % do not load source on error
]{example_pgfplots}
\pgfplotsset{width=12cm}
\begin{axis}[3d box=background,grid=major,
xlabel=$x$, ylabel=$y$, zlabel=$z$, view/h=40,
mesh/interior colormap name=hot,
colormap/blackwhite,
z buffer=sort,domain=0:90,y domain=0:60,
zmin=0,zmax=2,z post scale=1.2,
]
\addplot3[surf,mesh/interior colormap name=blackwhite,
colormap/hot,] ( {cos(x)},{sin(x)}, {2*sin(y)} );
\addplot3[surf] ( {2*cos(x)*cos(y)},{2*sin(x)*cos(y)}, {2*sin(y)} );
\end{axis}
\end{extikzpicture}
\end{center}
1.5
1
z
0.5
0 2
0
1.5
0.5
1 1
x 1.5 0.5 y
2 0
452
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/externalize listing=hnamei (style, no default)
The text content of a tcblistingÕ P. 299 is externalized with the given hnamei. Note that
the listing part is not externalized.
\begin{tcblisting}{externalize listing=example_listing,
bicolor,colback=yellow!10,colframe=yellow!50!black,
colbacklower=white,center lower}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
\end{tcblisting}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\end{tikzpicture}
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/externalize listing!=hnamei (style, no default)

Combination of /tcb/externalize listing and /tcb/external/force remakeÕ P. 448 .
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/externalize example=hnamei (style, no default)
The text content of a dispExample* Õ P. 464 is externalized with the given hnamei. Note
that the listing part is not externalized.
\begin{dispExample*}{sidebyside,externalize example=example_example}
\tikz\path[shading=ball,
ball color=red] circle (7mm);
\end{dispExample*}
\tikz\path[shading=ball,
ball color=red] circle (7mm);
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/externalize example!=hnamei (style, no default)

Combination of /tcb/externalize example and /tcb/external/force remakeÕ P. 448 .
453
23.3 Customization
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/safety=hlengthi (no default, initially 2mm)

The snippet box is surrounded with a safety border with a thickness of hlengthi. This
border is automatically trimmed during picture inclusion. The reason for this mechanism
is to catch box content which extrudes over the bounding box. For example, shadows of a
tcolorbox are painted outside the bounding box and would be lost otherwise.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/environment=henvi (no default, initially unset)
Surrounds the exported snippet text with an environment henvi without parameters. Note
that this option is ignored for /tcb/externalize listingÕ P. 453 .
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/external/environment with percent=true|false (default true, initially true)
If set to true, the \begin and \end code of /tcb/external/environment is appended with
a percent sign. For verbatim environments, this option typically has to be se to false.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/minipage=hlengthi (default \linewidth, initially unset)
Surrounds the exported snippet text with a minipage. The optional hlengthi parameter sets
the width of the minipage. Note that the default width is the current line width of the
main document. See tcbexternalÕ P. 449 for examples. Note that this option is ignored for
/tcb/externalize listingÕ P. 453 .
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/plain (no value, initially set)
Removes any text which was set to surround the snippet. This removes the setting of
/tcb/external/minipage, but is independent of /tcb/external/safety.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/compiler=htexti (no default, initially pdflatex)
Sets the name of the compiler for the snippets. Note that this compiler has to support
the \pdfmdfivesum primitive e.g. using the pdftexcmds package. This should work for
xelatex and lualatex.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/runs=hnumberi (no default, initially 1)
Sets the number of compiler runs for the snippet.
\begin{tcbexternal}[minipage,runs=2]{example_raster}
\begin{tcbitemize}[raster equal height,
\tcbitem One
\tcbitem \Huge Two
\tcbitem Three
\tcbitem Four
\end{tcbitemize}
\end{tcbexternal}
One
Two
Three Four
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/input source on error=true|false (default true, initially true)

If set to true, the source code of the snippet is loaded instead of the failed pdf picture.
Typically, this will lead to an error stop at the faulty place of the source and such helps
detecting the cause. If the source input compiles without error, the document setup may
be incorrect, see Section 23.1 on page 448. Maybe, the external/ subdirectory has to be
created manually in this case, see /tcb/external/prefixÕ P. 448 .
If the option is set to false, the compilation stops immediately on an error. The log file of
the external snippet has to be consulted for error messages in this case.
454
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/external/preclass=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
The given hcodei is added before the snippet document. Typically, this means before
\documentclass. This is not used for compilation of the main document.
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/external/PassOptionsToPackage={hoptionsi}{hpackagei} (no default, initially unset)
The given hoptionsi are passed to the given hpackagei for the snippet document. This is a
shortcut for using /tcb/external/preclass with \PassOptionsToPackage. This not used
for compilation of the main document.
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/external/PassOptionsToClass={hoptionsi}{hclassi} (no default, initially unset)
The given hoptionsi are passed to the given hclassi for the snippet document. This is a
shortcut for using /tcb/external/preclass with \PassOptionsToClass. This not used
for compilation of the main document.
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/external/clear preclass (no value)
Removes all additional /tcb/external/preclass settings.
N 2015-03-11 /tcb/external/preamble=hcodei (no default, initially unset)
The given hcodei is added to the preamble of the snippet document. This is not used for
compilation of the main document.
N 2015-05-05 /tcb/external/preamble tcbset=hoptionsi (no default, initially unset)
The given hoptionsi are added as parameter for \tcbset Õ P. 13 to the preamble of the snippet
document. This are not used for compilation of the main document.
N 2015-03-16 /tcb/external/clear preamble (no value)
Removes all additional /tcb/external/preamble settings.
N 2015-03-11 \tcbifexternal{htruei}{hfalsei}
Expands to htruei, if executed during snippet compilation, and to hfalsei, if executed dur-
ing main document compilation. This can be used before \tcbEXTERNALIZEÕ P. 448 to give
different setting to snippet and main document.
\tcbifexternal{
\usepackage{onlyforexternal}
}{
\usepackage{onlyformain}
}
455
N 2015-03-11 \newtcbexternalizeenvironment{hnewenvi}{henvi}{hoptionsi}{hbegini}{hendi}
Creates a new environment hnewenvi which is based on tcbexternalÕ P. 449 . This envi-
roment takes at least one optional parameter and one mandatory parameter. These two
parameters are passed to tcbexternalÕ P. 449 . Further, the given hoptionsi are always added
to the option list of tcbexternalÕ P. 449 .
The environment content is externalized and the external snippet is surrounded by an
environment henvi. All further parameters of hnewenvi are given to henvi as parameters.
The included image is prepended by hbegini and appended by hendi.
extikzpictureÕ P. 452 is an example application for \newtcbexternalizeenvironment.
\newtcbexternalizeenvironment{extabular}{tabular}{}{\par\centering}{\par}
\begin{extabular}{example_tabular}{|l|p{6cm}|r|}\hline
A & B & C\\\hline
a & This table is externalized as snippet. Obviously,
this only makes sense for highly complex tables.
& b\\\hline
\end{extabular}
A B C
a This table is externalized as snippet. Ob- b
viously, this only makes sense for highly
complex tables.
N 2015-03-11 \renewtcbexternalizeenvironment{hnewenvi}{henvi}{hoptionsi}{hbegini}{hendi}
Identical to \newtcbexternalizeenvironment, but the environment hnewenvi is created
by \renewenvironment instead of \newenvironment.
N 2015-03-11 \newtcbexternalizetcolorbox{hnewenvi}{henvi}{hoptionsi}{hbegin end optionsi}
Creates a new environment hnewenvi which is based on tcbexternalÕ P. 449 . This envi-
roment takes at least one optional parameter and one mandatory parameter. These two
parameters are passed to tcbexternalÕ P. 449 . Further, the given hoptionsi are always added
to the option list of tcbexternalÕ P. 449 .
The environment content is externalized and the external snippet is surrounded by an
environment henvi. All further parameters of hnewenvi are given to henvi as parameters.
In contrast to \newtcbexternalizeenvironment, the environment henvi is intended
to be based on tcolorboxÕ P. 12 or tcblistingÕ P. 299 .
The hbegin end optionsi are options for settings the space before and after the included im-
age using /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 , /tcb/before skipÕ P. 80 , /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 , or /tcb/after
skipÕ P. 80 .
Use the exact identical values for /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 inside
! hbegin end optionsi as they where used for definition of henvi! Otherwise, externalized
and non-externalized version will have different spacings.
extcolorboxÕ P. 451 is an example application for\newtcbexternalizetcolorbox.

\newtcblisting{myownlisting}[2][]{
enhanced,colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,fonttitle=\bfseries,
colbacktitle=red!50!yellow,before skip=6pt,after skip=6pt,
title={#2},#1}
\newtcbexternalizetcolorbox{exmyownlisting}{myownlisting}{minipage}%
{before skip=6pt,after skip=6pt}% same values as for mylisting
456
\begin{exmyownlisting}{example_mylisting}% <- name for the external file
{My externalized example box}
\end{exmyownlisting}
My externalized example box
This is my LATEX box.
N 2015-03-11 \renewtcbexternalizetcolorbox{hnewenvi}{henvi}{hoptionsi}{hbegin end optionsi}

Identical to \newtcbexternalizetcolorboxÕ P. 456 , but the environment hnewenvi is cre-
ated by \renewenvironment instead of \newenvironment.
N 2016-07-14 \tcbiffileprocess{hconditioni}{hsourcei}{hmd5-filei}{htargeti}{htruei}{hfalsei}
This is a low-level macro which is internally used. The MD5 digest of a hsourcei file is
compared with a stored MD5 digest from an auxiliary hmd5-filei. If they are not equal, the
auxiliary hmd5-filei is updated to store the current MD5 digest. Further,
• if hconditioni equals 0, htruei is executed.
• if hconditioni equals 1:
If the current and stored MD5 digests were different, htruei is executed.
Otherwise, if the htargeti file is not existing, htruei is executed.
Otherwise, if the htargeti file is older than the hmd5-filei, htruei is executed.
Otherwise, hfalsei is executed.
• if hconditioni equals 2, hfalsei is executed.
The intended processing purpose of the htruei code is to produce a htargeti file from the
given hsourcei file.
457
23.4 Troubleshooting and FAQ
• I use the default settings, but the external subdirectory is not created.
Depending on operating system and compiler, an external subdirectory is automatically
created or not. If not, create such a directory manually or add the following to your
document5 :
\ShellEscape{mkdir external}
or
\ShellEscape{mkdir -p external}
If the combination of /tcb/external/prefixÕ P. 448 and chosen snippet name points to

another subdirectory than external, this has to be adapted.
• I use the minted package and I get a cache directory for every externalized
snippet.
To avoid this problem, there are several ways.
– If you do not need minted inside the snippet code, you may use
\usepackage{minted} after \tcbEXTERNALIZEÕ P. 448 or use \tcbifexternalÕ P. 455
to switch minted off for the external code. If minted is already included by another
package, add the following to your preamble:
\tcbset{external/PassOptionsToPackage={draft}{minted}}
– If minted is needed for the snippet code, caching can be switched off by adding the
following to your preamble:
\tcbset{external/PassOptionsToPackage={cache=false}{minted}}
Alternatively, the cachedir option of minted may be used to redirect the cache.
5
The shellesc package is loaded automatically by the library.
458
24 Library documentation
LIB
This library has the single purpose to support LATEX package documentations like this one.
Actually, the visual nature follows the approach from Till Tantau’s pgf [22] documentation.
Typically, this library is assumed to be used in conjunction with the class ltxdoc or alike.
\tcbuselibrary{documentation}
This also loads the library listings , see Section 15 on page 298, the library
LIB skins , see
LIB
N 2014-09-19
Section 10 on page 148, the library xparse , see Section 22 on page 434, and a bunch of
LIB
packages, namely pifont, marvosym, makeidx, marginnote, refcount, and hyperref.
The package makeidx is loaded only, if \printindex is not already defined. Therefore,
! one can include an alternative to makeidx like imakeidx before the library documentation
is used.
! The package marginnote is loaded only, if \marginnote is not already defined.

In contrast to other tcolorbox options, the option settings for documentation are
!
LIB
typically not getting reset by /tcb/resetÕ P. 105 , i.e. they keep their values for embedded
boxes.
! In combination with DocStrip, /tcb/verbatim ignore percent Õ P. 127 may be helpful.
For UTF-8 support load (ignore this when using XeLATEX):
\tcbuselibrary{listingsutf8,documentation}
For minted [12] support, load:
\tcbuselibrary{documentation,minted}
\tcbset{listing engine=minted}
\begin{docCommand}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}{hparametersi}
hcommand descriptioni
\end{docCommand}
Documents a LATEX macro with given hnamei where hnamei is written without back-
slash. The given hoptionsi are set with \tcbsetÕ P. 13 . This macro takes manda-
tory or optional hparametersi. It is automatically indexed and can be referenced with
\refComÕ P. 466 {hnamei}.
\begin{docCommand}{foomakedocSubKey}{\marg{name}\marg{key path}}
Creates a new environment \meta{name} based on \refEnv{docKey} for the
documentation of keys with the given \meta{key path}.
\end{docCommand}
\foomakedocSubKey{hnamei}{hkey pathi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on docKeyÕ P. 461 for the documentation of keys with
the given hkey pathi.
459
\begin{docCommand}[color definition=blue]{foomakedocSubKey*}%
{\marg{name}\marg{key path}}
Creates a new environment \meta{name} based on \refEnv{docKey} for the
documentation of keys with the given \meta{key path}.
\end{docCommand}
\foomakedocSubKey*{hnamei}{hkey pathi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on docKeyÕ P. 461 for the documentation of keys with
the given hkey pathi.
\begin{docCommand*}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}{hparametersi}
hcommand descriptioni
\end{docCommand*}
Identical to docCommandÕ P. 459 , but without index entry.
\begin{docEnvironment}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}{hparametersi}
henvironment descriptioni
\end{docEnvironment}
Documents a LATEX environment with given hnamei. The given hoptionsi are set with
\tcbsetÕ P. 13 . This environment takes mandatory or optional hparametersi. It is automat-
ically indexed and can be referenced with \refEnvÕ P. 466 {hnamei}.
\begin{docEnvironment}{foocolorbox}{\oarg{options}}
This is the main environment to create an accentuated colored text box with
rounded corners and, optionally, two parts.
\begin{foocolorbox}[hoptionsi]
\end{foocolorbox}
This is the main environment to create an accentuated colored text box with rounded corners
and, optionally, two parts.
\begin{docEnvironment}%
[doclang/environment content=My content text]%
{foocolorbox*}{\oarg{options}}
This is the main environment to create an accentuated colored text box with
rounded corners and, optionally, two parts.
\begin{foocolorbox*}[hoptionsi]
hMy content texti
\end{foocolorbox*}
This is the main environment to create an accentuated colored text box with rounded corners
and, optionally, two parts.
\begin{docEnvironment*}[hoptionsi]{hnamei}{hparametersi}
\end{docEnvironment*}
Identical to docEnvironment, but without index entry.
460
U 2014-09-29 \begin{docKey}[hkey pathi][hoptionsi]{hnamei}{hparametersi}{hdescriptioni}
hkey descriptioni
\end{docKey}
Documents a key with given hnamei and an optional hkey pathi. The given hoptionsi
are set with \tcbsetÕ P. 13 . This key takes mandatory or optional hparametersi as value
with a short hdescriptioni. It is automatically indexed and can be referenced with
\refKeyÕ P. 467 {hnamei}.
\begin{docKey}[foo]{footitle}{=\meta{text}}{no default, initially empty}

Creates a heading line with \meta{text} as content.
\end{docKey}
/foo/footitle=htexti (no default, initially empty)

Creates a heading line with htexti as content.
U 2014-09-29 \begin{docKey*}[hkey pathi][hoptionsi]{hnamei}{hparametersi}{hdescriptioni}

hkey descriptioni
\end{docKey*}
Identical to docKey, but without index entry.
\docValue{hnamei}
Documents a value with given hnamei. Typically, this is a value for a key. This value is
automatically indexed.
A feasible value for \refKey{/foo/footitle} is \docValue{foovalue}.
A feasible value for /foo/footitle is foovalue.
\docValue*{hnamei}
Identical to \docValue, but without index entry.
U 2014-10-09 \docAuxCommand{hnamei}
Documents an auxiliary or minor LATEX macro with given hnamei where hnamei is written
without backslash. This macro is automatically indexed.
The macro \docAuxCommand{fooaux} holds some interesting data.
The macro \fooaux holds some interesting data.
U 2014-10-09 \docAuxCommand*{hnamei}
Identical to \docAuxCommand, but without index entry.
\docAuxEnvironment{hnamei}
Documents an auxiliary or minor LATEX environment with given hnamei. This macro is
automatically indexed.
The environment \docAuxEnvironment{fooauxenv} holds some interesting data.
The environment fooauxenv holds some interesting data.
\docAuxEnvironment*[hkey pathi]{hnamei}
Identical to \docAuxEnvironment, but without index entry.
461
\docAuxKey[hkey pathi]{hnamei}
Documents an auxiliary key with given hnamei and an optional hkey pathi. It is automati-
cally indexed.
The key \docAuxKey[foo]{fooaux} holds some interesting data.
The key /foo/fooaux holds some interesting data.
\docAuxKey*[hkey pathi]{hnamei}
Identical to \docAuxKey, but without index entry.
N 2015-01-08 \docCounter{hnamei}
Documents a counter with given hnamei. The counter is automatically indexed.
The counter \docCounter{foocounter} can be used for computation.
The counter foocounter can be used for computation.
N 2015-01-08 \docCounter*{hnamei}
Identical to \docCounter, but without index entry.
N 2015-01-08 \docLength{hnamei}
Documents a counter with given hnamei. The counter is automatically indexed.
The length \docLength{foolength} can be used for computation.
The length \foolength can be used for computation.
N 2015-01-08 \docLength*{hnamei}
Identical to \docLength, but without index entry.
\docColor{hnamei}
Documents a color with given hnamei. The color is automatically indexed.
The color \docColor{foocolor} is available.
The color foocolor is available.
\docColor*{hnamei}
Identical to \docColor, but without index entry.
462
\cs{hnamei}
Macro from ltxdoc [3] to typeset a command word hnamei where the backslash is prefixed.
The library overwrites the original macro.
This is a \cs{foocommand}.
This is a \foocommand.
\meta{htexti}
Macro from doc [8] to typeset a meta htexti. The library overwrites the original macro.
This is a \meta{text}.
This is a htexti.
\marg{htexti}
Macro from ltxdoc [3] to typeset a htexti with curly brackets as a mandatory argument.
This is a mandatory \marg{argument}.
This is a mandatory {hargumenti}.
\oarg{htexti}
Macro from ltxdoc [3] to typeset a htexti with square brackets as an optional argument.
This is an optional \oarg{argument}.
This is an optional [hargumenti].
\brackets{htexti}
Sets the given htexti with curly brackets.
Here we use \brackets{some text}.
Here we use {some text}.
463
U 2014-10-10 \begin{dispExample}
\end{dispExample}
Creates a colored box based on a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . It displays the environment content
as source code in the upper part and as compiled text in the lower part of the box.
The appearance is controlled by /tcb/documentation listing styleÕ P. 469 and the style
/tcb/docexampleÕ P. 469 . It may be changed by redefining this style.
\begin{dispExample}
\end{dispExample}
U 2014-10-10 \begin{dispExample*}{hoptionsi}
\end{dispExample*}
The starred version of dispExample takes tcolorboxÕ P. 12 hoptionsi as parameter. These
hoptionsi are executed after /tcb/docexampleÕ P. 469 .
\begin{dispExample*}{sidebyside}
\end{dispExample*}
464
\begin{dispListing}
\end{dispListing}
Creates a colored box based on a tcolorboxÕ P. 12 . It displays the environment content as
source code. The appearance is controlled by /tcb/documentation listing styleÕ P. 469
and the style /tcb/docexampleÕ P. 469 . It may be changed by redefining this style.
\begin{dispListing}
\end{dispListing}
\begin{dispListing*}{hoptionsi}
\end{dispListing*}
The starred version of dispListing takes tcolorboxÕ P. 12 hoptionsi as parameter. These
hoptionsi are executed after /tcb/docexampleÕ P. 469 .
\begin{dispListing*}{title=My listing}
\end{dispListing*}
My listing
\begin{absquote}
\end{absquote}
Used to typeset an abstract as quoted and small text.
\begin{absquote}
|tcolorbox| provides an environment for colored and framed text boxes with a
heading line. Optionally, such a box can be split in an upper and a lower part.
\end{absquote}
tcolorbox provides an environment for colored and framed text boxes

with a heading line. Optionally, such a box can be split in an upper and
a lower part.
465
\tcbmakedocSubKey{hnamei}{hkey pathi}
Creates a new environment hnamei based on docKeyÕ P. 461 for the documentation of keys
with the given hkey pathi as default. The new environment hnamei takes the same para-
meters as docKeyÕ P. 461 itself. A second starred environment hnamei is also created, which
is identical to hnamei but without index entry.
\tcbmakedocSubKey{docFooKey}{foo}
\begin{docFooKey}{foodummy}{=\meta{nothing}}{no default, initially empty}

Some key.
\end{docFooKey}
\begin{docFooKey*}{foo another dummy}{=\meta{nothing}}{no default, initially empty}

Some key (not indexed).
\end{docFooKey*}
/foo/foodummy=hnothingi (no default, initially empty)

Some key.
/foo/foo another dummy=hnothingi (no default, initially empty)
Some key (not indexed).
\refCom{hnamei}
References a documented LATEX macro with given hnamei where hnamei is written without
backslash. The page reference is suppressed if it links to the same page.
We have created \refCom{foomakedocSubKey} as an example.
We have created \foomakedocSubKeyÕ P. 459 as an example.
\refCom*{hnamei}
References a documented LATEX macro with given hnamei where hnamei is written without
backslash. There is no page reference.
We have created \refCom*{foomakedocSubKey} as an example.
We have created \foomakedocSubKey as an example.
\refEnv{hnamei}
References a documented LATEX environment with given hnamei. The page reference is
suppressed if it links to the same page.
We have created \refEnv{foocolorbox} as an example.
We have created foocolorboxÕ P. 460 as an example.
\refEnv*{hnamei}
References a documented LATEX environment with given hnamei. There is no page reference.
We have created \refEnv*{foocolorbox} as an example.
We have created foocolorbox as an example.
466
\refKey{hnamei}
References a documented key with given hnamei where hnamei is the full path name of the
key. The page reference is suppressed if it links to the same page.
We have created \refKey{/foo/footitle} as an example.
We have created /foo/footitleÕ P. 461 as an example.
\refKey*{hnamei}
References a documented key with given hnamei where hnamei is the full path name of the
key. There is no page reference.
We have created \refKey*{/foo/footitle} as an example.
We have created /foo/footitle as an example.
\refAux{hnamei}
References some auxiliary environment, key, value, or color. The hyperlink color is used,
but there is no real link.
Some pages back, one can see \refAux{/foo/footitle} as an example.
Some pages back, one can see /foo/footitle as an example.
\refAuxcs{hnamei}
References some auxiliary macro hnamei where hnamei is written without backslash. The
hyperlink color is used, but there is no real link.
Some pages back, one can see \refAuxcs{fooaux} as an example.
Some pages back, one can see \fooaux as an example.
\colDef{htexti}
Sets htexti with the command color, see /tcb/color commandÕ P. 471 .
This is my \colDef{text}.
This is my text.
\colOpt{htexti}
Sets htexti with the option color, see /tcb/color optionÕ P. 471 .
This is my \colOpt{text}.
This is my text.
467
N 2014-09-19 \tcbdocmarginnote[hoptionsi]{htexti}
Creates a tcolorbox note with the given htexti inside the margin using the marginnote
package. The style of the tcolorbox is predefined and can be altered by /tcb/doc
marginnoteÕ P. 476 and the given hoptionsi.
Some text\tcbdocmarginnote{Note A}
which is commented by a note inside the margin.
Alternatively to |\tcbdocmarginnote|, you can always use
|\marginnote| with a |tcolorbox| directly.\par
This is further text%
\tcbdocmarginnote[colframe=blue!50!white,colback=blue!5!white]{Note B}
with another note.
Note A Some text which is commented by a note inside the margin. Alternatively to \tcbdocmarginnote,
you can always use \marginnote with a tcolorbox directly.
Note B This is further text with another note.
N 2014-09-19 \tcbdocnew{hdatei}
Auxiliary macro which typesets the /tcb/doclang/newÕ P. 472 text with the given hdatei.
It may be redefined for customization.
\tcbdocnew{1981-10-29}.
New: % Next one is displayed in the margin: New: 1981-10-29.
1978-02-09 \tcbdocmarginnote{\tcbdocnew{1978-02-09}}
N 2014-09-19 \tcbdocupdated{hdatei}
Auxiliary macro which typesets the /tcb/doclang/updatedÕ P. 472 text with the given
hdatei. It may be redefined for customization.
\tcbdocupdated{2014-09-19}. Updated: 2014-09-19.
468
U 2015-03-16 /tcb/docexample (style, no value)
Sets the style for dispExampleÕ P. 464 and dispListingÕ P. 465 with the colors ExampleBack
and ExampleFrame. To change the appearance of the examples, this style can be redefined.
% Predefined style:
\tcbset{
docexample/.style={colframe=ExampleFrame,colback=ExampleBack,
before skip=\medskipamount,after skip=\medskipamount,
fontlower=\footnotesize}
}
/tcb/documentation listing options=hkey listi (no default,

initially style=tcbdocumentation)
Sets the options from the package listings [6]. They are used inside dispExampleÕ P. 464
and dispListingÕ P. 465 to typeset the listings. Note that this is not identical to the key
/tcb/listing optionsÕ P. 305 which is used for ’normal’ listings.
Used for /tcb/listing engineÕ P. 310 =listings only.
/tcb/documentation listing style=hlisting stylei (no default, initially tcbdocumentation)
Abbreviation for documentation listing options={style=...}. This key sets a hstylei
for the listings package, see [6]. Note that this is not identical to the key /tcb/listing
styleÕ P. 305 which is used for ’normal’ listings.
Used for /tcb/listing engineÕ P. 310 =listings only.
/tcb/documentation minted options=hminted stylei (no default,
initially tabsize=2,fontsize=\small)
Sets the options from the package minted [12] which are used during typesetting of the
listing, if used. Note that this is not identical to the key /tcb/minted optionsÕ P. 308
which is used for ’normal’ listings.
Used for /tcb/listing engineÕ P. 310 =minted only.
/tcb/documentation minted style=hkey listi (no default, initially unset)
Sets a hstylei known to Pygments [14] for the package minted [12], if used. Note that this
is not identical to the key /tcb/minted styleÕ P. 309 which is used for ’normal’ listings.
N 2017-04-24 /tcb/documentation minted language=hprogramming languagei (no default, initially latex)
Sets a hprogramming languagei known to Pygments [14] for the package minted [12], if used.
Note that this is not identical to the key /tcb/minted languageÕ P. 308 which is used for
’normal’ listings.
The following two keys are deprecated and without function (v3.50 and above). Use
! /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 and /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 with appropriate values instead. Also see
/tcb/docexample.
U 2015-03-16 /tcb/before example=hmacrosi (no default, initially empty)
deprecated
Sets the hmacrosi which are executed before dispExampleÕ P. 464 and dispListingÕ P. 465
additional to /tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 .
/tcb/after example=hmacrosi (no default, initially empty)
deprecated
Sets the hmacrosi which are executed after dispExample and dispListingÕ P. 465
Õ P. 464
additional to /tcb/afterÕ P. 78 .
469
N 2017-04-25 /tcb/keywords bold=true|false (default true, initially true)
Keyword used in docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 , docCommandÕ P. 459 , etc. are printed boldface (or
not). Since the typewriter font is used, the effect may be invisible with Computer Modern
fonts or similar which do not have a bold variant. Note that references to keywords are not
printed boldface at all.
\LARGE
\docAuxCommand{fooaux}, \refCom{tcbset} \fooaux, \tcbsetÕ P. 13
\tcbset{keywords bold=false}
\docAuxCommand{fooaux}, \refCom{tcbset}
\fooaux, \tcbsetÕ P. 13
N 2015-01-09 /tcb/index command=hmacroi (no default, initially \index)

Replaces the internally used \index macro by the given hmacroi. The hmacroi has to take
one mandatory argument like \index. This option is mutually exclusive with /tcb/index
command name.
\tcbset{index command=\myindexcommand}
N 2015-01-09 /tcb/index command name=hnamei (no default, initially unset)

Replaces the internally used \index macro by \index[hnamei], i.e. \index{...} is re-
placed by \index[hnamei]{...}. This option is intended to be used with imakeidx and
is mutually exclusive with /tcb/index command.
\tcbset{index command name=mydoc}
/tcb/index format=hformati (no default, initially pgf)

Determines the basic hformati of the generated index. Feasible values are:
• pgfsection: The index is formatted like in the pgf documentation (as a section).
• pgfchapter: The index is formatted like in the pgf documentation (as a chapter).
• pgf: Alias for pgfsection.
• doc: The index is assumed to be formatted by doc or ltxdoc. The usage of makeindex
with -s gind.ist is assumed. The package hypdoc has to be loaded before tcolorbox.
• off: The index is not formatted by tcolorbox. Use this, if the index is formatted by
other package like imakeidx.
/tcb/index actual=hcharacteri (no default, initially @)
Sets the character for ’actual’ in automatic indexing.
/tcb/index quote=hcharacteri (no default, initially ")
Sets the character for ’quote’ in automatic indexing.
/tcb/index level=hcharacteri (no default, initially !)
Sets the character for ’level’ in automatic indexing.
/tcb/index default settings (style, no value)
Sets the makeindex default values for /tcb/index actual, /tcb/index quote, and
/tcb/index level.
/tcb/index german settings (style, no value)
Sets the makeindex values recommended for German language texts. This is identical to
setting the following:
\tcbset{index actual={=},index quote={!},index level={>}}
470
/tcb/index annotate=true|false (default true, initially true)
If set to true, the index entries are annotated with short descriptions given by
/tcb/doclang/environmentÕ P. 472 , /tcb/doclang/keyÕ P. 472 , and others.
/tcb/index colorize=true|false (default true, initially false)
If set to true, the index entries colorized according to the color settings given by /tcb/color
environment, /tcb/color key, and others.
/tcb/color command=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by macro definitions.
/tcb/color environment=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by environment definitions.
/tcb/color key=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by key definitions.
/tcb/color value=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by value definitions.
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/color counter=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by counter definitions.
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/color length=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by length definitions.
/tcb/color color=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color used by color definitions.
/tcb/color definition=hcolori (no default, initially Definition)
Sets the highlight color for /tcb/color command, /tcb/color environment, /tcb/color
key, /tcb/color value, /tcb/color counter, /tcb/color length, and /tcb/color
color.
/tcb/color option=hcolori (no default, initially Option)
Sets the color used for optional arguments.
/tcb/color hyperlink=hcolori (no default, initially Hyperlink)
Sets the color for all hyper-links, i. e. all internal and external links.
471
The following keys are provided for language specific settings. The English language is prede-
fined.
/tcb/english language (style, no value)
Sets all language specific settings to English.
/tcb/doclang/color=htexti (no default, initially color)
Text used in the index for colors.
/tcb/doclang/colors=htexti (no default, initially Colors)
Heading text in the index for colors.
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/doclang/counter=htexti (no default, initially counter)
Text used in the index for counters.
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/doclang/counters=htexti (no default, initially Counters)
Heading text in the index for counters.
/tcb/doclang/environment=htexti (no default, initially environment)
Text used in the index for environments.
/tcb/doclang/environments=htexti (no default, initially Environments)
Heading text in the index for environments.
/tcb/doclang/environment content=htexti (no default, initially environment content)
Text used in docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 .
/tcb/doclang/index=htexti (no default, initially Index)
Heading text for the index.
/tcb/doclang/key=htexti (no default, initially key)
Text used in the index for keys.
/tcb/doclang/keys=htexti (no default, initially Keys)
Heading text used in the index for keys.
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/doclang/length=htexti (no default, initially length)
Text used in the index for lengths.
N 2015-01-08 /tcb/doclang/lengths=htexti (no default, initially Lengths)
Heading text in the index for lengths.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/doclang/new=htexti (no default, initially New)
Announcement text for new content.
/tcb/doclang/pageshort=htexti (no default, initially P.)
Short text for page references.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/doclang/updated=htexti (no default, initially Updated)
Announcement text for updated content.
/tcb/doclang/value=htexti (no default, initially value)
Text used in the index for values.
/tcb/doclang/values=htexti (no default, initially Values)
Heading text in the index for values.
472
/tcb/doc left=hlengthi (no default, initially 2em)
Sets the left hand offset of the documentation texts from docCommandÕ P. 459 ,
docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 , docKeyÕ P. 461 , etc, to hlengthi.
\begin{docCommand*}[doc left=2cm,doc left indent=-2cm]{myCommandA}{\marg{argument}}

This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandA} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandA} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandA{hargumenti} (no default, initially 2em)

This is the documentation of \myCommandA which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandA
does some funny things with its hargumenti.
/tcb/doc right=hlengthi (no default, initially 0em)

Sets the right hand offset of the documentation texts from docCommandÕ P. 459 ,
\begin{docCommand*}[doc right=2cm]{myCommandB}{\marg{argument}}
This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandB} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandB} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandB{hargumenti} (no default, initially 0em)

This is the documentation of \myCommandB which takes one hargumenti.
\myCommandB does some funny things with its hargumenti.
/tcb/doc left indent=hlengthi (no default, initially -2em)

Sets the left hand indent of documentation heads from docCommandÕ P. 459 ,
\begin{docCommand*}[doc left indent=2cm]{myCommandC}{\marg{argument}}

This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandC} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandC} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandC{hargumenti} (no default, initially -2em)

This is the documentation of \myCommandC which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandC does some
funny things with its hargumenti.
/tcb/doc right indent=hlengthi (no default, initially 0pt)

Sets the right hand indent of documentation heads from docCommandÕ P. 459 ,
\begin{docCommand*}[doc right indent=-10mm,doc right=10mm,

doc description=test value]{myCommandD}{\marg{argument}}
This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandD} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandD} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandD{hargumenti} (test value)

This is the documentation of \myCommandD which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandD
does some funny things with its hargumenti.
473
The head lines of the main documentation environments docCommandÕ P. 459 ,
docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 , docKeyÕ P. 461 , etc, are set inside tcolorboxes. Options to these
tcolorboxes can be given using the following keys.
/tcb/doc head command=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
Sets hoptionsi for the head line of docCommandÕ P. 459 and docCommand*Õ P. 460 .
\tcbset{doc head command={interior style={fill,left color=red!20!white,

right color=blue!20!white}}}
\begin{docCommand*}{myCommandE}{\marg{argument}}
This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandE} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandE} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandE{hargumenti} (no default, initially empty)

This is the documentation of \myCommandE which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandE does some
/tcb/doc head environment=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)

Sets hoptionsi for the head line of docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 and docEnvironment*Õ P. 460 .
\tcbset{doc head environment={beamer,boxsep=2pt,arc=2pt,colback=green!20!white,

after=\par\smallskip}}
\begin{docEnvironment*}{myEnvironment}{\marg{argument}}
This is the documentation of \refEnv{myEnvironment} which
takes one \meta{argument}.
\end{docEnvironment*}
\begin{myEnvironment}{hargumenti} (no default, initially empty)

\end{myEnvironment}
This is the documentation of myEnvironment which takes one hargumenti.
/tcb/doc head key=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)

Sets hoptionsi for the head line of docKeyÕ P. 461 and docKey*Õ P. 461 .
\tcbset{doc head key={boxsep=4pt,arc=4pt,boxrule=0.6pt,

frame style=fill,interior style=fill,colframe=green!50!black}}
\begin{docKey*}{/foo/myKey}{}{no value}
This is the documentation of \refKey{/foo/myKey}.
\end{docKey*}
/foo/myKey (no value)

This is the documentation of /foo/myKey.
/tcb/doc head=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)

Shortcut for setting the same hoptionsi for /tcb/doc head command, /tcb/doc head
environment, and /tcb/doc head key.
474
The description texts of the main documentation environments docCommandÕ P. 459 ,
docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 , docKeyÕ P. 461 , etc, are set in a compact form without indention
and parskip=0pt. This settings can overruled by using the following keys to insert code before
(or after) the description texts.
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/before doc body command=hcodei (no default, initially empty)
Executes hcodei before the description texts of docCommand Õ P. 459 and docCommand*Õ P. 460 .
\tcbset{before doc body command={%

\setlength{\parindent}{2.5em}%
\setlength{\parskip}{1ex plus 0.75ex minus 0.25ex}%
}}
\begin{docCommand*}{myCommandG}{\marg{argument}}
This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandG} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandG} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandG{hargumenti} (no default, initially empty)

This is the documentation of \myCommandG which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandG does
some funny things with its hargumenti.
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/after doc body command=hcodei (no default, initially empty)

Executes hcodei after the description texts of docCommandÕ P. 459 and docCommand*Õ P. 460 .
\tcbset{after doc body command={%

\hfill\nolinebreak[1]\hspace*{\fill}\textcolor{red}{$\diamondsuit$}%
}}
\begin{docCommand*}{myCommandH}{\marg{argument}}
This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandH} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandH} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandH{hargumenti} (no default, initially empty)

This is the documentation of \myCommandH which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandH does some
funny things with its hargumenti. ♦
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/before doc body environment=hcodei (no default, initially empty)

Executes hcodei before the description texts of docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 and
docEnvironment*Õ P. 460 .
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/after doc body environment=hcodei (no default, initially empty)
Executes hcodei after the description texts of docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 and
docEnvironment*Õ P. 460 .
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/before doc body key=hcodei (no default, initially empty)
Executes hcodei before the description texts of docKey Õ P. 461 and docKey*Õ P. 461 .
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/after doc body key=hcodei (no default, initially empty)
Executes hcodei after the description texts of docKeyÕ P. 461 and docKey*Õ P. 461 .
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/before doc body=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
Shortcut for setting the same hoptionsi for /tcb/before doc body command, /tcb/before
doc body environment, and /tcb/before doc body key.
N 2015-10-09 /tcb/after doc body=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
Shortcut for setting the same hoptionsi for /tcb/after doc body command, /tcb/after
doc body environment, and /tcb/after doc body key.
475
/tcb/doc description=htexti (no default, initially empty)
Sets a (short!) additional description htexti for docCommandÕ P. 459 or docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 .
Such a description is mandatory for docKeyÕ P. 461 .
\begin{docCommand*}[doc description=my description]{myCommandF}{\marg{argument}}

This is the documentation of \refCom{myCommandF} which takes one \meta{argument}.
\refCom{myCommandF} does some funny things with its \meta{argument}.
\end{docCommand*}
\myCommandF{hargumenti} (my description)

This is the documentation of \myCommandF which takes one hargumenti. \myCommandF does some
! long. Linebreaks can be used inside the htexti.

Note that the description htexti may overlap with the text on the left hand side if too
/tcb/doc into index=true|false (default true, initially true)

If set to false, no index entries are written for the main documentation environments. The
same effect is achieved by using e. g. docCommand*Õ P. 460 instead of docCommandÕ P. 459 .
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/doc marginnote=hoptionsi (no default, initially empty)
Sets style hoptionsi for the displayed box of the \tcbdocmarginnoteÕ P. 468 command.
\tcbset{doc marginnote={colframe=blue!50!white,colback=blue!5!white}}%
This is some text\tcbdocmarginnote{Note A}
which is commented by a note inside the margin.
Note A This is some text which is commented by a note inside the margin.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/doc new=hdatei (style, no default)

Adds a a marginnote with a ’New: hdatai’ message at the beginning of the upper box part.
The intended use is inside the option list of docCommandÕ P. 459 , docEnvironmentÕ P. 460 , etc.
\begin{docCommand}[doc new=2000-01-01]{foosomething}{\marg{text}}
Some command for something.
\end{docCommand}
New: \foosomething{htexti} (style, no default)

2000-01-01 Some command for something.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/doc updated=hdatei (style, no default)

Adds a marginnote with a ’Updated: hdatai’ message at the beginning of the upper box
part. See /tcb/doc new.
N 2014-09-19 /tcb/doc new and updated={hnew datei}{hupdate datei} (style, no default)
Adds a marginnote with ’New: hnew datei’ and ’Updated: hupdate datai’ messages at the
beginning of the upper box part. See /tcb/doc new.
24.3 Predefined Colors of the Library
The following colors are predefined. They are used as default colors in some library commands.
Option , Definition , ExampleFrame , ExampleBack , Hyperlink .
476
A Picture Credits
The following pictures were used inside this documentation.

Basilica_5.png lichtspiel.jpg
http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File: Photograph taken by Thomas F. Sturm.

Basilica_5.png
crinklepaper.png pink_marble.png

blueshade.png goldshade.png

477
References
[1] Donald Arseneau. The varwidth package. Sept. 26, 2011.

http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/varwidth/varwidth-doc.pdf.
[2] Peter Breitenlohner. The ε-TEX manual. Version 2. Feb. 1998.
http://mirrors.ctan.org/systems/doc/etex/etex_man.pdf.
[3] David Carlisle. The file ltxdoc.dtx for use with LATEX 2ε . Nov. 11, 2007.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx.
[4] David Carlisle. The tabularx package. Oct. 28, 2014.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/tabularx.pdf.
[5] Toby Cubitt. The cleveref Package. Dec. 28, 2013.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cleveref/cleveref.pdf.
[6] Carsten Heinz, Brooks Moses, and Jobst Hoffmann. The Listings Package. Version 1.6.
June 4, 2015.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/listings/listings.pdf.
[7] Philipp Lehman and Joseph Wright. The etoolbox Package. Aug. 2, 2015.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/etoolbox/etoolbox.pdf.
[8] Frank Mittelbach. The doc and shortvrb Packages. June 30, 2011.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/doc.dtx.
[9] Frank Mittelbach. An environment for multicolumn output. Sept. 30, 2015.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf.
[10] Heiko Oberdiek. The listingsutf8 package. Nov. 10, 2011.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/listingsutf8.pdf.
[11] Heiko Oberdiek. The bookmark package. May 17, 2016.
http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/bookmark.pdf.
[12] Geoffrey M. Poore and Konrad Rudolph. The minted package. Highlighted source code in
LATEX. Sept. 9, 2015.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minted/minted.pdf.
[13] The LATEX3 Project. The xparse Package. Oct. 14, 2015.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/l3packages/xparse.pdf.
[14] Pygments. Python syntax highlighter. 2013.
http://pygments.org/.
[15] Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Oberdiek. Hypertext marks in LATEX: a manual for hyperref.
Nov. 2012.
http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf.
[16] Will Robertson. A couple of things involving environments. May 4, 2014.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/environ/environ.pdf.
[17] Rainer Schöpf, Bernd Raichle, and Chris Rowley. A New Implementation of LATEX’s ver-
batim and verbatim* Environments. Mar. 12, 2001.
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/verbatim.pdf.
[18] Thomas F. Sturm. Mathematik 1 (B.Eng.) Vorlesungs-Skriptum. Neubiberg: Universität
der Bundeswehr München, 2007.
http://www.unibw.de/bw/sturm.
[19] Thomas F. Sturm. Mathematik 2 (B.Eng.) Vorlesungs-Skriptum. Neubiberg: Universität
der Bundeswehr München, 2008.
478
[20] Thomas F. Sturm. Höhere Mathematik: Fortgeschrittene mathematische Methoden
(M.Eng.) Vorlesungs-Skriptum. Neubiberg: Universität der Bundeswehr München, 2010.
[21] Thomas F. Sturm. LATEX – Einführung in das Textsatzsystem. 10th edition. RRZN-
Handbücher. Hannover: Regionales Rechenzentrum für Niedersachsen (RRZN), Mar. 2014.
http://www.rrzn.uni-hannover.de/buch.html?&titel=latex.
[22] Till Tantau. The TikZ and PGF Packages. Manual for version 3.0.1a. Aug. 29, 2015.
http://mirrors.ctan.org/graphics/pgf/base/doc/pgfmanual.pdf.
479
Index
- key, 448 ams nodisplayskip key, 353

! key, 448 ams nodisplayskip lower key, 353
ams nodisplayskip upper key, 353
0 value, 147 arc key, 36
1 value, 147 arc is angular key, 38
2 value, 147 arc is curved key, 38
areasize value, 419
above key, 407 areasize* value, 419
absquote environment, 465 as-is value, 255
add to height key, 55 at key, 408
add to list key, 99 at begin tikz key, 192
add to natural height key, 55 at begin tikz reset key, 192
add to width key, 34 at end tikz key, 192
adjust text key, 18 at end tikz reset key, 192
adjusted title key, 18 attach boxed title to bottom key, 156
adjusted title after break key, 366 attach boxed title to bottom center key,
after key, 78 155
after app key, 425 attach boxed title to bottom left key, 155
after doc body key, 475 attach boxed title to bottom right key,
after doc body command key, 475 155
after doc body environment key, 475 attach boxed title to bottom* key, 156
after doc body key key, 475 attach boxed title to top key, 156
after example key, 469 attach boxed title to top center key, 155
after lower key, 66 attach boxed title to top left key, 155
after lower app key, 425 attach boxed title to top right key, 155
after lower pre key, 425 attach boxed title to top* key, 156
after lower* key, 66 attach title key, 20
after pre key, 425 attach title to upper key, 20
after skip key, 80 auto value, 97
after title key, 64 auto counter key, 108
after title app key, 424 auto limited value, 97
after title pre key, 424 auto outer arc key, 38
after upper key, 65 autoparskip key, 78
after upper app key, 424
after upper pre key, 424 base value, 79
after upper* key, 65 base color key, 269
all key, 10 baseline key, 79
all value, 48, 49, 287, 368, 370 baselineskip value, 368
ams align key, 351 beamer key, 228
ams align lower key, 351 beamer Skin, 228
ams align upper key, 351 beamerfirst Skin, 230
ams align* key, 351 beamerlast Skin, 232
ams align* lower key, 351 beamermiddle Skin, 231
ams align* upper key, 351 bean arc key, 37
ams equation key, 350 before key, 78
ams equation lower key, 350 before app key, 425
ams equation upper key, 350 before doc body key, 475
ams equation* key, 350 before doc body command key, 475
ams equation* lower key, 350 before doc body environment key, 475
ams equation* upper key, 350 before doc body key key, 475
ams gather key, 352 before example key, 469
ams gather lower key, 352 before lower key, 66
ams gather upper key, 352 before lower app key, 425
ams gather* key, 352 before lower pre key, 425
ams gather* lower key, 352 before nobreak key, 81
ams gather* upper key, 352 before pre key, 425
480
before skip key, 80 center key, 85
before title key, 64 center value, 30, 33, 79, 117, 286
before title app key, 424 center lower key, 32
before title pre key, 424 center seam value, 117
before upper key, 65 center title key, 32
before upper app key, 424 center upper key, 32
before upper pre key, 424 change value, 355
beforeafter skip key, 80 change apart value, 355
below key, 407 change break value, 355
between key, 408 change standard value, 354
bicolor key, 219 check odd page key, 101
bicolor Skin, 219 circular arc key, 37
bicolorfirst Skin, 221 clear preamble key, 455
bicolorlast Skin, 223 clear preclass key, 455
bicolormiddle Skin, 222 clip lower key, 176
blank key, 208 clip title key, 175
blanker key, 238 clip upper key, 175
blankest key, 239 clip watermark key, 171
blend before title key, 113 clipped value, 270
blend before title code key, 114 code key, 106
blend into key, 112 colback key, 27
bookmark key, 100 colbacklower key, 220
bookmark* key, 100 colbacktitle key, 27
borderline key, 177 \colDef, 467
borderline east key, 180 colframe key, 27
borderline horizontal key, 181 collower key, 28
borderline north key, 180 colon value, 113
borderline south key, 180 colon hang value, 113
borderline vertical key, 181 \colOpt, 467
borderline west key, 180 color key, 472
both value, 123 color color key, 471
bottom key, 43 color command key, 471
bottom value, 33, 79, 117, 286 color counter key, 471
bottom seam value, 117 color definition key, 471
bottomrule key, 35 color environment key, 471
bottomrule at break key, 369 color from key, 269
bottomsep at break key, 369 color hyperlink key, 471
bottomtitle key, 43 color key key, 471
box align key, 79 color length key, 471
\boxarrayclear, 389 color option key, 471
\boxarraygetbox, 393 color value key, 471
\boxarraygetdepth, 394 Colors
\boxarraygetheight, 394 Definition, 476
\boxarraygetsize, 391 ExampleBack, 476
\boxarraygettotalheight, 395 ExampleFrame, 476
\boxarraygetwidth, 394 foocolor, 462
\boxarrayreset, 388 Hyperlink, 476
boxarraystore environment, 391 Option, 476
boxed title size key, 158 colors key, 472
boxed title style key, 159 colspacing key, 401
boxes key, 403 coltext key, 28
boxrule key, 36 coltitle key, 28
boxsep key, 39 column key, 405
\brackets, 463 column* key, 405
break value, 355 columns key, 401
break at key, 367 colupper key, 28
breakable key, 9, 365 comment key, 311
broken value, 165–167 comment above listing key, 318
comment above* listing key, 318
capture key, 94
481
comment and listing key, 314 \docAuxCommand, 461
comment only key, 311 \docAuxCommand*, 461
comment outside listing key, 316 \docAuxEnvironment, 461
comment side listing key, 316 \docAuxEnvironment*, 461
comment style key, 314 \docAuxKey, 462
compilable listing key, 322 \docAuxKey*, 462
compiler key, 454 \docColor, 462
compress page key, 368 \docColor*, 462
\consumeboxarray, 392 docCommand environment, 459
\consumetcboxarray, 392 docCommand* environment, 460
copy value, 158 \docCounter, 462
counter key, 472 \docCounter*, 462
Counters docEnvironment environment, 460
foocounter, 462 docEnvironment* environment, 460
counters key, 472 docexample key, 469
coverage key, 402 docKey environment, 461
Crefname key, 111 docKey* environment, 461
crefname key, 111 \docLength, 462
\cs, 463 \docLength*, 462
documentation key, 10
dash value, 113 documentation listing options key, 469
dash hang value, 113 documentation listing style key, 469
\DeclareTCBInputListing, 444 documentation minted language key, 469
\DeclareTCBListing, 442 documentation minted options key, 469
\DeclareTCBox, 439 documentation minted style key, 469
\DeclareTCBoxFit, 445 \docValue, 461
\DeclareTColorBox, 436 \docValue*, 461
\DeclareTotalTCBox, 440 downhill value, 48, 49
\DeclareTotalTCBoxFit, 446 draft key, 248
\DeclareTotalTColorBox, 438 draft Skin, 248
Definition color, 476 draftmode key, 203
description color key, 344 draw method key, 270
description delimiters key, 344 drop fuzzy midday shadow key, 183
description delimiters none key, 344 drop fuzzy shadow key, 182
description delimiters parenthesis key, drop fuzzy shadow east key, 186
344 drop fuzzy shadow north key, 186
description font key, 345 drop fuzzy shadow northeast key, 186
description formatter key, 345 drop fuzzy shadow northwest key, 186
detach title key, 20 drop fuzzy shadow south key, 185
direct value, 270 drop fuzzy shadow southeast key, 185
dispExample environment, 464 drop fuzzy shadow southwest key, 185
dispExample* environment, 464 drop fuzzy shadow west key, 185
dispListing environment, 465 drop large lifted shadow key, 187
dispListing* environment, 465 drop lifted shadow key, 187
do not store to box array key, 391 drop midday shadow key, 182
doc value, 470 drop shadow key, 182
doc description key, 476 drop shadow east key, 185
doc head key, 474 drop shadow north key, 184
doc head command key, 474 drop shadow northeast key, 185
doc head environment key, 474 drop shadow northwest key, 184
doc head key key, 474 drop shadow south key, 184
doc into index key, 476 drop shadow southeast key, 184
doc left key, 473 drop shadow southwest key, 184
doc left indent key, 473 drop shadow west key, 184
doc marginnote key, 476 drop small lifted shadow key, 187
doc new key, 476
doc new and updated key, 476 east fading, 270
doc right key, 473 east value, 48, 49
doc right indent key, 473 east size key, 267
doc updated key, 476 east style key, 269
482
empty key, 237 tcblisting, 299
empty Skin, 237 tcboutputlisting, 301
empty value, 135, 136 tcboxeditemize, 282
emptyfirst Skin, 240 tcboxedraster, 281
emptylast Skin, 242 tcbposter, 399
emptymiddle Skin, 241 tcbraster, 279
enforce breakable key, 366 tcbverbatimwrite, 126
english language key, 472 tcbwritetemp, 126
enhanced key, 206 tcolorbox, 12
enhanced Skin, 206 environments key, 472
enhanced jigsaw key, 213 equal height group key, 61
enhanced jigsaw Skin, 213 evenpage value, 46, 86
enhanced standard key, 208 every box key, 91
enhanced standard jigsaw key, 213 every box on higher layers key, 92
enhancedfirst Skin, 210 every box on layer n key, 92
enhancedfirst jigsaw Skin, 214 every float key, 77
enhancedlast Skin, 212 every listing line key, 306
enhancedlast jigsaw Skin, 218 every listing line* key, 306
enhancedmiddle Skin, 211 ExampleBack color, 476
enhancedmiddle jigsaw Skin, 215 ExampleFrame color, 476
enlarge bottom at break by key, 83 extcolorbox environment, 451
enlarge bottom by key, 83 extend freelance key, 250
enlarge bottom finally by key, 82 extend freelancefirst key, 250
enlarge by key, 84 extend freelancelast key, 250
enlarge left by key, 83 extend freelancemiddle key, 250
enlarge right by key, 83 external key, 10, 105
enlarge top at break by key, 83 externalize key, 448
enlarge top by key, 83 externalize example key, 453
enlarge top initially by key, 82 externalize example! key, 453
enlargepage key, 367 externalize listing key, 453
enlargepage flexible key, 368 externalize listing! key, 453
environment key, 454, 472 extikzpicture environment, 452
environment content key, 472 extras key, 371
environment with percent key, 454 extras broken key, 371
Environments extras broken pre key, 433
absquote, 465 extras first key, 371
boxarraystore, 391 extras first and middle key, 371
dispExample, 464 extras first and middle pre key, 433
dispExample*, 464 extras first pre key, 433
dispListing, 465 extras last key, 371
dispListing*, 465 extras last pre key, 433
docCommand, 459 extras middle key, 371
docCommand*, 460 extras middle and last key, 371
docEnvironment, 460 extras middle and last pre key, 433
docEnvironment*, 460 extras middle pre key, 433
docKey, 461 extras pre key, 433
docKey*, 461 extras title after break key, 372
extcolorbox, 451 extras unbroken key, 371
extikzpicture, 452 extras unbroken and first key, 371
fooauxenv, 461 extras unbroken and first pre key, 433
foocolorbox, 460 extras unbroken and last key, 371
foocolorbox*, 460 extras unbroken and last pre key, 433
posterboxenv, 404 extras unbroken pre key, 433
tcbclipframe, 172 extrude bottom by key, 90
tcbclipinterior, 174 extrude by key, 90
tcbcliptitle, 174 extrude left by key, 89
tcbexternal, 449 extrude right by key, 89
tcbinvclipframe, 173 extrude top by key, 90
tcbitemize, 280
fade in key, 271
483
fade out key, 271 finish vignette key, 274
Fadings first value, 165–167, 370
east, 270 first and middle value, 165, 370
north, 270 fit key, 413
semi east, 270 fit algorithm key, 419
semi north, 270 fit basedim key, 414
semi south, 270 fit fontsize macros key, 415
semi west, 270 fit height from key, 418
south, 270 fit height plus key, 416
west, 270 fit maxfontdiff key, 421
false value, 78, 81, 288, 365 fit maxfontdiffgap key, 421
fbox value, 44 fit maxstep key, 421
figures value, 112 fit maxwidthdiff key, 421
fill downwards key, 87 fit maxwidthdiffgap key, 421
fill image opacity key, 262 fit skip key, 414
fill image options key, 262 fit to key, 414
fill image scale key, 262 fit to height key, 414
fill overzoom image key, 258 fit warning key, 421
fill overzoom image* key, 258 fit width from key, 417
fill overzoom picture key, 258 fit width plus key, 416
fill plain image key, 256 fitbox value, 94
fill plain image* key, 256 fitting key, 9
fill plain picture key, 256 fixed height key, 406
fill shrink image key, 260 flip title key, 156
fill shrink image* key, 260 float key, 76
fill shrink picture key, 260 float* key, 76
fill stretch image key, 257 floatplacement key, 76
fill stretch image* key, 257 flush center value, 30, 32
fill stretch picture key, 257 flush left key, 85
fill tile image key, 261 flush left value, 30, 32
fill tile image* key, 261 flush right key, 85
fill tile picture key, 261 flush right value, 30, 32
fill tile picture* key, 261 flushleft lower key, 32
fill zoom image key, 259 flushleft title key, 32
fill zoom image* key, 259 flushleft upper key, 32
fill zoom picture key, 259 flushright lower key, 32
final value, 421 flushright title key, 32
finish key, 197 flushright upper key, 32
finish broken key, 198 fontlower key, 29
finish broken pre key, 431 fontsize key, 403
finish fading vignette key, 275 fontsize value, 419
finish first key, 198 fontsize* value, 419
finish first and middle key, 198 fonttitle key, 29
finish first and middle pre key, 431 fontupper key, 29
finish first pre key, 431 \fooaux, 461, 470
finish last key, 198 fooaux key, 462
finish last pre key, 431 fooauxenv environment, 461
finish middle key, 198 foocolor color, 462
finish middle and last key, 198 foocolorbox environment, 460
finish middle and last pre key, 431 foocolorbox* environment, 460
finish middle pre key, 431 foocounter counter, 462
finish pre key, 431 foodummy key, 466
finish raised fading vignette key, 274 \foolength length, 462
finish unbroken key, 198 \foomakedocSubKey, 459
finish unbroken and first key, 198 \foomakedocSubKey*, 460
finish unbroken and first pre key, 431 \foosomething, 476
finish unbroken and last key, 198 footitle key, 461
finish unbroken and last pre key, 431 foovalue value, 461
finish unbroken pre key, 431 force remake key, 448
484
forced value, 46, 86 hyperlink interior key, 200
forced center value, 97 hyperlink node key, 200
forced left value, 97 hyperlink title key, 200
forced right value, 97 hyperref key, 199
forces nobeforeafter key, 78 hyperref interior key, 199
frame code key, 138 hyperref node key, 199
frame code app key, 431 hyperref title key, 199
frame code pre key, 431 hypertarget key, 100
frame empty key, 138 hyperurl key, 200
frame engine key, 135 hyperurl interior key, 200
frame hidden key, 149 hyperurl node key, 200
frame style key, 148 hyperurl title key, 200
frame style image key, 148 hyperurl* key, 200
frame style tile key, 149 hyperurl* interior key, 200
freelance key, 250 hyperurl* node key, 200
freelance Skin, 250 hyperurl* title key, 200
freelance value, 135, 136 hyphenationfix key, 96
freelancefirst Skin, 250
freelancelast Skin, 250 if odd page key, 101
freelancemiddle Skin, 250 if odd page or oneside key, 101
freeze extension key, 325 if odd page or oneside* key, 102
freeze file key, 325 if odd page* key, 102
freeze jpg key, 325 IfBooleanTF key, 435
freeze none key, 325 \ifboxarrayempty, 393
freeze pdf key, 325 IfNoValueTF key, 434
freeze png key, 325 IfValueTF key, 435
fuzzy halo key, 183 ignore nobreak key, 81
fuzzy shadow key, 189 ignored value, 24
image comment key, 311
geometry nodes key, 137 \imagename, 252
graphical environment key, 135 \imagepage, 253
graphics directory key, 254 index key, 100, 472
graphics options key, 254 index actual key, 470
graphics orientation key, 255 index annotate key, 471
graphics pages key, 254 index colorize key, 471
grow sidewards by key, 85 index command key, 470
grow to left by key, 84 index command name key, 470
grow to right by key, 84 index default settings key, 470
index format key, 470
halign key, 30 index german settings key, 470
halign lower key, 31 index level key, 470
halign title key, 32 index quote key, 470
halign upper key, 30 index* key, 100
halo key, 183 inherit height key, 57
hbox key, 94 input source on error key, 454
hbox value, 94 inside node key, 267
hbox boxed title key, 163 interior code key, 139
height key, 53, 401 interior code app key, 432
height fill key, 56 interior code pre key, 432
height fixed for key, 370 interior empty key, 139
height from key, 54 interior engine key, 136
height plus key, 53 interior hidden key, 150
highlight math key, 349 interior style key, 149
highlight math style key, 349 interior style image key, 150
hooks key, 9 interior style tile key, 150
horizontal size key, 268 interior titled code key, 138
hybrid value, 419 interior titled code app key, 431
hybrid* value, 419 interior titled code pre key, 432
Hyperlink color, 476 interior titled empty key, 138
hyperlink key, 199 interior titled engine key, 135
485
invisible key, 22 arc, 36
invisible value, 22, 24 arc is angular, 38
arc is curved, 38
justify value, 30 at begin tikz, 192
at begin tikz reset, 192
key key, 472 at end tikz, 192
Keys at end tikz reset, 192
/foo/ attach boxed title to bottom, 156
fooaux, 462 attach boxed title to bottom
foodummy, 466 center, 155
footitle, 461 attach boxed title to bottom left,
/tcb/ 155
add to height, 55 attach boxed title to bottom right,
add to list, 99 155
add to natural height, 55 attach boxed title to bottom*, 156
add to width, 34 attach boxed title to top, 156
adjust text, 18 attach boxed title to top center,
adjusted title, 18 155
adjusted title after break, 366 attach boxed title to top left, 155
after, 78 attach boxed title to top right,
after app, 425 155
after doc body, 475 attach boxed title to top*, 156
after doc body command, 475 attach title, 20
after doc body environment, 475 attach title to upper, 20
after doc body key, 475 auto outer arc, 38
after example, 469 autoparskip, 78
after lower, 66 baseline, 79
after lower app, 425 beamer, 228
after lower pre, 425 bean arc, 37
after lower*, 66 before, 78
after pre, 425 before app, 425
after skip, 80 before doc body, 475
after title, 64 before doc body command, 475
after title app, 424 before doc body environment, 475
after title pre, 424 before doc body key, 475
after upper, 65 before example, 469
after upper app, 424 before lower, 66
after upper pre, 424 before lower app, 425
after upper*, 65 before lower pre, 425
ams align, 351 before nobreak, 81
ams align lower, 351 before pre, 425
ams align upper, 351 before skip, 80
ams align*, 351 before title, 64
ams align* lower, 351 before title app, 424
ams align* upper, 351 before title pre, 424
ams equation, 350 before upper, 65
ams equation lower, 350 before upper app, 424
ams equation upper, 350 before upper pre, 424
ams equation*, 350 beforeafter skip, 80
ams equation* lower, 350 bicolor, 219
ams equation* upper, 350 blank, 208
ams gather, 352 blanker, 238
ams gather lower, 352 blankest, 239
ams gather upper, 352 blend before title, 113
ams gather*, 352 blend before title code, 114
ams gather* lower, 352 bookmark, 100
ams gather* upper, 352 bookmark*, 100
ams nodisplayskip, 353 borderline, 177
ams nodisplayskip lower, 353 borderline east, 180
ams nodisplayskip upper, 353
486
borderline horizontal, 181 description delimiters none, 344
borderline north, 180 description delimiters parenthesis,
borderline south, 180 344
borderline vertical, 181 description font, 345
borderline west, 180 description formatter, 345
bottom, 43 detach title, 20
bottomrule, 35 do not store to box array, 391
bottomrule at break, 369 doc description, 476
bottomsep at break, 369 doc head, 474
bottomtitle, 43 doc head command, 474
box align, 79 doc head environment, 474
boxed title size, 158 doc head key, 474
boxed title style, 159 doc into index, 476
boxrule, 36 doc left, 473
boxsep, 39 doc left indent, 473
break at, 367 doc marginnote, 476
breakable, 365 doc new, 476
capture, 94 doc new and updated, 476
center, 85 doc right, 473
center lower, 32 doc right indent, 473
center title, 32 doc updated, 476
center upper, 32 docexample, 469
check odd page, 101 documentation listing options, 469
circular arc, 37 documentation listing style, 469
clip lower, 176 documentation minted language, 469
clip title, 175 documentation minted options, 469
clip upper, 175 documentation minted style, 469
clip watermark, 171 draft, 248
code, 106 draftmode, 203
colback, 27 drop fuzzy midday shadow, 183
colbacklower, 220 drop fuzzy shadow, 182
colbacktitle, 27 drop fuzzy shadow east, 186
colframe, 27 drop fuzzy shadow north, 186
collower, 28 drop fuzzy shadow northeast, 186
color color, 471 drop fuzzy shadow northwest, 186
color command, 471 drop fuzzy shadow south, 185
color counter, 471 drop fuzzy shadow southeast, 185
color definition, 471 drop fuzzy shadow southwest, 185
color environment, 471 drop fuzzy shadow west, 185
color hyperlink, 471 drop large lifted shadow, 187
color key, 471 drop lifted shadow, 187
color length, 471 drop midday shadow, 182
color option, 471 drop shadow, 182
color value, 471 drop shadow east, 185
coltext, 28 drop shadow north, 184
coltitle, 28 drop shadow northeast, 185
colupper, 28 drop shadow northwest, 184
comment, 311 drop shadow south, 184
comment above listing, 318 drop shadow southeast, 184
comment above* listing, 318 drop shadow southwest, 184
comment and listing, 314 drop shadow west, 184
comment only, 311 drop small lifted shadow, 187
comment outside listing, 316 empty, 237
comment side listing, 316 enforce breakable, 366
comment style, 314 english language, 472
compilable listing, 322 enhanced, 206
compress page, 368 enhanced jigsaw, 213
description color, 344 enhanced standard, 208
description delimiters, 344 enhanced standard jigsaw, 213
487
enlarge bottom at break by, 83 finish first and middle, 198
enlarge bottom by, 83 finish first and middle pre, 431
enlarge bottom finally by, 82 finish first pre, 431
enlarge by, 84 finish last, 198
enlarge left by, 83 finish last pre, 431
enlarge right by, 83 finish middle, 198
enlarge top at break by, 83 finish middle and last, 198
enlarge top by, 83 finish middle and last pre, 431
enlarge top initially by, 82 finish middle pre, 431
enlargepage, 367 finish pre, 431
enlargepage flexible, 368 finish raised fading vignette, 274
equal height group, 61 finish unbroken, 198
every box, 91 finish unbroken and first, 198
every box on higher layers, 92 finish unbroken and first pre, 431
every box on layer n, 92 finish unbroken and last, 198
every float, 77 finish unbroken and last pre, 431
every listing line, 306 finish unbroken pre, 431
every listing line*, 306 finish vignette, 274
extend freelance, 250 fit, 413
extend freelancefirst, 250 fit algorithm, 419
extend freelancelast, 250 fit basedim, 414
extend freelancemiddle, 250 fit fontsize macros, 415
external, 105 fit height from, 418
externalize example, 453 fit height plus, 416
externalize example!, 453 fit maxfontdiff, 421
externalize listing, 453 fit maxfontdiffgap, 421
externalize listing!, 453 fit maxstep, 421
extras, 371 fit maxwidthdiff, 421
extras broken, 371 fit maxwidthdiffgap, 421
extras broken pre, 433 fit skip, 414
extras first, 371 fit to, 414
extras first and middle, 371 fit to height, 414
extras first and middle pre, 433 fit warning, 421
extras first pre, 433 fit width from, 417
extras last, 371 fit width plus, 416
extras last pre, 433 flip title, 156
extras middle, 371 float, 76
extras middle and last, 371 float*, 76
extras middle and last pre, 433 floatplacement, 76
extras middle pre, 433 flush left, 85
extras pre, 433 flush right, 85
extras title after break, 372 flushleft lower, 32
extras unbroken, 371 flushleft title, 32
extras unbroken and first, 371 flushleft upper, 32
extras unbroken and first pre, 433 flushright lower, 32
extras unbroken and last, 371 flushright title, 32
extras unbroken and last pre, 433 flushright upper, 32
extras unbroken pre, 433 fontlower, 29
extrude bottom by, 90 fonttitle, 29
extrude by, 90 fontupper, 29
extrude left by, 89 forces nobeforeafter, 78
extrude right by, 89 frame code, 138
extrude top by, 90 frame code app, 431
fill downwards, 87 frame code pre, 431
finish, 197 frame empty, 138
finish broken, 198 frame engine, 135
finish broken pre, 431 frame hidden, 149
finish fading vignette, 275 frame style, 148
finish first, 198 frame style image, 148
488
frame style tile, 149 image comment, 311
freelance, 250 index, 100
freeze extension, 325 index actual, 470
freeze file, 325 index annotate, 471
freeze jpg, 325 index colorize, 471
freeze none, 325 index command, 470
freeze pdf, 325 index command name, 470
freeze png, 325 index default settings, 470
fuzzy halo, 183 index format, 470
fuzzy shadow, 189 index german settings, 470
geometry nodes, 137 index level, 470
graphical environment, 135 index quote, 470
graphics directory, 254 index*, 100
graphics options, 254 inherit height, 57
graphics orientation, 255 interior code, 139
graphics pages, 254 interior code app, 432
grow sidewards by, 85 interior code pre, 432
grow to left by, 84 interior empty, 139
grow to right by, 84 interior engine, 136
halign, 30 interior hidden, 150
halign lower, 31 interior style, 149
halign title, 32 interior style image, 150
halign upper, 30 interior style tile, 150
halo, 183 interior titled code, 138
hbox, 94 interior titled code app, 431
hbox boxed title, 163 interior titled code pre, 432
height, 53 interior titled empty, 138
height fill, 56 interior titled engine, 135
height fixed for, 370 invisible, 22
height from, 54 keywords bold, 470
height plus, 53 label, 98
highlight math, 349 label separator, 346
highlight math style, 349 label type, 98
hyperlink, 199 left, 39
hyperlink interior, 200 left skip, 81
hyperlink node, 200 left*, 39
hyperlink title, 200 lefthand ratio, 120
hyperref, 199 lefthand width, 119
hyperref interior, 199 leftlower, 40
hyperref node, 199 leftright skip, 81
hyperref title, 199 leftrule, 35
hypertarget, 100 lefttitle, 40
hyperurl, 200 leftupper, 40
hyperurl interior, 200 lifted shadow, 190
hyperurl node, 200 lines before break, 366
hyperurl title, 200 list entry, 99
hyperurl*, 200 list text, 99
hyperurl* interior, 200 listing above comment, 318
hyperurl* node, 200 listing above text, 317
hyperurl* title, 200 listing above* comment, 318
hyphenationfix, 96 listing above* text, 317
if odd page, 101 listing and comment, 314
if odd page or oneside, 101 listing and text, 310
if odd page or oneside*, 102 listing engine, 310
if odd page*, 102 listing file, 310
IfBooleanTF, 435 listing inputencoding, 306
IfNoValueTF, 434 listing only, 310
IfValueTF, 435 listing options, 305
ignore nobreak, 81 listing outside comment, 316
489
listing outside text, 315 on line, 96
listing remove caption, 306 only, 106
listing side comment, 316 opacityback, 51
listing side text, 315 opacitybacktitle, 51
listing style, 305 opacityfill, 51
listing utf8, 307 opacityframe, 51
lower separated, 25 opacitylower, 52
lowerbox, 24 opacitytext, 52
marker, 215 opacitytitle, 52
math, 350 opacityupper, 52
math lower, 350 outer arc, 38
math upper, 350 overlay, 71
middle, 43 overlay app, 426
minimum for current equal height overlay broken, 72
group, 62 overlay broken app, 427
minimum for equal height group, 62 overlay broken pre, 427
minipage, 94 overlay first, 72
minipage boxed title, 163 overlay first and middle, 72
minipage boxed title*, 163 overlay first and middle app, 427
minted language, 308 overlay first and middle pre, 427
minted options, 308 overlay first app, 426
minted style, 309 overlay first pre, 426
move upwards, 87 overlay last, 72
move upwards*, 87 overlay last app, 427
nameref, 99 overlay last pre, 427
natural height, 53 overlay middle, 72
no borderline, 179 overlay middle and last, 72
no boxed title style, 162 overlay middle and last app, 427
no extras, 371 overlay middle and last pre, 427
no extras first, 371 overlay middle app, 427
no extras last, 371 overlay middle pre, 427
no extras middle, 371 overlay pre, 426
no extras title after break, 372 overlay unbroken, 72
no extras unbroken, 371 overlay unbroken and first, 72
no finish, 198 overlay unbroken and first app, 427
no finish first, 198 overlay unbroken and first pre, 427
no finish last, 198 overlay unbroken and last, 72
no finish middle, 198 overlay unbroken and last app, 427
no finish unbroken, 198 overlay unbroken and last pre, 427
no label type, 98 overlay unbroken app, 426
no listing options, 305 overlay unbroken pre, 426
no overlay, 72 oversize, 45
no process, 322 pad after break, 369
no recording, 128 pad at break, 369
no shadow, 182 pad at break*, 369
no underlay, 195 pad before break, 369
no underlay boxed title, 196 pad before break*, 369
no underlay first, 196 parbox, 95
no underlay last, 196 parfillskip restore, 81
no underlay middle, 196 parskip, 78
no underlay unbroken, 196 pdf comment, 312
no watermark, 167 pdf extension, 314
nobeforeafter, 78 phantom, 98
nofloat, 76 phantomlabel, 98
noparskip, 78 placeholder, 409
nophantom, 98 process code, 322
notitle, 18 raster after skip, 284
notitle after break, 366 raster before skip, 284
octogon arc, 37 raster column n, 288
490
raster column skip, 285 scale, 193
raster columns, 283 segmentation at break, 370
raster equal height, 287 segmentation code, 139
raster equal height group, 287 segmentation code app, 432
raster equal skip, 284 segmentation code pre, 432
raster even column, 288 segmentation empty, 139
raster even number, 289 segmentation engine, 136
raster even row, 289 segmentation hidden, 151
raster every box, 288 segmentation style, 151
raster force size, 288 separator sign, 343
raster halign, 286 separator sign colon, 343
raster height, 284 separator sign dash, 343
raster left skip, 285 separator sign none, 343
raster multicolumn, 290 shadow, 188
raster multirow, 291 sharp corners, 48
raster number n, 289 sharpish corners, 49
raster odd column, 288 shield externalize, 105
raster odd number, 289 show bounding box, 179
raster odd row, 288 shrink break goal, 368
raster reset, 288 shrink tight, 89
raster right skip, 285 sidebyside, 116
raster row m, 289 sidebyside adapt, 123
raster row m column n, 289 sidebyside align, 117
raster row skip, 285 sidebyside gap, 119
raster rows, 283 sidebyside switch, 125
raster valign, 286 size, 44
raster width, 283 skin, 134
record, 128 skin first, 134
remake, 105 skin first is subskin of, 141
remember, 193 skin last, 134
remember as, 194 skin last is subskin of, 141
reset, 105 skin middle, 134
reset and store to box array, 391 skin middle is subskin of, 141
reset box array, 388 smart shadow arc, 190
right, 40 space, 58
right skip, 81 space to, 59
right*, 41 space to both, 59
righthand ratio, 120 space to lower, 58
righthand width, 119 space to upper, 58
rightlower, 42 spartan, 247
rightrule, 35 split, 60
righttitle, 41 spread, 88
rightupper, 41 spread downwards, 88
rotate, 193 spread inwards, 87
rounded corners, 49 spread outwards, 87
run arara, 324 spread sidewards, 88
run biber, 324 spread upwards, 88
run bibtex, 324 spread upwards*, 88
run dvips, 324 square, 58
run latex, 324 squeezed title, 19
run lualatex, 324 squeezed title*, 19
run makeindex, 324 standard, 204
run pdflatex, 322 standard jigsaw, 205
run ps2pdf, 324 step, 98
run system command, 322 step and label, 98
run xelatex, 324 store to box array, 389
savedelimiter, 26 subtitle style, 21
savelowerto, 24 tabularx, 68
saveto, 23 tabularx*, 68
491
tcbimage comment, 312 underlay broken, 196
tcbox raise, 96 underlay broken pre, 430
tcbox raise base, 96 underlay first, 196
tcbox width, 97 underlay first and middle, 196
tempfile, 96 underlay first and middle pre, 430
terminator sign, 345 underlay first pre, 430
terminator sign colon, 346 underlay last, 196
terminator sign dash, 346 underlay last pre, 430
terminator sign none, 346 underlay middle, 196
text above listing, 317 underlay middle and last, 196
text above* listing, 317 underlay middle and last pre, 430
text and listing, 310 underlay middle pre, 430
text fill, 67 underlay pre, 430
text height, 54 underlay raised fading vignette,
text only, 311 273
text outside listing, 315 underlay raised shading vignette,
text side listing, 315 273
text width, 34 underlay shade in vignette, 273
theorem, 349 underlay unbroken, 196
theorem full label supplement, 347 underlay unbroken and first, 196
theorem label supplement, 347 underlay unbroken and first pre,
theorem name, 348 430
theorem name and number, 348 underlay unbroken and last, 196
theorem number and name, 348 underlay unbroken and last pre, 430
theorem style, 354 underlay unbroken pre, 430
tikz, 192 underlay vignette, 272
tikz lower, 69 upperbox, 22
tikz reset, 192 use height from group, 63
tikz upper, 69 valign, 33
tikznode, 70 valign lower, 33
tikznode boxed title, 164 valign scale limit, 33
tikznode lower, 70 valign upper, 33
tikznode upper, 70 varwidth boxed title, 164
tile, 224 varwidth boxed title*, 164
title, 18 varwidth upper, 70
title after break, 366 verbatim, 434
title code, 140 verbatim ignore percent, 127
title code app, 432 vfill before first, 370
title code pre, 432 visible, 22
title empty, 140 void, 107
title engine, 136 watermark color, 170
title filled, 27 watermark graphics, 166
title hidden, 152 watermark graphics app, 429
title style, 151 watermark graphics app on, 429
title style image, 152 watermark graphics on, 166
title style tile, 152 watermark graphics pre, 429
titlerule, 36 watermark graphics pre on, 429
titlerule style, 153 watermark opacity, 168
toggle enlargement, 86 watermark overzoom, 169
toggle left and right, 46 watermark shrink, 169
top, 42 watermark stretch, 170
toprule, 35 watermark text, 165
toprule at break, 369 watermark text app, 428
topsep at break, 369 watermark text app on, 428
toptitle, 42 watermark text on, 165
unbreakable, 366 watermark text pre, 428
underlay, 195 watermark text pre on, 428
underlay boxed title, 196 watermark tikz, 167
underlay boxed title pre, 430 watermark tikz app, 429
492
watermark tikz app on, 429 hooks, 9
watermark tikz on, 167 listings, 9
watermark tikz pre, 429 listingsutf8, 9
watermark tikz pre on, 429 magazine, 9
watermark zoom, 168 many, 10
widget, 233 minted, 9
width, 34 most, 10
/tcb/boxtitle/ poster, 9
xshift, 157 raster, 9
yshift, 157 skins, 9
yshift*, 157 theorems, 9
yshifttext, 157 vignette, 9
/tcb/doclang/ xparse, 10
color, 472 /tcb/new/
colors, 472 auto counter, 108
counter, 472 blend into, 112
counters, 472 Crefname, 111
environment, 472 crefname, 111
environment content, 472 list inside, 115
environments, 472 list type, 115
index, 472 no counter, 109
key, 472 number format, 110
keys, 472 number freestyle, 110
length, 472 number within, 110
lengths, 472 use counter, 109
new, 472 use counter from, 109
pageshort, 472 use counter*, 109
updated, 472 /tcb/poster/
value, 472 colspacing, 401
values, 472 columns, 401
/tcb/external/ height, 401
-, 448 prefix, 401
!, 448 rows, 401
clear preamble, 455 rowspacing, 401
clear preclass, 455 showframe, 401
compiler, 454 spacing, 401
environment, 454 width, 401
environment with percent, 454 /tcb/posterloc/
externalize, 448 above, 407
force remake, 448 at, 408
input source on error, 454 below, 407
minipage, 454 between, 408
name, 450 column, 405
PassOptionsToClass, 455 column*, 405
PassOptionsToPackage, 455 fixed height, 406
plain, 454 name, 405
preamble, 455 row, 406
preamble tcbset, 455 rowspan, 406
preclass, 455 sequence, 409
prefix, 448 span, 406
runner, 448 xshift, 410
runs, 454 yshift, 410
safety, 454 /tcb/posterset/
/tcb/library/ boxes, 403
all, 10 coverage, 402
breakable, 9 fontsize, 403
documentation, 10 no coverage, 402
external, 10 poster, 401
fitting, 9 /tcb/vig/
493
base color, 269 label key, 98
color from, 269 label separator key, 346
draw method, 270 label type key, 98
east size, 267 landscape value, 255
east style, 269 landscape* value, 255
fade in, 271 last value, 165–167, 370
fade out, 271 left key, 39
horizontal size, 268 left value, 30, 123, 286
inside node, 267 left skip key, 81
lower left corner, 266 left* key, 39
lowered color, 269 lefthand ratio key, 120
north size, 267 lefthand width key, 119
north style, 268 leftlower key, 40
outside node, 267 leftright skip key, 81
over node, 267 leftrule key, 35
over node offset, 267 lefttitle key, 40
raised color, 269 leftupper key, 40
scope, 269 length key, 472
semi fade in, 271 Lengths
semi fade out, 271 \foolength, 462
size, 268 lengths key, 472
south size, 267 lifted shadow key, 190
south style, 268 lines before break key, 366
upper right corner, 266 list entry key, 99
vertical size, 268 list inside key, 115
west size, 268 list text key, 99
west style, 269 list type key, 115
xmax, 266 listing above comment key, 318
xmin, 266 listing above text key, 317
ymax, 266 listing above* comment key, 318
ymin, 266 listing above* text key, 317
/tikz/ listing and comment key, 314
fill image opacity, 262 listing and text key, 310
fill image options, 262 listing engine key, 310
fill image scale, 262 listing file key, 310
fill overzoom image, 258 listing inputencoding key, 306
fill overzoom image*, 258 listing only key, 310
fill overzoom picture, 258 listing options key, 305
fill plain image, 256 listing outside comment key, 316
fill plain image*, 256 listing outside text key, 315
fill plain picture, 256 listing remove caption key, 306
fill shrink image, 260 listing side comment key, 316
fill shrink image*, 260 listing side text key, 315
fill shrink picture, 260 listing style key, 305
fill stretch image, 257 listing utf8 key, 307
fill stretch image*, 257 listings key, 9
fill stretch picture, 257 listings value, 112, 310
fill tile image, 261 listingsutf8 key, 9
fill tile image*, 261 lower left corner key, 266
fill tile picture, 261 lower separated key, 25
fill tile picture*, 261 lowerbox key, 24
fill zoom image, 259 lowered color key, 269
fill zoom image*, 259
fill zoom picture, 259 magazine key, 9
tcb fill frame, 154 many key, 10
tcb fill interior, 154 \marg, 463
tcb fill title, 154 margin value, 356
keys key, 472 margin apart value, 356
keywords bold key, 470 margin break value, 356
marker key, 215
494
math key, 350 no finish first key, 198
math lower key, 350 no finish last key, 198
math upper key, 350 no finish middle key, 198
maximum value, 56 no finish unbroken key, 198
\meta, 463 no label type key, 98
middle key, 43 no listing options key, 305
middle value, 165–167, 370 no overlay key, 72
middle and last value, 165–167, 370 no process key, 322
minimal value, 44 no recording key, 128
minimum center value, 97 no shadow key, 182
minimum for current equal height group no underlay key, 195
key, 62 no underlay boxed title key, 196
minimum for equal height group key, 62 no underlay first key, 196
minimum left value, 97 no underlay last key, 196
minimum right value, 97 no underlay middle key, 196
minipage key, 94, 454 no underlay unbroken key, 196
minipage value, 94, 280 no watermark key, 167
minipage boxed title key, 163 nobeforeafter key, 78
minipage boxed title* key, 163 nofloat key, 76
minted key, 9 none value, 46, 86, 123, 287, 368, 370
minted value, 310 noparskip key, 78
minted language key, 308 nophantom key, 98
minted options key, 308 normal value, 44, 158
minted style key, 309 north fading, 270
most key, 10 north value, 48, 49
move upwards key, 87 north size key, 267
move upwards* key, 87 north style key, 268
northeast value, 48, 49
name key, 405, 450 northwest value, 48, 49
nameref key, 99 notitle key, 18
natural height key, 53 notitle after break key, 366
new key, 472 number format key, 110
\newboxarray, 388 number freestyle key, 110
\newtcbexternalizeenvironment, 456 number within key, 110
\newtcbexternalizetcolorbox, 456
\NewTCBInputListing, 444 \oarg, 463
\newtcbinputlisting, 304 octogon arc key, 37
\NewTCBListing, 442 off value, 421, 470
\newtcblisting, 302 on value, 421
\NewTCBox, 439 on line key, 96
\newtcbox, 16 only key, 106
\NewTCBoxFit, 445 opacityback key, 51
\newtcboxfit, 412 opacitybacktitle key, 51
\newtcbtheorem, 339 opacityfill key, 51
\NewTColorBox, 437 opacityframe key, 51
\newtcolorbox, 15 opacitylower key, 52
\NewTotalTCBox, 441 opacitytext key, 52
\NewTotalTCBoxFit, 446 opacitytitle key, 52
\NewTotalTColorBox, 438 opacityupper key, 52
no borderline key, 179 Option color, 476
no boxed title style key, 162 outer arc key, 38
no counter key, 109 outside node key, 267
no coverage key, 402 over node key, 267
no extras key, 371 over node offset key, 267
no extras first key, 371 overlay key, 71
no extras last key, 371 overlay app key, 426
no extras middle key, 371 overlay broken key, 72
no extras title after break key, 372 overlay broken app key, 427
no extras unbroken key, 371 overlay broken pre key, 427
no finish key, 198 overlay first key, 72
495
overlay first and middle key, 72 \posterbox, 404
overlay first and middle app key, 427 posterboxenv environment, 404
overlay first and middle pre key, 427 preamble key, 455
overlay first app key, 426 preamble tcbset key, 455
overlay first pre key, 426 preclass key, 455
overlay last key, 72 prefix key, 401, 448
overlay last app key, 427 process code key, 322
overlay last pre key, 427 \ProvideTCBInputListing, 444
overlay middle key, 72 \ProvideTCBListing, 442
overlay middle and last key, 72 \ProvideTCBox, 439
overlay middle and last app key, 427 \ProvideTCBoxFit, 445
overlay middle and last pre key, 427 \ProvideTColorBox, 437
overlay middle app key, 427 \ProvideTotalTCBox, 441
overlay middle pre key, 427 \ProvideTotalTCBoxFit, 446
overlay pre key, 426 \ProvideTotalTColorBox, 438
overlay unbroken key, 72
overlay unbroken and first key, 72 raised color key, 269
overlay unbroken and first app key, 427 raster key, 9
overlay unbroken and first pre key, 427 raster after skip key, 284
overlay unbroken and last key, 72 raster before skip key, 284
overlay unbroken and last app key, 427 raster column n key, 288
overlay unbroken and last pre key, 427 raster column skip key, 285
overlay unbroken app key, 426 raster columns key, 283
overlay unbroken pre key, 426 raster equal height key, 287
oversize key, 45 raster equal height group key, 287
raster equal skip key, 284
pad after break key, 369 raster even column key, 288
pad at break key, 369 raster even number key, 289
pad at break* key, 369 raster even row key, 289
pad before break key, 369 raster every box key, 288
pad before break* key, 369 raster force size key, 288
pageshort key, 472 raster halign key, 286
parbox key, 95 raster height key, 284
parfillskip restore key, 81 raster left skip key, 285
parskip key, 78 raster multicolumn key, 290
PassOptionsToClass key, 455 raster multirow key, 291
PassOptionsToPackage key, 455 raster number n key, 289
path value, 135, 136 raster odd column key, 288
pathfirst value, 135, 136 raster odd number key, 289
pathfirstjigsaw value, 135 raster odd row key, 288
pathjigsaw value, 135 raster reset key, 288
pathlast value, 135, 136 raster right skip key, 285
pathlastjigsaw value, 135 raster row m key, 289
pathmiddle value, 135, 136 raster row m column n key, 289
pathmiddlejigsaw value, 135 raster row skip key, 285
pdf comment key, 312 raster rows key, 283
pdf extension key, 314 raster valign key, 286
\pdfpages, 254 raster width key, 283
pgf value, 470 record key, 128
pgfchapter value, 470 \refAux, 467
pgfsection value, 470 \refAuxcs, 467
phantom key, 98 \refCom, 466
phantomlabel key, 98 \refCom*, 466
placeholder key, 409 \refEnv, 466
plain key, 454 \refEnv*, 466
plain value, 354 \refKey, 467
plain apart value, 355 \refKey*, 467
portrait value, 255 remake key, 105
portrait* value, 255 remember key, 193
poster key, 9, 401 remember as key, 194
496
\renewtcbexternalizeenvironment, 456 segmentation code app key, 432
\renewtcbexternalizetcolorbox, 457 segmentation code pre key, 432
\RenewTCBInputListing, 444 segmentation empty key, 139
\renewtcbinputlisting, 304 segmentation engine key, 136
\RenewTCBListing, 442 segmentation hidden key, 151
\renewtcblisting, 303 segmentation style key, 151
\RenewTCBox, 439 semi east fading, 270
\renewtcbox, 16 semi fade in key, 271
\RenewTCBoxFit, 445 semi fade out key, 271
\renewtcboxfit, 412 semi north fading, 270
\renewtcbtheorem, 340 semi south fading, 270
\RenewTColorBox, 437 semi west fading, 270
\renewtcolorbox, 15 separator sign key, 343
\RenewTotalTCBox, 441 separator sign colon key, 343
\RenewTotalTCBoxFit, 446 separator sign dash key, 343
\RenewTotalTColorBox, 438 separator sign none key, 343
reset key, 105 sequence key, 409
reset and store to box array key, 391 shadow key, 188
reset box array key, 388 sharp corners key, 48
right key, 40 sharpish corners key, 49
right value, 30, 123, 286 shield externalize key, 105
right skip key, 81 show bounding box key, 179
right* key, 41 showframe key, 401
righthand ratio key, 120 shrink break goal key, 368
righthand width key, 119 shrink tight key, 89
rightlower key, 42 sidebyside key, 116
rightrule key, 35 sidebyside adapt key, 123
righttitle key, 41 sidebyside align key, 117
rightupper key, 41 sidebyside gap key, 119
rotate key, 193 sidebyside switch key, 125
rounded corners key, 49 size key, 44, 268
row key, 406 skin key, 134
rows key, 401 skin first key, 134
rows value, 287 skin first is subskin of key, 141
rowspacing key, 401 skin last key, 134
rowspan key, 406 skin last is subskin of key, 141
run arara key, 324 skin middle key, 134
run biber key, 324 skin middle is subskin of key, 141
run bibtex key, 324 Skins
run dvips key, 324 beamer, 228
run latex key, 324 beamerfirst, 230
run lualatex key, 324 beamerlast, 232
run makeindex key, 324 beamermiddle, 231
run pdflatex key, 322 bicolor, 219
run ps2pdf key, 324 bicolorfirst, 221
run system command key, 322 bicolorlast, 223
run xelatex key, 324 bicolormiddle, 222
runner key, 448 draft, 248
runs key, 454 empty, 237
emptyfirst, 240
safety key, 454 emptylast, 242
savedelimiter key, 26 emptymiddle, 241
savelowerto key, 24 enhanced, 206
saveto key, 23 enhanced jigsaw, 213
scale key, 193 enhancedfirst, 210
scale value, 33 enhancedfirst jigsaw, 214
scale* value, 33 enhancedlast, 212
scope key, 269 enhancedlast jigsaw, 218
segmentation at break key, 370 enhancedmiddle, 211
segmentation code key, 139
497
enhancedmiddle jigsaw, 215 tcb fill frame key, 154
freelance, 250 tcb fill interior key, 154
freelancefirst, 250 tcb fill title key, 154
freelancelast, 250 \tcbbreak, 377
freelancemiddle, 250 tcbclipframe environment, 172
spartan, 247 tcbclipinterior environment, 174
standard, 204 tcbcliptitle environment, 174
standard jigsaw, 205 \tcbcontinuedraftmode, 203
tile, 224 \tcbcounter, 108
tilefirst, 225 \tcbdocmarginnote, 468
tilelast, 227 \tcbdocnew, 468
tilemiddle, 226 \tcbdocupdated, 468
widget, 233 tcbexternal environment, 449
widgetfirst, 234 \tcbEXTERNALIZE, 448
widgetlast, 236 \tcbfitdim, 412–415
widgetmiddle, 235 \tcbfitsteps, 413
skins key, 9 \tcbfontsize, 412
small value, 44 \tcbheightfromgroup, 63
smart shadow arc key, 190 \tcbheightspace, 146
south fading, 270 \tcbhighmath, 341
south value, 48, 49 \tcbhypernode, 264
south size key, 267 \tcbifexternal, 455
south style key, 268 \tcbiffileprocess, 457
southeast value, 48, 49 \tcbifoddpage, 103
southwest value, 48, 49 \tcbifoddpageoroneside, 103
space key, 58 tcbimage comment key, 312
space to key, 59 \tcbincludegraphics, 251
space to both key, 59 \tcbincludepdf, 253
space to lower key, 58 \tcbinputlisting, 301
space to upper key, 58 \tcbinputrecords, 128
spacing key, 401 \tcbinterruptdraftmode, 203
span key, 406 tcbinvclipframe environment, 173
spartan key, 247 \tcbitem, 280
spartan Skin, 247 tcbitemize environment, 280
spartan value, 135, 136 \tcbline, 209
split key, 60 \tcbline*, 209
spread key, 88 tcblisting environment, 299
spread downwards key, 88 \tcblistof, 115
spread inwards key, 87 \tcblower, 12
spread outwards key, 87 \tcbmakedocSubKey, 466
spread sidewards key, 88 \tcbmaketheorem, 340
spread upwards key, 88 tcboutputlisting environment, 301
spread upwards* key, 88 \tcbox, 14
square key, 58 tcbox raise key, 96
squeeze value, 419 tcbox raise base key, 96
squeezed title key, 19 tcbox width key, 97
squeezed title* key, 19 tcboxeditemize environment, 282
standard key, 204 tcboxedraster environment, 281
standard Skin, 204 \tcboxedtitleheight, 157
standard value, 135, 136, 158, 354 \tcboxedtitlewidth, 157
standard jigsaw key, 205 \tcboxfit, 411
standard jigsaw Skin, 205 \tcboxmath, 341
step key, 98 \tcboxverb, 441
step and label key, 98 \tcbpatcharcangular, 263
store to box array key, 389 \tcbpatcharcround, 263
subtitle style key, 21 tcbposter environment, 399
\tcbpostercolspacing, 400
tables value, 112 \tcbpostercolumns, 400
tabularx key, 68 \tcbpostercolwidth, 400
tabularx* key, 68
498
\tcbposterheight, 400 \thetcbcounter, 108, 109
\tcbposterrowheight, 400 \thetcbrasternum, 279, 290
\tcbposterrows, 400 \thetcolorboxnumber, 104
\tcbposterrowspacing, 400 \thetcolorboxpage, 104
\tcbposterset, 400 tight value, 44
\tcbposterwidth, 400 tikz key, 192
tcbraster environment, 279 tikz lower key, 69
\tcbrecord, 128 tikz reset key, 192
\tcbsegmentstate, 147 tikz upper key, 69
\tcbset, 13 tikznode key, 70
\tcbsetforeverylayer, 13 tikznode boxed title key, 164
\tcbsetmacrotoheightofnode, 264 tikznode lower key, 70
\tcbsetmacrotowidthofnode, 264 tikznode upper key, 70
\tcbsetmanagedlayers, 92 tile key, 224
\tcbsettoheightofnode, 264 tile Skin, 224
\tcbsettowidthofnode, 264 tilefirst Skin, 225
\tcbsidebyside, 122 tilelast Skin, 227
\tcbstartdraftmode, 203 tilemiddle Skin, 226
\tcbstartrecording, 128 title key, 18
\tcbstopdraftmode, 203 title value, 44, 158
\tcbstoprecording, 128 title after break key, 366
\tcbsubskin, 141 title code key, 140
\tcbsubtitle, 21 title code app key, 432
\tcbtextheight, 147 title code pre key, 432
\tcbtextwidth, 146 title empty key, 140
\tcbtitle, 20 title engine key, 136
\tcbtitletext, 20 title filled key, 27
\tcbuselibrary, 9 title hidden key, 152
\tcbuselistinglisting, 301 title style key, 151
\tcbuselistingtext, 301 title style image key, 152
\tcbusetemp, 126 title style tile key, 152
\tcbusetemplisting, 301 titlerule key, 36
tcbverbatimwrite environment, 126 titlerule style key, 153
\tcbvignette, 265 toggle enlargement key, 86
tcbwritetemp environment, 126 toggle left and right key, 46
tcolorbox environment, 12 top key, 42
\tcolorboxenvironment, 17 top value, 33, 79, 117, 286
tempfile key, 96 top seam value, 117
terminator sign key, 345 toprule key, 35
terminator sign colon key, 346 toprule at break key, 369
terminator sign dash key, 346 topsep at break key, 369
terminator sign none key, 346 toptitle key, 42
text above listing key, 317 true value, 81, 365
text above* listing key, 317
text and listing key, 310 unbreakable key, 366
text fill key, 67 unbroken value, 165–167
text height key, 54 unbroken and first value, 165–167
text only key, 311 underlay key, 195
text outside listing key, 315 underlay boxed title key, 196
text side listing key, 315 underlay boxed title pre key, 430
text width key, 34 underlay broken key, 196
theorem key, 349 underlay broken pre key, 430
theorem full label supplement key, 347 underlay first key, 196
theorem label supplement key, 347 underlay first and middle key, 196
theorem name key, 348 underlay first and middle pre key, 430
theorem name and number key, 348 underlay first pre key, 430
theorem number and name key, 348 underlay last key, 196
theorem style key, 354 underlay last pre key, 430
theorems key, 9 underlay middle key, 196
underlay middle and last key, 196
499
underlay middle and last pre key, 430 doc, 470
underlay middle pre key, 430 downhill, 48, 49
underlay pre key, 430 east, 48, 49
underlay raised fading vignette key, 273 empty, 135, 136
underlay raised shading vignette key, 273 evenpage, 46, 86
underlay shade in vignette key, 273 false, 78, 81, 288, 365
underlay unbroken key, 196 fbox, 44
underlay unbroken and first key, 196 figures, 112
underlay unbroken and first pre key, 430 final, 421
underlay unbroken and last key, 196 first, 165–167, 370
underlay unbroken and last pre key, 430 first and middle, 165, 370
underlay unbroken pre key, 430 fitbox, 94
underlay vignette key, 272 flush center, 30, 32
unlimited value, 364, 365 flush left, 30, 32
updated key, 472 flush right, 30, 32
uphill value, 48, 49 fontsize, 419
upper right corner key, 266 fontsize*, 419
upperbox key, 22 foovalue, 461
use counter key, 109 forced, 46, 86
use counter from key, 109 forced center, 97
use counter* key, 109 forced left, 97
use height from group key, 63 forced right, 97
\useboxarray, 391 freelance, 135, 136
\usetcboxarray, 392 hbox, 94
hybrid, 419
valign key, 33 hybrid*, 419
valign lower key, 33 ignored, 24
valign scale limit key, 33 invisible, 22, 24
valign upper key, 33 justify, 30
value key, 472 landscape, 255
Values landscape*, 255
0, 147 last, 165–167, 370
1, 147 left, 30, 123, 286
2, 147 listings, 112, 310
all, 48, 49, 287, 368, 370 margin, 356
areasize, 419 margin apart, 356
areasize*, 419 margin break, 356
as-is, 255 maximum, 56
auto, 97 middle, 165–167, 370
auto limited, 97 middle and last, 165–167, 370
base, 79 minimal, 44
baselineskip, 368 minimum center, 97
both, 123 minimum left, 97
bottom, 33, 79, 117, 286 minimum right, 97
bottom seam, 117 minipage, 94, 280
break, 355 minted, 310
broken, 165–167 none, 46, 86, 123, 287, 368, 370
center, 30, 33, 79, 117, 286 normal, 44, 158
center seam, 117 north, 48, 49
change, 355 northeast, 48, 49
change apart, 355 northwest, 48, 49
change break, 355 off, 421, 470
change standard, 354 on, 421
clipped, 270 path, 135, 136
colon, 113 pathfirst, 135, 136
colon hang, 113 pathfirstjigsaw, 135
copy, 158 pathjigsaw, 135
dash, 113 pathlast, 135, 136
dash hang, 113 pathlastjigsaw, 135
direct, 270
500
pathmiddle, 135, 136 watermark text pre key, 428
pathmiddlejigsaw, 135 watermark text pre on key, 428
pgf, 470 watermark tikz key, 167
pgfchapter, 470 watermark tikz app key, 429
pgfsection, 470 watermark tikz app on key, 429
plain, 354 watermark tikz on key, 167
plain apart, 355 watermark tikz pre key, 429
portrait, 255 watermark tikz pre on key, 429
portrait*, 255 watermark zoom key, 168
right, 30, 123, 286 west fading, 270
rows, 287 west value, 48, 49
scale, 33 west size key, 268
scale*, 33 west style key, 269
small, 44 widget key, 233
south, 48, 49 widget Skin, 233
southeast, 48, 49 widgetfirst Skin, 234
southwest, 48, 49 widgetlast Skin, 236
spartan, 135, 136 widgetmiddle Skin, 235
squeeze, 419 width key, 34, 401
standard, 135, 136, 158, 354
tables, 112 xmax key, 266
tight, 44 xmin key, 266
title, 44, 158 xparse key, 10
top, 33, 79, 117, 286 xshift key, 157, 410
top seam, 117
true, 81, 365 ymax key, 266
unbroken, 165–167 ymin key, 266
unbroken and first, 165–167 yshift key, 157, 410
unlimited, 364, 365 yshift* key, 157
uphill, 48, 49 yshifttext key, 157
visible, 22, 24
west, 48, 49
values key, 472
varwidth boxed title key, 164
varwidth boxed title* key, 164
varwidth upper key, 70
verbatim key, 434
verbatim ignore percent key, 127
vertical size key, 268
vfill before first key, 370
vignette key, 9
visible key, 22
visible value, 22, 24
void key, 107
watermark color key, 170

watermark graphics key, 166
watermark graphics app key, 429
watermark graphics app on key, 429
watermark graphics on key, 166
watermark graphics pre key, 429
watermark graphics pre on key, 429
watermark opacity key, 168
watermark overzoom key, 169
watermark shrink key, 169
watermark stretch key, 170
watermark text key, 165
watermark text app key, 428
watermark text app on key, 428
watermark text on key, 165
501

Le Package Tcolorbox - Apprendre Le LaTeX / Mohammed Jaiti

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Le Package Tcolorbox - Apprendre Le LaTeX / Mohammed Jaiti

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Le Package Tcolorbox - Apprendre Le LaTeX / Mohammed Jaiti

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

um, erat

ascetur r ociis natoque pen massa.

3 Macros for Box Creation 12

5 Initialization Option Keys 108

7 Saving and Loading of Verbatim Texts 126

9 Technical Overview and Customization 134

10 Library skins 148

10.1 Style Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

11 Inclusion of Boxed Image Files 251

12 TikZ Image and Picture Fill Extensions; Auxiliary Macros 256

13 Library vignette 265

13.1 Vignette Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

14 Library raster 277

14.1 Concept of Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

15 Libraries listings , listingsutf8 , and minted 298

LIB LIB LIB

LIB LIB LIB

16 Library theorems 339

16.1 Macros of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

17 Library breakable 363

17.1 Technical Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

18 Library magazine 388

18.1 Creation and Resetting of Box Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

19 Library poster 398

19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

21 Library hooks 422

22.1 Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

23 Library external 447

23.1 Preparation of a Document for Externalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

24 Library documentation 459

24.1 Macros of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

A Picture Credits 477

1.2 Loading the Package

Provides support for creating posters, Section 19 on page 398.

of typesetting listings and using the specialized documentation library.

/tcb/library/all (style, no value)

Advanced Features Advanced Listings Documentation

breakable listings documentation

/tcb/beforeÕ P. 78 , /tcb/before skipÕ P. 80

/tcb/afterÕ P. 78 , /tcb/after skipÕ P. 80

iaculis in, pretium

creates the following compiled text box:

This code gives the following box:

Here, you see the lower part of the box.

\begin{tcolorbox}[colback=red!5!white,colframe=red!75!black,title=My nice heading]

This is another tcolorbox.

Here, you see the lower part of the box.

\begin{tcolorbox}[title=All options for this box]

All options for this box

Options given with \tcbsetforeverylayer survive a reset.

Text \tcbox[tcbox raise base]{Hello World}\hfill

% Fixed width box

% Fitted width box (like hbox or makebox)

% Fitted width box (using a \tikzname\ node)

Definition in the preamble:

Examp. 3.1: Hello there

Definition in the preamble:

(3.2) Hello there